Home

opennet controller - Steven Engineering

1. Member Description Updated See Page D8084 INTERBUS Node 8 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8085 INTERBUS Node 8 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8086 INTERBUS Node 9 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8087 INTERBUS Node 9 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8088 INTERBUS Node 9 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8089 INTERBUS Node 9 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8090 INTERBUS Node 10 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8091 INTERBUS Node 10 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8092 INTERBUS Node 10 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8093 INTERBUS Node 10 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8094 INTERBUS Node 11 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8095 INTERBUS Node 11 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8096 INTERBUS Node 11 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8097 INTERBUS Node 11 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8098 INTERBUS Node 12 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8099 INTERBUS Node 12 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8100 INTERBUS Node 12 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8101 INTERBUS Node 12 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8102 INTERBUS Node 13 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8103 INTERBUS Node 13 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8104 INTERBUS Node 13 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8105 INTERBUS Node 13 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8106
2. MSB 010 011 LSB 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 lt 0 M8003 Shift to the left After shift 010 011 1 431 655 764 MSB 010 011 LSB 1 o 1 o 1 po 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o i o i o i o i o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o o M8003 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS SFTR Shift Right x SFTR B END When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSB Data Type Word bits to shift 2 1 MSB S1 LSB CY Before shift 0 1 o oj1 i ojipo ii i i oj o i i o Shift to the right M8003 MSB 51 LSB After shift o 1 o o 1 1 o i o i i
3. 20 mm minimum LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LX x IZLL LL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Wiring Duct Mounting Direction Mount the OpenNet Controller modules horizontally on a vertical plane as shown above Keep a sufficient spacing around the OpenNet Controller modules to ensure proper ventilation When the ambient temperature is 40 C or below the Open Net Controller modules can also be mounted upright on a horizontal plane as shown at left below fal Allowable Mounting Direction Incorrect Incorrect at 40 C or below Mounting Mounting Direction Direction 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Input Wiring e Terminal name NC means No Connection Do not connect input or any other wiring to NC terminals e Separate the input wiring from the output line power line and motor line e Use UL1015AWG22 UL1007AWG18 wires for input wiring DC Source Input DC Sink Input 24V perse NN Noaunwnro aun gt UJ o e 2 wire Sensor 2 wire Sensor L TT IL IL IL IL IL IL IL IL IL TT TL IPTE HI
4. Symbol Name W 18 bs Weds a SFTL Shift Left X X 4 134 SFTR Shift Right X X 4 133 ROTL Rotate Left X X 4 13 5 ROTR Rotate Right X X 4 13 7 ROTLC Rotate Left with Carry X X 4 13 9 ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry X X 4 13 11 BCDLS BCD Left Shift X 4 13 13 HTOB Hex to BCD X X 5 14 1 BTOH BCD to Hex X X 5 14 3 to ASCII X 7 14 5 ATOH ASCII to Hex X 7 14 7 BTOA BCD to ASCII X 7 14 9 ATOB ASCII to BCD X 7 14 11 DTDV Data Divide X 5 14 13 DTCB Data Combine X 5 14 14 WKCMP ON Week Compare ON 9 15 1 WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF 9 15 1 WKTBL Week Table 4 2n 15 2 DISP Display 6 16 1 DGRD Digital Read 8 16 3 CDISP Character Display 44 2n 3m 16 5 TXD1 Transmit 1 74n42m 174 TXD2 Transmit 2 74n42m 174 RXD1 Receive 1 74n42m 17 13 RXD2 Receive 2 74n42m 17 13 LABEL Label 2 18 1 LJMP Label Jump 3 18 1 LCAL Label Call 3 18 3 LRET Label Return 1 18 3 DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero 5 18 5 XYFS XY Format Set X 4 4 19 1 CVXTY Convert X to Y X 7 19 2 CVYTX Convert Y to X X 7 19 3 AVRG Average X X 11 194 PID PID Control 11 20 1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Structure of an Advanced Instruction Opcode Source Operand Destination Operand The opcode is a symbol to identify the advanced instruction Repeat Cycles Data Type MOWW SIR DIR REP Specifies the word W integer
5. Before execution After execution H Hsen soTu ae m A 12345 48 D1 D D10 5039h D20 ggg Upper byte D21 A Lower byte Destination Operand Link Register Before execution After execution paci som Dio 1516 12345 57 D10 3039h L1316 39h Lower byte 1317 on Upper byte dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 13 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS DTCB Data Combine SI S141 DI DTCB REN S1 D1 REN KK KK K When input is on the lower byte data is read out from 2 consecutive sources starting with operand designated by S1 and combined to make 16 bit data When a data register is selected as source operand the lower byte data from the first source operand is moved to the upper byte of the destination designated by operand D1 and the lower byte data from the next source operand is moved to the lower byte of the destination When a link register is selected as source operand the lower byte data from the first source operand is moved to the lower byte of the destination designated by operand D1 and the lower byte data from the next source operand is moved to the upper byte of the destination Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to combine XX D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X
6. 5 51 15 1 ojo i 1 o i oj 1 i i o po i i oj i o o i i o i o i i o o i i o o M8003 Shift to the left After shift CY To LSB 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 SWEETCSHI 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit shift X A X X X bits Quantity of bits to shift 125 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to shift can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the SFTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types Oe When a bit operand such as output M internal relay shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 13 1 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples SFTL Data Type
7. g Digital 1 Analog 1 O Expansion Power Supply Remote 1 Master DeviceNet Slave and LonWorkKS Interface Modules Digital 1 analog 1 expansion power supply remote I master Devicenet Slave and LonWorks interface modules have the same outside dimensions Example The following figure illustrates a system setup consisting of a remote I O master module a CPU module and three I O modules gt gt gt gt gt gt L unn oo oo o a oo oo oo o o a nn nn nn o g 8 n oo oo s oo s o o 8 D nu aj o Li a og aj oo 2f oo Slo oo aj aj oo aj o n B nu ajo oo aj oo aj oo aj o aj jun aj aj o B oo n nu B o a og o oo oo oo a o oo aj oo aj oo o oo oo oo o c o n Clq ZEN oo B o Lj jc 4 oo oo oo o o C E39 o oo oo oo oo oo o c oo a D C oo
8. Symbol Name T 7 p NOP No Operation 1 8 6 MOV Move 7 9 1 MOVN Move Not X 6 or7 95 IMOV Indirect Move X X 9 or 10 9 6 IMOVN Indirect Move Not X X 9 or 10 9 7 BMOV Block Move X 7 9 8 NSET N Data Set X X 2xS1 4 9 9 NRS N Data Repeat Set X X XX 7 or8 9 10 IBMV Indirect Bit Move X 9 9 11 IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not X 9 9 12 XCHG Exchange X X 5 9 13 CMP Compare Equal To X X X X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt gt Compare Unequal To X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than or Equal To XX XX 8 to 10 10 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X 8 to 10 10 1 ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X 9 to 12 104 ADD Addition 8 to 10 11 1 SUB Subtraction xX 8 to 10 11 1 MUL Multiplication X X X X 8 to 10 11 1 DIV Division 8 to 10 11 1 INC Increment X X 3 119 DEC Decrement X X 3 119 ROOT Root X 5 11 10 SUM Sum X 8 11 11 ANDW AND Word X X 8 to 10 124 ORW OR Word X X 8 to 10 124 XORW Exclusive OR Word X 8 to 10 124 NEG Negate X X 3 12 5 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 8 1 Group Bit Shift and Rotate Data Conversion Week Programmer Interface User Communication Program Branching Coordinate Conversion PID 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS
9. MSB 51 LSB 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X A X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 7 13 BiT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTR Data Type Word REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay S1 D1 13 D20 When the CPU starts operation
10. Type List CPU Modules HSC Output Memory Card Connector Type No Without FC3A CP2K Sink Output Type With FC3A CP2KM Without FC3A CP2S Source Output Type With FC3A CP2SM Note Every CPU module is supplied with a pair of end plates Input Modules Input Type Input Points Terminal Connector Type No Screw Terminal FC3AN16B1 16 points Nylon Connector 10 x 2 FC3AN16B3 24V DC Sink Source Nylon Connector 18P x 2 FC3A N32B4 32 points Fujitsu Connector FC3A N32B5 100 120V AC Input 8 points Screw Terminal FC3A N0O8A11 Analog Input 12 bit resolution 1 4000 6 channels Screw Terminal FC3A AD1261 4 20mA 0 5V 0 10V 5V 10V input Output M odules Output Type Output Points Terminal Connector Type No Screw Terminal FC3AR161 Relay Output 16 points 240V AC 24V DC 2A Nylon Connector 5P x 4 FC3AR162 Transistor Sink Output Screw Terminal FC3A T16K1 24V DC 0 5A point 16 points 2 0A common Nylon Connector 10P x 2 FC3A T16K3 Transistor Protect Source Output 24V DC 0 5A point 16 points Screw Terminal FC3A T16P1 2 0A common Transistor Sink Output Nylon Connector 18P x 2 FC3A 132K4 24V DC 0 1A point 32 points 2 0A common Fujitsu Connector FC3A T32K5 Analog Output 12 bit resolution 1 4000 2 channels Screw Terminal FC3ADA1221 4 20 0 5V 0 10V 5V 10V output Expansion Power Supply Module Description Input Power Voltage 24V DC Conne
11. Number Description Updated See Page D8128 INTERBUS Node 19 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8129 INTERBUS Node 19 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8130 INTERBUS Node 20 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8131 INTERBUS Node 20 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8132 INTERBUS Node 20 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8133 INTERBUS Node 20 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8134 INTERBUS Node 21 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8135 INTERBUS Node 21 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8136 INTERBUS Node 21 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8137 INTERBUS Node 21 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8138 INTERBUS Node 22 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8139 INTERBUS Node 22 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8140 INTERBUS Node 22 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8141 INTERBUS Node 22 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8142 INTERBUS Node 23 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8143 INTERBUS Node 23 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8144 INTERBUS Node 23 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8145 INTERBUS Node 23 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8146 INTERBUS Node 24 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8147 INTERBUS Node 24 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8148 INTERBUS Node 24 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8149 INTERBUS Node 24 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8150 INTERBUS Node 25 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6
12. ASCII data Transmitted data Tor pg T D10 010Ch 100268 geo to ASCH 2 36m 38h 32h 36h 38h value conversion Lowest 3 digits 3 No conversion Transmit digits 1 ASCII data Transmitted data SOH FF FF D10 010Ch No conversion 0Ch Lowest 1 digit Repeat Cycles When a data register is designated to repeat consecutive data registers as many as the repeat cycles are used for transmit data in the same conversion type and transmit digits Example D10 000Ch Data register No D10 D11 60221 Transmit digits 2 D12 0038h Conversion type BCD to ASCII Data of data registers starting with D10 is converted in BCD to ASCII and is transmitted according to the designated repeat cycles 1 Repeat cycles 2 ASCII data 1 3 4 31 32 33 34 Repeat 1 10 000Ch 100012 0022n 808812 00034 Di Decimal value yi BCD to ASCII conversion 2 Repeat cycles 3 ASCII data 2 3 4 5 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h m Repeat 1 m p10 000Ch 00012 Repeat 2 D11 0022h 100034 2 poan re 00056 pi Decimal value i BCD to ASCII conversion dee OPENNET CONTROLLER
13. Expansion Power Supply Module Remote FO Master Module waa we we a Bde Re icd DeviceNet Slave Module oae tes d RR RU EEL LonWorks Interface Module s 2 ee rr Re c RTT Rede BE Ee DIMENSIONS amio i Aem OP SU OR TRUE Pe SRS E Re ie oec INSTALLATION AND WIRING installation Location s 2 6 4 ow Wales Red A ar M pd Rr OM AO e era Assembling lt Disassembling Modules Mounting on DIN Rail Removing from DIN Rall i zia exer qaid pisce i4 ds Installation in Control E dabei ue SIE RR d uia ated an Rel a ww eee eve om Baba da Output WIFING e co attri teet e Red dos spe pH d EP ER ciel n P tp ad Data Link WIFIRQ cud tec io tt e Rel ea avs eae ple eate om dos Analog Input Output Wiring Power Supply as Sisto sud he ne Ca ame we qe aos eee d Mti Terminal Connection E EREE hs OPERATION BASICS Connecting OpenNet Controller to PC 1 1 Computer Link System Start Stop Operation 2 55 Ree
14. Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOVD S1 DIR REP ni D10 MO 3 010 110 MO through M7 M10 through M17 gt D11 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 012 112 M40 through M47 M50 through M57 D13 113 M60 through M67 M70 through M77 014 114 M80 through M87 M90 through M97 D15 115 M100 through M107 M110 through M117 Overlapped Operands by Repeat If the repeat operation is designated for both the source and destination and if a portion of the source and destination areas overlap each other then the source data in the overlapped area is also changed Source D10 through D13 Repeat 4 Hi SOTU HH MOV W EA mu X Destination D12 through D15 Repeat 4 Before Execution Ist Execution 2nd Execution Diol 1 D10 Diol 1 D11 2 Duil 2 11 2 12 3 pi2 1 pi2 1 pi3 4 pi3 2 pDi3 2 D14 pi4 3 14 1 015 015 4 D15 2 94 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER s MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS MOVN Move Not S1 NOT gt H MOVIS R a When input is on 16 or 32 bit data from operand designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Functio
15. 17 15 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Designating Constant as Start Delimiter A start delimiter can be programmed at the first byte in the receive format of a RXDI RXD2 instruction the OpenNet Con troller will recognize the beginning of valid communication although a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at the first byte of source operand S1 the one byte data serves as a start delimiter to start the processing of the received data The valid start delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box When 8 data bits are selected start delimiters can be 00h through FFh When 7 data bits are selected as default start delimiters can be 00h through 7Fh Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal nota tion into the source data A maximum of five RXD1 and five RXD2 instructions with different start delimiters can be executed at the same time When the first byte of the incoming data matches the start delimiter of a RXDI RXD2 instruction the received data is pro cessed and stored according to the receive format specified in the RXDI RXD2 instruction If the first byte of the incom ing data does not match the start delimiter of any RXD1 RXD2 instruction that is executed the OpenNet Controller
16. 174 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Selections and Operands in Transmit Instruction Dialog Box Tye TXD Transmit instruction RXD Receive instruction Port Port 1 Transmit user communication through RS232C port 1 TXD1 Port 2 Transmit user communication through RS232C port 2 TXD2 Enter the data to transmit in this area S1 Source 1 Transmit data can be constant values character or hexadecimal data registers or BCC D1 Destination 1 Transmit completion output can be an output or internal relay Transmit status register can be data register DO through D7998 The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data D2 Destination 2 Transmit Data Transmit data is designated by source operand S1 using constant values or data registers BCC code can also be calculated automatically and appended to the transmit data One TXD instruction can transmit 200 bytes of data at the maximum S1 Source 1 Transmit Data Operand Conversion Type Doeg Repeat Calculation Pier E Constant 00h FFh 7Fh No conversion 1 A Binary to ASCII 14 Data Register D0 D7999 B BCD to ASCII 15 1 99 No conversion 12 A Binary to ASCII X XOR BEC No Ee ADD pum Designating Constant as S1 When a constant value is designated as source operand S1 one byte data is transmitted without conversion The
17. D8201 D8301 Value Initialization String D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 Applicable Modem 0 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X4 Q3 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W AIWA 33 6 Kbps or less 1 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 Q2 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W OMRON 2 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X4 Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W AIWA 56 Kbps 3 ATEOQ0V1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X4 amp H1 amp l0 amp B1 amp M5S0 22 amp W OMRON 56 Kbps 4 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 amp K3 A0 N3S0 2 amp W Sun Corporation Micro Research 5 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 amp K3 A0 350 2 610 Seiko Instruments 10 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X3 Q3 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 11 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 Q2 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 12 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X3 Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 13 ATEOQ0V1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X3 amp H1 amp l0 amp B1 amp M5S0 22 amp W 14 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1YVVOX3 amp K3V A0 N3S0 2 amp W 15 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 amp K3 A0 N3S5022 amp WO 20 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX0 Q3 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 21 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X0 Q2 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 22 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 23 ATEOQ0V1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X0 amp H1 amp l0 amp B1 amp M5S0 22 amp W 24 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X0 amp K3 AOV N3S0 2 amp W 25 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VO X0 amp K3 AOV N3S022 amp WO Default Initialization String ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C I VOXA Q3 J0 A0 amp MS5 N2S0 2 amp W R LF
18. P 5 55 INTERBUS 000000 00 0 cag 000000000 Node 0 SX5S SBN16S 16 inputs Node 1 SX5S SBT16K 16 outputs Nodes are numbered 0 1 2 and so forth starting with the node nearest to the remote I O master module In this example the 16 point input module is allocated node 0 and the 16 point output module is allocated node 1 Consequently I O data of each slave station is stored in link registers shown below Node Input Operand Output Operand Node 0 L1000 L1003 L1004 L1007 Node 1 1101041013 11014411017 Node 2 1102041023 11024 11027 Node 3 L1030 L1033 L1034 L1037 MOV W S1 1 REP M8125 L1000 00 MOV W Sl 1 M8125 10 L1014 L1000 Input data of the 16 point input module at node 0 L1014 Output data of the 16 point output module at node 1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay MOV instruction stores data of 16 inputs at the slave station of node 0 to 16 outputs QO through Q17 at the master station MOV instruction stores data of 16 inputs IO through 117 at the master sta tion to 16 outputs at the slave station of Example 2 Loading Bit Operand in Remote 1 System One point of
19. The following program is an example of an application program in Neuron C to initialize the LONWORKS interface mod ule consisting of initialization codes and a header file When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the following codes in italics Initialization Codes WN FP MOM NON M NM pP HB B Bo B B amp 26 18 PRAGMA pragma scheduler reset BR RK RR RRR IK IKK RK IK KKK OK IK KK IK KKK OK IK KR IK IK RK IK KK RK RK KK Network Variable FRR KR KOK KKK KOK IKK IK KOK RK IK RK IK KK OK IKK IK IK RK IK RK k k RK IK Define network variables BR RK RK KK RK IK KKK IR KK KR IK IKK OK IK KKK IK KKK IK IK RK IK KK IK KK KK Write the software version number to C018h FOR RK KOR KKK OK IK KK FOR KK IK KK KR IK IK KR IK IK IK IK RK CK KK RK OK KKK define FC3ASX5L VERSION 0x10 BR RK RK KR KK IKK RK IK KKK OK IK KR OK IK KK IK IK KR IK IK KR RK IK KK RK RK KK Write the expansion module ID to C019h III define EMID CODE 0x50 BR RK RK RRR KIRK RK IK KKK IK IK KK IK KK IK IK KR IK IK RK IK KR KK RR KK include file FOR RK AOR IK IK IK KK IK KK IK IK KR IK KOK RK IO IK IK KK
20. Timing Chart Input 10 T2 Current Value Output QO Output Q1 Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Instruction Prgm Adrs Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction gt 350 15 Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Instruction Data Input I3 Timer T20 Current Value Output Q2 Output Q3 Input I1 Timer T30 Current Value Output 00 Input 12 Timer T15 Current Value Output 01 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Output 00 is on when timer 2 current value is 50 Output Q1 is turned on when timer T2 starts to timedown and remains on until the current value reaches 30 Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output 00 is on when timer T30 current value is 500 Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Q1 is turned on when timer T15 starts to time down and remains on until the current value reaches 350 Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Q3 is turned on while timer T20 current value is between 149 and 100 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS DC DC2 Data Register Comparison The DC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly com pare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated T
21. Repeat Destination Operand When the D1 destination is designated to repeat the source operand designated by S1 is moved to all destination oper ands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the destination designated by D1 Note The NRS N data repeat set instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with only the destination desig nated to repeat Data Type Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W S1 DIR REP Hs Brom Coni es p10 110 D20 110 011 111 D21 110 012 112 L D22 110 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 S1 DIR REP D Fh D10 110 020 110 011 111 021 111 012 112 rD22 110 gt 013 113 D23 111 014 114 024 110 D15 115 p25 111 Repeat Source and Destination Operands When both S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the same quantity of operands starting with the operand designated by D1 Note The BMOV block move instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with both the source and destination designated to repeat Data Type Word Source Rep
22. T Absorber Transistor Sink Output Output o Load L A dt Terminal with the load Load E 110 1 d Load H 210 l Load 210 Ld Load Load 3 C C ad ale 18 compatible Pias e Load 5 C HE with the load 1616 in eje s Load 7G s Load 7 C Load 18 seas 1910 5g Load 91C ta Irole Load 10 C 5B e Load uiie 75 11 G PES Load L 12 C E Load 1210 Load F T Load 13 C Load 14 e Load 14 Load F 15 C Load 15 C Load F 160 16 Load 17 Load 17 Load 18 Load 18 E c Load 19 C 201 Load pole Power supply for source output 3 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Output Wiring for Application in Europe When equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is intended for use in European countries insert an IEC 60127 approved fuse to each output of every output module for protection against overload or short circuit This is required when exporting equipment containing the OpenNet Controller to Europe Example FC3A R161 Relay Outp
23. B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 All B10 10 B9 A9 B8 8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 5 B4 A4 B3 A3 4 2 A2 Bl Al 2 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL FC3A N08A11 8 point AC Input Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact IL IL TL TE TE TL IL HL IE HE TL TL TL TL IL IE TIE TL I C C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 CO C2 CO C2 Wiring Schematic COM terminals are not connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input module e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Terminal No Name Terminal No Name dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Output Module Digital output modules are available in 16 point relay output modules 16 and 32 point transistor sink output modules and 16 point transistor protect source output modules Five different connector terminal styles are available Output Module Type Numbers Module 16 point 16 point Transistor 16 point Transistor 32 point Transistor Relay Output Sink Ou
24. Item Condition Execution Time Housekeeping 540 usec IN OUT 32 32 points 630 usec IN OUT 64 64 points 730 usec 1 O service IN OUT 128 128 points 910 usec IN OUT 240 240 points 1400 usec Calendar clock function processing Note 1 66 usec 2 083 x transmit receive words 3 125 msec at 19200 bps See page 21 9 Data link master station processing When using a data link system Note 2 separate refresh mode Note 1 Calendar clock function is processed once every 100 msec Note 2 Data link slave stations are processed in interrupt processing asynchronous to the ordinary system processing In addition to processing user program instructions and END instruction the OpenNet Controller system processing includes interrupt processing of various functions 1 O Delay Time The minimum delay from a standard input to a standard output in the program below is 1 31 msec 10 0 LOD OUT e Maximum execution time LOD 0 65 usec OUT 1 15 usec e END processing time without interrupt processing Housekeeping 540 usec I O service 630 usec e Input delay time DC input without filter setting 40 usec Output delay time transistor output Approx 100 usec The I O delay time may be increased by such factors as increased END processing time caused by frequent interrupt pro cessing and larger program size and input filter setting A 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL APPENDIX
25. idee C nn oo oo All dimensions in mm 240 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Introduction This chapter describes the methods and precautions for installing and wiring OpenNet Controller modules Before starting installation and wiring be sure to read Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual and under stand precautions described under Warning and Caution Turn power off to the OpenNet Controller before starting installation removal wiring mainte nance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard e Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure of the OpenNet Controller may cause disorder of the control system damage or accidents e Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the OpenNet Controller People without such expertise must not use the OpenNet Controller e Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the OpenNet Controller hous ing Put a cover on the OpenNet Controller modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction Installation Location The OpenNet Controller must be installed correctly for o
26. oo000000000000000000 oo0o00000000000000000 SX5D SBM16K SX eeeee D SBM16P SX5D SBR08 25 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Network Troubleshooting Three LED indicators are provided on the DeviceNet slave module When a trouble occurs during DeviceNet communica tion these status LEDs go on or flash depending on the error When the LEDs go on or flash locate the error referring to the table described below Probable Causes for Network Errors When a trouble occurs during DeviceNet communication the following causes are suspected e Strong external noise e The power voltage to the DeviceNet slave module has dropped below the minimum operating voltage at least momen tarily e Use of a faulty communication line incorrect cable or transmission over the rated distance e Improper terminator DeviceNet master module fails to recognize the DeviceNet slave module Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module POW OFF MNS OFF 10 OFF Cause Power is not supplied to the OpenNet Controller CPU module Action Supply 24V DC to the OpenNet Controller CPU module Plug in the expansion connector correctly Green ON OFF OFF Power is not supplied to the DeviceNet interface Plug in the communication connector correctly Connect the DeviceNet power lines red V and black V c
27. 3000 When input is on data of D10 is multiplied by data of D20 and 5000 D30 D31 500000000 Note When the result exceeds 4 294 967 295 a user program execution error will result turning on the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error The result is not set to the destination operand Data Type Long MUL L S1 S2 Dl REP 1 D10 D20 D30 10 011 100000 20 021 5000 D30 D31 500000000 Note When the result is below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 a user program execution error will result turning on the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error The result is not set to the destination operand OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DIV Data Type Word DIV W S1 S2 Dl REP 010 50 020 7 030 7 031 1 12 D10 D20 D30 Quotient Remainder When input I2 is on data of D10 is divided by data of D20 The quotient is set to D30 and the remainder is set to D31 Note Destination uses two word operands in the division operation of word data type so do not use data register D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit oper and such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relay
28. ADD S1 through S2 added gt D1 D1 1 SI through S2 XORed gt DI When input is on with ADD selected all data of operands designated by S1 through S2 are added and the result is stored to the destination operand designated by D1 and the next operand D1 1 When input is on with XOR selected all data of operands designated by S1 through S2 are XORed and the result is stored to the destination operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number for SUM X X X X 52 Source 2 Last operand number for SUM X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results XX For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out Since the SUM instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types X m m Z When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used Example SUM ADD SOTU SUM W S1 2 D1 When input is on all data of D10 through D12 are added and ADD D10 D12 D20 the result is stored to D2
29. RE ER eqq uuu Ok DE eS 17 13 User Communication Error 17 25 ASCII Character Code Table ze fa T ok SEY ee eed ead BREE PPE 17 26 RS232C Line Control Signals co RR OT er a ew ee PR 17 27 Sample Program User Communication TXD 17 31 Sample Program User Communication 17 33 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS EABEE Eab l e RR ate DU at de e RR D 18 1 BJ MP acd AO Ti Re etc AER rad un 18 1 ECAE Label Gall os ORG RAD a RR Ra n Re ctl eR rcd 18 3 ati D ar aA e d a RR Rs Ron abate Ahaha S dr ts 183 DJNZ Decrement Jump 18 5 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS XYFS XY Format tete uem DRE ad RR ous 19 1 CVXTYACONVEFEX tO yY e PR Pale ne ot a4 A EA DEW SALDO 19 2 CVYTX Convert YV to X r eed Ga ali bea aa ba EA RUD RR OC 19 3 AVRG Average sonate ise redu ee a baled ad Fs TA Ba oe CX a eles 19 6 PID INSTRUCTION PID PID CODEtOl v s reti enya we Oana ea Aya ie a 20 1 Application Example cc scares eae hE Sa ROS ON RE EO de re Te de 20 14 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link Specifications 21 1 Data L
30. For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the DTCB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X uz When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the destination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used Example DTCB Source Operand Data Register Before execution After execution uem SOTU DTCB W S1 0 1 m ET D10 D20 gt D10 0030p UPPer byte D20 3039h 57 D11 0039h Lower byte Source Operand Link Register Before execution After execution H Hsen SOTU DTCB W Od 57 12345 L131 D L1316 Lower byte 5039h 11317 5 45 Upper byte 0030h 14 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS ntroduction WKCMP instructions can be used as
31. Fuecten fura Selling Configure Communication Master Module Check Box Check this box only when ___ Master Medals the remote I O master ENS g ip al Modes Connected module is used Fite Catch Data Link Comm Poa Open ness ale Quantity of Nodes Connected When using the remote I O mas ter module specify the quantity Slee Staten Data Quastiy Brien of nodes from 1 through 32 Slave Station Maul Transmit Receive B E Be l g a cp Transmit Receive Bytes 0 to 8 default 8 bytes This value determines the data quantity 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits to communicate with the DeviceNet master module For the example on the next page select 8 trans mit bytes and 4 receive bytes for Module 1 Data Quantity Bytes Zea When using DeviceNet slave module or LONWORKS interface module specify the data bytes to communi cate through each slave or interface module 3 Select transmit and receive data bytes for module position 1 through 7 where the DeviceNet slave module is mounted 4 Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller 25 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL P E 25 DEVICENET SLAVE M ODULE rogramming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR The OpenNet interface module such as DeviceNet slave or LONWORKS interface module exchanges data between the open netwo
32. Cause The active configuration is the quantity of INTERBUS devices connected to the INTERBUS system whose data is within the summation frame The active configuration may differ from the connected bus configuration only when physically connected bus segments have been switched off Remedy Compare the active configuration with the connected bus configuration taking any disabled bus seg ments into account Error location Segment Position Add Error Info 0C14hex to 0C17 Meaning hex RB FAIL or 0D14hex to 0D17hex LB FAIL Multiple errors in the segment of the connected INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Error location Segment Position Add Error Info 0C18hex to 0C1B Meaning hex RB FAIL or 0OD18hex to OD1Bhex LB FAIL Multiple timeout in the segment of the specified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint
33. D11 E D20 D31 D34 D12 cs D20 032 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 Hs UE T EE E s 010 011 D20 D21 D30 D31 D36 D37 012 013 D20 D21 032 033 038 039 D14 D15 D20 D21 D34 D35 040 041 Quotient Remainder Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 Hs sw om LR cpu oe 030 033 D11 D21 D31 D34 D12 D22 gt D32 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 H dE e eee D10 D11 020 021 D30 D31 D36 D37 D12 D13 022 023 gt 032 033 038 039 14 15 024 025 gt 034 035 040 41 Quotient Remainder Note When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program exe cution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user program execution error results are not set to a
34. Reset 7 25 JMP Jump and JEND 7 27 Jp UR 7 28 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Advanced Instruction List aaa aaa 8 1 Structure of an Advanced 1 5 8 3 Input Condition for Advanced Instructions 8 3 Source and Destination Operands 8 3 Using Timer or Counter as Source Operand 8 3 Using Timer or Counter as Destination 8 3 Data Types for Advanced Instructions 84 Discontinuity of Operand 5 8 5 MON EE unde ioi 8 6 M OVE INSTRUCTIONS MOV MOVE oss Se char ee eee en Rt stag Gad pled Ee CRECEN 9 1 MOVN Move Not Sed oie nl hE Roe be Pad ee Be NS EG 9 5 IMOV indirect Move siege ks Bi ee E tee ein wen 9 6 IMOVN Indirect Move Not 9 7 BMOV Block MOVE ioc ue ls al Ba een he cig SEE 9 8 NSET N Data Set 4 sto Eie EU Ee Sl oy Mal Sa dell oui 9 9 NRS N Data Repeat 9 10 IBMV Indirect Bit MOVe
35. When D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection stores 0 the default initialization string shown above is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 AT and LF are appended at the beginning and end of the initialization string automatically by the system program and are not stored in data registers DR 8245 8246 8247 8248 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 DR 8345 8346 8347 8348 8349 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 8355 8356 8357 8358 8359 8360 8361 8362 8363 8364 AT EO 90 amp 28 c1 v ox a u o 5v N2 so 2 amp w owd ir This initialization string is used for AIWA s modems Depending on your modem and telephone line the initialization string may have to be modified To select another initialization string from the table above set another value to data regis ter D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection 234 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE More changes can also be made by entering required values to data registers D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 Store two characters in one data register the first character at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register AT and LF need not be stored in data registers Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the initialization string characters and ASCII value ODh
36. When only program download is not possible Only program download is not possible Disable the user program protection Is Protect User Program For details see page 5 18 enabled Call IDEC for assistance dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 13 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 7 Cannot stop or reset operation Is stop or reset input designated in the WindLDR Function Area Settings Is the designated stop or reset input on YES NO Note To monitor M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Monitor Enter Monitor the designated stop or reset input using WindLDR on a computer Does the monitored input turn on and off YES M8000 in the Direct Monitor Dialog Monitor the start control special internal relay M8000 using WindLDR on a computer Turn on the designated input The input circuit in the input module is damaged Replace the input module YES Is M8000 off Y Call IDEC for assistance 27 14 Turn off the start control special internal relay M8000 using WindLDR on a computer Note To turn off M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Set Reset Enter M8000 in the Direct Set Reset Dialog Press Reset
37. Acknowledge rere When the acknowledge pushbutton input I1 is pressed the warning indicator is reset 11 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL E Data Type Integer ADD 51 52 DI REP H 10 D20 030 brof 4 020 Data Type Double Word ADD D S1 52 Dl REP 10 D10 020 030 10 011 Data Long 1957400 D20 D21 ADD S1 S2 Dl 0 10 D20 030 10 011 xample SUB Data Type Word 216283 D20 D21 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS 4112600 D30 D31 964355 D30 D31 gt 030 15 6070000 748072 The following example demonstrates the use of special internal relay M8003 to process a borrow M8003 Examples MUL Data Type Word MUL W S1 S2 1 REP 1 D10 D20 D30 Data Type Integer MUL I S1 S2 Dl REP 1 D10 D20 D30 Data Type Double Word SUB W S1 D12 52 7000 D1 D12 REP D12 7000 gt D12 one D10 50 x D20 60 the re sult is set to D30 and 031 MULD Sl S2 1 REP 1 D10 D20 D30 10 011 100000 x 20 021 To process borrowing so that the number of times a borrow occurs is subtracted from D13 When a borrow occurs D13 is decremented by D30 D31
38. C C0 C0 C0 C20 C2 C2 C2 Co C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 CO C2 C2 C2 AC Input za aunt gt C02 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C2 C2 D EF WN 1416 EE 1810 o e 201 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL IL ILILILILIL IL TP IL T T ITI aunt WN 10 28 00000000000 PES 00000 C C C0 C C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C20 C2 C20 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C2 CD 3 5 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Output Wiring UN Caution e Terminal name NC means No Connection Do not connect output or any other wiring to NC terminals e If relays or transistors in the OpenNet Controller output modules should fail outputs may remain on or off For output signals which may cause heavy accidents provide a monitor circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Connect a fuse to the output module selecting a fuse appropriate for the load e Use ULI015AWG22 or UL1007AWGI8 wires for output wiring e When driving loads which generate noise such as electromagnetic contactors and solenoid valves use a surge absorber for AC power or a diode for DC power Relay Output Insert a fuse compatible Output Terminal Surge
39. D8072 D8073 D8074 D8075 D8076 D8077 D8078 D8079 D8080 D8081 D8082 D8083 D8084 D8085 D8086 D8087 D8088 D8089 Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7 Node 8 Node 9 Description Logical Device No 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High
40. Error location Segment Position Add_Error_Info 0C40hex to 0C43 Meaning hex RB FAIL or OD40hex to 0D43hex LB FAIL The length code of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the entry in the configuration frame Add Error Info 0C44hex to 0C47 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D44hex to 0D47hex LB FAIL The ID code of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the entry in the configuration frame Error location Segment Position Add Error Info hex RB FAIL or OD48hex to OD4Bhex LB FAIL 0C48hex to 0C4B Meaning Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Cause The data register of the specified INTERBUS device has been interrupted The number of data registers of the specified INTERBUS is not identical with the length code entered in the configuration frame Error location Segment Position Add Error Info 0C4Chex to 0C4F Meaning hex RB FAIL or OD4Chex to 0D4Fhex LB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device has an invalid ID code Add Error Info Error location Segment Position 2424 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM 0D50hex to OD53hex LB FAIL Meaning The specified INTERBUS device has the ID code of a remote bus device Add Error Info 0C58hex to 0C5B Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD58hex to OD5Bhex LB FAIL
41. O uU gt C O0OOOOOQOOQOQOcO goooooooooo000000 5su 7 8 V WOD C O0OOQOOQOOQOQOOcQO Fuse D AOAVEK Output Q1 Output 00 20 PID INSTRUCTION Analog Input Module FC3A AD1261 M n Transducer 50 to 500 C EE to O U Thermocouple High Alarm Light 1 Heater Power Switch Process Variable after Conversion 61 0 Linear Conversion Maximum Value 51 5 5000 500 C High Alarm Value 51 14 2500 250 C Set Point 53 2000 200 C AT Set Point 51 21 1500 150 C 0 Linear Conversion Minimum Value S1 6 500 50 C 4000 Digital Output from Analog Input Module Temperature Control by Auto Tuning and PID Action Process Variable after Conversion S1 0 High Alarm Value 51 14 2500 250 C Set Point 53 2000 200 C AT Set Point 1421 1500 150 C A gt Time U PID Action Auto Tuning OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 20 15 20 PID INSTRUCTION Ladder Program The ladder diagram shown below describes an example of using the PID instruction The user program must be modified according to the application and simulation must be performed before actual operation MOV W S1 DIR REP 10 0 DO 27 MOV W
42. slave stations powered up Are network cables are connected correctly Call IDEC for assistance Monitor special data registers D8178 D8179 D8182 and D8183 to view the remote YES Make sure that the quantity of connected remote 1 0 slave stations is 32 or less Deselect Configure Communication Mas ter Module on the Open Bus page in the Function Area Settings in WindLDR or change the Quantity of Nodes Connected to match the actual quantity of the nodes then download the user program to the OpenNet Controller Power up all remote 1 O slave stations Make sure that all cables are connected correctly using INTERBUS cables End Initialize the remote 1 network by turning on special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize or power down and up the OpenNet Controller CPU module 1 system status error code and error location See page 24 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagram 16 Remote 1 communication has stopped Bus NG The RDY RUN LED flashes and the FAIL LED is on 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Note When a bus NG occurs the output oper ation of the remote 1 slave station depends on the slave station module When the SX5S communication 1 terminal is used for the slave station all outputs are turned off Special internal relay M8036 INTERBUS mas ter
43. 1 O Counts Status Area L 13 L 13 b15 12 transmit bytes b11 b8 receive bytes b7 b0 unused This link register stores the transmit and receive byte counts selected in the Function Area Setting gt Open Bus in WindLDR Connection Status Status Area L 14 This link register stores the data of the allocation choice byte Software Version Reserved Area L 24 L 24 b15 b12 major revision b11 b8 minor revision b7 b0 unused This link register stores the system software version number Example Version 1 3 1 major revision 3 minor revision dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 7 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Function Area Setting for DeviceNet Slave Station The quantity of transmit receive data for DeviceNet network communication is specified using the Function Area Setting in WindLDR The OpenNet Controller CPU module recognizes all functional modules such as DeviceNet slave LON WORKS interface and analog I O modules automatically at power up and exchanges data with the DeviceNet master sta tion through the link registers allocated to each slave station node Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab
44. 3233h D8271 to designate telephone number ODOO0h D8272 to enter qi at the end of the telephone number When input IO is turned on M8050 initialization string 10 M8050 is turned on to send the initialization string ATZ and dial command to the modem at 7 SOTU pe 2 Mn 52 8077 line connection status is on while telephone line is connected When I1 is turned on TXD1 sends seven characters Connect See the next page for the WindLDR dialog When input I2 is turned on M8053 disconnect line is 12 M8053 turned on to disconnect the telephone line Note The MACRO instruction is not included in the OpenNet Controller instruction set but can be programmed using WindLDR to move data to consecutive data registers using the MOV instructions em cen imi 23 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE The TXD1 instruction in the sample program for the modem originate mode is programmed using WindLDR with parame ters shown below 51 mi 02 F m raran xm r TETI OF Pent et Sample Program for Modem Answer Mode This program demonstrates a user program for the modem answer mode to move values to data registers assigned to the modem mode at RS232C port and initialize the modem While the telephone line is connected user communication instruction RXD1 is executed to receive an incoming communica
45. 52 815 53 D1 0 00 53 D1 0 00 8125 51 62 52 through Friday M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay S1 62 specifies Monday through Friday The WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 15 on Monday The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 17 15 on Monday through Friday With Additional Days in the Week Table S3 1 When the current time reaches the hour minute preset time on the special days programmed in the WKTBL the designated output is turned on WKCMP ON or turned off WKCMP OFF In addition the designated output is turned on and off every week as designated by operand 51 of WKCMP In normal execution when the current day and time coincide with the preset day S1 and time S2 the designated output is turned on or off Execution on the special days has precedence over execution on normal days This example demonstrates operation on special days in addition to regular weekends The output is turned on from 10 18 a m to 11 03 p m on every Saturday and Sunday Without regard to the day of week the output is also turned on Decem ber 31 through January 3 and May 3 through May 5 S6 57 504 505 WKTBL 51 1231 52 101 53 102 54 103 55 8125 503 WKCMP 51 ON 65 52 53 1018 1 D1 Q0 D1 Q0 WKCMP OFF S1 65 S2 53 2303 1 With Skip Days i
46. MSB LSB CY 0 ojo o o o o ojoj o o o 1 1 1 o 1 o o oo 0 0 o o o i 1 1 o 1 Shift to the right M8003 After shift 010 011 475 143 MSB 010 011 LSB 0101010010 101010101010 10111111110 1100010010110 101000111111 0 M8003 134 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTL Rotate Left W ROTLE 0987 bits When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is E er T rotated to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Data Word bits to rotate 1 CY MSB S1 LSB Before rotation r 31 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 B a Rotate to the left CY MSB 51 15 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation CY MSB 51 LSB _ 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation MSB 51 15 1 0 o 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
47. Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector VHR 10N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg Terminal No Name 1 CNL 2 3 PE 4 n 20 8 5 s co 6 n 70 a HE 7 a BI 8 uo to 9 vo m e CN2 CN2 Terminal No Name mm 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m e Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1 Terminal No Name m WO WN Dd m e CN2 Terminal No Name m 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m e dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 25 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T32K4 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector H18 SHF AA J S T Mfg SHF 001T 0 8BS J S T Mfg CN1 CN2 CNI Terminal No Name Terminal No Name E our 18 18 17 17 T5 16 16 n 20 15 15 T 14 14 13 13 58 12 12 o o Mz 11 11 CN2 o na 10 10 5n 9 9 5 E 8 8 7 7 z 6 6 5 n 370 4 4 3 3 2 2 1
48. Rig ou NEGE 0 S D gt S D TENES When input is on a two s complement of operand designated by S D is produced and the new value is stored to the same operand Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat S D Source Destination Operand to negate data For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the NEG instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 D double word L long X X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source destination 1 point integer data type or 2 points long data type are used In the integer data type valid values are 32768 to 32767 If the designated operand is currently 32768 8000h the value will become 32768 8000h after it is negated In the long data type valid values 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 If the designated operand is currently 2 147 483 648 80000000h the value will become 2 147 483 648 80000000h after it is negated Example NEG Data Type Integer Before Execution After Execution SOTU NEG I S D 10 D10 D10 0 10 0 D10 1 D10 1 010 32768 010 32768 Data Long H S D Before Exec
49. eh ee RON da od ee wa we eee Simpl Operati DP TROUVE ER ee Rad deg d SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Stop Input and Reset Input Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers Module ID Selection and Run Stop Operation upon 5 Filte u cccrr Ier ier Highspeed Counter iater iapa tee tee ttd send eg eon hee pde etr Key Matix liput s Ls to er ere RR PS ed onis dest Heo ode s User Program Protection ssi ebd cede Ba AA a Eel SUR RR eae d Memory Card ciu d roca pter dug usate DEC RO Constant S an TIITie 2 2 str reos M a RID RR UE OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS HAPTER 6 HAPTER 7 C HAPTER 8 C HAPTER 9 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers 6 2 Operand Allocation Numbers for Functional Modules 64 Operand Allocation Numbers for Master Module 64 Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Master Station 6 5 Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Slave Station 6 5 Special Internal Relay Allocation Numbers 6 6 Special Dat
50. to de pott e Tos deed e e cer opted 2540 DeviceNet Network Troubleshooting sel m 25 11 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS C HAPTER 26 HAPTER 27 APPENDIX vi NDEX LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LonWorks Interface Module Features 26 1 AbOUELON iIeera sed ERU Back anal oro e ick ee Wann 26 1 LonWorks Network Components 262 LonWorks Network System Setup 26 3 LonWorks Interface Module Parts Description 264 LonWorks Interface Module Specifications 26 5 Wiring LonWorks Interface Module 266 TeErminatol whee ON Raa he A eke REX NEN TE 26 7 Link Registers for LonWorks Network Communication 26 8 Transmission Lime uo esset ke Ret ke ee ce tae ee Re Oe ee 26 9 Function Area Setting for LonWorks Node 26 10 Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR 26 11 Starting Operation 3 5 risa e pere e B E xe EA EE Ier e 26 12 Network Management 26 12 Precautions for Modifying Application Program 26 13 LonWorks Interface Module Internal Structure 26 14
51. 4 5 0 32 ON 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 33 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 34 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 35 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 36 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 37 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 39 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 40 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 41 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 42 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 43 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 44 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 13 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 45 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 46 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 47 ON ON ON ON OFF ON 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 48 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 49 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 18 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 50 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 19 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 51 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 52 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 53 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 22 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 54 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 23 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 55 ON ON ON OFF ON ON 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 56 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 25 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 57 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 26 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 58 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 27 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 59 ON ON OFF ON ON ON 28 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 60 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 29 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF
52. Binary to ASCII Conversion 5 33 35 Receive Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q597 or internal relay MO through M2557 as an operand for the receive completion output When the start input for a RXD instruction is turned on preparation for receiving data is initiated followed by data con version and storage When a sequence of all data receive operation is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Conditions for Completion of Receiving Data After starting to receive data the RXD instruction can be completed in three ways e When an end delimiter is received except when a BCC exists immediately after the end delimiter e When receive timeout occurs e When a specified byte count of data has been received Data receiving is completed when one of the above three conditions is met To abort a RXD instruction use the user com munication receive instruction cancel flag M8022 or M8023 See page 17 21 17 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Receive Status Designate a data register DO through D7998 as an operand to store the receive status information including a receive sta tus code and a user communication error code Receive Status Code Receive Status Code Status Description From turning on the start input for a RXD instruction to read the 16 Preparing data receive receive format until the RXD instruction is en
53. Brief description of functions used for the initialization program e init internal io function This function initializes the Neuron Chip internal IO pins e init external io function This function substitutes the number of register IO points for max out number or max in number e init gate array function This function turns on the LED when initialization of registers fails within 5 seconds 26 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Writing Receive Data to Data Registers in the LonWorks Interface Module The following diagram shows a typical example of writing receive data to the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module Preparation for data write Is preparation for data write complete YES N __ Write data Y End data write Application Program Example for Data Write The following program is an example to write receive data to data register CO00h of the LONWORKS interface module when an 8 bit input network variable nv 18 is updated When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the following codes in italics 1 Input Network Variables 2 network input unsigned char nv i8 define 4 define GA BCTL OxCO1A 5 define BCTL NWR REQ 0x04 6 define GA FCDR RX 0xC000 7 8 when nv update occurs 18 9 unsigned char pGA 10 unsigned char dat 11
54. Calendar Clock Special Data Registers Data Register No Data Value Read Write Updated D8008 Year current data 0 to 99 D8009 Month current data 1to 12 D8010 Day current data 1to31 D8011 Day of week current data 0 to 6 Note Read only ud eee 08012 Hour current data 0 to 23 D8013 Minute current data 0 to 59 D8014 Second current data 0 to 59 D8015 Year new data 0 to 99 D8016 Month new data 1 to 12 D8017 Day new data 1 to 31 D8018 Day of week new data 0 to 6 Note Write only Not updated D8019 Hour new data 0 to 23 D8020 Minute new data 0 to 59 D8021 Second new data 0 to 59 Note The day of week value is assigned for both current and new data as follows 0 312 Ts f s Sunday Saturday dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 7 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Example Setting Calendar Clock Data This example demonstrates how to set calendar clock data using a ladder program After storing new calendar clock data into data registers D8015 through D8021 special internal relay M8020 calendar clock data write flag must be turned on to set the new calendar clock data to the CPU NSET W 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 D1 M8120 99 4 1 4 10 30 0 DO MOVW SIR DIR REP 08015 4 Q MO MOVW SIR DIR REP 11 08019 3 C M1 MO M8020 M1 MOVW SIR DIR REP M8125 D8008 10 7 Adjusting Clock Using a User Pr
55. E KKK KK When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is divided into upper SI D1 D1 1 ni DTDV aum wm S1 D1 and lower bytes When a data register is selected as destination operand the upper byte data is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 The lower byte data is stored to the operand next to D1 When a link register is selected as destination operand the lower byte data is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 The upper byte data is stored to the operand next to D1 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to divide X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results XX For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Since the DTDV instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types X m When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used xamples DTDV Destination Operand Data Register
56. E ag fs a oo ual o Bo a og o B gt vo a ole un vel o a oo a NIC a o gc q S oo g o Orc Lig oo g mi TIS nu a C LIIS BH o o S oo o u C S oo o alc IS idec oa H A IDEC I O Module OpenNet Controller CPU Module DeviceNet Slave Module FC3A SX5DS1 Example Rockwell Automation SLC Processor with 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner DeviceNet Network SX5D DeviceNet o a OW NS 10 Qocoo0000000000000000000000 opmeooooooooo IDEC SX5D Communication 1 Terminal 5 5 DeviceNet Pow 09000000 0 msg o 100 Other DeviceNet Compliant Devices OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Parts Description Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 DIP Switch 4 Color Label 3 Network Interface Connector Module Name DeviceNet Slave Module Type No 5 5 051 1 Module ID FC3A SX5DS1 indicates the DeviceNet slave module ID 2 DIP Switch 10 pole DIP switch for setting node address MAC ID data rate output ho
57. Feet OMe System Program Version Error Code Box D8005 general error code Cer value in hexadecimal FREUT Tei 1355 16 Protect Statue dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 27 1 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box press the Details button The Error Status screen appears Clearing Error Codes from WindLDR After removing the cause of the error clear the error code using the following procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt PLC Status 3 Under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box press the Clear button This procedure clears the error code from special data register D8005 general error code and the error code is cleared from the PLC Status dialog box Clear Button Error Code Cleared 27 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Data Registers for Error Information Three data registers are assigned to store information on errors D8005 General Error Code D8006 User Program Execution Error Code D8007 User Program Execution Error Address General Error Codes The general error code is stored in special data register D8005 general error code When monitoring the PLC status using WindLDR the error code is displayed in the error code box under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box using four hex
58. IL The controller board could not activate the services when the following services were processed Activate Configuration 0711hex or Meaning Control_Active_Configuration 0713hex The error location could not be detected The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 17 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OBE8hex BUS FAIL A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off When checking the current config Meaning uration the diagnostic algorithm detected errors but could not locate the precise error location This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error rate can be very high The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling v
59. ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 21 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Register Allocation for Transmit Receive Data The master station has 20 data registers assigned for data communication with each slave station Each slave station has 20 data registers assigned for data communication with the master station When data is set in data registers at the master sta tion assigned for data link communication the data is sent to the corresponding data registers at a slave station When data is set in data registers at a slave station assigned for data link communication the data is sent to the corresponding data registers at the master station Master Station Slave Slave Station Data Register Transmit Receive Data Station Data Register Transmit Receive Data Number Number Slave 1 D7000 D7009 Transmit data to slave 1 Slave 17 D7320 D7329 Transmit data to slave 17 D7010 D7019 Receive data from slave 1 D7330 D7339 Receive data from slave 17 Slave 2 D7020 D7029 Transmit data to slave 2 Slave 18 D7340 D7349 Transmit data to slave 18 D7030 D7039 Receive data from slave 2 D7350 D7359 Receive data from slave 18 Slave 3 D7040 D7049 Transmit data to slave 3 Slave 19 D7360 D7369 Transmit data to slave 19 D7050 D7059 Receive data from slave 3 D7370 D737
60. The data transmission is interrupted at the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause The connector has not been plugged in The bridge for connector identification RBST or LBST is defective Add Error Info 0 5 to 5 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD5Chex to OD5Fhex LB FAIL Data transmission is interrupted at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause The connector has not been plugged in The bridge for connector identification RBST or LBST is defective Add Error Info 0C68hex to 0C6B Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD68hex to OD6Bhex LB FAIL The SUPI 3 of the specified INTERBUS device detected an 1 timeout Add Error Info Error location Segment Position O0C6Chex to OC6Fhex RB FAIL or OD6Chex to OD6Fhex LB FAIL Meaning The specified INTERBUS device carried out a reset Cause The specified INTERBUS device is insufficiently supplied with power or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maxim
61. When the linear conversion is disabled 51 4 set to 0 the set point 53 is set to a value larger than 4000 The current control action S2 0 differs from that determined at the start of AT To restart AT set correct parameters referring to the probable causes listed below The manipulated variable D1 or the control output S2 6 is not outputted to the control target correctly The process variable is not stored to the operand designated by S4 The AT output manipulated variable 51 22 is not set to a large value so that the process variable 54 can change sufficiently Alarge disturbance occurred AT failed to complete normally because the process variable S4 fluctuated excessively To 201 restart AT set the AT sampling period S1 19 or the input filter coefficient S1 11 to a larger value 107 200 AT is stopped because of AT execution error dec OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 3 20 PID INSTRUCTION 143 Operation Mode When the start input for the PID instruction is turned on the CPU module checks the value stored in the data register des ignated by 1 3 and executes the selected operation The selection cannot be changed while executing the PID instruction 0 PID action The PID action is executed according to the designated PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S1 8 derivative time S1 9 and control action S240 1 AT auto tunin
62. amp K3 amp HI amp IO The software flow control XON XOFF cannot be used for the OpenNet Controller modem mode Any of these commands must be included in the initialization string Set bps rate adjust off JO amp B1 The bps rate between the modem and the OpenNet Controller is constant and independent of the tele phone line bps rate Enables auto reliable link amp M5 The modems at both ends of the telephone line detect the best communication format for the modems and establish a link N2 N3 Enables reliable or auto eliable mode m X Error correction function is used to improve the communication reliability amp W amp WO Write active profile The current configuration profile is saved to a non volatile memory of the modem OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 239 23 MODEM MODE Preparation for Using Modem Before using a modem read the user s manual for your modem Determine commands for the initialization string The required initialization string depends on the model and make of the modem The OpenNet Controller contains 18 pre determined initialization strings When D8200 8300 RS232C port communication mode selection value is changed to 1 or D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection value is changed one of the predetermined modem initialization strings is stored to D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 depending on the value stored in D8201 or D8301 respectively Modem Initial
63. bit move not 9 12 move 9 6 move not 9 7 initialization 26 18 codes 26 18 error 25 7 string 23 2 23 3 23 4 23 7 commands 23 9 initialization string 23 2 initialize pulse M8120 6 10 in operation output M8125 6 11 input condition for advanced instructions 8 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL filter 5 6 module 2 7 terminal arrangement 2 11 modules 3 network variables 26 23 wiring 3 5 installation and wiring 3 1 in control panel 3 4 instructions binary arithmetic 11 1 bit shift rotate 13 1 Boolean computation 12 1 coordinate conversion 19 1 data comparison 10 1 data conversion 14 1 interface 16 1 move 9 1 PID 20 1 program branching 18 1 user communication 17 1 week programmer 15 1 INTERBUS cable 24 15 cycle time 24 12 error code 24 16 master access error 27 5 acknowledge code 24 10 additional error information 24 10 bus NG M8036 6 10 error code 24 10 error location 24 10 error M8040 6 10 error M8041 6 10 initialize M8030 6 10 peripheral fault M8037 6 10 status transition number D8179 24 10 system error information D8178 24 10 internal relays for modem mode 23 2 structure LonWorks interface module 26 14 International Standard Organization 26 2 interval compare greater than or equal to 10 4 comparison in WKCMP ON OFF instructions 15 4 ISO 26 2 JMP and JEND instructions 7 27 jump instructions 7 27 keep data sum check error 27 5 designation 5 3 key matrix input 5 16 LABEL 18 1 label 18 1
64. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 13 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTLC Rotate Left with Carry 8 ROTLC bit When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 and a carry special i s d 2 cae pum x T internal relay M8003 are rotated to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out of the source operand is set to a carry M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB of the source operand Data Type Word bits to rotate 1 CY MSB S1 LSB Before rotation La ojo ij1ijo ijolilij i o o i i 0 4 M8003 Rotate to the left MSB 51 LSB After rotation 1 o o i i pji o i i i Jojoj i i oO 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation CY MSB 51 LSB 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation MSB 51 LSB 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
65. 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X A X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTLC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types TESTO uL un When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 9 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTLC Data Type Word MOWW S1 Dl REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 40966 D10 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 ROTLC W S1 bits 10 D10 1 Each time input 1
66. 12 I3 Timing Chart io ON When both inputs 10 and 11 are on or both ul inputs 12 and 1 are on output 00 is on 11 hol When either input IO or I1 is off and either input I2 or I3 is off output QO is off p ON OFF ON I3 ofr ON 00 der OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 75 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP Bit Pop The BPS bit push instruction is used to save the result of bit logical operation temporarily The BRD bit read instruction is used to read the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily The BPP bit pop instruction is used to restore the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily When using WindLDR the user need not program the BPS BRD and BPP instructions The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into BPS BRD and BPP when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List BPS Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 11 Q1 BRD CO O Ui C Timing Chart ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Ql ON Q2 ON Q3 When both inputs 10 11 are on output Q1 is turned on When both inputs 10 and 12 are on output 02 is turned on When both inputs 10 and 13 are on output Q3 is turned on 7 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Data Movement in Operation Register and Bit Stack Register When the BPS bit push instruction is used the pro
67. 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Control Signal Statuses in STOP Mode Communication DR Value DSR Input DTR Output RTS Output Mode D8205 D8305 D8206 D8306 D8207 D8307 No effect 0 default disabled OFF ON No effect 1 TXD disabled OFF No effect User TXD RXD disabled SEF Communication No effect Mode 3 TXD RXD disabled OFF No effect TXD RXD disabled OFF ON No effect ormore TXD RXD disabled ORF ON Maintenance While transmitting OFF Mode B NONE ON Not transmitting DSR Input Control Signal Option D8205 D8305 Special data registers D8205 and D8305 are used to control data flow between the OpenNet Controller RS232C port 1 or port 2 and the remote terminal depending on the DSR data set ready signal sent from the remote terminal The DSR sig nal is an input to the OpenNet Controller to determine the status of the remote terminal The remote terminal informs the OpenNet Controller using DSR whether the remote terminal is ready for receiving data or is sending valid data The DSR control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 1 or port 2 D8205 D8305 0 system default DSR is not used for data flow control When DSR control is not needed set 0 to D8205 or D8305 D8205 D8305 1 When DSR is on the OpenNet Controller can transmit and receive data ON DSR signal spf D8205 D8305 2 2 When
68. 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 paai sory DIO 020 D30 3 pio 10 20 25 n3065 D11 15 021 35 gt D30 50 D12 20 022 45 030 65 Data Type Double Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ADD D SIR 52 Dl REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 D22 D23 030 031 D14 D15 D24 D25 D30 D31 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 115 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 H sotu H ADD W S1R S2 DIR REP Repeat s Repeat 0 Repeat 3 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 p30 35 D11 15 D20 25 p31 40 D12 20 D20 25 032 45 Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD D 51 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 D20 D21 032 033 D14 D15 t D
69. Analog Input Func tional Module Analog Output Func tional Module OpenNet Interface OpenNet Controller CPU Module Output Output Module Module 16 pt Output Input Module 32 pt Input 32 pt Output The system setup shown above will have operand numbers allocated to each module as follows Slot No Module Operand Numbers 1 Functional Module 1 L100 through L127 2 Output Module 1 QO through Q7 Q10 through 017 Q20 through Q27 Q30 through Q37 3 Functional Module 2 L200 through L227 4 Output Module 2 Q40 through Q47 Q50 through Q57 5 Functional Module 3 L300 through L327 6 Input Module 1 10 through 17 110 through 117 120 through 127 130 through 137 In the system setup shown above the analog input module in slot 5 uses link register L300 for channel 0 data and L304 for channel 4 data Bit Designation of Link Register The following table illustrates how to read and write link register bits primarily used for basic instructions and some advanced instructions as bit operands Link Register Mapping for Functional Modules Allocation Numbers Functional Module Reserved Area Access Prohibited Status Area Data Area Read Only Functional Module 1 10100410107 10110 10117 1012010127 Functional Module 2 1020010207 10210 10217 1022010227 Functional Module 3 1030040307 10310 10317 1032040327 Functional Module 4 104
70. C C2 C0 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C20 C2 C2 un Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are not connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the output module For wiring precautions see page 3 6 Terminal No Name Fuse DC Fuse L D DE Fuse AC L D VU l Fuse DC L D DC Fuse C AC D D VU Fuse Etpe Fuse L DC Fuse CJ ac i D DC Fuse L DC Fuse AC D Load 2 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A R162 16 point Relay Output Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connectors VHR 5N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg CN1 Terminal No Name CN3 Terminal No Name ooo NOURWNHO ooooooood BONES CN2 Terminal No Name ooo CN4 Terminal No Name Wiring Schematic COM terminals are not connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1
71. COM terminals not connected together M aximum Load Current 2A per point 8A per common line 7A per common line Minimum Switching Load 0 1 mA 0 1V DC reference value Initial Contact Resistance 30 mQ maximum Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated load 1 800 operations hour Mechanical Life 20 000 000 operations minimum no load 18 000 operations hour Rated Load Voltage resistive inductive 240V AC 2A 30V DC 2A Dielectric Strength Between output terminal and FG 1 500V AC 1 minute Between output terminal and internal circuit 1 500V AC 1 minute Between output terminals COMs 1 500V AC 1 minute Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Nylon Connector B5PS VH x 4 S T Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON 170 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Turn ON time 6 msec maximum Output Delay Chatter 6 msec maximum Turn OFF time 10 msec maximum Weight approx 260g 2300 Contact Protection Circuit for Relay Output Depending on the load a protection circuit may be needed for the relay output of the OpenNet Controller Choose a protec tion circuit from A through D shown below according to the power supply and connect the protection circuit to the outside of the relay output module Pro
72. DeviceNet Slave Module The OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks For communication through the DeviceNet network the DeviceNet slave module is available For details about the DeviceNet slave module and DeviceNet communication system see page 25 1 DeviceNet Slave Module Type Number and Weight Module Name DeviceNet Slave Module Type No FC3A SX5DS1 Weight approx 180g Parts Description 5 Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 4 Status LED 2 DIP Switch 3 Connector 1 Module ID FC3A SX5DS1 indicates the DeviceNet slave module ID 2 DIP Switch 10 pole DIP switch for setting the node address MAC ID media access control identi fier data rate output hold load off and physical port number 3 Connector Network interface connector for connecting an input communication cable 4 Status LED Indicates operating status POW POWER Green ON Power is on MODULE NETWORK STATUS OFF Duplicate MAC ID test not completed Green Flash Normal operation not communicating with master MNS Green ON Normal operation communicating with master Red Flash Minor fault e g timeout Red ON Critical fault e g duplicate MAC ID 1 STATUS 10 Green ON Normal operation Red ON Fault 5 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules 2 38 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL LoNWonks Interface Module The OpenNet Controller can be linked to LONWoRKS networks For co
73. INDEX command execution 23 2 result code 23 3 string 23 3 general command mode 23 2 23 6 ATOB 14 11 ATOH 14 7 ATZ 23 2 23 5 23 7 auto tuning 20 9 average 19 6 AVRG 19 6 B basic instructions 7 1 system 1 6 BCC block check character 17 8 17 18 BCD left shift 13 13 to ASCII 14 9 tohex 14 3 BCDLS 13 13 bidirectional shift register 7 23 binary arithmetic instructions 11 1 bit designation of link register 6 19 shift rotate instructions 13 1 stack register 7 7 block move 9 8 BMOV 9 8 Boolean computation instructions 12 1 BPS BRD and BPP instructions 7 6 breakdown of END processing time A 2 BTOA 14 9 BTOH 14 3 bus fail 24 16 segment no 24 6 bus topology 26 7 busy control 17 28 signal 17 31 C cable 17 2 17 31 23 1 24 15 DeviceNet 25 4 cables and accessories 5 calendar clock data write flag M8020 6 10 error 27 5 function processing A 2 setting using auser program 15 7 WindLDR 15 7 carry Cy and borrow Bw M8003 6 9 carry or borrow signals 11 2 catch input 5 7 CC and CC2 instructions 7 14 CDISP 16 5 character codes for character display unit 16 7 display 16 5 unit 16 7 clearing error codes 27 2 clock ii OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL adjusting using a user program 15 8 data adjust flag M8021 6 10 CMP lt 10 1 CMP lt 10 1 CMP lt gt 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CNT CDP and CUD instructions 7 11 comm port tab 17 3 21 7 communication enable button 2 2 fault 25 7
74. If the check box is on click the check box to delete the check mark so that you can proceed with the following procedures Mende ID Gain Link Gomer Post open Bu Tias Lisk Poot R48 Uncheck this box 1 Enable Freesat Selection A 3 Select the Data Link tab Baud Rate 19200 or 38400 bps Transmit Receive Data Quantity Words Select the quantity of data registers for transmit and receive data per slave station 0 through 10 words Slave Station Number 1 through 31 Enable Data Link Click the check box on the left to use the data link communication Refresh Operation Click the button for separate refresh default or simultaneous refresh See page 21 8 Baud Rate Select 19200 or 38400 bps When the data link system consists of only OpenNet Controllers and FA 3S serial interface module PF3S SIFA select 38400 bps for faster communication When the data link system includes the MICRO or MICRO C select 19200 bps Data Link Transmit Receive Data Quantity Words Scroll the slave station number using the up and down buttons on the left Select the quantity of data registers used for transmit and receive data per slave station The data words can be selected from 0 through 10 words dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 21 7 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Refresh Modes In the data link communication the master station sends data to a slave station and re
75. M8003 m m Re e m jaa e e Re e m e m m Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X A X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word nteger D double word L long L When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 5 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTL Data Type Word M8120 is the initialize pulse special inte
76. Network Interface Connector 5 Status LED Module Name Type No 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4 Network Interface Connector LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A SX5LS1 FC3A SX5LS1 indicates the LONWORKS interface module ID Frame ground terminal Pushbutton used for network management For connecting the LONWORKS communication cable Indicates operating status Indicator Status Description OFF Module power OFF POW POWER Green ON Module power ON RUN Green ON Normal operation ERR OFF Normal operation COM ERROR Red ON Communication error OFF Normal operation 1 O 70 ERROR Red ON Access error to the CPU through I O bus ON Application program not configured SER SERVICE Yellow Flash Network management not configured OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRKs Interface Module Specifications Normal Operating Conditions Operating Ambient Temperature 0 to 55 C no freezing Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C no freezing Operating Humidity Level RH1 30 to 90 no condensation Pollution Degree 2 IEC 60664 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Altitude Operation 0 to 2000m Transportation 0 to 3000m Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 swe
77. Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Data Registers for INTERBUS Master Information Six data registers are assigned to store the system error and status informatio
78. OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Device Number DIP Switch 75747 7487 19 120 121 122 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON OR ON OR ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Monitoring PLC Status The following example describes the procedures to monitor the operating status of the OpenNet Controller assigned with device number 12 in a 1 N communication computer link system 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Communication Settings The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Under PLC Network Setting click the 1 N button to select 1 N communication and enter 12 to the Device No field 3 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor The ladder diagram on the screen enters the monitor mode 4 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online PLC Status The OpenNet PLC Status dialog box appears Device No Enter 12 to select a device number to communicate w
79. Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical De
80. Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Module ID tab Fusctien ina Sting Keep 10 Dos oale Bde it Een Digi IMI Bia Wabi IS 1 nis eden diei D Calves aserabnn ahaa amp Hr irparac um hand 3 Click Module 01 through Module 15 in the Module Selection list box to select a slot number to mount a module Digital I O and functional modules are numbered Module 01 through Module 15 starting with the module mounted next to the CPU module 4 Select a module type in the Module Type list box Not Set Module type is not selected for the selected slot Digital I O A digital I O module is selected for the selected slot Functional Module A functional module is selected for the selected slot such as an analog I O or OpenNet I F module 5 Click the check box under Module ID Operation Selection Check in the Box default CPU starts to run even if actual modules differ from the module ID settings No Check in the Box The CPU does not start to run when actual modules differ from the module ID settings Terminal and connector type difference has no effect When the check box is unchecked and the CPU does not start the ERROR LED is turned on and I O bus error is caused error code 0800h Then replace the I O and functional modules to matc
81. Receive Byte Count 4 Register in the LoNWonks Interface Module b3 b2 bl j bO LSB 0 Note Link register L 13 is for read only Do not write data into L 13 Example 5 Software Version in Register C018h and Expansion Module ID in Register C019h When a software version number is stored to register CO18h in the LONWORKS interface module or when an expansion module ID is stored to register CO19h in the LONWORKS interface module the data is transferred to a link register in the CPU module as illustrated below C018h or CO19h 8 bits Register in the b5 b2 LoNWoRks Interface Module Link Register L 24 or L 25 in the CPU Module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 17 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Application Program Examples This section describes application program examples for initializing the registers in the LONWORKS interface module writing receive data to data registers and reading transmit data from data registers Initialization Before starting LONWORKS communication through the network the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module have to be initialized The initialization sequence is illustrated in the chart below Power up Y when reset Initialization Is the register initial ization complete Start to execute user program Initialization is not complete
82. Terminal No Name Fuse em pc n TES Jc e i Fuse Fuse Fuse DC DC Fuse Fuse DC umm UNE 2j 7 DC Fuse D Ji D V Load OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 16 point Transistor Sink and Protect Source Output Modules Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name 24 S NaURWNHO GRUPES C C2 C0 C C2 C2 C2 C2 C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 CB oo Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the output module e For wiring precautions see page 3 6 FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P 1 2 24 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T16K3 16 point Transistor Sink Output Module
83. Then take one of the following actions e Turn power off and on for the master station e Initialize data link communication for the master station using WindLDR on a computer See page 21 11 e Turn on special internal relay M8007 data link communication initialize flag at the master station See page 21 6 0008h User Program ROM Sum Check Error The user program stored in the OpenNet Controller CPU module ROM is broken Download a correct user program to the OpenNet Controller and clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer When a memory card is installed in the CPU module the user program in the memory card is checked 0010h Timer Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error The execution data of timer counter preset values is broken The timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program automatically Note that modified preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 274 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 0020h User Program RAM Sum Check Error The data of the user program compile area in the OpenNet Controller CPU module RAM is broken When this error occurs the user program is recompiled automatically and the timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program Note that modified preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored Clear the error code using WindLD
84. XY Format Set KFS S1 X YO Y When input is on the format for XY conversion is set m n Wb SNR Mate AREFE The number of XY coordinates defining the linear relationship between X and Y can be 2 to 32 points 0 lt lt 31 Valid Operands Operand Function I QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number oe 0 to 29 X0 through Xn X value X X X X X X X X 0 to 32767 YO through Yn Y value X X X X X X X X 32768to 32767 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as XO through Xn or YO through Yn the timer counter current value is read out S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 A maximum of 30 formats for XY conversion can be set Xn X value Enter a value for the X coordinate The integer value can be 0 through 32767 If the X value becomes negative a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Yn Y value Enter a value for the Y coordinate The integer value can be 32768 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X Em When bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or shift register is designated as Xn or Yn 16 points integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as Xn or Yn 1 point intege
85. adjusting clock 15 8 execution error 27 6 execution error M8004 6 9 protection 5 18 RAM sum check error 27 5 ROM sum check error 27 4 setting calendar clock 15 7 syntax error 27 5 writing error 27 5 W watchdog timer error 27 4 week compare OFF 15 1 compare ON 15 1 programmer instructions 15 1 table 15 2 WindLDR 4 4 clearing error codes 27 2 programming high speed counter 5 11 RXD instruction 17 22 transmit receive data 25 9 26 11 TXD instruction 17 10 viii OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL setting calendar clock 15 7 communication parameters 17 3 wiring 3 1 analog input output 3 8 data link 3 7 DeviceNet slave module 25 5 high speed counter 5 13 input 3 5 LonWorks interface module 26 6 output 3 6 power supply 3 9 WKCMP OFF 15 1 WKCMP 15 1 WKTBL 15 2 write communication command execution 8014 6 10 writing receive data 26 21 XCHG 9 13 XIF 26 2 26 12 No 26 12 XORW 12 1 XY format set 19 1 XYFS 19 1
86. function 2 6 I O terminals SX5 A 4 SX5D 25 2 SXSL 26 3 parameters 17 32 17 33 setting WindLDR 17 3 selector DIP switch 2 2 settings 2 6 compare equal to 10 1 greater than 10 1 greater than or equal to 10 1 less than 10 1 less than or equal to 10 1 unequal to 10 1 computer link 1 1 communication 1 5 1 N communication 1 5 communication 22 1 system 1 5 connection status 25 7 connector pinout 17 2 17 31 23 1 24 15 constant scan time 5 20 contact protection circuit for relay output 2 17 control register 20 2 relay 20 10 control signal option DSR D8205 D8305 17 28 DTR D8206 D8306 17 29 RTS D8207 D8307 17 29 status D8204 D8304 17 27 statuses RUN mode 17 27 STOP mode 17 28 conversion linear 19 4 type 17 6 17 15 convert XtoY 19 2 YtoX 19 3 coordinate conversion instructions 19 1 counter adding up counter 7 11 and shift register in master control circuit 7 26 comparison instructions 7 14 dual pulse reversible counter 7 12 up down selection reversible 7 13 CPU module 2 1 specifications 2 5 modules A 3 crimping tool 3 10 25 5 26 6 CVXTY 19 2 CVYTX 19 3 cycle time 24 12 D A converter 2 31 data combine 14 14 communication between remote I O master and slave stations 24 3 comparison instructions 10 1 conversion instructions 14 1 divide 14 13 input 7 20 mapping 24 5 type 8 3 26 23 types for advanced instructions 8 4 data link communication 21 1 error 21 4 error code 21 4 error M8005 6 9 21 6 initia
87. however it is not necessary to program the END instruc tion after the last programmed instruction The END instruction already exists at every unused address When an address is used for programming the END instruction is removed A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies with respect to program length which corresponds to the address where the END instruction is found During the scan time program instructions are processed sequentially This is why the output instruction closest to the END instruction has priority over a previous instruction for the same output No output is initiated until all logic within a scan is processed Output occurs simultaneously and this is the first part of the END instruction execution The second part of the END instruction execution is to monitor all inputs also done simultaneously Then program instructions are ready to be pro cessed sequentially once again Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adis 10 7 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes general rules of using advanced instructions terms data types and formats used for advanced Advanced Instruction List instructions Group NOP Move Data Comparison Binary Arithmetic Boolean Computation
88. iaram aaa dee de VON RE ee AA LE e eS 14 13 DTGB Data Combine hace do VOIR BEA a ON eae oe a 14 14 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS WKCMP ON Week Compare ON 15 1 WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF 154 WKIBE Week Table et br ake eek CM ble e eod as 152 Setting Calendar Clock Using WindLDR 15 7 Setting Calendar Clock Using User Program 15 7 Adjusting Clock Using a User Program 15 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL iii TABLE OF CONTENTS C HAPTER 16 Carter 17 C HAPTER 18 C HAPTER 19 C HAPTER 20 HAPTER 21 HAPTER 22 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS DISP Display uo ete SR RR ERS RAP Ra MER DIESE RSS 16 1 DGRD Digital Read ed y ERR Eri eink ed UO Y A 16 3 CDISP Character Display 16 5 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication Overview 17 1 User Communication System Setup 17 2 TXDI Transmit aoe Ala Pat a REX bre a Ee Cea uw i 174 TXD2 Transtmib 2 undue Ea decer rr Rm due oad WE RES qe S 174 RXDI Recelve 1 xa ns aise he tbe es Rin nate eee kk uie 17 13 RXD2 Receive 2 Mewes
89. momentary power voltage drop below the minimum power voltage faulty transmission line incorrect cable and transmission longer than the rated distance e When a network error occurs all outputs are turned off dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 15 24 REMOTE I O SYSTEM INTERBUS Error Codes One of the useful features of INTERBUS is the powerful error detection function This function makes it possible to detect cable disconnection remote bus failures and also to locate the errors so the system downtime can be minimized Two special data registers are assigned to store error information D8182 INTERBUS master error code stores an error code for user error general bus error remote or local bus error D8183 INTERBUS master error location stores the ADD_Error_Info to indicate the error location For example when a peripheral fault is found at node 0 logical device number 1 0 D8182 and D8183 store information as shown below D8182 0 1 Peripheral fault 08183 0100h Logical device number 1 0 Error Codes for User Errors USER FAIL OBB1hex PF Meaning The specified INTERBUS device indicated a peripheral fault Remedy Check the specified INTERBUS device Add Error Info OBDFhex LOOK F Meaning INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OR FAIL The controller board has stopped data transmission and is searchin
90. receive status registers for RXD1 RXD2 instructions While RXD1 RXD2 instructions are ready for receiving data after a receive format is complete turning on the user com munication receive instruction cancel flag M8022 or M8023 cancels all RXD1 RXD2 instructions Precautions for Programming the RXD Instruction e The OpenNet Controller can execute a maximum of five RXD1 and five RXD2 instructions that have a start delimiter at the same time If a start delimiter is not programmed in RXDI RXD2 instructions the OpenNet Controller can execute only one RXD1 and one RXD2 instructions at a time If the start input for a RXD1 RXD2 instruction is turned on while another RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed a user communication error occurs e Since RXD instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Once the input to instruction is turned on is activated and ready for receiving incoming communica tion even after the input is turned off When the RXD completes data receiving the RXD is deactivated if the input to the RXD is off Or if the input is on the RXD is made ready for receiving another communication M8022 M8023 deacti vate all RXD instructions waiting for incoming communication User Communication Receive Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR TE 51 01 pa r Tm n Ha 5 Pan d r ee Ese a
91. slave station has one special data register to store data link communication error codes If any communication error occurs in the data link system communication error codes are set to a corresponding data register for link communication error at the master station and to data register D8400 at the slave station For details of link communication error codes see below If a communication error occurs in the data link communication system the data is resent three times If the error still exists after three attempts then the error code is set to the data registers for data link communication error Since the error code is not communicated between the master and slave stations error codes must be cleared individually Master Station ip Data Link Communication Error Data Data Link Communication Error Data D8400 Slave station 1 communication error D8416 Slave station 17 communication error D8401 Slave station 2 communication error D8417 Slave station 18 communication error D8402 Slave station 3 communication error D8418 Slave station 19 communication error D8403 Slave station 4 communication error D8419 Slave station 20 communication error D8404 Slave station 5 communication error D8420 Slave station 21 communication error D8405 Slave station 6 communication error D8421 Slave station 22 communication error D8406 Slave station 7 communication error D8422 Slave station 23 communication error D
92. variables 26 2 26 9 26 23 Neuron chip 26 2 pins 26 13 26 15 nooperation 8 6 node address 24 4 25 6 information remote I O 24 6 number 24 4 NOP 8 6 normal operating conditions 2 4 NRS 9 10 NSET 9 9 NV 262 on line mode protocol selection 23 3 opcode 8 3 open bustab 24 13 network communication system 1 3 system interconnection OSI 26 2 opennet interface module 4 operand allocation numbers 6 2 for data link master station 6 5 for data link slave station 6 5 for functional modules 6 4 for master module 6 4 areas discontinuity 8 5 operands digital I O module 6 18 functional module 6 18 operating procedure 23 11 data link system 21 11 status during errors 27 4 operation basics 4 1 register 7 7 operational state 23 2 OR and ORN instructions 7 4 OR LOD instruction 7 5 OR word 12 1 originate mode 23 2 23 4 ORW 12 1 OSI 26 2 OUT and OUTN instructions 7 2 output during errors 27 4 hold or load off 25 6 module 2 16 terminal arrangement 2 22 modules 3 network variables 26 23 dee OpenNet Controller User s Manual V INDEX vi wiring 3 6 diagram 16 2 16 6 overlapping coordinates 19 5 peripheral fault 24 16 PF 24 16 physical port number 25 6 PID control 20 1 instruction notes for using 20 17 pinout 17 2 17 31 23 1 24 15 PLC status monitoring 22 2 position 24 6 power failure 27 4 memory protection 7 10 supply 2 4 3 9 wiring 3 9 wiring expansion power supply module 2 35 preparation for usin
93. voltage Channel 5 H current C C C C Wiring Diagram Voltage Input Current Input Unused Channel Analog Analog Analog Input Input Input Module Module Module Analog Analog Ww Connect V and COM vee J EE H terminals of unused utput utput hannels together Device g COM Device g COM COM CEN 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V 5V 4 to 20 mA Example When converting an analog voltage input 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V or 5 DC using channel 4 connect the signal to terminals 13 and 15 When the analog input module is the second functional module installed in the OpenNet Controller system the converted digital value is stored to link register L204 When connecting an analog current input 4 to 20 mA connect terminals I and V together and connect the input across terminals I and COM as shown in mid dle above For wiring schematic and precautions see page 3 8 Notes e Before mounting the analog input module first set the rotary switch to meet the required analog input range After setting the rotary switch power up the CPU and other modules e The COM V 1 terminal of each channel is independent from each other e Connect the V and COM terminals of unused chann
94. while TRUE 12 pGA unsigned char GA 13 pGA BCTL NWR REQ 14 dat pGA 15 if dat amp BCTL NWR REQ 16 pGA unsigned char GA FCDR RX 17 pGA nv i8 18 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL 19 pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ 20 break 21 22 23 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Acknowledge input network variable update Preparation for data write Preparation for data write complete Write input NV data to data register C000h End data write 26 21 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Reading Transmit Data from Data Registers in the LonWorks Interface Module The following diagram is a typical example of reading transmit data from the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module Preparation for data read Is preparation for data read complete YES Read data End data read Application Program Example for Data Read The following program is an example to substitute transmit data of data register COO8h for 8 bit output network vari able nv 08 When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the fol lowing codes in italics 1 Output Network Variables 2 network output unsigned char nv 08 define 4 define GA BCTL OxCO1A 57 define GA FCDR TX 0 008 6 define BCTL NWR REQ 0x04 7 define HIGH 1 8 Define IO 4 RUN 9 IO 4 i
95. 031 D34 D10 D20 gt 032 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 20 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 x MEL EE A Rx ee 10 011 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D36 D37 D10 D11 D20 D21 032 033 038 039 010 011 D20 D21 D34 D35 D40 D41 Quotient Remainder Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 and 1 1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W 1 2R D1 REP H SOI EE o oe a D10 D20 gt D30 031 D11 D21 030 031 012 D22 D30 D31 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When S1 and 52 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 D1 1 and D1 2 D1 3 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 H SONU eee ncc D10 D11 D20 D21 D30 D31 D32 D33 0124013 D22 D23 030 031 032 033 014 015 D24 D25 D30 D31 032 033 Quotient Remainder dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 7 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 puces m SE ie BAS PH o
96. 1 Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1 CN2 Load D 18 18 f D 17 17 t 16 16 t O 15 15 t O 14 14 D 13 13 D 12 12 11 11 L 10 10 f D 9 9 O 8 8 f D 7 7 D 6 6 D 5 5 4 4 Fuse 2 t t 2 2 1 1 2 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T32K5 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Fujitsu Connector Type Applicable Connector NOuURWNHO RGNASNSGRONSSUSGEGR SS ooo Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are the front view of the male connector on the output module e For wiring precautions see page 3 6 FCN 367J040 AU Fujitsu Terminal No Name Terminal No Name Fuse Connect the two V terminals together and connect the two COM terminals together because the current capacity of one terminal is exceeded when many outputs are on simultaneously O
97. 1055040557 1059040597 480 total when using an expansion power supply module Output Q Q0000 Q0007 Q0040 Q0047 Q0080 Q0087 Q0120 Q0127 Q0160 Q0167 Q0200 Q0207 00240 00247 00010 00017 00050 00057 00090 00097 00130 00137 00170 00177 00210 00217 00250 00257 00020 00027 00060 00067 00100 00107 00140 00147 00180 00187 00220 00227 00260 00267 00030 00037 00070 00077 00110 00117 00150 00157 00190 00197 00230 00237 00270 00277 224 00280 00287 00320 00327 00360 00367 00400 00407 00440 00447 00480 00487 00520 00527 00560 00567 00290 00297 00330 00337 00370 00377 00410 00417 00450 00457 00490 00497 00530 00537 00570 00577 00300 00307 00340 00347 00380 00387 00420 00427 00460 00467 00500 00507 00540 00547 00580 00587 00310 00317 00350 00357 00390 00397 00430 00437 00470 00477 00510 00517 00550 00557 00590 00597 480 total when using an expansion power supply module Internal Relay M M0000 M0007 M0040 M0047 M0080 M0087 M0120 M0127 0160 0167 M0200 M0207 M0240 M0247 M0280 M0287 M0320 M0327 M0360 M0367 M0400 M0407 M0440 M0447 M0480 M0487 M0520 M0527 M0560 M0567 M0600 M0607 M0640 M0647 M0680 M0687 M0720 M0727 M0760 M0767 M0800 M0807 M0840 M0847 M0880 M0887 M0920 M0927 M0010 M0017 M0050 M0057 M0090 M0097 M0130 M0137 M0170 M0177 M0210 M0217 M0250 M0257 M0290 M0297 M0330 M0337 M0370 M0377 M0410 M0417 M0450 M0457 M0490 M0497 M0530 M0537 M057
98. 2 Control relay 00 0590 M0 M2550 3 Source 3 Set point D0 D7999 0 4000 54 Source 4 T 0007999 11001705 D1 Destination 1 Manipulated variable 0 07999 Source operand 51 control register uses 27 data registers starting with the operand designated by S1 Data registers DO through D7973 can be designated by S1 For details see the following pages Source operand S2 control relay uses 8 points of outputs or internal relays starting with the operand designated by S2 Outputs QO through Q590 or internal relays MO through M2550 can be designated by S2 For details see page 20 10 Source operand S3 set point When the linear conversion is disabled 5 1 4 set to 0 the valid range of the set point S3 is 0 through 4000 which can be designated using a data register or constant When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 the valid range is 532768 to 32767 that is a value after linear conversion Use a data register to designate a nega tive value for a set point when the linear conversion is used For details see page 20 12 Source operand S4 process variable is designated using a data register or link register When reading input data from an analog input module designate a proper link register number depending on the slot position of the analog input module and the channel number connected to the analog input Fo
99. 51 S2 DI p10 4660 11 D10 3 D20 1234h e Quantity of Digits 2 H HTOA W 12 Quantity of Digits 1 H HTOA W 13 144 51 52 D10 2 51 52 10 1 01 4660 020 010 1234h Binary D1 4660 D20 010 1234h OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D20 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 52 0034h 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ASCII to Hex ATOH W 51 S2 KKK k K When input is on the ASCII data designated by S1 as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is converted into 16 bit binary data and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 H DI S1 S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 DI Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 ASCII data to convert X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X 14 D1 De
100. 55 Communication I Terminals for INTERBUS Other vendor s INTERBUS slave modules remote bus sta tions are also applicable 64 input and 64 output points Node 0 Node 1 Node N N x 31 per slave station at the maximum OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2441 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Specifications The total 1 points per node is 128 points maximum A node is allocated 4 link registers each for inputs 16 x 4 points and outputs 16 x 4 points Maximum Points per Node 128 points Maximum Quantity of Nodes 32 nodes The maximum quantity of nodes includes bus stations without I Os When using SX5 communication terminals as remote slave sta 4096 points tions with 16 inputs or 16 outputs a maximum of 512 1 0 points can be connected to the remote 1 network Maximum Total 1 Points Link Registers for Remote I System I O points at each node are allocated to predetermined link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module Only read InputData and write OutputData functions can be used for the OpenNet Controller remote I O communication Nodes and link registers are allocated as listed below Node Input Operand Output Operand Node Input Operand Output Operand Node 0 L1000 L1003 L1004 L1007 Node 16 L116011163 L116411167 Node 1 L1010 L1013 11014411017 Node 17 1117041173 11174411177 Node 2 1102041023 11024411027 Node 18 111804118
101. 75 8 GY 3200519 AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 32 00 807 100 1 0 18 Al 1 8 RD 32 0003 0 AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD 32 00 810 100 1 5 16 Al 1 5 8 BK 32 00 04 3 AI TWIN 2 1 5 8 BK 32 00 82 3 100 2 5 14 Al 2 5 8 BU 32 00 52 2 100 For 1 wire Connection Er Dimension For 2 wire connection aoe Dimension Al0 25 8 4 5mm AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Al 0 5 8 WH 2 x0 75 8 GY 7 0 mm A 0 Al 0 75 8 GY AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD Exe mm Al 1 8 RD 6 0 mm AKTWIN2 x1 5 8 BK 80mm Al 1 5 8 BK B 8 0 mm Al 2 5 8 BU Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x 2 5 1205040 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DIP Switch Settings DIP switches are inside the protective lid After setting the DIP switches replace the lid into position All DIP switches are set to off before shipping from factory Set the DIP switches to select the node address MAC ID media access control identifier data rate output hold load off and physical port number Do not set the DIP switches to the Selection Prohibited positions Node Address MAC ID Node Address NAO NA1 NA2 NA3 NA4 NA5 Node Address NAO 1 2
102. 8120 At startup MOV instructions store initial data 51 1049 DO to store the value for the first cycle 50 D1 y 50 DI to determine the jump cycles IMOV W S1 52 D1 D2 REP IMOV moves DO data 1049 to D149 in the first cycle DO D99 D1 DEC W A DEC decrements DO data to 1048 DJNZ S1 52 DJNZ jumps to label 255 until D1 value reduces to 0 D1 255 Ist cycle 1 50 Destination D99 50 D149 1049 D149 1049 2nd cycle 1 49 Destination D99 49 D148 1048 D148 1048 3rd cycle D1 48 Destination D99 48 D147 11047 D147 1047 4th cycle D1 47 Destination D99 47 2 D146 1046 D146 1046 149th cycle D1 2 Destination D99 2 D101 11001 D101 1001 150th cycle D1 1 Destination D99 1 D100 1000 D100 1000 ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 5 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS 18 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The coordinate conversion instructions convert y one data point to another value using a linear x2 Y2 relationship between values of X and Y X1 Y1 X0 YO X XYFS
103. Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Run Stop tab Run Default Click the button on the left to start the CPU at memory backup error Stop Click the button on the left to stop the CPU when attempting to start at memory backup error When the CPU does not start because of the Stop selection the CPU can not be started alone then the CPU can still be started by sending a start command from WindLDR For start stop operation see page 4 2 Function Area Eriin 8 Keep Bodl ID Data liek eale Siep inp Rassi lapai This example designates to allow Selecion Emm to start operation when the 5 Rum andit f Siep keep data has been lost Default Run 52 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers The statuses of internal relays and shift register bits are usually cleared at startup It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive internal relays or shift register bits as keep types Counter current values and data register values are usually maintained at powerup It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive counters and data registers as clear types When the CPU is stopped these statuses and values are maintained When the CPU is reset by turning on a designated reset input these statues and va
104. B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 23 72 421 0 Power failure X X X X X X Watchdog timer error X X XX XIX Data link connection error User program ROM sum check error X X X XxX xX CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 3 27 TROUBLESHOOTING OpenNet Controller Operating Status Output and ERROR LED during Errors Error Items Operating Output ERROR LED Checked at Status Power failure Stop OFF ON 1 Any time Watchdog timer error Stop OFF ON Any time Data link connection error Stop OFF OFF Initializing data link User program ROM sum check error Stop OFF ON During operation TIM CNT preset value sum check error Maintained Maintained OFF Starting operation User program RAM sum check error Stop 2 OFF ON Starting operation Keep data sum check error Maintained Maintained OFF Turning power on User program syntax error Stop OFF ON Downloading user program User program writing error Stop OFF ON Downloading user program Protect output overload error Maintained Maintained 3 ON During operation Calendar clock error Maintained Maintained ON Any time I O bus error Stop OFF ON Any time INTERBUS master access error Maintained Maintained ON Any time I O bus initialize error Stop OFF ON Turning power on User program execution error Maintained Maintained ON Executing user program 1 When the power voltage to the OpenNet Controller CPU module drops below the rated value the ERR
105. Cable Terminal 4 Terminal Label Indicates terminal numbers on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules Selects the output mode from five different signal ranges Rotary Switch Output Signal Range Resolution Output when Position Output value of LSB Stopped 0 0 to 10V DC 2 5 mV OV 1 10V DC 5 mV 10V 2 0 to 5V DC 1 25 mV OV 3 5V DC 2 5 mV 5V 4 4 to 20 mA DC 4 pA 4 mA V V 1 COM OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Voltage Output 1 0 Current Output 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Output Module Specifications Type No Quantity of Output Channels FC3A DA1221 2 channels Terminal Arrangement See page 2 33 Maximum Error at 25 C 0 6 of full scale Output Error Temperature Coefficient 0 013 C typical Maximum Error over Full Temperature Range 1 of full scale Digital Resolution 4000 increments Data Type in Application Program 0 to 4000 Total Output System Transfer Time 3 msec 1 scan time maximum Settling Time after Maximum Range Change 3 msec Overshoot 0 Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise Tests and Test Conditions 3 maximum of full scale at 500V impulse test Output Voltage Drop 1 maximum of full scale Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy Impossible Maximum Capacitive Load Not ap
106. Cen mem dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 17 13 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Selections and Operands in Receive Instruction Dialog Box TXD Transmit instruction RXD Receive instruction Port Port 1 Receive user communication through RS232C port 1 RXD1 Port 2 Receive user communication through RS232C port 2 RXD2 Enter the receive format in this area S1 Source 1 The receive format can include a start delimiter data register to store incoming data end delimiter BCC and skip D1 Destination 1 Receive completion output can be an output or internal relay D2 Destination 2 Receive status register can be data register DO through D7998 The next data register stores the byte count of received data Receive Format Receive format designated by source operand S1 specifies data registers to store received data data digits for storing data data conversion type and repeat cycles A start delimiter and an end delimiter can be included in the receive format to discriminate valid incoming communication When some characters in the received data are not needed skip can be used to ignore a specified number of characters BCC code can also be appended to the receive format to verify the received data One RXD instruction can receive 200 bytes of data at the maximum S1 Source 1 Receive Calculation jani Operand Digits Conversion Type Repeat Calculation Start Bytes Po
107. D30 D11 D20 gt D31 D12 D20 D32 Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D STR 52 REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 D20 D21 85 D30 D31 D12 D13 D20 D21 032 033 014 015 D20 D21 034 035 Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW W STR S2R DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 i D20 RN D30 D11 D21 gt D31 D12 D22 D32 Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D SIR 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 D22 D23 032 033 D14 D15 D24 D25 c D34 D35 Note When a user program error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user program execution error results are not set to any destination 124 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS NEG Negate
108. DSR is off the OpenNet Controller can transmit and receive data ON DSR signal OFE Possible D8205 D8305 2 3 When DSR is on the OpenNet Controller can transmit data This function is usually called Busy Control and is used for controlling transmission to a remote terminal with a slow processing speed such as a printer When the remote terminal is busy data input to the remote terminal is restricted ON DSR signal on Possible D8205 D8305 4 When DSR is off the OpenNet Controller can transmit data ON DSR signal Gee Possible Same as D8205 D8305 0 DSR is not used for data flow control Transmit receive Impossible Impossible Transmit receive Impossible Impossible Transmit Impossible Impossible Transmit Impossible Impossible D8205 D8305 5 or more 17 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Output Control Signal Option D8206 D8306 Special data registers D8206 and D8306 are used to control the DTR data terminal ready signal to indicate the OpenNet Controller operating status or transmitting receiving status The DTR control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 1 or port 2 D8206 D8306 0 system default While the OpenNet Controller is running DTR is on whether the OpenNet Controller is transmitting or receiving data While the OpenNet Controller is stopped DTR remains off Use this option
109. DTR output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8307 RTS output control signal option When sending receiving data R W Control Signal Status D8204 D8304 Special data registers D8204 and D8304 store a value to show that RTS DSR and DTR are on or off at RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively The data of D8204 and D8304 is updated at every END processing D8204 D8304 Value RTS DSR DTR Description 0 OFF OFF OFF All RTS DSR and DTR are off 1 ON OFF OFF RTS is on 2 OFF ON OFF DSR is on 3 ON ON OFF RTS and DSR are on 4 OFF OFF ON DTR is on 5 ON OFF ON RTS and DTR are on 6 OFF ON ON DSR and DTR are on 7 ON ON ON All RTS DSR and DTR are on Control Signal Statuses in RUN Mode Communication DR Value DSR Input DTR Output RTS Output s Mode II 8205 8306 Dee DOO ss While transmitting OFF 0 default No effect ON Not transmitting ON 1 ON Enable TXD RXD OFF While transmitting ON OFF Disable TXD RXD Not transmitting OFF U 2 ON Disable TXD RXD RXD enabled ON ON OFF Enable TXD disabled OFF Communication ON Enable TXD OFF Disable TXD ON 4 ON Disable TXD ON While transmitting OFF OFF Enable TXD Not transmitting While transmitting OFF 3 ormorg 9N Not transmitting ON Maintenance While transmitting OFF Mode ON Not transmitting OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 1727
110. Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 3 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8143 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 4 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8144 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 5 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8145 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 6 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8146 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 7 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8147 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 8 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8150 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 9 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8151 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 10 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8152 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 11 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8153 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 12 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8154 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 13 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8155 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 14 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8156 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 15 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8157 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 16 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8160 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 17 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8161 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 18 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8162 Da
111. ERR LED on the LONWORKS interface module goes on according to the error and a cor responding bit in the link register goes on The status LED goes off when the cause of the error is removed The error data bit remains on until the CPU is powered up again or reset b15 initialization error This bit goes on when the CPU module fails to acknowledge the completion of initialization for communication with the LONWORKS interface module When this bit goes on the I O LED also goes on b13 I O error This bit goes on when an error occurs during communication with the LONWORKS interface module through the CPU bus When this bit goes on the I O LED also goes on b12 transaction timeout This bit goes on when the CPU module fails to receive an acknowledge reply during communication through the LON WORKS network with the acknowledge ACKD service enabled When this bit goes on the ERR LED also goes on The transaction timeout is enabled only when the ACKD service is selected b11 transmission error This bit goes on when a CRC error is detected while receiving incoming data from the LONWORKS network When this bit goes on the ERR LED also goes on 1 O Counts Status Area L 13 L 13 b15 b12 transmit bytes b11 b8 receive bytes b7 b0 unused This link register stores the transmit and receive byte counts selected in the Function Area Setting Open Bus in WindLDR 26 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MO
112. Function Area Settings gt Run Stop gt Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error See page 5 2 The backup duration is approximately 30 days typical at 25 C after the backup battery is fully charged 4 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 S S 4 OPERATION BASICS tart Stop Operation Using the Power Supply The OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped by turning power on and off 1 Power up the OpenNet Controller to start operation See page 4 1 2 Ifthe OpenNet Controller does not start check that start control special internal relay M8000 is on using WindLDR If M8000 is off turn it on See page 4 2 3 Turn power on and off to start and stop operation Note If M8000 is off the OpenNet Controller does not start operation when power is turned on To start operation turn power on and turn M8000 on by clicking the Start button in WindLDR The response time of the OpenNet Controller at powerup depends on such factors as the contents of the user program data link usage and system setup The table below shows an approximate time delay before starting operation after powerup Response time when no data link and remote 1 O modules are used Program Size After powerup the CPU starts operation in 1K words Approx 1 second 4K words Approx 2 seconds 8K words Approx 3 seconds 16K words Approx 5 seconds Order of Powerup and Powerdown To ensure I O data transfer power up the I O mod ules fir
113. INSTRUCTIONS MP Jump JEND Jump End The JMP jump instruction is usually used in combination with the JEND jump end instruction At the end of a program the JMP instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the JEND instruction These instructions are used to proceed through the portion of the program between the JMP and the JEND without pro cessing This is similar to the MCS MCR instructions except that the portion of the program between the MCS and MCR instruction is executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is on the JMP is valid and the program is not executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is off the JMP is invalid and the program is executed When the input condition to the JMP instruction is on and the JMP is executed other instructions between the JMP and JEND are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT and OUTN All are held in current status SET and RST All are held in current status Current values are held TML TIM TMH and TMS Timeout statuses are held Current values are held CNT CDP and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are held Shift register bit statuses are held SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is held Input conditions ca
114. ITE PS Fuswtren Arna Seth Dia Link Comm Past Open fon Tiberi Exaile speed rantes Mit Daan eaae de ee E fe dne T i niic ocn Her E riim sey Weert Fast II lor inning Infaesalierr jn C zr jhapan t Wair Pete C relie 3 Click the Enable Key Matrix Input check box and enter required data in the areas shown below First Input No Enter the first input number used for the key matrix Inputs Enter the quantity of input points used for the key matrix First Output No Enter the first output number used for the key matrix Outputs Enter the quantity of output points used for the key matrix First IR for Storing Information Enter the first internal relay number used for storing key matrix input information Key Matrix Dialog Box The screen display shown above is an example to configure a key matrix of 6 input points and 5 output points starting with input IO and output QO The key matrix information is stored to 30 internal relays starting with M100 5 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Key Matrix Circuit 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS The key matrix structure includes sequentially numbered input points along the top and sequentially numbered output points along the side The I O connecting blocks include a diode and a switch as shown below DC Input Module Int
115. Input 12 ON R0 Q0 og ON Rl Ql off ON R2 Q2 ON R3 Q3 off Ladder Diagram Program List Rung 1 Prgm Adrs Instruction 2 3 4 5 6 7 Rung 2 8 9 R1 01 The last bit status output be programmed directly after the SFR instruction In this example the status of bit R3 is read to output Q3 e Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruction Setting and Resetting Shift Register Bits 6 e Any shift register bit can be turned on using the SET instruction 10 RO e Any shift register bit can be turned off using the RST instruction R The SET or RST instruction is actuated by any input condition 11 R3 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 21 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Reverse Shift Register SFRN For reverse shifting use the SFRN instruction When SFRN instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFRN instructions are entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate operand num bers The shift register number corresponds to the lowest bit number in a string The number of bits is the second required address after the SFRN instructions The SFRN instruction requires three inputs The reverse shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input and the SFRN instruction followed by the last bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram Last Bit Program List Reset Rung 1 SFRN R20 Prgm Adrs In
116. Input Current mA Input O Y kw Internal Circuit 2 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Input Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A N16B1 16 point DC Input Module Screw Terminal Type SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Applicable Connector Wiring Schematic C C C C C C C C ooooogoo00000 BONES ooo 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Terminal No Name e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input module e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Sink Input Wiring Terminal No Name Source Input Wiring Terminal No Name OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N16B3 16 point DC Input Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connectors VHR 10N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg CNL Terminal No Name 1 UN 2 3 n ia 4 n 20 u iB 5 u E 0 6 SH 7 n
117. Keen Keep Rangel Start Keep Number A ihe End Keep Number gt Start Keep Number When a range of M50 M100 is designated as shown in the example above M50 through M100 are keep types MO through M49 and M101 through M2557 are clear types Shift Register Keep Designation All Clear All shift register bit statuses are cleared at startup default All Keep All shift register bit statuses are maintained at startup Keep Range designated area of shift register bits are maintained at startup Enter the start keep number in the left field and the end keep number in the right field The start keep number must be smaller than or equal to the end keep number Valid shift register bit numbers are RO through R255 When a range of R17 R32 is designated R17 through R32 are keep types RO through R16 and R33 through R255 are clear types Counter Clear Designation All Keep All counter current values are maintained at startup default All Clear All counter current values are cleared at startup Clear Range designated area of counter current values are cleared at startup Enter the start clear number in the left field and the end clear number in the right field The start clear number must be smaller than or equal to the end clear number Valid counter numbers are CO through C255 When a range of C10 is designated CO through C10 are clear types and C11 thr
118. Mode ea Ra eR KE E eR 23 7 Modem Mode Status Data lt 23 8 Initialization String Commands 23 9 Preparation for Using Modem 23 10 Setting Communication Parameters 23 10 Programming Data Registers and Internal Relays 23 11 Setting Up the CPU Module 23 11 Operating Procedure ee 23 11 Sample Program for Modem Originate Mode 23 12 Sample Program for Modem Answer Mode 23 13 Troubleshooting in Modem Communication 23 14 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remote I O System Setup 24 1 Specifications xci Sed RC b Wer MET ES 24 2 Link Registers for Remote I O System 24 2 About INTERBU S ae ow Dee E oi dae WI EY Wunde ees 24 2 Data Communication between Remote I O Master and Slave Stations 24 3 Logical Device Number Node Number 244 Data Mapping scere Rat meteo d cem ED HEAT qe edet a e Tre RD AO eh eben 24 5 Special Data Registers for Remote I O Node Information 24 6 Special Data Registers for INTERBUS M
119. Module Module OpenNet Interface Modules I O Modules 0000000000 0000000000 S65 nunuunmnunuiB sss 000000 00x8 INTERBUS EFE INTERBUS EFE o nun B Remote 1 0 Remote SX5S Communication 1 Terminals ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 1 GENERAL INFORMATION User Communication System The OpenNet Controller CPU module has two RS232C ports and one RS485 port to control two RS232C devices and one RS485 device such as IDEC s HG series operator interface at the same time The figure below illustrates a system setup of remote I O and user communication In this example the I O statuses of a remote machine are transferred through the remote I O line to the CPU The data received through modems is monitored on a computer and also sent to a pager transmitter For details about the remote I O system see page 24 1 For details about the modem mode see page 23 1 OpenNet Controller Master Station m pum I Terminal Block Type Module Type Slave Station rmm Pager Transmitter Data Transmission Data Commu nication Remote Mach
120. OpenNet Controller remote I O network OpenNet Controller Master Station SX5S SBN16S 16 inputs 2 1 Node 2 Other Vendor s Other Vendor s Remote Bus Local Bus 3 0 Node 3 Other Vendor s Branch Unit SX5S SBM 16K SX5S SBR08 8 in 8 out 8 outputs SX5S SBT16K Other Vendor s 16 outputs Remote Bus Logical Device Number 1 0 Position low byte Bus Segment No high byte Logical Device Number INTERBUS Address Number Node Number 1 0 Node 0 2 0 Node 1 2 1 Node 2 3 0 Node 3 4 0 Node 4 5 0 Node 5 5 1 Node 6 6 0 Node 7 7 0 Node 8 Other Vendor s Local Bus OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Data Mapping The data mapping for the remote I O network configuration on the preceding page is shown in the table below Node N Input Output ode No Logical Device No Input Operand Output Operand tog Link Register Byte 1 Byte 0 Link Register eye Byteg Node 0 L1000 7 0 15 8 L1004 1 0 L1001 Not used Not used L1005 Not used 16 in ut module L1002 Not used Not used L1006 p L1003 Not used Not used L1007 L1010 L1014 Node 1 L1011 Depends on the module L1015 Depends on the module 2 0 L1012 specifications L1016 specifications L1013 L1017 L1020 L1024 Node 2 L1021 Depends on the module L1025 Depends on the module 2 1 L1022 specifications L1026 specifications L1023 L102
121. PID calculation results 52 7 AT complete output Goes on when AT is complete or failed and remains on until reset S240 Control Action When auto tuning is executed with the operation mode S1 3 set to 1 AT PID or 2 AT the control action is deter mined automatically When auto tuning results in a direct control action the control action control relay designated by S240 is turned on When auto tuning results in a reverse control action the control action control relay designated by S240 is turned off The PID action is executed according to the derived control action which remains in effect during the PID action Process Variable S140 When auto tuning is not executed with the operation mode A 5 1 3 set to 0 PID turn on or off the control action control relay S240 to select a direct or reverse control action respec tively before executing the PID instruction Direct Control Action In the direct control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the process variable S1 0 is larger than the Set Point 53 set point S3 Temperature control for cooling is executed in the direct control action Time 1 Process Variable 51 40 In the reverse control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the process variable S1 0 is smaller than the set point S3 Temperature control for heating is executed in the reverse control action Set Point S3 ssec In either
122. Q580 through Q597 in the first repeat cycle The destination of the sec ond cycle is the next 16 outputs Q600 through Q617 which are invalid resulting in a user program syntax error For details about repeat operations of each advanced instruction see the following chapters dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 5 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS NOP No Operation 28 No No operation is executed by the NOP instruction The NOP instruction may serve as a place holder Another use would be to add a delay to the CPU scan time in order to simulate communication with a machine or application for debugging pur poses The NOP instruction does not require an input and operand Details of all other advanced instructions are described in following chapters 8 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data can be moved using the MOV move MOVN move not IMOV indirect move or IMOVN indirect move not instruction The moved data is 16 or 32 bit data and the repeat operation can also be used to increase the quantity of data moved In the MOV or MOVN instruction the source and destination operand are designated by S1 and D1 directly In the IMOV or IMOVN instruction the source and destination operand are determined by the offset values designated by S2 and D2 added to source operand S1 and destination operand D1 Since the move instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse inp
123. RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8107 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Line Connection Status Maintained Cleared 8110 8117 Reserved Special Internal Relays Read Only Description CPU Stopped Power OFF umber M8120 Initialize Pulse Cleared Cleared M8121 1 sec Clock Operating Cleared M8122 100 msec Clock Operating Cleared M8123 10 msec Clock Operating Cleared M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed Maintained Maintained OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 6 7 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS ee Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8125 In operation Output Cleared Cleared M8126 M8127 Reserved M8130 High s peed Counter Up Down Status Maintained Cleared M8131 High speed Counter Comparison ON Status ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8132 High s peed Counter Current Value Zero clear ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8133 High s peed Counter Current Value Overflow ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8134 High s peed Counter Current Value Underflow ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8135 High speed Counter Comparison Output Status Maintained Cleared M8136 M8137 Reserved M8140 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 1 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8141 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 2 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8142
124. S1 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 Fuceev remm d a RC D10 D20 gt D31 D10 x D20 D32 Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D S1 S2 D1 R REP I1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 d D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D10 D11 D20 D21 gt 032 033 D10 D11 D20 D21 D34 D35 Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and 52 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 H Hon ANDWW STR 52 DI REP 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 D10 020 030 3 010 D20 LE D30 D11 021 D30 D12 D22 D30 Data Type Double Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D 51 S2R 1 REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 D22 D23 030 031 D14 D15 D24 D25 D30 D31 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 12 3 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW W S1 R S2 DIR REP H SOTU a aC a 33 D10 D20
125. S2 D1 on H CNES out wee ere e When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off CMP gt Compare Greater Than 88 51 gt S2 D1 on H are id When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are compared When S1 data is greater than S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off lt Compare Less Than or Equal 51 lt 52 DI on H MA JSIR 2 Br bad When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal 3 51252 Dl on H Mace ae eae p When input is 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are compared When S1 data is greater than or equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 1 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X
126. S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 10 D20 D30 M50 3 D20 D21 4 D30 D31 M50 D22 D23 gt 032 033 M51 D24 D25 034 035 M52 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 3 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS ICM P gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To S1 gt S2 gt S3 D1 on ICMP gt S1 S2 53 D1 RRR RK When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated 51 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met desti nation operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 52 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 3 Source 3 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Comparison output X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or
127. Sl Dl REP 1 D3 MOWW Sl Dl REP 1 D4 MOV I S1 1 REP 5000 D5 MOV I S1 1 500 D6 MOV W S1 D1 REP 0 D10 MOV W S1 D1 REP 70 D11 MOVW S1 1 REP 50 D12 MOWW S1 D1 REP 10 D13 MOV W S1 D1 REP 2500 014 MOV W S1 D1 REP 150 D19 S1 D1 REP 30 D20 MOV W S1 D1 REP 1500 D21 MOVW S1 1 100 D22 S1 D1 REP 2000 D100 PD Sl 52 53 l0 DO 0100 54 D1 L100 D102 M4 Q1 Continued on the next page 20 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL When input 10 is turned on 0 is stored to 27 data registers DO through D26 designated as control registers D3 operation mode 1 AT PID D4 linear conversion 1 enable linear conversion D5 linear conversion maximum value 5000 500 C D6 linear conversion minimum value 500 50 C D10 integral start coefficient 0 100 D11 input filter coefficient 70 70 D12 sampling period 50 500 msec D13 control period 10 1 sec D14 high alarm value 2500 250 C D19 AT sampling period 150 1 5 sec D20 AT control period 30 3 sec D21 AT set point 1500 150 C D22 AT output manipulated variable 100 100 D100 set point 2000 200 C When input 10 is turned on 3 internal relays M1 through M3 designated as control relays are turned off M1 auto manual mode Auto mode M2 output manipulated variable limit enable Disable M
128. Station 18 D7340 D7349 D7350 D7359 D8417 Slave Station 19 D7360 D7369 D7370 D7379 D8418 Slave Station 20 D7380 D7389 D7390 D7399 D8419 Slave Station 21 D7400 D7409 D7410 D7419 D8420 Slave Station 22 D7420 D7429 D7430 D7439 D8421 Slave Station 23 D7440 D7449 D7450 D7459 D8422 Slave Station 24 D7460 D7469 D7470 D7479 D8423 Slave Station 25 D7480 D7489 D7490 D7499 D8424 Slave Station 26 D7500 D7509 D7510 D7519 D8425 Slave Station 27 D7520 D7529 D7530 D7539 D8426 Slave Station 28 D7540 D7549 D7550 D7559 D8427 Slave Station 29 D7560 D7569 D7570 D7579 D8428 Slave Station 30 D7580 D7589 D7590 D7599 D8429 Slave Station 31 D7600 D7609 D7610 D7619 D8430 Note When any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave sta tions can be used as ordinary data registers Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Slave Station Allocation Number Data Transmit Data Receive Data Data Link to Master Station from Master Station Communication Error Slave Station Data D7000 D7009 D7010 D7019 D8400 Note Slave station data registers D7020 through D7619 and D8401 through D8430 can be used as ordinary data regis ters der OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 5 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Special Internal Relay Allocation Numbers Special internal relays M8000 through M8117 are read write internal relays used for controlling the CPU operation and communication Special internal relays M8120 throug
129. Strength Between power terminal on the CPU module and FG 500V AC 1 minute Insulation Resistance Between REMOTE OUT terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Between V 24 Interface terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Internal Current Draw Approx 142 mA 24V DC See Power Consumption on page 2 4 FG Terminal M3 screw Tightening torque 0 6 to 1 0 N m Ground Grounding resistance 100Q maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Weight approx 200g Remote 1 Master Module Function Specifications Network Protocol INTERBUS Transmission Speed 500 kbps Transmission Distance Between remote 1 master and remote bus station 400m maximum Between remote bus stations 400m maximum Remote bus total length 12 8 km maximum Quantity of Nodes 32 remote I O slave stations maximum 1 O Points per Node 128 points maximum 64 inputs and 64 outputs Branch Levels 16 maximum INTERBUS device levels 0 through 15 Remote 1 Connector D sub 9 pin female connector on the remote I master module Network Cable INTERBUS cable V 24 Interface Connector D sub 9 pin male connector on the remote I O master module V 24 Interface Cable Serial straight cable Electrostatic Discharge Severity Level ESD3 network interface See page 24 11 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 37 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
130. TMH or 1 msec TMS The maximum advance error is Increment 1 scan time The maximum behind error is 3 scan times The timer input error and timeout output error do not include the input response time behind error and output response time behind error Power Failure Memory Protection Timers TML TIM TMH and TMS do not have power failure protection A timer with this protection can be devised using a counter instruction and special internal relay M8121 1 sec clock M8122 100 msec clock or M8123 10 msec clock Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart 10 sec Timer Reset Note Designate counter C2 used in this program as a keep type counter See page 5 3 7 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL CNT CDP and CUD Counter Three types of counters are available adding up counter CNT dual pulse reversible counter CDP and up down selection reversible counter CUD A total of 256 counters can be programmed in a user program Each counter must be allocated to a unique number CO through C255 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Preset Value Constant 0 to 65535 Data registers DO to D7999 Counter Allocation Number CNT adding counter CO to C255 CDP dual pulse reversible counter CO to C255 CUD up down selection reversible counter CO to C255 CNT Adding Counter When counter instructions are programmed two addresses are required The circuit for an adding UP counter must be programmed in the follo
131. UL1007 AWG18 grounding resistance 1000 maximum Do not connect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment 2 8 V WOO NO 2 24V DC Grounding Remote 1 Master and LonWorks Interface Modules Connect the FG terminal to the ground using a wire of UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 grounding resistance 100Q maximum and a ring shape wire terminal Tighten the M3 FG terminal screw to a torque of 0 6 to 1 0 N m Do not con nect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment Note For power supply wiring to the expansion power supply module see page 2 35 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 9 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Terminal Connection e Make sure that the operating conditions and environments are within the specification values e Be sure to connect the grounding wire to a proper ground otherwise electrical shocks may be caused Do not touch live terminals otherwise electrical shocks may be caused e Do not touch terminals immediately after power is turned off otherwise electrical shocks may be caused Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of cable Applicable ferrules for the Phoe nix terminal blocks and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below The screwdriver is
132. USER S MANUAL 17 7 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Block Check Character Block check characters can be appended to the transmit data The start position for the BCC calculation can be selected from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC calculated in either XOR or ADD can be or 2 digits Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation start position can be selected from this range i BCC i 2 digits A BCC calculation range when starting with the 1st byte of the data BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the transmit data Example Transmit data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start position 1 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th e BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from XOR exclusive OR or ADD addition operation Example Conversion results of transmit data consist of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h ASCII data A B C D E 41h 42h 43h
133. WKCMP OFF instructions have the same values for the day of week comparison data S1 constant When S1 is set to 0 the instructions work without designation of day of week Set 51 to 0 or a value to designate consecutive days such as 6 for Monday and Tuesday 56 for Wednesday through Friday or 65 for Saturday and Sunday Do not set 51 to a value to designate a single day such as 32 for Friday only or 127 to designate all days 3 Hour minute comparison data S2 constant has a relationship ON time gt OFF time 4 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have 0 set for the week table output control S3 to disable use of the week table 5 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have the same comparison output operand D1 Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different days 1 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m on Monday through Friday and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 Sun Sat M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay WKCMP S1 92 53 D ON 126 1100 0 Q0 M8125 S1 126 specifies Monday through Saturday WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m on Monday through Friday WKCMP OFF S1 126 52 200 53 90 51 Same constant value to designate consecutive days WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m the next day S2 Constant values ON time gt OFF time S3 Sam
134. Word MOV W S1 D1 43690 D10 REP S1 bits D10 1 Bits to shift 2 1 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 43690 to data register D10 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit sta tus shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB CY MSB D10 LSB Before shift D10 43690 1 o 1 o 1 o i o 1 o 1 o 1 o i o 0 M8003 Shift to the left CY MSB D10 LSB After first shift 010 21844 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 M8003 CY MSB D10 LSB After second shift D10 43688 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word SFTL D S1 11 D10 1 Bits to shift 1 Before shift 010 011 2 863 311 530 Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and D11 is shifted to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB
135. X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Comparison output X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments When an output or internal relay is designated as the destination only 1 point is used regardless of the selected data type When repeat is designated for the destination outputs or internal relays as many as the repeat cycles are used Examples gt The comparison output is usually maintained while the input to the data comparison instruction is off If the comparison output is on
136. and shift registers Example Counting Catch Input Pulses This example demonstrates a program to count short pulses using the catch input function Input 10 is used as a reset input for adding counter C2 Input is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings Counter C2 counts short pulse inputs to input Note When a catch input is used as a pulse input to a counter the repeat cycle period of the pulse inputs must be more than 2 scan times Designate input 11 as a catch input Example Maintaining Catch Input When a catch input is received the input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan This example dem onstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan Input 10 is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings 4 10 1 MO When input IO is turned on internal relay MO is turned on and MO is maintained in the self holding circuit MO Catch input When NC input I1 is turned off the self holding circuit is unlatched and MO is turned off MO is used as an input condition for the subsequent program instructions MO Note To catch as short inputs as possible select 0 msec in the Input Filter Time Selection field 5 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High speed Counter This section describes the high speed counter function to count many pulse inputs within one scan Using the built in 16 bit high speed counte
137. bit data Third 16 32 bit data Emm P Nm e eee D1 N 1 or D1 2N 2 Nth 16 32 bit data Valid Operands Operand 1 Source 1 D1 Destination 1 Constant X Function Repeat x First operand number to move x x O lt x 2 xj x a4 x x O D L X X X X x First operand number to move to For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 through SN the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data type or D1 2N 2 double word or long data type is within the valid operand range If the derived destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the CPU module Valid Data Types W word X D double word X integer X L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link re
138. block and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw terminals on the LONWORKS interface module Ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are made by and available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of Phoenix Contact ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are listed below When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below Ferrule Order No Applicable Wire Size For 1 wire connection For 2 wire connection Pcs Pkt Cs mm AWG Phoenix Type Order No Phoenix Type Order No 0 25 24 Al 0 25 8 YE 32 00 852 100 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8 WH 3200014 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 3200933 100 0 75 18 Al 0 75 8 GY 3200519 AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 3200807 100 1 0 18 Al 1 8 RD 3200030 AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD 3200810 100 1 5 16 Al 1 5 8 BK 3200043 AI TWIN 2 x 1 5 8 BK 3200823 100 2 5 14 Al 2 5 8 BU 32 00522 100 For 1 wire Connection For 2 wire connection Ferrule res Ferrule eee Al 0 25 8 YE 4 5mm AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Al 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 7 0 mm A 8 0 mm Al 0 75 8 GY Selene lt gt Al 1 8 RD 6 0 mm B 8 0 mm AI TWIN 2 1 5 8 BK 80mm Al 1 5 8 BK a Al 2 5 8 BU Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 12 04 43 6 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x2 5 1205040 10 26 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MA
139. call 18 3 jump 18 1 return 18 3 ladder diagram 17 32 17 34 LCAL 18 3 length code 24 6 line connection 23 2 control signals RS232C 17 27 linear conversion 19 4 link register bit designation 6 19 registers for DeviceNet network communication 25 7 for LonWorks network communication 26 8 for remote I O system 24 2 LJMP 18 1 LOD and LODN instructions 7 2 logical device no 24 6 number 24 4 LON 26 1 LonMaker 26 2 26 12 LonTalk protocol 26 2 LonWorks 26 1 interface module 2 39 network system setup 26 3 LRET 18 3 M MAC ID 25 6 maintain outputs while CPU stopped M8011 6 9 maintaining catch input 5 8 maintenance mode 2 2 17 2 manipulated variable 20 13 mapping 24 5 master and slave station numbers 21 2 control instruction 7 25 MCS and MCR instructions 7 25 media access control identifier 25 6 memory backup error run stop selection 5 2 card 2 6 5 19 connector 2 2 eject button 2 2 map 26 14 message service 26 13 modem cable 1 23 1 initialization string selection 23 3 mode 23 1 status 23 3 data register 23 8 modifying application program 26 13 module ID selection 5 5 specifications 2 1 monitor operation 4 7 monitoring PLC status 22 2 mounting direction 3 4 on DIN rail 3 3 MOV 9 1 move 9 1 move not 9 5 MOVN 9 5 MUL 11 1 multiple usage of MCS instructions 7 26 INDEX multiplication 11 1 N data repeat set 9 10 set 9 9 NEG 12 5 negate 12 5 network configuration information 26 2 management 26 2 26 12
140. changed in the CPU module RAM M8124 turns on When a user program is transferred to the CPU from WindLDR or when the changed timer counter preset value is cleared M8124 turns off M8125 In operation Output M8125 remains on while the CPU is running dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Special Data Registers Special Data Register Allocation Numbers ER Description Updated See Page D8000 System Setup ID Quantity of Inputs When 1 initialized D8001 System Setup ID Quantity of Outputs When 1 initialized D8002 System Setup ID Quantity of Functional Modules When I O initialized D8003 System Setup ID Data Link Usage 1 Yes 0 No When I O initialized D8004 System Setup ID INTERBUS Master Usage 1 Yes 0 No When 1 0 initialized D8005 General Error Code When error occurred 27 3 D8006 User Program Execution Error Code When error occurred 274 D8007 User Program Execution Error Address When error occurred 27 6 D8008 Year Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8009 Month Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8010 Day Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8011 Day of Week Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8012 Hour Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8013 Minute Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8014 Second Current
141. check box HSC Operation Mode Two operation modes are available Select a required operation mode in the pull down list box Rotary Encoder Counts input pulses from a rotary encoder Dual pulse Reversible Counter Counts input pulses from a dual pulse reversible counter Enable HSC Reset Input Click the check box to enable the high speed counter reset input then a field appears to the right Enter an input or internal relay number to designate a reset input When the high speed counter reset input is turned on the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 high speed counter reset value and the high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value Enable HSC Gate Input Click the check box to enable the high speed counter gate input Enter an input or internal relay number to designate a gate input When a gate input is designated counting is enabled while the gate input is on and is disabled while the gate input is off When a gate input is not designated counting is always enabled Enable Comparison Output Click the check box to enable the high speed counter comparison output With this box checked the high speed current value is compared with the preset value The comparison output at terminal 5 comparison output is turned on when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output is turned off by turning on special internal relay M8010 comparison output reset Current Va
142. communication terminal and FG 1000V AC 1 minute 10 mA maximum Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 sweep cycles each in 3 axes total 80 minutes IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec 3 shocks each in 3 axes IEC1131 Altitude Operation 0 to 2000m Transportation 0 to 3000m Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C no freezing Operating Humidity 30 to 9096 RH no condensation Storage Temperature 25 to 75 C Storage Humidity 30 to 9096 RH no condensation Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Mounting Snap on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Weight approx 180g Communication Specifications Data Rate and Transmission Distance Data Rate Max Cable Distance Max Cable Distance Max Drop Line Max Total Drop for 10096 Thick Cable for 100 Thin Cable Length Line Length 500k baud 100m 100m 6m 39m 250k baud 250m 100m 6m 78m 125k baud 500m 100m 6m 156m Maximum Number of Stations in the Network 64 stations including a master Communication Data Length Transmit 0 to 8 bytes selectable in 1 byte increments Receive 0 to 8 bytes selectable in 1 byte increments Network Interface Connector In the module MSTB2 5 5 GF 5 08AU made by Phoenix Contact To the cable FRONT MSTB2 5 5 STF 5 08AU made by Phoenix Contact Communication Cable Special DeviceNet
143. connect the LONWORKS interface module to the network Do not run the network cable in parallel with or near power lines output lines and motor lines Keep the network cable away from noise sources e Power down the LONWORKS interface module before you start wiring Make sure wiring is correct before powering up the LONWORKS interface module One or two cables can be connected to one terminal of the network interface connec tor When connecting one cable use AWG24 to AWGI4 cables core cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm When connecting two cables to one terminal use the same cables of AWQG24 to AWGI6 0 2 to 1 5 mm Do not use cables of different diameters Strip the cable insulation as shown at right 7 mm e Tighten the mounting screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 3 to 0 5 N m e Tighten the terminal screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m e To prevent electrical shocks or communication error due to noises connect the FG terminal to a proper ground using grounding wire of UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWG18 grounding resistance 100 2 maximum Do not connect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block of the network interface connector can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of the cable Applicable ferrules for the terminal
144. dat 2 JBIT16 DAT 16 point outputs 8 bits x 2 BIT24 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 3 JBIT24 DAT 24 point outputs 8 bits x 3 BIT32_DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 4 BIT32_DAT 32 point outputs 8 bits x 4 BIT40_DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 5 BIT40_DAT 40 point outputs 8 bits x 5 BIT48_DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 6 JBITA8 DAT 48 point outputs 8 bits x 6 BIT56 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 7 JBIT56 DAT 56 point outputs 8 bits x 7 BIT64 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 8 64 point outputs 8 bits x 8 JBIT64 DAT Example When the transmit and receive bytes are set to 3 using WindLDR on the Open Bus page selected from Configure Func tion Area Settings only 24 point type declared network variables nv i124 and nv 024 and the network variables shown in the table below can be used Then link registers listed below can be used for transmission and receiving pas Tz Tr Teo 6 Te v T6 T2 T9 L 00 Leo ios 2624 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRKS Network Troubleshooting This section describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the LONWORKS interface module Probable Causes for Network Errors e A network cable is disconnected o
145. data link system After a data link system setup is changed M8007 must also be turned on to ensure correct communication Slave station Data link communication stop flag When a slave station does not receive communication data from the master station for 10 seconds or more in the data link system M8007 turns on When a slave station does not receive data in 10 seconds after initializing the data link system M8007 also turns on at the slave station When the slave station receives correct communication data M8007 turns off M8140 M8176 Slave Station Communication Completion Relay for Separate Refresh Mode Special internal relays M8140 through M8176 are used to indicate the completion of data refresh when the data link com munication is performed in the separate refresh mode When data link communication with a slave station is complete a special internal relay assigned for the slave station is turned on for one scan time at both the master and slave station Special Internal Relay Slave Station Number Special Internal Relay Slave Station Number M8140 Slave Station 1 M8160 Slave Station 17 M8141 Slave Station 2 M8161 Slave Station 18 M8142 Slave Station 3 M8162 Slave Station 19 M8143 Slave Station 4 M8163 Slave Station 20 M8144 Slave Station 5 M8164 Slave Station 21 M8145 Slave Station 6 M8165 Slave Station 22 M8146 Slave Station 7 M8166 Slave Station 23 M8147 Slave Station 8 M8167 Slave Station 24
146. dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 19 24 REMOTE I O SYSTEM OBF6hex BUS FAIL Meaning Bus error Data transmission was temporarily interrupted As a result the controller board reset all outputs and stopped data transmission The display shows the INTERBUS device number The error can be found in the preceding bus segment of a local bus in the preceding bus segment of a ST compact station in the bus segments of a preceding remote bus branch e g installation remote bus or in the bus segment of the indicated INTERBUS device Cause Voltage reset of an INTERBUS device in the specified area Cable break in the specified bus segment The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing bus is defective for a device in the specified area Add Error Info OBF8hex BUS FA INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device IL Multiple errors when acquiring I O data at the specified device It was not possible to exactly locate Meanin 9 The error occurs due to Cause installation errors defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system
147. disabled when 2550 msec is selected The receive timeout has an effect when using RXD1 RXD2 instructions Communication M ethod Start stop synchronization system half duplex Maximum Transmit Data 200 bytes Maximum Receive Data 200 bytes Connecting RS232C Equipment through RS232C Port 1 or 2 To connect equipment with an RS232C communication port to the RS232C port 1 or 2 on the OpenNet Controller use the user communication cable 1C FC2A KP1C One end of the user communication cable 1C is not provided with a connec tor and it can be terminated with a proper connector to plug in to communicate with the RS232C port See the figure on page 17 2 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 1 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication System Setup Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Attach a proper connector to the RS232C Equipment open end referring to the cable To RS232C Port 2 connector pinouts shown below RINI User Communication Cable 1C RS232C Port To RS232C Port 1 FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long Cable Connector Pinouts Description Request to Send Data Terminal Ready Twisted Yellow Transmit Data Blue Receive Data Green L Data Set Ready Brown 1 Signal Ground Gray Signal
148. discards the incoming data and waits for the next communication While a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed any incoming data is processed continuously according to the receive format Only RXD1 and one RXD2 instructions without a start delimiter can be executed at a time If start inputs to two or more RXDI RXD2 instructions without a start delimiter are turned on simultaneously one at the smallest address is executed and the corresponding completion output is turned on Example 1 When a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed Incoming Data When D100 is designated as the first data register 0 1 2 ERE 30h 31h 32 33 4 D100 p101 eh 5 character D100 n The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format 2 When RXD1 RXD2 instructions with start delimiters STX 02h and ENQ 05h are executed Incoming Data STX 1 2 3 02h 31h 32h 33h A B C 05h 41h 42h 43h A D100 x xh D101 h RXD Instruction 1 STX 02h gt When D100 is designated as the first data register D1004n h Compare D200 RXD Instruction 2 05 gt D201 h When D200 is designated as
149. double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Example XORW To convert optional output status among a series of 10 output points use the XORW instruction in combination with 10 internal relay points Q17 Q10 Q7 Q0 This program will invert the status of the shaded outputs at the left from on to off and those not shaded from off to on 16 points ___ gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Sixteen outputs QO through 17 are assigned to 16 M8120 internal relays MO through M17 Five internal relays M2 M4 M6 and M10 are set by initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 When input I1 is turned on the XORW instruction is XORW W S1 S2 Dl REP executed to invert the status of outputs Q0 Q2 Q4 Q
150. e If the power voltage turns on or off very slowly between 5 and 15V DC the OpenNet Controller may run and stop repeatedly between these voltages If failure or disorder of the control system damage or accidents may be caused provide a measure for prevention using a voltage monitor ing circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the OpenNet Controller This is required when exporting equipment containing OpenNet Controller to Europe Power Supply Voltage The allowable power voltage range for the OpenNet Controller is 19 to 30V DC Power failure detection voltage depends on the quantity of used input and output points Basically power failure is detected when the power voltage drops below 19V DC stopping operation to prevent malfunction A momentary power interruption for 10 msec or less is not recognized as a power failure at the rated voltage of 24V DC Inrush Current at Powerup When the OpenNet Controller is powered up an inrush current of 40A or less flows at the rated voltage of 24V DC Power Supply Wiring Use a stranded wire of UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWG18 for power supply wiring Make the power supply wiring as short as possible Run the power supply wiring as far away as possible from motor lines Grounding CPU Module To prevent electrical shocks or malfunctioning due to noise connect the FG terminal to the ground using a wire of UL1015 AWG22 or
151. each of three mutually perpendicular axes total 80 minutes each IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec duration 3 shocks per axis on three mutually perpen dicular axes IEC1131 Weight approx Power Supply Rated Power Voltage FC3A CP2K CP2S w o memory card connector 2909 FC3A CP2KM CP2SM w memory card connector 300g 24V DC Allowable Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC including ripple Dielectric Strength Between power terminal and FG Between 1 terminal and FG 500V AC 1 minute 1 500V AC 1 minute Maximum Input Current 1 5A at 24V DC Power Consumption 8 4W 24V CPU module 48 1 Os 32 DC input module 16 relay output module 18W 24V CPU module 128 1 Os 32 DC input module x 2 16 DC input mod ule 16 elay output module 3 11 8W 24V CPU module remote I O master module 48 1 Os 32 DC input mod ule 16 elay output module 21 4W 24V CPU module remote I O master module 128 1 Os 32 DC input module x 2 16 DC input module 16 relay output module x 3 Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 msec 24V DC Level PS2 EN61131 Insulation Resistance Between power terminal and FG Between 1 terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Inrush Current 40A maximum 24V DC Ground Grounding resistance 1000 maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG1
152. for at end Program MACRO to replace the default values in D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 stored in the first scan and execute the MACRO in a subsequent scan For essential commands which must be included in the initialization string see page 23 9 After the new values are stored do not change the values stored in D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection Turn on M8050 M8080 to send the new initialization string to the modem When the initialization string has been sent successfully internal relay M8060 M8090 is turned on If the initialization string fails internal relay M8070 M8100 is turned on When the subsequent commands of ATZ and dialing are also com pleted successfully M8061 M8091 and M8062 M8092 will also be turned on The default initialization string or the modified initialization string stored in D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 is also used for the initialization in the answer mode ATZ Resetting the Modem in Originate Mode The default initialization string specifies to be stored in the non volatile memory of the modem using the amp W command The initialization string is restored when the modem is powered up or when the ATZ command is issued The OpenNet Controller sends the ATZ command to the modem following the initialization string when M8050 M8080 is turned on The ATZ command can also be issued separately by turning 805 1 8081 on followed by the dial command to be exe cuted automaticall
153. for Module 1 3 Select transmit and receive data bytes for module position 1 through 7 where the LONWORKS interface module is mounted 4 Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller 26 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR The OpenNet interface module such as LONWORKS interface or DeviceNet slave module exchanges data between the open network and the link registers in the CPU module allocated to the OpenNet interface module depending on the slot where the OpenNet interface module is mounted To create a communication program for an OpenNet interface module first determine the slot number where the OpenNet interface module is mounted and make a program to write data to link registers allocated to transmit data and to read data from link registers allocated to receive data Example When a LonWorks interface module is mounted in the first slot of all functional modules e Transmit Data MOWW Sl DIR REP 10 65535 1104 4 e Receive Data MOVW 51 DIR REP 11 1100 2 65535 L104 through L107 When input IO is on constant 65535 FFFFh designated by source oper and S1 is moved to four link registers L104 through L107 designated by destination operand D1 All 64 bits 8 bytes in link registers L104 through L107 are turned on Since link registers L104 through L107 transmit data the data is tra
154. in the CPU module as illustrated below C0O01h 8 bits C000h 8 bits Registers in the b5 b2 LoNWoRks Interface Module Link Register L 00 in the CPU Module Example 2 Transmit Data in Link Register L 04 When transmit data is stored to link register L 04 in the CPU module the data is transferred to registers in the LONWORKS interface module as illustrated below Link Register L 04 in the CPU Module C009h 8 bits Registers in the b4 b3 LoNWoRks Interface Module 26 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Example 3 Error Data in Register CO12h When error data enters register CO12h in the LONWORKS interface module the data is transferred to a link register in the CPU module as illustrated below C012h 8 bits Register in the b5 b2 LonWorks Interface Module Link Register L 12 in the CPU Module Example 4 1 Counts in Link Register L 13 When 8 bytes output and 4 bytes input are selected as the transmit and receive data quantities in WindLDR Function Area Settings respectively these values are stored to link register L 13 in the CPU module and the data is transferred to register CO13h in the LONWORKS interface module as illustrated below Link Register L 13 in the CPU Module C013h 8 bits Transmit Byte Count 8
155. injury or damage to equipment nstall the OpenNet Controller according to instructions described in this user s manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller The OpenNet Controller is designed for installation in a cabinet Do not install the OpenNet Controller outside a cabinet Install the OpenNet Controller in environments described in this user s manual If the OpenNet Controller is used in places where the OpenNet Controller is subjected to high temperature high humidity condensation corrosive gases excessive vibrations and excessive shocks then electrical shocks fire hazard or malfunction will result The environment for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 The DC power applicable to the OpenNet Controller is PS2 type according to EN 61131 Prevent the OpenNet Controller from falling while moving or transporting the OpenNet Controller otherwise damage or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller will result Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the OpenNet Controller housing Put a cover on the Open Net Controller modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction Use a power supply of the rated value Use of a wrong power supply may cause fir
156. internal relays are turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D8211 D8311 see page 23 8 When a start internal relay is turned on a corresponding sequence of commands is executed once as described below M8055 M8085 Send initialization string and send the ATZ command M8056 M8086 Send the ATZ command Initialization String in Answer Mode When the modem mode is enabled as described on page 23 1 and the OpenNet Controller is started to run the default ini tialization string is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 at the END processing of the first scan To send the initialization string from the data registers to the modem turn M8055 M8085 on then the ATZ command is issued subsequently Default Initialization String ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 Q3 JO A0 amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W Q LF As described in the Originate Mode the initialization string can be modified to match your modem For details of modify ing the initialization string see page 23 4 When the initialization string has been sent successfully internal relay M8065 M8095 is turned on If the initialization string fails internal relay M8075 M8 105 is turned on When the subsequent ATZ command is also completed successfully M8066 M8096 will also be turned on ATZ Resetting the Modem in Answer Mode The default initialization string specifies to be stor
157. is reached again Feed Roller Tape Punch Wiring Diagram 24V o V Control Input GND GND Power Supply Tape Punch V 24V Phase A Output A Phase B Output B Phase Z Output Z HSC OUT 24V DC OpenNet Controller CPU Module Rotary Encoder FC3A CP2K Sink Output Type Note This example does not use the Phase Z signal Program Parameters Enable High speed Counter Yes HSC Operation Mode Rotary Encoder Enable HSC Reset Input No Enable HSC Gate Input No Enable Comparison Output Yes Current Value Automatic Reset Yes HSC Reset Value D8046 300 HSC Preset Value D8047 2 999 Timer Preset Value 0 5 sec needed for punching programmed in TIM instruction 5 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Programming WindLDR Dana Link Come Post pen Others a e 7 Enable Hligh spend oonim theanaton Maier Festas Eacan O T Enable ISE T Enable HAC Gate lepra E Enable Compartean Timing Chart When the high speed counter current value reaches 3000 the comparison output is turned on and the current value is reset to 300 Current Value Preset Value D8047 2999 Reset Value D8046 300 Comparison Output Status M8135 is lt SF 0 5 sec for punching Comparison Comparison o
158. is started and stopped by turning power on and off to the CPU module After connecting remote I O slave modules to the remote I O master module using INTERBUS cable power up the slave modules first followed by the CPU module at the remote I O master station The start delay after power up depends on the contents of the user program remote I O system setup and data link config uration A rough estimate of the start delay is the operation start time depending on the user program size plus approxi mately 4 seconds While the CPU module is powered up and program operation is stopped the remote I O network is in the run state but the data exchange between the CPU and the remote I O master module is stopped 24 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Function Area Setting for Remote 1 Master Station Normally the remote I O communication does not require the Function Area Settings The CPU module at the remote I O master station recognizes the remote I O slave stations automatically at power up and exchanges I O data through the link registers allocated to each slave station node You can also configure the remote I O system setup in the master module When the quantity of nodes is specified the CPU communicates with slave stations as many as specified in the Function Area Settings If the configuration in the Func tion Area Settings differs from the actual remote I O system setup the CPU does not start the rem
159. is turned on While the OpenNet Controller is not transmitting data RTS remains off Use this option for communication with a remote terminal in the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the data transmission from the OpenNet Controller Data transmission Transmitting ON RTS signal Ore D8207 D8307 2 While the OpenNet Controller is running RTS remains on whether the OpenNet Controller is trans mitting or receiving data While the OpenNet Controller is stopped RTS remains off Use this option to indicate the OpenNet Controller operating status OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped ON RTS signal Gee D8207 D8307 3 Whether the OpenNet Controller is running or stopped RTS remains off OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped ON RTS signal Bi D8207 D8307 4 or more Same as D8207 8307 0 17 30 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Sample Program User Communication TXD This example demonstrates a program to send data to a printer using the user communication TXD2 transmit instruction System Setup Mini DIN Connector Pinouts Shield Description Printer Ol e Communication Selector DIP Switch ejj Bx g 88 af 3 Set DIP switch to ON to select user com Fa X munication mode for RS232C port 2 To RS232C Port2 User Comm
160. larger than the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 the linear conversion maximum value will become the low alarm value dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 20 7 20 PID INSTRUCTION 1416 Output Manipulated Variable Upper Limit The value contained in the data register designated by S1 16 specifies the upper limit of the output manipulated variable S1 1 in two ways direct and proportional 51 16 Value 0 through 100 When 5 1 16 contains a value 0 through 100 the value directly determines the upper limit of the output manipulated vari able S1 1 If the manipulated variable D1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value S1 1 the upper limit value is outputted to the output manipulated variable 5 1 1 Set a required value of 0 through 100 for the output manipulated variable upper limit to the data register designated by 51 16 When S1 16 stores a value larger than 100 except 10001 through 10099 the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 is set to 100 The output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 must be larger than the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 To enable the manipulated variable upper limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 When 8222 is turned off the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 has no effect 1416 Value 10001 through 10099 disables Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit 1417 When S1 16 contains a value 10001 throu
161. many as required The slave station numbers do not have to be consecutive 6 Create user programs for the master and slave stations Different programs are used for the master and slave stations 7 Using WindLDR enter settings to Configure Function Area Settings Data Link for the master station Only when a baud rate of 38400 bps is used enter the setting to the Data Link page in WindLDR for the slave station For program ming WindLDR see page 21 7 8 Power up all OpenNet Controller CPU modules at the same time and download the user programs to the master and slave stations 9 Monitor the data registers used for data link at the master and slave stations Note To enable data link communication power up all OpenNet Controller modules at the same time or power up slave sta tions first If a slave station is powered up later than the master station the master station does not recognize the slave sta tion To make the master station recognize the slave station in this case turn on special internal relay M8007 data link communication initialize flag at the master station see page 21 6 or in WindLDR select Online gt Monitor followed by Online gt PLC Status and click the Reset COM x button lipentict PLC Salun 1 link aras communication cz iem When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device
162. number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as Q Special internal relays cannot be designated as Q When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Conversion BCD connect BCD decimal display units BIN To connect BIN hexadecimal display units Latch Phase and Data Phase Select the latch and data phases to match the phases of the display units in consideration of sink or source output of the OpenNet Controller output module Output Points The quantity of required output points is 4 plus the quantity of digits to display When displaying 4 digits with output QO designated as the first output number 8 consecutive output points must be reserved starting with QO through Q7 Display Processing Time Displaying numerical data requires the following time after the input to the DISP instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DISP instruction for the period of time shown below to process the display data Scan Time Display Processing Time 5 msec or more 3 scan times x Quantity of digits When the scan time is less than 5 msec the data cannot be displayed correctly When the scan time is too short to ensure normal display set a value of 6 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 16 1 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example DISP The following example demo
163. on Inrush Current 3A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Inductive Load L R 2 20 msec 27 6V DC 1 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Isolation Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Between output terminals Not isolated Connector on Mother Board Nylon Connector BS18P SHF 1AA x 2 J S T Mfg Fujitsu Connector FCN 365P040 AU Fujits u Connector Insertion Removal Durability 50 times minimum 500 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON 90 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 40 mA 24V DC Output Delay Turn ON time Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum 500 usec maximum Weight approx Output Internal Circuit 190g 2000 M O v y Y O Output lr Internal Circuit QOCOM ha COM terminals are connected together internally OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Output Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A R161 16 point Relay Output Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Terminal No Name ROSS
164. operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out 51 Day of week comparison data 0 through 127 Specify the days of week to turn on WKCMP ON or to turn off WKCMP OFF the output or internal relay desig nated by D1 Bit Position bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 ON OFF Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Designate the total of the ON OFF values as operand S1 to turn on or off the output or internal relay Example To turn on the output on Mondays through Fridays designate 62 as S1 because 2 4 8 16 32 62 52 Hour minute comparison data Specify the hours and minutes to turn on WKCMP ON or to turn off WKCMP OFF the output or internal relay designated by D1 See the table on the next page dec OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 15 1 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Hour Minute 00 through 23 00 through 59 Example To turn on the output or internal relay at 8 30 a m using the WKCMP ON instruction designate 830 as S2 To turn off the output or internal relay at 5 05 p m using the WKCMP OFF instruction designate 1705 as S2 53 Week table output control 0 through 2 0 Disable the week table When the current day and time reach the presets for 51 and 52 the designated output or internal relay is turned on WKCMP
165. operand number to store results X X D2 Destination 2 Sampling completion output X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out While input is on the AVRG instruction is executed in each scan When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by operand 53 is 1 through 65535 sampling data designated by operand S1 is processed in each scan When the designated sampling cycles have been completed the average value of the sampling data is set to operand designated by D1 The max imum value of the sampling data is set to the next operand D1 1 The minimum value of the sampling data is set to the next operand D1 2 The sampling completion output designated by operand D2 is turned on When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by operand 53 is 0 sampling is started when the input to the AVRG instruction is turned on and stopped when the sampling end input designated by operand S2 is turned on Then the aver age maximum and minimum values are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 When the sampling exceeds 65535 cycles the average maximum and minimum values at this point are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 and sampling con
166. point at 30V DC Maximum Load Current 5A per common line at 30V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on Inrush Current 5A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Maximum Lamp Load 10W Inductive Load L R 10 msec 30V DC 0 5 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Isolation i Between output terminals Not isolated Screw Terminal Block Nylon Connector Connector on Mother Board MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 B10PS VH x 2 Phoenix Contact J S T Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum All outputs ON 60 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Turn ON time 500 usec maximum Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum Weight approx 220g 190g Internal Current Draw Output Delay Output Internal Circuit O w 5 A a 1 O Output g wrt ra COM COM terminals are connected together internally 2 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Transistor Protect Source Output Module Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A T16P1 See Terminal Arrangement chart on page 2 24 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Vol
167. preset value to compare with the current value When a high speed counter reset input described later is turned on the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 and the high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value When comparison output reset special internal relay M8010 is turned on the comparison output is turned off While the high speed counter is counting up up down status special internal relay M8130 remains on While counting down M8130 remains off When the current value exceeds the preset value comparison ON status special internal relay M8131 turns on in the next scan When the current value is reset cleared to zero current value zero clear special internal relay M8132 turns on in the next scan When a current value overflow or underflow occurs while counting up or down special internal relay M8133 or M8134 turns on in the next scan respectively While the comparison output is on comparison output sta tus special internal relay M8135 remains on While the comparison output is off M8135 remains off See page 5 12 In addition two inputs can be designated as a high speed counter gate input and reset input to control the high speed counter operation The gate input and reset input are designated using the Function Area Settings When a gate input is designated counting is enabled while the gate input is on and is disabled while the gate input is off When a gate input is not designa
168. rung 1 input I2 M8123 is the 10 msec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 msec increments Program execution returns to rung 1 END OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero When input is on the value stored in the data register or link register designated H DJNZ 31 52 by S1 is checked When the value is 0 no jump takes place When the value is not 0 the value is decremented by one If the result is not 0 jump to address with label 0 through 255 designated by S2 If the decrement results in 0 no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction KKKKK KKK KK Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Decrement value X X S2 Source 2 Label number to jump to X X X X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out Since the DJNZ instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Example DJNZ and LABEL The following example demonstrates a program to store consecutive values 1000 through 1049 to data registers D100 through D149 respectively MOVW S1 1 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 104 D
169. sampling during auto tuning When using auto tuning set a required value of 1 through 10000 to specify an AT sampling period of 0 01 sec through 100 00 sec to the data register designated by 51 19 When 51 19 stores 0 the AT sampling period is set to 0 01 sec When 1 19 stores a value larger than 10000 the AT sampling period is set to 100 00 sec 20 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION Set the AT sampling period to a long value to make sure that the current process variable is smaller than or equal to the pre vious process variable during direct control action S2 0 is on or that the current process variable is larger than or equal to the previous process variable during reverse control action S2 0 is off 1420 AT Control Period The AT control period determines the duration of the ON OFF cycle of the control output S2 6 during auto tuning For operation of the control output see Control Period on page 20 7 When using auto tuning set a required value of 1 through 500 to specify an AT control period of 0 1 sec through 50 0 sec to the data register designated by S 1 20 When S1 20 stores 0 the AT control period is set to 0 1 sec When 5 1 20 stores a value larger than 500 the AT control period is set to 50 0 sec 1421 AT Set Point While auto tuning is executed the AT output manipulated variable S 1 22 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S141 until the process variable S1 0 reaches the AT s
170. smaller than the linear conversion minimum value 5 1 6 the linear conversion minimum value will become the high alarm value If the high alarm value is set to a value larger than the linear conversion maximum value 1 5 the lin ear conversion maximum value will become the high alarm value 1415 Low Alarm Value The low alarm value is the lower limit of the process variable S1 0 to generate an alarm When the process variable is lower than or equal to the low alarm value while the start input for the PID instruction is on the low alarm output control relay S2 5 is turned on When the process variable is higher than the low alarm value the low alarm output control relay S2 5 is turned off When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required low alarm value of 0 through 4000 to the data register designated by 51 15 When 1 15 stores a value larger than 4000 the low alarm value is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set a required low alarm value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designated by 51 15 The low alarm value must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S146 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value 5 1 5 If the low alarm value is set to a value smaller than the linear conversion minimum value 5 1 6 the linear conversion minimum value will become the low alarm value If the low alarm value is set to a value
171. special internal relay M8004 user program execution error To continue operation enter correct parameters and turn on the start input for the PID instruction Status Code Description Operation 1X AT in progress Arie Ram 2X AT completed 5X PID action in progress 6X PID set point 53 is reached Status code changes from 5X to 6X once the PID set point PID action is normal reached 100 The operation mode S1 3 is set to a value over 2 101 The linear conversion 51 4 is set to a value over 1 102 When the linear conversion is enabled 144 to 1 the linear conversion maximum value 145 and the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 are set to the same value 103 The output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 is set to a value smaller than the out put manipulated variable lower limit S 14 17 When the linear conversion is enabled 51 4 set to 1 the AT set point 51421 is set to a PID action or AT is 104 value larger than the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 or smaller than the linear con stopped because of version minimum value S1 6 incorrect parameter 105 When the linear conversion is disabled 14 set to 0 the AT set point S1 21 is settoa settings value larger than 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 the set point 53 is set to a value 106 larger than the linear conversion maximum value 51 5 or smaller than the linear conver sion minimum value S146
172. the Create Configuration 07 10hex service This error caused the bus system to be switched off The error location could not be detected This indicates that the error cause always occurs fora short time only The error rate can be very high Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE6hex BUS FA IL A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off However no error was detected Meaning when checking the current configuration This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error affected data cycles but no ID cycles The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE7hex BUS FA
173. the interface module on Call IDEC for assistance END Troubleshooting Diagram 5 The SER LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on The SER LED goes on when the Neuron Chip fails to recognize an application program no application program exists or an on chip failure occurs The LonWorks interface module is shipped with an application program installed in the memory so a problem in the LonWorks interface module is suspected Call IDEC for assistance Troubleshooting Diagram 6 26 28 The SER LED on the LonWorks interface module flashes at a frequency of 1 2 Hz The SER LED flashes when the network management is not configured Configure install the network management information See page 26 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR LED OPENNET The OpenNet Controller CPU module has an error indicator ERROR CONTROLLER When an error occurs in the OpenNet Controller CPU module the POWER ERROR LED is lit See the trouble shooting diagrams on page 27 10 E RUN ntroduction This chapter describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the OpenNet Controller The OpenNet Controller has self diagnostic functions to prevent the spread of troubles if any trouble should occur In case of any trouble follow the troubleshooting procedures to determine the c
174. the MOV move instruction sets 13 to data register D20 ROTR W S1 bits D20 2 Each time input I1 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 2 MSB D20 LSB Before rotation D20 13 01010 10 1010 10101101010 0 1111011 M8003 MSB 020 LSB After first rotation D20 16387 0111010 1010 10 0 0 10 0 0 1010111 0 M8003 MSB D20 LSB After second rotation D20 53248 11110111100 0 0 01000 0000 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D20 and E SOTU MS D21 is rotated to the right by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D20 D21 851 981 MSB 20 21 LSB C o o o o o o o o o o o o 1 1 o 1 o o o o o o 0 0 o o 0 0 M8 Y Rotate to the right _ 003 After rotation D20 D21 2 147 909 638 MSB D20 D21 LSB 1 0 0 0
175. the PID instruction first executes auto tuning according to the designated AT parameters such as AT sampling period AT control period AT set point and AT output manipulated variable and also the temperature data inputted to the analog input module The control output remains on to keep the heater on until the tem perature reaches the AT set point of 150 C Auto tuning determines PID parameters such as proportional gain integral time derivative time and control action When the temperature reaches 150 C PID action starts to control the temperature to 200 C using the derived PID param eters The heater is turned on and off according to the output manipulated variable calculated by the PID action When the heater temperature is higher than or equal to 250 C an alarm light is turned on by the high alarm output The analog input module data is also monitored to force off the heater power switch Operand Settings Operand Function Description eh 51 43 Operation mode AT auto tuning PID action D3 1 S144 Linear conversion Enable linear conversion D4 1 145 Linear conversion maximum value 500 C D5 5000 S146 Linear conversion minimum value 50 C D6 500 51 10 Integral start coefficient 100 D10 0 51 11 Input filter coefficient 70 D11 70 51 12 Sampling period 500 msec D12 50 51 13 Control period 1 sec D13 10 51 14 High alarm valu
176. the first data register D2004n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format Start delimiters are not stored to data registers 1746 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Designating Constant as End Delimiter An end delimiter can be programmed at other than the first byte in the receive format of a RXD instruction the OpenNet Controller will recognize the end of valid communication although RXD instructions without an end delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at other than the first byte of source operand S1 the one or multiple byte data serves as an end delimiter to end the processing of the received data The valid end delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box See page 17 3 When 8 data bits are selected end delimiters can be 00h through FFh When 7 data bits are selected as default end delimiters can be 00h through 7Fh Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data If a character in incoming data matches the end delimiter the RXD instruction ends receiving data at this point and starts subsequent receive processing as specified Even if a character matches the end delimiter at a position earlier than expected the RX
177. the range specified in the XYFS instruction Although the integer value can be 0 through 32767 any value out of the range specified in the XYFS results in a user program execution error turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED D1 Destination to store results The conversion results of the Y value is stored to the destination The integer value of the conversion results can be 32768 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X nu When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as S2 or D1 16 points integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as S2 or D1 1 point integer data type is used Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 19 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS CVYTX Convert Y to X CWTX 1 S7 D1 When input is on the Y value designated by operand S2 is converted H 1 oe Shee into corresponding X value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction Operand S1 selects a format from a maximum of 30 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the oper and designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number qM 0 to29 S2 Source 2 Y value X X X X X X X 32768 t
178. the relationship for Y to X conversion X Y 100 Therefore if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 60 not 180 Exactly the same two line segments might also be defined by the XYFS instruction except that the point 300 100 could be assigned first as YO and the point 100 0 could be defined next as Y 1 In this case this linear relationship would have priority In this case if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 180 not 60 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 5 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS AVRG Average When input is on sampling data designated by oper and S1 is processed according to sampling conditions designated by operands S2 and S3 H AVRG S1 S2 53 D1 D2 KKK KK KK KKK KKKKK KKKKK When sampling is complete average maximum and minimum values are stored to 3 consecutive operands starting with operand designated by D1 then sam pling completion output designated by operand D2 is turned on This instruction is effective for data processing of analog input values A maximum of 10 AVRG instructions can be programmed in a user program Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 51 Source 1 Sampling data X X X X X X 2 Source 2 Sampling end input X X X 3 Source 3 Sampling cycles X X X X X X X X 065535 D1 Destination 1 First
179. the valid range 9 51 0 through 127 2 Hour data 0 through 23 minute data 0 through 59 3 0 through 2 10 WKTBL has S1 through Sn out of range 11 DGRD data exceeds 65535 with BCD5 digits selected 12 CVXTY CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS 13 CVXTY CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS 14 Label in 1 MP LCAL DJ NZ is not found 15 TXD RXD is executed while the RS232C port 1 or 2 is not set to user communication mode 274 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagrams 27 TROUBLESHOOTING When one of the following problems is encountered see the trouble shooting diagrams on the following pages Problem Troubleshooting Diagram The POWER LED does not go on Diagram 1 The RUN LED does not go on Diagram 2 The ERROR LED is on Diagram 3 Input module does not operate normally Diagram 4 Output module does not operate normally Diagram 5 Communication between WindLDR on a computer and the OpenNet Controller is not possible Diagram 6 Cannot stop or reset operation Diagram 7 Data link communication is impossible Diagram 8 Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode Diagram 9 Data is not trans mitted correctly in the user communication mode Diagram 10 Data is not received at all in the user communication mode Diagram 11 Data is not received correctly in the user communication mode Diagram 12 The catch input function cannot receive sho
180. through 15 to designate input filter or catch input function Module number 1 is the input module mounted next to the CPU module Module number 2 is the second from the CPU module and so on Input Filter Time Selection Input filter time is selected in groups of eight inputs For example input numbers of module number 1 containing 32 inputs are divided into four groups IN FLTO 10 through I7 only IN FLTO has effect on catch inputs IN FLTI I10 through I17 IN FLT2 I20 through 127 IN FLT3 I30 through 137 Select an input filter value from 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 msec for each input group Default 4 msec Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection No effect on the input filter Input Filter Values and Input Operation Depending on the selected values the input filter has three response areas to receive or reject input signals Input reject area Input signals are ignored and not received one third of the selected filter value or less Input indefinite area Input signals may be received or ignored Input accept area Input signals are received the selected filter value or higher Example Rejecting Input Pulses of 2 6 msec at Inputs 0 through 7 To accept input pulses of 8 msec plus 1 scan time using normal inputs select 8 msec in the Input Filter Time Selection area for IN FLTO Then since 8 3 approximately equals 2 6 msec input pulses shorter than 2 6 msec are rejected 2 6 msec 8 msec 1 scan Inputs IO to 17 Reje
181. transmitted repeatedly but failed in all trials as many as the retry cycles specified in data register D8209 or D8309 Status Internal Relays for RS232C Port 1 and Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Status Description M8057 M8087 AT Command ON AT command is in execution start IR is on Execution OFF AT command is not in execution completion or failure IR is on Note Operational ON Command mode MEDI MSO State OFF On line mode Line ON Telephone line connected MOTA MaLo Connection OFF Telephone line disconnected Note While M8057 M8087 AT command execution is on the OpenNet Controller cannot send and receive communica tion 23 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Data Registers for Modem Mode When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8200 through D8399 are allocated to special functions At the first scan in the modem mode D8209 D8309 and D8210 D8310 store the default values then D8245 D8269 and D8345 D8369 store an initialization string depending on the value in D8201 D8301 respectively 23 MODEM MODE Port 1 Port 2 Stored Data Description Communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 is selected 0 other than 1 User communication mode RS232C Port 1 Modem mode D8200 D8300 Communication Enter 1 to D8200 D8300 to enable the modem mode after Mode Selection setting DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON When 1 is stored to D8200 D8300 the modem mode is initialized at the next END pro cessing Depending on the val
182. ttt at tet eR ace t t erc Me Uh CM tia Suo cod 11 11 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS ANDW AND Word oa GAIA A etc ARO LU Ac AR ee 12 1 ORWHOR Word 3 4 03 67 tb aee Finke dua dew C deb ob dct at AR Pb da add Ad 124 XORW Exclusive OR Word 1241 NEG Ne gate 4 45 ed ese a tud ioa dados rre lb quote CAR 12 5 BIT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS SFTE Shift Lett uo WARE S ae ee ee ean ae 13 1 SETR Shift Right cutie er oper eo eas 243 444 oe eae d 13 3 ROTE Rotate Lett cfr tetas wae bad le oes sure P DAT eee ee 13 5 Rotat Right eof elas aue anda rw Ra tks lOS 13 7 ROTLC Rotate Left with 13 9 ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry 13 11 BCDLS BCD Left Shift au ee a ha a add i Deos 13 13 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS HTOB Hexto BCD anm oo ace Ee TL we ee et 144 BTOH BOD to H6eX WA ete ORE ee dae OG dee OD 14 3 HTOA HexXto ASCII ewe WE ae Wh ee a RNS Re de OR dete 145 ATOH AS CIO HeX ati me RUE DoD a RE ee ea ed 14 7 BIOA BCD to ASCII eit EID o PE PROLES Pe CC 14 9 ATOBX ASCIltO BCD riui are m CIC a DE wn CHE DUE ECTS CR Pob e De 1441 DIDV Data Divide
183. ues to work Special internal relay M8037 INTERBUS master periph eral fault is also turned on Special data register D8182 INTERBUS master error code stores user error code OBBIh peripheral fault See page 24 16 APPENDIX Execution Times for Instructions Execution times for main instructions of the OpenNet Controller are listed below Operand and Maximum Execution Time usec Instruction m Condition w o Data Type Data W or Data Type Dor L LOD LODN 0 65 OUT OUTN 1 15 SET RST 1 AND ANDN OR ORN 0 5 AND LOD OR LOD 0 3 BPS 3 BRD 0 5 BPP 3 TML TIM TMH TMS 43 CNT CDP CUD 42 CC CC TCs TC2 22 DC DC2 Reset input ON 190 1 1N NEL Pulse input ON 252 2 8N Others 113 SOTU SOTD 50 JMP JEND MCS MCR 3 END See the next page M gt M 170 240 MOV MOVN DoD 70 74 210 260 lt gt lt gt lt gt gt 115 125 0 172 232 ADD 0 gt 98 110 M M gt D 172 232 SUB D DD 98 110 MxM gt D 172 238 MUL DxD gt D 98 140 205 280 DIV 05 136 192 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 APPENDIX Breakdown of END Processing Time The END processing time depends on the OpenNet Controller settings and system configuration The total of execution times for applicable conditions shown below is the actual END processing time
184. until the reset input is turned on e When the reset input changes from off to on the current value is reset When the reset input is on all pulse inputs are ignored e The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin e When power is off the counter s cur rent value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using Function Area Settings see page 5 3 Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR with out transferring the entire program to the CPU see page 7 12 e When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective imme diately 7 12 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter The dual pulse reversible counter CDP has up and down pulse inputs so that three inputs are required The circuit for a dual pulse reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input up pulse input down pulse input the CDP instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Preset Input Program List Instruction When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CDP instruction To program other instruct
185. used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 1 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOB Data Type Word SOTU HTOB W 51 D1 H soTU D10 D20 Data Type Double Word HTOB D S1 D1 12 D10 D20 D10 D10 D10 D11 D10 D11 D10 D11 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Binary 0 0000h 1234 04D2h 9999 270Fh Binary 0 0000h 0 0000h 188 00BCh 24910 614Eh 1525 05F5h 57599 EOFFh D20 D20 D20 D20 D21 D20 D21 D20 D21 BCD 0 0000h 4660 1234h 39321 9999h BCD 0 0000h 0 0000h 4660 1234h 22136 5678h 39321 9999h 39321 9999h 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOH BCD to Hex S1 5 DI BTOH LN S1 D1 LN e KKK KK When input is on the BCD data designated by S1 is converted into 16 or 32 bit binary data and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 BCD for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 BCD for the double word da
186. user 1410 Integral Start Coefficient The integral start coefficient is a parameter to determine the point in percent of the proportional term where to start the integral action Normally the data register designated by S1 10 integral start coefficient stores 0 to select an integral start coefficient of 100 and the integral start coefficient disable control relay S2 3 is turned off to enable integral start coefficient When the PID action is executed according to the PID parameters determined by auto tuning proper control is ensured with a moderate overshoot and no offset It is also possible to set a required value of 1 through 100 to start the integral action at 1 through 100 to the data regis ter designated by 51 10 When S1 10 stores 0 or a value larger than 100 except for 200 the integral start coefficient is set to 10096 When 200 is set to 1 10 the integral action is enabled only while the process variable S4 is within the proportional band When the process variable runs off the proportional band due to disturbance or changing of the set point the integral action is disabled so that adjustment of the output manipulated variable S1 1 is improved with little overshoot and undershoot To enable the integral start coefficient turn off the integral start coefficient disable control relay S2 3 When S243 is turned on the integral start coefficient is disabled and the integral term takes effect at the start of the PID ac
187. values ON time OFF time 3 Same constant value 0 D1 Same operand Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times extending over three days To keep the output on for more than two days use the gt interval compare greater than or equal to instruction in combination with the WKCMP ON OFF instructions This example turns on the output at 8 00 a m on Monday and turn it off at 7 00 p m on Friday Output Q0 WKCMP SI 52 53 DI M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay m8125 ON 6 800 0 MO S1 6 specifies Monday and Tuesday WKCMP 51 52 53 D1 WKCMP ON turns on at 8 00 a m on Monday OFF 6 0 0 MO WKCMP OFF turns off MO at 0 00 a m on Tuesday CHEW z 1 i D8011 contains the current day of week data S1 4 specifies Thursday S3 2 specifies Tuesday See page 15 7 remains WKCMP S1 52 53 01 on from Tuesday through Thursday ON 32 0 0 M2 S1 32 specifies Friday WKCMP 1 2 D1 US jou v M2 WKCMP ON turns on M2 at 0 00 a m on Friday WKCMP OFF turns off M2 at 19 00 on Friday MO While MO or M2 is on output QO is turned on M1 M2 15 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Setting Calendar Clock Using WindLDR Before using the week programmer instructions for the first time the internal calendar clock must be set using WindLDR or executing a user program to transfer correct calendar clock data to special data registers allocate
188. 0 Phoenix Ferrule Tool Used for crimping ferrules See page 3 10 Screwdriver Used for tightening screw terminals See page 3 10 Terminal Block Removal Tool Used for removing terminal blocks from 1 modules 92 20 Miniature Memory 2MB memory card to store a user program FC9Z M C02 WindLDR Programming and monitoring software for Windows PC CD FC9Y LP2 CDW AC Adapter When using the computer link cable 6C to connect a computer to the RS485 terminals on the OpenNet Controller CPU module an AC adapter is required to power the RS232C RS485 converter on the computer link cable 6C AC adapter out put capacity 5 to 6 5V DC 4W The RS232C RS485 converter FC2A MD1 for 1 N computer link communication is powered by 24V DC source or an AC adapter with 9V DC 350mA output capacity Polarity amp G e o 9 5 4 22 1 S Ap 8 Dimensions in mm The output plug of the AC adapter applicable to both the com puter link cable 6C and the RS232C RS485 converter is shown on the right OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 5 APPENDIX 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL INDEX 1 1 computer link 4 1 1 N computer link 22 1 100 msec clock M8122 6 11 10 msec clock M8123 6 11 1 sec clock M8121 6 10 reset M8001 6 9 A D converter 2 28 about INTERBUS 24 2 AC adapter 4 1 A 5 accessories A 5 ACKD 26 12 acknowledge code 24 10 service 26 12 ADD 11
189. 0 M8003 13 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry ROTRC bit When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 and a carry special ni B x ra ca pe E d internal relay M8003 are rotated to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out of the source operand is set to a carry M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB of the source operand Data Type Word bits to rotate 1 MSB LSB CY Before rotation 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 Rotate to the right M8003 MSB LSB CY After rotation 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB o 1 1 o o 1 i ij o iJ o i i o o 1 o 1 i o o i i i o i o i i o o i gt 0 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation E LSB CY 01011111010 11111110110 TE 1 0 1 110 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 11 1 0 0 1 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X AX X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays M
190. 0 D20 D30 D10 D11 100000 D20 D21 70000 D30 D31 1 D32 D33 30000 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses four word operands in the division operation of long data type so do not use data register D7997 through D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2481 ora larger number as destination operand D1 114 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the ADD SUB and MUL Instructions Source operands S1 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When repeat is desig nated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ADD addition SUB subtraction and MUL multiplication instructions the following examples are described using the ADD instruction Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 5
191. 0 M0577 M0610 M0617 M0650 M0657 M0690 M0697 M0730 M0737 M0770 M0777 M0810 M0817 M0850 M0857 M0890 M0897 M0930 M0937 M0020 M0027 M0060 M0067 M0100 M0107 M0140 M0147 M0180 M0187 M0220 M0227 M0260 M0267 M0300 M0307 M0340 M0347 M0380 M0387 M0420 M0427 M0460 M0467 M0500 M0507 M0540 M0547 M0580 M0587 M0620 M0627 M0660 M0667 M0700 M0707 M0740 M0747 M0780 M0787 M0820 M0827 M0860 M0867 M0900 M0907 M0940 M0947 M0030 M0037 M0070 M0077 M0110 M0117 M0150 M0157 M0190 M0197 M0230 M0237 M0270 M0277 M0310 M0317 M0350 M0357 M0390 M0397 M0430 M0437 M0470 M0477 M0510 M0517 M0550 M0557 M0590 M0597 M0630 M0637 M0670 M0677 M0710 M0717 M0750 M0757 M0790 M0797 M0830 M0837 M0870 M0877 M0910 M0917 M0950 M0957 2048 M0960 M0967 6 2 M0970 M0977 M0980 M0987 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL M0990 M0997 Operand Internal Relay M M1000 M1007 M1040 M1047 M1080 M1087 1120 1127 1160 1167 1200 1207 1240 1247 1280 1287 1320 1327 1360 1367 M1400 M1407 1440 1447 1480 1487 1520 1527 1560 1567 1600 1607 1640 1647 1680 1687 1720 1727 1760 1767 M1800 M1807 M1840 M1847 M1880 M1887 1920 1927 1960 1967 M2000 M2007 M2040 M2047 M2080 M2087 2120 2127 2160 2167 2200 2207 2240 2247 2280 2287 2320 2327 2360 2367 2400 2407 2440 2447 2480 2487 2520 2527 Allocation Numbers M1010 M1
192. 0 and D21 100 D11 200 J 012 300 gt D20 D21 600 XOR SOTU SUM W S1 S2 D1 When input is on all data of D10 through D12 are XORed XOR D10 D12 D20 and the result is stored to D20 1 011 2 D12 3 D20 0 1h 0000 0000 0000 0001 2h 0000 0000 0000 0010 3h 0000 0000 0000 0011 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 11 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS 11 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Boolean computations use the AND OR and exclusive OR statements as carried out by the ANDW ORW and XORW instructions in the word or double word data type respectively The NEG negate instruction is used to change the plus or minus sign of integer or long data ANDW AND Word H ANDW 51 52 D1 ORW OR Word 8 H ORW S1 R S1 S2 D1 XORW Exclusive OR Word H XORW 51 52 1 S1 R KKKKK KKKKK x xke xe x x S1 R KKKKK x xke xx x x S2 R 1 0 I 010 I 010 S2 R KKKKK KKKKK KKKKK 110 mm I 010 1 I 1 0 1 S2 R 1 0 I e 010 I 1 0 I A LA Lu S1 S
193. 0 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB Bits to rotate 1 5 D10 LSB Before rotation D10 40966 0 kK 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 5 D10 LSB After first rotation D10 16396 1 lt 0100 11100 M8003 5 D10 LSB After second rotation D10 32793 0 1101010 10101010 010 1011111101011 M8003 Data Type Double Word h Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and m sSOTU ROAD T 2i z D11 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB Bits to rotate 2 1 Before rotation D10 D11 2 684 788 742 CY MSB 010 011 15 0 41 ori o oTpo o o o o o o oj1 1 o 110 1 0 o o o o o o o o o 1 1 0 M8003 x Rotate to the left After rotation 010 011 1 074 610 188 CY MSB 10 011 LSB 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 110 0 10 0 00 0 0 00 1 1 0
194. 00 Rung 2 CC C30 C 500 00 Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Timing Chart Rung 1 E Prgm Adrs Instruction ON E 330391392 3 Pulse Input 14 gre ON Output Q1 gg A Output Q1 is turned on when counter C31 munia gt C51 current value reaches 350 and remains on un 9 ot until counter C31 is reset Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Timing Chart Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction N 100 101 150151152 Pulse Input 16 or ON 2C20 100 ore ON Output 02 off Output Q3 Su Output Q3 is on when counter C20 current value is between 100 and 149 CO Ui C j dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 15 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS TC and gt Timer Comparison The TC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for timer current values This instruction will constantly com pare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the timer value equals the given value the desired out put will be initiated The TC2 instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for timer current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the timer value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When a timer comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a timer comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the TC o
195. 003 x Rotate to the left After rotation 010 011 1 074 610 189 E ee D10 D11 l 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 135 CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Rotate Right ROTRE as bits When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is mE rotated to the right by quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Data Word bits to rotate 1 MSB LSB CY Before rotation 1101011111011 7 7 11110 11110 Rotate to the right __ gt M8003 MSB 51 15 After rotation 011 010 1111101111011 1111110101111 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation
196. 0040407 10410 10417 1042010427 Functional Module 5 1050040507 10510 10517 1052010527 Functional Module 6 1060040607 10610 10617 1062040627 Functional Module 7 1070040707 10710 10717 1072010727 Each functional module has eight channels of data areas One channel consists of one link register which can process word data or 16 bits Functional module data is addressed for bit operands in the following formula L0100 01 Bit No 0 through 15 Link Register No 100 through 727 1000 through 1317 Example 1 Load link register L300 bit 10 eer 012 Example 2 Set link register L304 bit 8 Hs ton OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 6 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes programming of the basic instructions available operands and sample programs Basic Instruction List Symbol Name Function Words AND And Series connection of NO contact 2 AND LOD And Load Series connection of circuit blocks 1 ANDN And Not Series connection of NC contact 2 BPP Bit Pop result of bit logical operation which was saved 1 5 Bit Push Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily 1 BRD Bit Read ae result of bit logical operation which was saved te
197. 01 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is set every 500 scans Istscan 2ndscan 500th scan l1stscan 2ndscan ON In operation Special IR M8125 off ON Sampling End Input 110 off Sampling Completion Output M100 ee Average Value D200 500 Maximum Value D201 530 Minimum Value D202 480 Values are set every 500 scans When the sampling end input turns on When sampling end input I10 turns on the average maximum and minimum values at this point are stored to data regis ters D200 D201 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is also set When sampling end input I10 turns off sampling resumes starting at the first scan 151stscan 152nd scan 153rd scan 421stscan lstscan Sampling Data D100 489 510 X so Je A sos ae i In operation Special IR M8125 gor ON Sampling End Input 110 M Sampling Completion Output M100 Bal Average Value D200 502 Maximum Value D201 513 Minimum Value D202 485 p Values are set when 110 is turned on der OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 7 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 19 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION Introduction P The PID instruction implements a PID proportional integral and derivative algorithm with built in auto tuning to deter mine PID parameters such as proportional gain integral time derivative time and control action automatically The PID instructi
198. 010 5 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the value of data register D10 designated by source operand M37 M30 M27 M20 S2 is 8 the source data is determined by adding the offset to C internal relay M20 designated by source operand S1 LV WW XX W W NOT gth from M20 If the current value of counter C5 designated by destination 3 operand D2 is 10 the destination is determined by adding the E 020 3 2 offset to output Q10 designated by destination operand D1 Ww WWW 10th from Q10 As a result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M30 is inverted and moved to output Q22 9 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS XCHG Exchange D1 o D2 XCHG EUREN D2 EUREN When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data in operands designated by D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other Valid Operands Operand Function D1 Destination 1 First operand number to exchange D L Constant Repeat X X X X xi x oO z gt lt x d x xj x KIO D2 Destination 2 First operand number to exchange For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO thro
199. 017 M1050 M1057 M1090 M1097 M1130 M1137 M1170 M1177 1210 1217 1250 1257 1290 1297 M1330 M1337 M1370 M1377 M1410 M1417 M1450 M1457 M1490 M1497 M1530 M1537 M1570 M1577 M1610 M1617 M1650 M1657 M1690 M1697 M1730 M1737 M1770 M1777 M1810 M1817 M1850 M1857 M1890 M1897 M1930 M1937 M1970 M1977 M2010 M2017 M2050 M2057 M2090 M2097 M2130 M2137 M2170 M2177 M2210 M2217 M2250 M2257 M2290 M2297 M2330 M2337 M2370 M2377 M2410 M2417 M2450 M2457 M2490 M2497 M2530 M2537 M1020 M1027 M1060 M1067 M1100 M1107 M1140 M1147 1180 1187 1220 1227 1260 1267 M1300 M1307 1340 1347 1380 1387 1420 1427 1460 1467 1500 1507 1540 1547 1580 1587 1620 1627 1660 1667 1700 1707 1740 1747 1780 1787 1820 1827 1860 1867 1900 1907 1940 1947 1980 1987 M2020 M2027 M2060 M2067 M2100 M2107 2140 2147 2180 2187 2220 2227 2260 2267 M2300 M2307 M2340 M2347 M2380 M2387 M2420 M2427 M2460 M2467 M2500 M2507 M2540 M2547 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M1030 M1037 1070 1077 1110 1117 1150 1157 1190 1197 1230 1237 1270 1277 1310 1317 1350 1357 1390 1397 1430 1437 1470 1477 1510 1517 1550 1557 1590 1597 1630 1637 1670 1677 1710 1717 1750 1757 1790 1797 1830 1837 1870 1877 1910 1917 1950 1957 1990 1997 M2030 M2037 M2070 M2077 2110 211
200. 1 N blocks of 16 bit data N blocks of 16 bit data S1 First 16 bit data D1 First 16 bit data S14 Second 16 bit data Block Move 1 1 Second 16 bit data S142 Third 16 bit data D1 2 Third 16 bit data Dan e Do O O O c l S1 N 1 Nth 16 bit data D1 N 1 Nth 16 bit data Valid Operands Operand Function QM R C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X N W N words Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or N W the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 N 1 and the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program exe cution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X c When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift registe
201. 1 M CR LF CR LF 4Dh 0Dh 0Ah ODh 0Ah SP SP SP C N T 2 2 20h 20h 20h 43h 4Eh 54h 32h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh 031 Conversion BCDASCII Digits 4 REP 01 CR 55 5 SP 70 35 105 uo ODh 0Ah 20h 20h 20h 44h 30h 33h 30h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh D21 minute data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 2 digits are sent D31 counter C2 data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 4 digits are sent D30 Conversion BCDASCII Digits 4 REP 01 D30 data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 4 digits are CR LF CR LF sent O0Dh 0Ah ODh OAh END 17 32 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Sample Program User Communication RXD This example demonstrates a program to receive data from a barcode reader with a RS232C port using the user communi cation RXD1 receive instruction System Setup Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 2 to ON to select user com munication mode for RS232C port 1 User Communication Cable 1C FC2AKP1C ToRS232CPortl 7 87 ft long To RS232C Port e 3 pean Attach a proper connector to the open end of the cable referring to the cable connector pinouts shown below Mini DIN Connector Pinouts D sub 25 pin Connector Pinouts Description Shield FG Frame Ground RTS Request to Send Black TXD1 Transmit Data DTR Data Terminal Ready Yellow RXD1 Receive Data TXD
202. 1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ADD W 51 S2 1 REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 gt 30 35 D11 D20 030 40 D12 D20 030 45 Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 R t 3 52 R t 0 D1 t 0 sor ADD D SIR S2 DI REP Repea Repea Repea D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 020 21 030 031 12 13 D20 D21 030 031 014 015 D20 D21 030 031 Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 ADD W S1 S2 DIR REP 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 5070 D10 D20 030 3 D10 10 D20 25 30 35 010 10 020 25 031 35 010 10 D20 25 gt 032 35 Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 t 0 52 R t 0 D1 t 3 sotu H ADD D S1 52 DIR REP R eae RM 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20D21 gt 030 031 10 011 D20 D21 gt 032 033 10 011 D20 D21 034 035 Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and 52 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 ADDW SIR SDR DI REP S1 Repeat
203. 1 adding counter CNT 7 11 addition 11 1 additional error information 24 10 address 24 4 adjusting clock using a user program 15 8 advanced instruction 8 1 ADD 11 1 ANDW 12 1 ATOB 14 11 ATOH 14 7 AVRG 19 6 BCDLS 13 13 BMOV 9 8 BTOA 14 9 BTOH 14 3 CDISP 16 5 CMP 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP lt gt 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CVXTY 19 2 CVYTX 19 3 datatypes 8 4 DEC 11 9 DGRD 16 3 DISP 16 1 DIV 11 1 DJNZ 18 5 DTCB 14 14 DTDV 14 13 HTOA 14 5 HTOB 14 1 IBMV 9 11 IBMVN 9 12 ICMP gt 10 4 IMOV 9 6 IMOVN 9 7 INC 11 9 input condition 8 3 LABEL 18 1 LCAL 18 3 list 8 1 LJMP 18 1 LRET 18 3 MOV 9 1 MOVN 9 5 MUL 11 1 NEG 12 5 NOP 8 6 NRS 9 10 NSET 9 9 ORW 12 1 PID 20 1 ROOT 11 10 ROTL 13 5 ROTLC 13 9 ROTR 13 7 ROTRC 13 11 RXD1 17 13 RXD2 17 13 SFTL 13 1 SFTR 13 3 structure 8 3 SUB 11 1 SUM 11 11 TXD1 17 4 TXD2 17 4 WKCMP OFF 15 1 WKCMP ON 15 1 WKTBL 15 2 XCHG 9 13 XORW 12 1 XYFS 19 1 all outputs OFF M8002 6 9 allocation numbers 6 1 analog input module 2 28 terminal arrangement 2 30 input output wiring 3 8 output module 2 31 terminal arrangement 2 33 AND and ANDN instructions 7 4 AND LOD instruction 7 5 AND word 12 1 ANDW 12 1 answer mode 23 2 23 7 application program 26 2 examples 26 18 modifying 26 13 character code table 17 26 ASCII toBCD 14 11 tohex 14 7 assembling modules 3 2 AT 20 9 OpenNet Controller User s Manual
204. 1 25V DC to the DeviceNet power line OpenNet Controller link registers cannot receive data from the network correctly Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module POW MNS 10 ON or ON or ON or OFF OFF OFF Cause Incorrect setting or communication error Action Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Set the transmit receive bytes in the Function Area Settings correctly Make sure that the link register numbers are correct See DeviceNet Master Module fails to recognize the slave module and Communication error occurs described above OpenNet Controller link registers cannot send out data to the network correctly Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module 25 12 Cause Incorrect setting or communication error OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Action Make sure that the settings for the master are correct See DeviceNet Master Module fails to recognize the slave module and Communication error occurs described above 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Introduction This chapter describes LONWORKS interface module FC3A SX5LS1 used with the OpenNet Controller to interface with the LONWORKS network and provides details on the LONWORKS system setup and the LONWORKS interface module specifications The OpenNet Controller can be linked to LONWORKS networks For communication through the LONWORKS network the LONWORKS interface module is availab
205. 1 D2 10 M101 D100 Even after M100 is reset RXD1 still waits for incoming data When data receive is complete M101 is turned on then M100 is set to execute RXD1 to receive the next incoming data RXD1 Data STX 020 B4 2 ETX 02h Data Register 03h End Delimiter D20 ASCII to BCD Conversion 4 digits Repeat 2 Start Delimiter 17 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS ntroduction The program branching instructions reduce execution time by making it possible to bypass portions of the program when ever certain conditions are not satisfied The basic program branching instructions are LABEL and LJMP which are used to tag an address and jump to the address which has been tagged Programming tools include either or options between numerous portions of a program and the ability to call one of several subroutines which return execution to where the normal program left off LABEL Label This is the label number from 0 to 255 used at the program address where the execution of pro PAREL gram instructions begins for a program branch An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged portion of the program from the main pro gram In this way scan time is minimized by not executing the program branch unless input condi tions are satisfied Note The same label number cannot be used more than once When a user program including duplicate label numbers is downloa
206. 1 is moved to data registers D2 0 0 D2 and D3 designated by destination operand D1 03 810 lt 810 Data move operation for the long data type is the same as for the double word data type Data Type Word D10 gt D2 H MOV W Dus ed When input I1 is on the data in data register D1 D10 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data register D2 designated by destination D2 930 Lr operand D1 D10 930 Data Type Double Word D10 D11 D2 D3 DO MOVID Dus o MEE When input I1 is on the data in data registers D1 D10 and D11 designated by source operand 51 D2 is moved to data registers D2 and D3 desig nated by destination operand D1 D3 Tu D10 Double word D11 Data Double word Data Move in Data Registers and Link Registers The data movement differs depending on the selected double word operand When a data register timer or counter is selected as a double word operand the upper word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The lower word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand On the contrary when a link register is selected as a double word operand the lower word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The upper word data is loaded from or stored to the s
207. 1 msec cycle time is determined by the number of I O points However it is also required to consider quantities such as the number of installed remote bus devices the 1024 A0 mseg duration of the check sequence the firmware runtime and the signal runtime on 2048 7 5 msec the transmission medium Remote I O slave stations have a specific data length depending on the I O type The data length register width is a factor to determine the cycle time SX5S Type No Slave Module Name Inputs Outputs bon SX5S SBN16S SBN16K 16 input module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBR08 8 relay output module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBT16K SBT16P 16 output module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBM 16K SBM16P Mixed I O module 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte The cycle time refresh time can be calculated according to K x 13 x 6 4 x m x toy tph rx ty whereby teycle INTERBUS cycle time 1 scan time K 1 15 n Number of user data bytes m Number of installed remote bus devices Bit duration 0 002 msec Firmware run time 1 msec Signal run time on the transmission medium 0 016 msec km r 1 tw 13 x 2 usec conversion time Note Data exchange between the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the remote 1 O master module is asynchronous with the INTERBUS cycle time Start and Stop of Remote 1 Communication The remote I O master module is powered by the CPU module The remote I O communication
208. 1 or 2 respectively Did you press the hod NO communication enable button for 4 sec YES Did you power down and up after chang ing the comm selector DIP switch NO Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once communication cable NO connected correctly YES Is the input to the NO RXD instruction on YES Is the POWER LED on NO YES Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct wiring Turn on the input to the RXD instruction See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagram 12 Correct the program to make sure that inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions do not go on simultaneously Data is not received correctly in the user communication mode NO 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Are communication parameters set correctly using WindLDR NO Set the communication parameters to match those of the remote termi nal using WindLDR see page 17 3 Is the data register designated as receive status used repeatedly Correct the program to replace the repeated data register with a differ ent data register NO Is a start delimiter NO specified in the RXD instruction YES Are inp
209. 1021010217 1022010227 Functional Module 3 1030040307 1031040317 1032010327 Functional Module 4 1040010407 1041010417 1042010427 Functional Module 5 1050040507 1051010517 1052010527 Functional Module 6 1060040607 1061010617 1062010627 Operand Allocation Numbers for Master Module Functional Module 7 Node Node 0 1070040707 1071010717 Allocation Numbers Input Data L1000 L1003 Output Data L1004 L1007 Node 1 1101011013 1101411017 Node 2 1102011023 1102411027 Node 3 1103011033 1103411037 Node 4 1104011043 1104411047 Node 5 1105011053 1105411057 Node 6 L1060 L1063 1106411067 Node 7 1107011073 1107411077 Node 8 1108011083 1108411087 Node 9 1109011093 1109411097 Node 10 1110041103 1110411107 Node 11 1111011113 11114 11117 Node 12 1112011123 1112411127 Node 13 11130411133 1113411137 Node 14 1114011143 11144 11147 Node 15 1115011153 11154 11157 Node 16 1116011163 1116411167 Node 17 1117011173 11174 11177 Node 18 1118011183 1118411187 Node 19 1119011193 1119411197 Node 20 1120011203 1120411207 Node 21 1121011213 1121411217 Node 22 1122011223 1122411227 Node 23 1123011233 1123411237 Node 24 1124011243
210. 11 M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault When the INTERBUS master detects a peripheral fault M8037 is turned on See page 24 11 M8040 INTERBUS Master Error When a critical error is found in the INTERBUS master hardware software M8040 or M8041 is turned on depending on error contents and the master module is initialized See page 24 11 M8041 INTERBUS Master Error When a critical error is found in the INTERBUS master hardware software M8040 or M8041 is turned on depending on error contents and the master module is initialized See page 24 11 gt 1 scan time M8120 Initialize Pulse M8120 When the CPU starts operation M8120 turns on for a period of one scan Start M8121 1 sec Clock 500 msec 500 msec While M8001 is off M8121 generates clock pulses in 1 sec incre ments with a duty ratio of 1 1 500 msec on and 500 msec off M8121 1 sec 6 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL M8122 100 msec Clock M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 msec increments whether M8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 50 msec on and 50 msec off M8123 10 msec Clock M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 msec increments whether M8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 5 msec on and 5 msec off M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed 50 msec M8122 6 100 msec ALLOCATION NUMBERS 50 msec 5 msec 5 msec 10 msec When timer or counter preset values are
211. 1124411247 Node 25 1125011253 1125411257 Node 26 1126011263 1126411267 Node 27 1127011273 1127411277 Node 28 1128011283 1128411287 Node 29 1129011293 1129411297 Node 30 L1300 L1303 1130411307 64 Node 31 131041313 1131411317 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1072010727 Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Master Station 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Allocation Number Slave Station Number Transmit Data Receive Data Data Link to Slave Station from Slave Station Communication Error Slave Station 1 D7000 D7009 D7010 D7019 D8400 Slave Station 2 D7020 D7029 D7030 D7039 D8401 Slave Station 3 D7040 D7049 D7050 D7059 D8402 Slave Station 4 D7060 D7069 D7070 D7079 D8403 Slave Station 5 D7080 D7089 D7090 D7099 D8404 Slave Station 6 D7100 D7109 D7110 D7119 D8405 Slave Station 7 D7120 D7129 D7130 D7139 D8406 Slave Station 8 D7140 D7149 D7150 D7159 D8407 Slave Station 9 D7160 D7169 D7170 D7179 D8408 Slave Station 10 D7180 D7189 D7190 D7199 D8409 Slave Station 11 D7200 D7209 D7210 D7219 D8410 Slave Station 12 D7220 D7229 D7230 D7239 D8411 Slave Station 13 D7240 D7249 D7250 D7259 D8412 Slave Station 14 D7260 D7269 D7270 D7279 D8413 Slave Station 15 D7280 D7289 D7290 D7299 D8414 Slave Station 16 D7300 D7309 D7310 D7319 D8415 Slave Station 17 D7320 D7329 D7330 D7339 D8416 Slave
212. 20 D21 D34 D35 Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 H SIR S2R DIR REP Piceno 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 gt p30 35 D11 15 D21 35 gt 031 50 D12 20 D22 45 gt p32 65 Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD D SIR 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 t D22 D23 032 033 D14 D15 t D24 D25 034 035 Note Special internal relay 8003 carry borrow is turned on when a carry or borrow occurs in the last repeat operation When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user program execution error results are not set to any destination 11 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the DIV Instruction Since the DIV division ins
213. 20 through 127 130 through 137 6 Input Module 2 140 through 147 150 through 157 160 through 167 170 through 177 Input and output modules may be grouped together for easy identification of I O numbers The I O numbers are allocated automatically starting with 10 and QO at the module nearest to the CPU module When the I O modules are relocated the I O numbers are renumbered automatically The location of functional modules does not affect the I O operand numbers Functional Module Operands Functional modules are analog input analog output DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules A maximum of 7 functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module in a system setup of 15 modules at the maximum Operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 The location of digital I O modules between CPU and functional modules does not affect the operand numbers for the functional modules Functional Module Operand Numbers Allocation Number Description L 00 through L 07 Data area Data used in each functional module such as analog data L 10 through L 17 Status area Status of each functional module L 20 through L 27 Reserved area Reserved for system program Do not access this area 6 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER s MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Example Slot No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Func tional Module
214. 3 integral start coefficient disable Enable While input 10 is on the PID instruction is executed 0 026 control registers MO M7 control relays D100 set point L100 process variable D102 manipulated variable When internal relay M6 control output is turned on out put QO heater power switch is turned on When internal relay M4 high alarm output is turned on output Q1 high alarm light is turned on 20 PID INSTRUCTION Ladder Program continued While monitor input is on the temperature is monitored When the temperature is higher than or equal to 250 C M10 is turned on 4000 x 250 1300 769 23 When M10 is on while monitor input I1 is on QO heater power switch is forced off and Q1 high alarm light is forced on 51 L100 52 769 1 M10 CMP gt W Notes for Using the PID Instruction e Since the PID instruction requires continuous operation keep on the start input for the PID instruction e The high alarm output S2 4 and the low alarm output S2 5 work while the start input for the PID instruction is on These alarm outputs however do not work when a PID instruction execution error occurs S1 2 stores 100 through 107 due to data error in control data registers S1 0 through 81426 or while the start input for the PID instruction is off Pro vide a program to monitor the process variable S4 separately e When a PID execution error occurs S1 2 stores 100 th
215. 3 1118441187 Node 3 L1030 L1033 1103441037 Node 19 1119041193 11194411197 Node 4 1104011043 1104441047 Node 20 1120041203 11204411207 Node 5 1105041053 11054411057 Node 21 1121041213 11214411217 Node 6 11060 11063 1106441067 Node 22 11220411223 11224411227 Node 7 11070 11073 1107441077 Node 23 1123041233 11234411237 Node 8 L1080 L1083 1108441087 Node 24 1124041243 11244411247 Node 9 L1090 L1093 1109441097 Node 25 L125011253 L125411257 Node 10 L1100 L1103 11104411107 Node 26 1126041263 11264411267 Node 11 L1110 L1113 L111411117 Node 27 1127041273 11274411277 Node 12 L1120 L1123 L112411127 Node 28 L128011283 L128411287 Node 13 L1130 L1133 L113411137 Node 29 L129011293 L129411297 Node 14 L1140 L1143 L114411147 Node 30 1130041303 1130441307 Node 15 L1150 L1153 L115411157 Node 31 1131041313 1131441317 About INTERBUS INTERBUS is a network originally developed for controlling sensors and actuators by Phoenix Contact Germany and the specifications were opened in 1987 Today many major automobile manufacturers in the world use the INTERBUS network The INTERBUS system is a data ring with a central master slave access method It has the structure of a spatially dis tributed shift register Every module forms with its registers a part of this shift register ring through which the data is shifted serially from the host controller board The use of the ring topology in this way offers the possibility of sending and receiving data simultaneo
216. 30 08344 Port 2 AT Command String When sending AT command 23 3 D8345 D8369 Port 2 Initialization String When sending init string 233 08370 08399 Port 2 Telephone Number When dialing 233 Special Data Registers for Data Link Master Slave Stations Ad Description Updated See Page D8400 Slave Station Communication Error at Slave Station When etoroccurred 214 D8401 Slave Station 2 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8402 Slave Station 3 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8403 Slave Station 4 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8404 Slave Station 5 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8405 Slave Station 6 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8406 Slave Station 7 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8407 Slave Station 8 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8408 Slave Station 9 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8409 Slave Station 10 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8410 Slave Station 11 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8411 Slave Station 12 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8412 Slave Station 13 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8413 Slave Station 14 Communication Error at Master Station When error occ
217. 32C port 2 If two or more start internal relays are turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D8211 D8311 see page 23 8 When a start internal relay is turned on a corresponding sequence of commands is executed once as described below When the start command fails the same command is repeated as many as the retry cycles specified by D8209 D8309 M8050 M8080 Send an initialization string send the ATZ command and dial the telephone number M8051 M8081 Send the ATZ command and dial the telephone number M8052 M8082 Dial the telephone number Initialization String in Originate Mode When the modem mode is enabled as described on page 23 1 and the OpenNet Controller is started to run an initialization string is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 at the END processing of the first scan depending on the value stored in data register D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection To send the initialization string from the OpenNet Controller to the modem turn M8050 M8080 on then the ATZ command is issued and the telephone number is dialed successively When the D8200 D8300 value is changed to 1 to enable modem mode or when the D8201 D8301 value is changed an ini tialization string is stored to D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 depending on the value stored in D8201 D8301 Modem Initialization String
218. 4 Since the Transmit instruction dialog box reappears repeat the above procedure In the Data Type Selection dialog box click Variable DR and click OK Next in the Variable Data Register dialog box type D10 in the DR No box and click BCD to ASCII to select the BCD to ASCII conversion Enter 4 in the Digits box 4 digits and 2 in the REP box 2 repeat cycles When finished click OK 5 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click BCC and click OK Next in the BCC dialog box enter 1 in the Cal culation Start Position box click ADD for the Calculate Type click BIN to ASCII for the Conversion Type and click 2 for the Digits When finished click OK dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 11 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 6 Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Constant Hexadecimal and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX 03h When finished click OK ima Hansina V Content T o ee 7 Vesiablie IT Livan cance ETE 7 In the Transmit instruction dialog box type M10 in the destination D1 box and type D100 in the destination D2 box When finished click OK Programming of the TXD1 instruction is complete and the transmit data is specified as follows BCC calculation range Constant D10 D11 BCC Constant hex hex 17 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER US
219. 4 gt DI Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through 39h The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 ASCII data to convert XX S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 1 5 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h through 39h Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the S1 or S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the ATOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X E When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source o
220. 44h 45h 1 BCC calculation formula XOR 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC calculation formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh 4Fh Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC 17 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Conversion Type The BCC calculation result can be converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 004 1h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data 1 0041h Binary to ASCII conversion 34h 31h 2 digits 2 No conversion ASCII data NUL A DO No conversion YS 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from or 2 Example ASCII data an 1 1 BCC digits 22 4p iain e 4 1 2 digits 1 Transmit Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q597 or an internal relay MO through M2557 as an operand for the transmit completion output Special internal relays cannot be used When the start input for a TXD instruction is turned on preparation for transmission is initiated followed by data trans mission When a sequence of all transmission operation is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Transmit Status Designate a data register DO through D7998 as an operand to store the tran
221. 5 Decimal 6 Decimal 7 Decimal 8 Decimal 9 Decimal A Decimal B Decimal Decimal D Decimal E Decimal F Decimal 17 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL RS232C Line Control Signals While the OpenNet Controller is in the user communication mode special data registers can be used to enable or disable DSR DTR and RTS control signal options for the RS232C port 1 and port 2 Special Data Registers for RS232C Line Control Signals 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS To use the control signals on the RS232C port 1 or port 2 in the user communication mode enter 0 to D8200 RS232C port 1 communication mode selection or to D8300 RS232C port 2 communication mode selection respectively Special data registers D8204 through D8207 and D8304 through D8307 are allocated for RS232C line control signals RS232C Port DR No Data Register Function DR Value Updated R W D8204 Control signal status Every scan R Port D8205 DSR input control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8206 DTR output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8207 RTS output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8304 Control signal status Every scan R can D8305 DSR input control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8306
222. 5 terminals A B and G on every OpenNet Controller CPU module using a shielded twisted pair cable as shown below The total length of the cable for the data link system can be extended up to 200 meters 656 feet Master Station Slave Station 1 Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON at all master and slave stations to select the data link mode for the RS485 port OZ Shield Shield A DIP Switch Cable Cable AO NU 2 uisu C C0 C0 C2 C0 C2 CD NTC 2 sees SA C C C5 C0 C2 C2 ivi Shield Slave Station 31 Slave Station 2 02 HG2A Series Interface Shield DIP Switch Cable NG 2 sess 388 C0 C5 C2 C20 C2 CD o a o v Shielded twisted pair cable 200 meters 656 feet maximum Core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch The communication selector DIP switch is used to select the communication protocol for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also to select the device number for the CPU module used in a data link or computer link communication system When using the OpenNet Controllers in a data link system set communication selector DIP switches 1 and 4 through 8 Selecting Data Link Communication M ode To select the data link communication mode set communication selector DIP switch 1
223. 51 12 When S1 12 stores 0 the sampling period is set to 0 01 sec When S1 12 stores a value larger than 10000 the sampling period is set to 100 00 sec When a sampling period is set to a value smaller than the scan time the PID instruction is executed every scan Example Sampling period 40 msec Scan time 80 msec Sampling period lt Scan time 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec a lt PID PID PID PID PID PID Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed 206 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 5 5 20 PID INSTRUCTION Example Sampling period 80 msec Scan time 60 msec Sampling period gt Scan time 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec PID PID Not PID PID PID PID Not PID PID Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed 60 msec 120 msec 100 msec 80 msec 60 msec 120 msec 100 msec 40 msec 20 msec 0 msec 40 msec 20 msec 1413 Control Period The control period determines the duration of the ON OFF cycle of the control output S2 6 that is turned on and off according to the output manipulated variable S1 1 calculated by the PID action or derived from the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 Set a required value of 1 through 500 to specify a control period of 0 1 sec through 50 0 sec to the data register designated by 51 13 When S1 13 stores 0 the control period is set to 0 1 sec When 51 13 is set to
224. 525 DI When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are ANDed bit by bit The result is set to desti nation operand D1 S1 52 DI When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are ORed bit by bit The result is set to destina tion operand D1 1 S82 D1 When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are exclusive ORed bit by bit The result is set to destination operand D1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 1 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for computation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data for computation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the Boolean computation instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D
225. 6 12 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the ANDW ORW and XORW Instructions Source operands S1 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When repeat is desig nated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ANDW AND word ORW OR word and XORW exclusive OR word instructions the following examples are described using the ANDW instruction Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 H Hsen ANDWW SIR S2 DI REP S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 D30 D11 D20 gt 030 D12 D20 030 Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D SIR S2 D1 REP D10 D20 030 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 s D20 D21 030 031 D14 D15 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1
226. 7 3210 55 6 6 A 5B 5 5 n 36 O n 370 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 CN1 CN2 lt 18 18 t 17 17 T 16 16 15 15 14 14 lt 13 13 lt 12 12 T 11 11 T 10 10 T 9 9 T 8 8 7 7 lt 6 6 p 5 5 4 4 3 3 pot 2 2 L 1 1 1 T TE Sink Source Input Input Wiring Wiring dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 13 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N32B5 32 point DC Input Module Fujitsu Connector Type Applicable Connector FCN 367J040 AU Fujitsu Terminal No Name Terminal No 000 Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are the front view of the male connector on the input module e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name a Ss B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 18 B17 17 4 B16 16 x B15 15 B14 14
227. 7 2150 2157 2190 2197 2230 2237 2270 2277 2310 2317 2350 2357 2390 2397 M2430 M2437 M2470 M2477 M2510 M2517 M2550 M2557 Total Points 2048 Special Internal Relay M M8120 M8237 for read only M8000 M8007 M8040 M8047 M8080 M8087 M8010 M8017 M8050 M8057 M8090 M8097 M8020 M8027 M8060 M8067 M8100 M8107 M8030 M8037 M8070 M8077 8110 8117 8120 8127 8160 8167 8200 8207 8130 8137 8170 8177 8210 8217 M8140 M8147 M8180 M8187 M8220 M8227 M8150 M8157 M8190 M8197 M8230 M8237 192 Shift Register R R0000 R0255 256 Timer T T0000 T0255 256 Counter C C0000 C0255 256 Data Register D D0000 D7999 8000 Special Data Register D D8000 D8999 1000 Link Register L 010040127 10200 10227 L0300 0327 1040040427 050040527 10600 10627 1070040727 Slave 168 1100041317 For details about allocation numbers of link registers see page 6 4 For details about allocation numbers used for data link communication see page 6 5 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Master 256 6 3 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers for Functional Modules Functional Module Functional Module 1 Allocation Numbers Data Area 1010040107 Status Area Read Only 1011010117 Reserved Area Access Prohibited 1012010127 Functional Module 2 10200 40207
228. 7 L1030 L1034 Node 3 L1031 Depends on the module L1035 Depends on the module 3 0 L1032 specifications L1036 specifications L1033 L1037 Node 4 L1040 L1044 7 0 L1041 L1045 Not used NEM L1042 NOCHSSA L1046 Not used NO data 11043 11047 Not used L1050 L1054 Node 5 L1051 Depends on the module L1055 Depends on the module 5 0 L1052 specifications L1056 specifications L1053 L1057 L1060 L1064 Node 6 L1061 Depends on the module L1065 Depends on the module 5 1 L1062 specifications L1066 specifications L1063 L1067 7 11070 7 0 11074 7 0 11071 Not used L1075 Not used E 1072 Not used Notused 1076 Not used Notused L1073 Not used L1077 Not used Node 8 L1080 L1084 7 0 15 8 7 0 L1081 Notu s d L1085 Not used Not used 16 out ut modul L1082 L1086 Not used Not used p L1083 L1087 Not used Not used ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 245 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Data Registers for Remote 1 O Node Information Four data registers are allocated to each node to store information of the slave station The remote I O node information is stored to special data registers D8050 through D8177 while the remote I O communication is in normal operation The remote I O node information is not stored when special data register D8178 INTERBUS master system error information stores 6 7 or 8 to indicate a data size error ID code error or maximum node quantity over respectively See page 24 10 Logical Dev
229. 8 Power Supply Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Effect of Improper Power Supply Connection 24 Reverse polarity Improper voltage or frequency Improper lead connection No operation no damage Permanent damage may be caused Permanent damage may be caused OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Function Specifications CPU Module Specifications Program Capacity 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16K words 8K steps Quantity of Slots 7 slots maximum without using expansion power supply module 15 slots maximum when using expansion power supply module 1 0 a Maximum Digital O Points 224 points without using expansion power supply module 480 points when using expansion power supply module 56 points when using 7 modules of 8 point I O e 112 points when using 7 modules of 16 point I O 224 points when using 7 modules of 32 point I O 480 points when using 15 modules of 32 point I O User Program M emory Flash ROM RAM memory card Backup Duration Approx 30 days typical at 25 C after backup battery fully charged Backup Data Internal relay shift register counter data register RAM Battery Lithium secondary battery Backup Charging Speed Approx 2 hours from 0 to 90 of full charge Battery Life Approx 10 years using in cycles of 9 hour charging 15 hour discharging Replaceability Impossible Control System Stored program syste
230. 8407 Slave station 8 communication error D8423 Slave station 24 communication error D8408 Slave station 9 communication error D8424 Slave station 25 communication error D8409 Slave station 10 communication error D8425 Slave station 26 communication error D8410 Slave station 11 communication error D8426 Slave station 27 communication error D8411 Slave station 12 communication error D8427 Slave station 28 communication error D8412 Slave station 13 communication error D8428 Slave station 29 communication error D8413 Slave station 14 communication error D8429 Slave station 30 communication error D8414 Slave station 15 communication error D8430 Slave station 31 communication error D8415 Slave station 16 communication error If any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave stations can be used as ordinary data registers Slave Station Special Data Register Data Link Communication Error Data D8400 Slave station communication error Note Slave station data registers D8401 through D8430 can be used as ordinary data registers Data Link Communication Error Code The data link error code is stored in the special data register allocated to indicate a communication error in the data link system When this error occurs special internal relay M8005 data link communication error is also turned on at both master and slave stations The detailed information of general errors can be viewed using Wi
231. 9 Receive data from slave 19 Slave 4 D7060 D7069 Transmit data to slave 4 Slave 20 D7380 D7389 Transmit data to slave 20 D7070 D7079 Receive data from slave 4 D7390 D7399 Receive data from slave 20 Slave 5 D7080 D7089 Transmit data to slave 5 Slave 21 D7400 D7409 Transmit data to slave 21 D7090 D7099 Receive data from slave 5 D7410 D7419 Receive data from slave 21 Slave 6 D7100 D7109 Transmit data to slave 6 Slave 22 D7420 D7429 Transmit data to slave 22 D7110 D7119 Receive data from slave 6 D7430 D7439 Receive data from slave 22 Slave 7 D7120 D7129 Transmit data to slave 7 Slave 23 D7440 D7449 Transmit data to slave 23 D7130 D7139 Receive data from slave 7 D7450 D7459 Receive data from slave 23 Slave 8 D7140 D7149 Transmit data to slave 8 Slave 24 D7460 D7469 Transmit data to slave 24 D7150 D7159 Receive data from slave 8 D7470 D7479 Receive data from slave 24 Slave 9 D7160 D7169 Transmit data to slave 9 Slave 25 D7480 D7489 Transmit data to slave 25 D7170 D7179 Receive data from slave 9 D7490 D7499 Receive data from slave 25 Sjave To D7180 D7189 Transmit data to slave 10 Slave 26 D7500 D7509 Transmit data to slave 26 D7190 D7199 Receive data from slave 10 D7510 D7519 Receive data from slave 26 Slave 11 D7200 D7209 Transmit data to slave 11 Slave 27 D7520 D7529 Transmit data to slave 27 D7210 D7219 Receive data from slave 11 D7530 D7539 Receive data from slave 27 Slave 12 D7220 D7229 Transmi
232. 9999 for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 for the double word data type Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 270Fh for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 5 5 EOFFh for the double word data type Make sure that the source designated by S1 is within the valid value range If the source data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the HTOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are
233. BNL6 mounting clips on both sides of the OpenNet Controller modules to prevent moving sideways 35 mm wide DIN Rail Clamp Removing from DIN Rail 1 Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot in the clamp 2 Pull out the clamps from the modules 35mm wide DIN Rail 3 Turn the OpenNet Controller modules bottom out i AT Clamp 95 e dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 33 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Installation in Control Panel The OpenNet Controller modules are designed for installation in equipment Do not install the OpenNet Controller mod ules outside equipment The environment for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to 60664 1 When installing the OpenNet Controller modules in a control panel take the convenience of operation and maintenance and resistance against environments into consideration Front Panel C LLLLLLLLL LLL ul ul uL a I I E au 20 mm minimum gt 40 minimum 80 mm minimum H n a a a a n a a a a n a a D ae
234. BUS device with the ID code of a local bus device was found at the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Add Error Info Error location Segment Position Meaning 0C98hex to 0C9Bhex RB FAIL or OD98hex to OD9Bhex LB FAIL The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTER BUS device has an invalid ID code Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position Meaning OD9Chex to OD9Fhex LB FAIL The local bus connected directly to the controller board consists of more devices than have been Meaning entered in the active configuration Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position OCCOhex to OCC3hex RB FAIL or ODCOhex to ODC3hex LB FAIL Meaning Multiple errors at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device INTERBUS cable connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 without any further INTERBUS device A local remote bus cable is defective that belongs to the local remote bus of the specified INTER Cause BUS device Defective INTERBUS device connected to the local remote bus of the specified INTERBUS device Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage UL for the module electronics made available by the BK module Failure of the supply voltage U for the BK module Remedy Check this local remote bus Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCCA4hex to
235. Bit RO of Bits 4 Reset Input The reset input will cause the value of each bit of the shift register to return to zero Initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 may be used to initialize the shift register at start up Pulse Input The pulse input triggers the data to shift The shift is in the forward direction for a forward shift register and in reverse for a reverse shift register A data shift will occur upon the leading edge of a pulse that is when the pulse turns on If the pulse has been on and stays on no data shift will occur Data Input The data input is the information which is shifted into the first bit when a forward data shift occurs or into the last bit when a reverse data shift occurs Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See page 5 3 SFR N shifting flag special internal relay M8012 is turned on when the CPU is powered down while data shifting is in progress See page 6 10 7 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Forward Shift Register SFR continued Ladder Diagram Program List Reset Rung 1 Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 11 12 Rung 2 0 00 R1 Q1 ac Q2 Timing Chart ON R3 03 Reset Input 10 off gt One scan or more is required ON Pulse Input 11 off ON Data
236. C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data XX X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results XK X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the ROOT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X m When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used Examples ROOT Before Execution After Execution emen ny ROOT W RET DL DO gt D20 po 2 noa Jj 14 qp ROOT W T d n gt D21 pi 3 021 173 3 2173 JDB 122 pi2 4 022 200 J4 2 00 ap ROOT W ROSY e ET pi JDB D23 pi3 55 e o3 741 55 274161 ROOT W oem E Dl JDI gt D24 14 p24 2 9997 99 98 d I JDI gt D25 p15 9998 gt 25 9998 9998 99 98 1140 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS SUM Sum H SUM W 51 52 The SUM instruction can be selected for ADD operation ADDI XOR es
237. C3A CP2KM Source Type High speed Counter Comparison Output FC3A CP2S and FC3A CP2SM Wiring for loads insusceptible to noises COM CW Wiring for loads susceptible to noises 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS CCW Reset to zero HSC OUT 24V DC Reset to zero HSC OUT OV Wiring for loads insusceptible to noises COM 24V DC CW OV Wiring for loads susceptible to noises CCW Reset to zero HSC OUT 24V DC Reset to zero HSC OUT OV 24V DC OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL OV 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Example Counting High speed Input Pulses from Rotary Encoder This example demonstrates a program to punch holes in a paper tape at regular intervals Description of Operation A rotary encoder is linked to the tape feed roller directly and Rolled Tape the output pulses from the rotary encoder are counted by the high speed counter in the OpenNet Controller CPU module When the high speed counter current value reaches 3 000 the comparison output is turned on When the comparison output is turned on the current value is reset to 300 automatically to continue another cycle of counting The comparison output remains on for 0 5 second to punch holes in the tape and is Rotary Encoder turned off until the preset value
238. CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERR LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on Is the to the LonWorks network correctly YES interface module connected 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE NO Connect the interface module to the LonWorks network correctly YES Is installation of the network information completed YES Is the ERR LED on the interface module on NO NO Install the network information YES Is the target node operating normally YES Is the ERR LED on the interface module on ates normally NO Make sure the target node oper YES Is the network affected by surrounding noise YES Is the ERR LED on the interface module on NO Remove the noise source YES Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Is the ERR LED on the interface module on NO END 26 27 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Troubleshooting Diagram 4 The I O LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on Is the CPU module operating normally See Troubleshooting on page 27 1 Set the quantity of trans mit receive data using WindLDR correctly See page 26 10 Is the trans mit receive data quantity set correctly YES Is the I O LED on
239. CTIONS Interval Comparison in WKCMP ON OFF Instructions The WKCMP ON OFF instructions compare the current day and time with the preset values designated by operands S1 and S2 When the current day and time reach the presets the WKCMP turns on or off the output or internal relay desig nated by destination operand D1 When the WKCMP ON OFF instructions are programmed as described below interval comparison among the current day time and presets is performed to reflect the comparison result on the comparison out put With the WKCMP ON OFF instructions programmed for interval comparison the comparison output status is ensured when the CPU restarts operation after interruption the output is turned on or off as appropriate N Caution The program shown below does not make an interval comparison because the WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instruction have separate input contacts WKCMP S1 52 53 D1 We strongly recommend the use of ON 62 830 0 00 the interval comparison to ensure WKCMP 51 52 S3 D1 outputs as programmed when the OFF 62 1715 0 00 CPU is restarted Conditions for Interval Comparison with ON OFF Times on the Same Day When the three conditions shown below are satisfied the interval comparison is enabled Otherwise the instructions work as ordinary clock data comparison instructions 1 WKCMP ON is followed by WKCMP OFF immediately which has the same input contact 2 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have the same v
240. Cable Terminator Thick Cable Type No Thin Cable Type No Maker Rockwell Automation For details about cables con sult Rockwell Automation 1485C P1A50 1485 1 150 Terminators must be connected to both ends of DeviceNet network When setting up a network either connect commercially available terminators at both ends of the network or connect the following resistor to the branch taps at both ends of the network Metal film resistor 121Q 1 1 4W OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Wiring DeviceNet Slave Module Precautions for Wiring e Do not run the network cable in parallel with or near power lines and keep the network cable away from noise sources Power down the DeviceNet slave module before you start wiring Make sure that wiring is correct before powering up the DeviceNet slave module e Use the special DeviceNet cable for connecting the network e A five color label is located beside the connector on the DeviceNet slave module Connect each of the five different color wires of the cable to the terminal of a matching color e When using thick cables only one wire can be connected to a terminal of the network interface connector To connect two wires of thick cables use a device tap e Tighten the mounting screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 3 to 0 5 N m e Tighten the terminal screws of the network interface connector to a recom
241. Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 13 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Example 1 Reading and Writing I Data in Remote I System This example demonstrates a program to receive input data from the input slave module at node 0 and to send input data to the output slave module at node 1 in the remo Remote 1 Master Mo FC3A SX5SM1 INTERBUS Cable T at ij te I O system shown below Remote 1 Master Station dule o o o o a o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o D 0000000000000000000000 Remote 1 O Slave Stations OOOO OOOOOO 5 55 INTERBUS DoooooooK om00000 0 E H 9j orHeeeeeoooe9o 50000000000 i
242. Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network 25 11 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Communication error occurs Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module Cause Action POW MNS 10 Power is not supplied to Supply 24V DC to the OpenNet Controller CPU module OFF OFF OFF the OpenNet Controller CPU module Plug in the expansion connector correctly m Plug in the communication connector correctly Green Red Green Arn T Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire ON ON ON Pant DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Make sure that the network is not affected by noise Make sure that the master is operating Green Plug in the communication connector correctly Green Red ON or Data from the master ON ON Red does not arrive Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire Flash DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Make sure that the network is not affected by noise Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Make sure that the slave is not stopped by power down or other causes if automatic recovery is enabled at the master Green Green Green Communication with communication resumes when power is restored at the slave the master is not T ON Flash ON established Plug in the communication connector correctly Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Supply 1
243. Control Set and Reset continued Multiple Usage of MCS instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This master control circuit will give priority to I1 I3 and I5 in that order When input I1 is off the first MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I6 are forced off When input I1 is on the first MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When is on and I3 is off the second MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I4 through I6 are forced off When both I1 and 13 are on the first and second MCSs are not executed so that the following program is executed accord ing to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 Counter and Shift Register in Master Control Circuit Ladder Diagram When input is on the MCS is not executed so that the counter and shift regis Rung 1 mcs ter are executed according to actual statuses of subsequent inputs I2 through I4 When input I1 is off the MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I4 are forced off When input I1 is turned on while input I2 is on the counter and shift register pulse inputs are turned on as shown below Rung 3 Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Input I1 Input I2 Counter Pulse Input Rung 4 MCR Shift Register Pulse Input 7 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL J 7 BASIC
244. D instruction ends receiving data there If a BCC code is included in the receive format of a RXD instruction an end delimiter can be positioned immediately before or after the BCC code If a data register or skip is designated between the BCC and end delimiter correct receiving is not ensured When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed data receiving ends when the specified bytes of data in the receive format such as data registers and skips have been received In addition data receiving also ends when the interval between incoming data characters exceeds the receive timeout value specified in the Communication Parameters dialog box whether the RXD has an end delimiter or not The character interval timer is started when the first character of incom ing communication is received and restarted each time the next character is received When a character is not received within a predetermined period of time timeout occurs and the RXD ends data receive operation Example 1 When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 h re ee C as the first data register D101 h 30h 31h 32h 33h D1004n h Total of received characters The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format Receive operation is completed when the total characters programme
245. D8151 INTERBUS Node 25 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8152 INTERBUS Node 25 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8153 INTERBUS Node 25 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8154 INTERBUS Node 26 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8155 INTERBUS Node 26 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8156 INTERBUS Node 26 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8157 INTERBUS Node 26 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8158 INTERBUS Node 27 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8159 INTERBUS Node 27 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8160 INTERBUS Node 27 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8161 INTERBUS Node 27 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8162 INTERBUS Node 28 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8163 INTERBUS Node 28 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8164 INTERBUS Node 28 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8165 INTERBUS Node 28 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8166 INTERBUS Node 29 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8167 INTERBUS Node 29 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8168 INTERBUS Node 29 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8169 INTERBUS Node 29 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8170 INTERBUS Node 30 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8171 INTERBUS Node 30 Length Code When initialized 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 15 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S
246. DIP Switch Master Station Slave Station 2 Slave Station 1 Slave Station 31 HG Series Operator Interface Data Link Specifications Electric Specifications Compliance with EIA RS485 Baud Rate 19 200 or 38 400 bps Synchronization Start stop synchronization Start bit 1 Data bits 7 Parity Even Stop bit 1 Communication Cable Shielded twisted pair cable core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Maximum Cable Length 200m 656 feet total Maximum Slave Stations 31 slave stations Refresh Mode Separate or simultaneous refresh Transmit Receive Data 0 through 10 words each for transmission and receiving per slave station Special Internal Relay M8005 M8007 communication control and error M8140 M8176 communication completion for each slave station M8177 communication completion for all slave stations Data Register D7000 D7619 for transmit receive data Special Data Register D8400 D8430 for communication error code OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link System Setup To set up a data link system connect the RS48
247. DULE LONWoRKS Interface M odule Internal Structure The LONWORKS interface module block diagram is illustrated in the figure below mU LED Service mU Button RUN LED 10 0 IO 1 Transceiver Neuron Chip 3150 FTT 10A Register g a x c I Failure CPU LoNWoRks Interface Module LONWORKS Network Memory Map The LONWORKS interface module memory map is illustrated in the figure below FFFFh FFFFh Neuron Chip 3150 6KB Ae ao IO QKB E800h FCOOh CFFFh Register 4KB Reserved 2 5KB C000h FLFFh Unused EEPROM 0 5KB F000h 7FFFh Application RAM 2KB Program 16KB E800h Neuron Chip Firmware 16KB 0000h Flash Memory The LONWORKS interface module contains a 32KB nonvolatile rewritable memory Of the 32KB memory area a 16KB area of 0000h through 3FFFh is allocated to the Neuron Chip firmware and the remaining 16KB area of 4000h through 7FFFh is allocated to the application program 26 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Neuron Chip 1 O Pins and Status LEDs Neuron Chip I O pins and status LEDs are assigned as listed below I O Pin No Signal Name Description Controls the RUN LED green 0 Output RUN LED 0 ON 1 OFF Controls the ERR LED red 1 Output ERR LED 0 ON 1 OFF Controls the I O LED red 2 Output O LED 0 ON 1 OFF 3 input The 10 3 pin must be defied as an input when th
248. DULE Link Registers and Network Variables Network variables are allocated to data areas of the link registers as shown below Tous Rn 9 59 8 56 5 4 TE 8 19 wo eC S 03 wets S sa mem ies me i06 me9B eats Example Network variables nv_i8 0 and nv_i8 1 are allocated to link register data areas L100 00 through L100 15 as listed below nv i8 1 nv i8 0 L100 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b4 b3 EE lc Transmission Time The transmission time depends on the network configuration application program and user program It is recommended that you confirm the transmission time on the actual network system Processing transmit and receive data to and from the LONWORKS network is described below Processing Transmit Data The data in link registers are updated each time the CPU module scans the user program The LONWORKS interface mod ule reads data from the link registers allocated to transmit data in the OpenNet Controller CPU module When any changes are found in the comparison between the new and old read data the interface module updates the transmit network vari ables of which the data has been changed and the new data is transmitted to the network The refresh cycle of reading from the link register to the interface module is approximately 15 msec When the dat
249. DVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Double Word Operands in Data Registers and Link Registers When the double word data type is selected for the source or destination operand the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive operands The order of the two operands depends on the operand type When a data register timer or counter is selected as a double word operand the upper word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The lower word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand On the contrary when a link register is selected as a double word operand the lower word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The upper word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand Example When data register D10 and link register L100 are designated as a double word source operand and data regis ter D20 and link register L200 are designated as a double word destination operand the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive operands as illustrated below Source Operand Destination Operand Data Register Timer Counter Data Register Timer Counter Upper Word D10 dh Upper Word D20 Lower Word D11 SER Double word Data 567b Lower Word D21 305419896 Link Register 12345678h Link Register Lower Word L100 22726 Lower Word L200 Upper Word L101 12 dh D Upper Word L201 Discontin
250. Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8015 Year New Data Write only 15 7 D8016 Month New Data Write only 15 7 D8017 Day New Data Write only 15 7 D8018 Day of Week New Data Write only 15 7 D8019 Hour New Data Write only 15 7 D8020 Minute New Data Write only 15 7 D8021 Second New Data Write only 15 7 D8022 Constant Scan Time Preset Value 5 20 D8023 Scan Time Current Value Every scan 5 20 D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value At occurrence 520 D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value At occurrence 520 D8026 Communication Selector Switch Value 0 through 7 Power up D8027 Communication Device Number 0 through 31 Power up D8028 Internal System Program Version Power up D8029 External System Program Version Power up D8030 Protect Transistor Output Error 1st 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8031 Protect Transistor Output Error 2nd 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8032 Protect Transistor Output Error 3rd 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8033 Protect Transistor Output Error 4th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8034 Protect Transistor Output Error 5th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8035 Protect Transistor Output Error 6th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8036 Protect Transistor Output Error 7th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 2 20 D8037 D8039 Reserved D8040 Advanced Instruction Err
251. Data Exchange between LonWorks Interface Module and CPU Module 26 16 Application Program Examples 26 18 Defined Network Variables 26 23 LonWorks Network Troubleshooting 26 25 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR LED odere ee ee pk Rte ed POP o ene ait een bes avatars 274 Reading Error Data UY Yes DR EX oe ER e ir Yee 27 1 Special Data Registers for Error Information 27 3 General Error Codes essere pte e e ee ee f ea e Re 27 3 OpenNet Controller Operating Status Output ERROR LED during Errors 27 4 Error Causes and Actions im rs cree PME Wade Bn Pee ae Bes Alene 27 4 User Program Execution Error 1 ee as 276 Troubleshooting 27 7 Execution Times for Instructions 1 Breakdown of END Processing Time 2 VO Delay Time 5 ex o rhe roe ee ee ee 2 Type LIS CE AUREOS ono Ra eaten Oe ot ee CORR A 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Introduction This chapter describes general information for understanding the OpenNet Controller and system setups for using the OpenNet Controller in various ways of communica
252. EM345 0 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read this user s manual to make sure of correct operation before starting installation wiring operation maintenance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller All OpenNet Controller modules are manufactured under IDEC s rigorous quality control system but users must add a backup or failsafe provision to the control system using the OpenNet Controller in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused in case the OpenNet Controller should fail n this user s manual safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death Turn off the power to the OpenNet Controller before starting installation removal wiring maintenance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the OpenNet Controller People without such expertise must not use the OpenNet Controller Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure of the OpenNet Controller may cause disorder of the control system damage or accidents Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal
253. ER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS RXD1 Receive 1 51 D1 D2 When input is on data received through the RS232C port 1 from a ds Kd REFE ERRES remote terminal is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format designated by S1 RXD2 Receive 2 8 SI D2 When input is on data received through the RS232C port 2 from a WT E UTE remote terminal is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format designated by S1 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 51 Source 1 Receive format Xx X D1 Destination 1 Receive completion output D2 Destination 2 Receive status x For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Receive format designated by operand 51 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When data receive is complete an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The receive status data register DO through D7998 stores the status of data receive and error code The next data register stores the byte count of received data The same data registers should not be used as transmit status registers for TXD1 TXD2 instructions and
254. ERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Overlapping Coordinates In this example the XYFS instruction sets up three coordinate points which define two different linear relationships between X and Y The three points are X0 YO 0 100 X1 Y1 100 0 and X2 Y2 300 100 The two line segments define overlapping coordinates for X That is for each value of Y within the designated range there would be two X values assigned M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 2 X0 YO X1 1 X2 Y2 0 100 100 300 100 S1 52 D1 At startup XYFS specifies three points 0 C10 D90 CVXTY converts the value in C10 and 51 52 51 stores the result in D90 0 D95 D30 CVYTX converts the value in D95 and stores the result in D30 YO X2 Y2 0 100 300 100 D30 100 C10 300 X 60 250 The first line segment defines the following relationship for X to Y conversion Y X 100 The second line segment defines another relationship for X to Y conversion 1 5X 50 For X to Y conversion each value of X has only one corresponding value for Y If the current value of counter C10 is 250 the value assigned to D90 is 75 For Y to X conversion the XYFS instruction assigns two possible values of X for each value of Y The relationship defined by the first two points has priority in these cases The line between points X0 YO and X1 Y 1 that is the line between 0 100 and 100 0 has priority in defining
255. ES 9 11 IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not 9 12 KCHG EXGhange Aleta dite gd aaah Wik ENR AACE Una UR Re RE ce RR RR Oa 9 13 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL C HAPTER 10 Carter 11 C HAPTER 12 C HAPTER 13 C HAPTER 14 C HAPTER 15 TABLE OF CONTENTS DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS CMP Compare Equal To 10 1 CMP lt gt Compare Unequal 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than 0 cece RR 3 hh 10 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than 10 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal 10 1 ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal 10 4 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS ADD Addition 2 x 2 ueeieaueweererefrsemercde er BS Aeon ee Tee eS 11 1 SUB Subtraction 2 255 204 olen be ROR gea pda i 11 1 MUL Multiplication 5 thw Ps ee etc ein Dao natn SH Reh OA OAR DS Edad 11 1 DIM DIVISION Rd NN ERU 11 1 INC Iricrertierit ke tee oe edie IY te quay where eames aS Be 11 9 DEG Decrement serrie el okie ded sinew pie ee e oa a ee Geen 11 9 ROOT ROO ce ete nt ate Sie Se oe ont a LN tudo ss ae EDI ica Ard 11 10 SUM SUM eee
256. Error When an error occurs during communication in the data link system M8005 turns on The M8005 status is maintained when the error is cleared and remains on until M8005 is reset using WindLDR or until the CPU is turned off The cause of the data link communication error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt PLC Status gt Error Status gt Details See page 21 4 M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station When M8006 at the master station is turned on in the data link system data link communication is stopped The M8006 status is maintained when the CPU is turned off and remains on until M8006 is reset using WindLDR M8007 Data Link Communication Initialize Flag Master Station Data Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station M8007 has a different function at the master or slave station of the data link communication system Master station Data link communication initialize flag When M8007 at the master station is turned on during operation the link configuration is checked to initialize the data link system When a slave station is powered up after the master station turn M8007 on to initialize the data link system After a data link setup is changed M8007 must also be turned on to ensure correct communication Slave station Data link communication stop flag When a slave station does not receive communication data from the master station for 10 sec or more in the data link sys tem M8007 turns on When th
257. Ground No Connection Shield Signal Direction Twisted 1 Setting RS232C Port Communication Mode Selection Special Data Registers D8200 and D8300 When using the user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 set 0 to special data register D8200 When using the user communication mode for the RS232C port 2 set 0 to special data register D8300 When the modem mode is not used for the RS232C port 1 or 2 make sure that special data register D8200 or D8300 is set to 0 Setting Communication Selector DIP Switches The communication selector DIP switch is used to select communication modes for the RS232C ports 1 and 2 When the CPU is powered up the selected communication modes are enabled automatically If the communication selector DIP switch setting is changed after the CPU is powered up the new setting does not take effect until the communication enable button is depressed Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to enable the user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Communication Mode for RS232C Ports Communication Selector DIP Switch Port ON OFF 2 RS232C port 1 User communication mode Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 User communication mode Maintenance mode User communication mode Used for user communication instructions Maintenance mode Used for communication between the CPU and WindLDR on computer Communication Enable Button To enable the new settings of the communica
258. I double word D or 10 KKK long L data type Source Operand Repeat The source operand specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to be Designation processed by the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two source operands Data Type Repeat Designation Specifies whether repeat is used for the operand or not Destination Operand The destination operand specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to store the result of the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two destination operands Repeat Cycles Specifies the quantity of repeat cycles 1 through 99 Input Condition for Advanced Instructions Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact except NOP no operation LABEL label and LRET label return instructions The input condition can be programmed using a bit operand such as input output internal relay shift register or link register bit Timer and counter can also be used as an input condition to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the counter counts out While the input condition is on the advanced instruction is executed in each scan To execute the advanced instruction P SOTU MOV W Di oe only at the rising or falling edge of the input use the SOTU or SOTD instruction While the input condition is off the advanced instruction is not executed and operand statuses are held Source and Destination Operands The source and destinatio
259. IFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples SFTR Data Type Word 1 D10 REP bits Bits to shift 2 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 29 to data register D10 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSB MSB D10 LSB Before shift D20 29 010101010000 10101011 111111011 Shift to the right gt M8003 MSB Y D10 LSB CY After first shift D20 27 0 o o o ojo o o 0101010 110111111 0 M8003 in Y D10 LSB CY After second shift D20 21 0 0 0 0 0 000 0101010 110101011 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word SFTRD S1 11 D10 bits 2 Bits to shift 2 Before shift 010 011 1 900 573 Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and D11 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSBs D10 D11
260. INTERBUS Node 14 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8107 INTERBUS Node 14 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8108 INTERBUS Node 14 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8109 INTERBUS Node 14 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8110 INTERBUS Node 15 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8111 INTERBUS Node 15 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8112 INTERBUS Node 15 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8113 INTERBUS Node 15 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8114 INTERBUS Node 16 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8115 INTERBUS Node 16 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8116 INTERBUS Node 16 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8117 INTERBUS Node 16 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8118 INTERBUS Node 17 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8119 INTERBUS Node 17 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8120 INTERBUS Node 17 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8121 INTERBUS Node 17 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8122 INTERBUS Node 18 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8123 INTERBUS Node 18 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8124 INTERBUS Node 18 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8125 INTERBUS Node 18 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8126 INTERBUS Node 19 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8127 INTERBUS Node 19 Length Code When initialized 24 6 6 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Allocation 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS
261. INTERBUS device or of a Gales device on any subsequent local bus Check this part of the system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info 0C84hex to 0C87 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D84hex to 0D87hex LB FAIL Multiple timeout of the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Defect of the bus cable connected to this bus interface of the following INTERBUS device or of a Cause device on any subsequent local bus Check this part of the system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position 0C88hex to 0C8B Meaning hex RB FAIL or OD88hex to OD8Bhex LB FAIL An unexpected device was found at the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause INTERBUS device connected without an entry in the active configuration INTERBUS cable connected without any further INTERBUS devices Add Error In
262. Ifa 12 O RS bo 9 70 CN2 10 CN2 Terminal No Name oOo0n0000 0090 mm WO CO NI GD OT BY NM m e Wiring Schematic e COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Sink Input Wiring CN1 Source Input Wiring CN1 nes Terminal No Name Ea Terminal No Name m 3 m WO NI Dd NWN DD 1 mn e m e CN2 CN2 1 1 2 2 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 t 9 t 9 10 10 212 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N32B4 32 point DC Input Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector H18 SHF AA J S T Mfg SHF 001T 0 8BS J S T Mfg CN1 CN2 DC n IN 18 17 iB 16 2 I E iB 15 14 70 E un 13 z 12 wo SB 11 CN2 o 20 10 ai Cy n 5B 9 9 24 C1 ae 8 8 E 00 7
263. Initialize Maintained Cleared M8031 M8035 Reserved M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG read only Maintained Cleared M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault read only Maintained Cleared M8040 INTERBUS Master Error read only Cleared Cleared M8041 INTERBUS Master Error read only Cleared Cleared M8042 M8047 Reserved M8050 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8051 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8052 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Start Maintained Maintained M8053 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Start Maintained Maintained M8054 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Start Maintained Maintained M8055 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8056 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8057 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode AT Command Execution Maintained Cleared M8060 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8061 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8062 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Completion Maintained Cleared M8063 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Completion Maintained Cleared M8064 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Completion Maintained Cleared OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S
264. Invalid Valid More than one scan y i time is required m OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 13 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS and gt Counter Comparison The CC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated The CC instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When a counter comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a counter comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the CC or CC2 instruction a counter number CO through C255 followed by a preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram CC Program List Counter to compare with Pam Ads Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram gt Program List Gg Fram Adis bis e The CC and CC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for diff
265. K A NO output coil of output QO is programmed in the third column of the first ladder line This completes programming for rung 1 as 1 20000 Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating the similar procedures dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 45 4 OPERATION BASICS A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung A new rung can also be inserted by selecting Edit gt Append gt Rung When completed the ladder program looks like below T0000 Tooo1 Qoa Rumy 02 ae al 20001 n 3 j rDOOD 0010 4 0010 MB121 2 Now save the file with a new name 10 From the menu bar select File gt Save As and type TESTOI LDR in the File Name field Change the Folder or Drive as necessary Click OK and the file is saved in the selected folder and drive Download Program You can download the user program from WindLDR running on a PC to the OpenNet Controller From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Download Program The Download Program Dialog shows then click the Download button The user program is downloaded to the OpenNet Controller OpenWet Donde Ta Tianshi Mode ET rpm C Lander T Asci Download Button Program Size ma RRRKJRAR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 20 30 50 70 H 10 100 W Aulbemalsc cop balme dovnload v Aulemate slant al
266. KS interface DeviceNet slave and analog I O modules automatically at power up and exchanges data with LONWORKS nodes through the link registers allocated to each node Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab Fuecten fura Selling Configure Communication Master Module Check Box Check this box only when x Eonligue Conmonicaton Medals the remote 1 0 master zl Mock module is used Fler Caich Data Link Comm Open Bus mess Quantity of Nodes Connected When using the remote I O mas ter module specify the quantity 7 Staten Data Quantity Brea of nodes from 1 through 32 Slave Station __ Mele Tames Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes When using LonWorks inter face module or DeviceNet slave module specify the data bytes to communicate through each interface or slave module Transmit Receive Bytes 0 to 8 default 8 bytes This value determines the data quantity 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits to communicate with the network For the example on the next page select 8 trans mit bytes and 4 receive bytes
267. LE 54 56 init_internal_io init_external_io 57 void init_internal_io void 58 59 60 io change init PI ODE io change init PI RUN 61 void init external io void 62 63 init_gate_array 64 void init gate array void 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 13 74 75 76 TT 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 93 94 95 96 int st n unsigned char pGA unsigned char dat io check timer DTm 5sec while TRUE post events pGA unsigned char GA BCTL pGA BCTL NWR REQ dat pGA if dat amp BCTL pGA unsigned char GA FCDR for n 0 n MAX FCDR DATA LEN pGA 0x00 PGA unsigned char GA CSR ERR csr error data 0 pGA csr error data pGA unsigned char GA FVER pGA FC3ASX5L VERSION pGA unsigned char GA EMID pGA EMID CODE pGA unsigned char GA BCTL pGA BCTL NENABLE dat pGA if dat amp BCTL NENABLE pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ break Jelse pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ 97 The following program turns on the I O LED when initialization fails within 5 seconds and can be modified by the user 98 if timer expires check timer 99 io out PO IO LED LOW 100 break 101 102 103 Note is an exclusive OR of every bit I O LED goes on when timeout
268. LE SPECIFICATIONS System Statuses at Stop Reset and Restart Internal Relays Shift Registers Ti Viale Redet Counters Data Registers Imer Mode Outputs Current Value Note Keep Type Clear Type Run Operating Operating Operating Operating Operating Reset Reset input ON OFF OFF Reset to zero OFF Resettozero Reset to zero Reset to zero Stop Stop input ON OFF Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Restart Unchanged Unchanged OFF Reset to zero Reset to preset Unchanged Note Link registers used as outputs are turned off like outputs Communication Function Communication Port RS232C Port 1 RS232C Port 2 RS485 Port Standards EIA RS232C EIA RS232C EIA 5485 Computer link 19 200 bps Baud Rate 19 200 bps 19 200 bps Data link 38 400 bps Maintenance Communication Possible Possible Possible User Communication Possible Possible Impossible Data Link Communication Impossible Impossible Possible Quantity of Slave Stations 31 Maximum Cable Length Special cable Special cable 200m Isolation between Power Supply and Not isolated Not isolated Not isolated Communication Port Recommended cable for data link Twisted pair shielded cable with a minimum core wire diameter of 0 9 mm Conductor resistance 85 Q km maximum shield resistance 20 Q km maximum Communication Selector DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch No Function Setting 1 RS485 port communicatio
269. LER USER S MANUAL 17 33 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Configuring Barcode Reader The values shown below are an example of configuring a barcode reader For actual settings see the user s manual for the barcode reader Synchronization mode Auto Read mode Single read or multiple read Communication parameter Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits i Parity check Even Stop bit 1 Header 02h Terminator 03h Data echo back No BCR data output Yes Other communication settings Output timing Output priority 1 Character suppress No Data output filter No Main serial input No Sub serial No Comparison preset mode Not used Allocation Numbers M100 Input to start receiving barcode data M101 Receive completion output for barcode data M8120 Initialize pulse special internal relay D20 Store barcode data upper 4 digits D21 Store barcode data lower 4 digits D100 Receive status data register for barcode data D101 Receive data byte count data register Ladder Diagram When the OpenNet Controller starts operation the RXD1 instruction is executed to wait for incoming data When data receive is complete the data is stored to data registers D20 and D21 The receive completion signal is used to execute the RXDI instruction to wait for another incoming data M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to set M100 At the rising edge of M100 RXDI is executed to be ready for receiving data 51 D
270. M1 INTERBUS Cable D sub 9 pin Male Connector D sub 9 pin Female Connector Total Cable Length 400m x 32 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum For wiring INTERBUS cable see page 24 15 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o D Remote 1 Master Station 0000000000000000000000 T S55 000000 INTERBUS ui scs O00000 00X8 BA a WERBS ooo 555 5B NERUS o Remote 1 Slave Stations IDEC s 5
271. M8120 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instructions set 123 and 4567 to data registers D10 and D11 respectively MOV W S1 D1 REP 4567 D11 Each time input IO is turned on the 32 bit binary data of data registers D10 and D11 designated by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits shifted to the left by 1 digit as designated by operand digits and converted back to BCDLS D digits 10 1 32 bit binary data Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits shifted Data Type Double Word digits to shift 2 1 D10 11 Before shift 01112 3 14 5 617 0 Shift to the left After first shift 0 lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 lt 0 After second shift 11 12 13 415 11617 00 MSD LSD ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 13 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS 13 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data conversion instructions are used to convert data format among binary BCD and ASCII Data divide and data combine instructions are used for conversion between byte data and word data HTOB Hex to BCD S1 gt D1 HTOB HEN S1 D1 HEN When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 is converted into BCD and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through
272. M8150 Slave Station 9 M8170 Slave Station 25 M8151 Slave Station 10 M8171 Slave Station 26 M8152 Slave Station 11 M8172 Slave Station 27 M8153 Slave Station 12 M8173 Slave Station 28 M8154 Slave Station 13 M8174 Slave Station 29 M8155 Slave Station 14 M8175 Slave Station 30 M8156 Slave Station 15 M8176 Slave Station 31 M8157 Slave Station 16 M8177 All Slave Station Communication Completion Relay When data link communication with all slave stations is complete in either separate or simultaneous refresh mode special internal relay M8177 at the master station is turned on for one scan time M8177 at slave stations does not go on 214 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Programming WindLDR The Data Link page in the Function Area Settings must be programmed for the data link master station Only when baud rate of 38400 bps is used the baud rate must also be selected for slave stations on the Data Link page of WindLDR Any other settings are not needed for slave stations Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Click the Comm Port tab and make sure that the check box to the left of Enable Communication Format Selection for the Data Link Port RS485 is unchecked
273. MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8065 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8066 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8067 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Operational State Maintained Cleared M8070 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8071 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8072 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Failure Maintained Cleared M8073 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Failure Maintained Cleared M8074 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Failure Maintained Cleared M8075 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8076 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8077 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Line Connection Status Maintained Cleared M8080 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8081 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8082 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Start Maintained Maintained M8083 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Start Maintained Maintained M8084 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Ge
274. MANUAL pna Description Updated See Page D8172 INTERBUS Node 30 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8173 INTERBUS Node 30 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8174 INTERBUS Node 31 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8175 INTERBUS Node 31 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8176 INTERBUS Node 31 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8177 INTERBUS Node 31 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8178 INTERBUS Master System Error Information When initialized 2440 D8179 INTERBUS Master Status Transition Number When accessed 24 10 D8180 INTERBUS Master Acknowledge Code When accessed 24 10 D8181 INTERBUS Master Additional Error Information When accessed 24 10 D8182 INTERBUS Master Error Code When accessed 24 10 D8183 INTERBUS Master Error Location When accessed 24 10 D8184 D8199 Reserved Special Data Registers for Modem Mode Description Updated See Page D8200 Port 1 RS232C Port Communication Mode Selection Every scan 23 3 D8201 Port 1 Modem Initialization String Selection Every scan 23 3 08202 Reserved D8203 Port 1 On line Mode Protocol Selection When sending receiving data 23 3 D8204 Port 1 Control Signal Status Every scan 17 27 D8205 Port 1 DSR Input Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 28 D8206 Port 1 DTR Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8207 Port 1 RTS Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8208 Reserved D8209 Port 1 Retry C
275. NS User Program Protection The user program in the OpenNet Controller CPU module can be protected from reading writing or both using the Func tion Area Settings in WindLDR Warning When proceeding with the following steps make sure to note the protect code which is needed to disable the user program protection If the user program in the OpenNet Controller CPU module is write or read write protected the user program cannot be changed without the protect code Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function ETT LUI ID OBSS Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box Dia Link Comm Opin Bi Oiii appears Ena amp ia Hligh z perd rranim 2 Select the Others tab eee I brads SE et Peet T Ener HEMI jas Chive Enabla Cap Waira iral Fasi Min Fani Bis V Atel for Esper in liter mei eani 00 ia 3 Click the Protect User Program check box enter required data in the areas shown below Protect Mode Select from Write Protect Read Protect or Read Write Protect Protect Code Enter a protect code of 1 through 16 ASCII characters from the keyboard Code Confirm Repeat to enter the same protect code for confirmation Download the user program to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Disabling and Enabling Pro
276. NUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION The communication sequence in the separate refresh mode is shown below 1 scan time END Processed Master Station E ey E ey ee E Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave 31 Slave 1 Refresh Refresh Refresh Refresh Refresh Slave 1 Comm Completion M8140 e Master i ave 2 Comm Station Completion M8141 OUT Slave 31 Comm Completion M8176 MH All Slave Comm Completion M8177 E S SSSA 1 scan Slave Slave Station 1 CEN Station 1 END Processed Slave 1 Comm Completion M8140 STL LL ee n ue 1 scan time Slave Slave Station 2 md Station 2 END Processed Slave 2 Comm Tr Completion M8141 Y 1 scan time Slave Slave Station 31 CC es Station 31 END Processed Slave 31 Comm Completion M8176 _ s cc 2__ Separate Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with One Slave Station Trf When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with one slave station Trf 2 2 083 msec x Transmit Words Receive Words 3 125 msec 1 scan time Total Separate Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with All Slave Stations Trfn When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to
277. NUAL Terminator Terminators must be connected to the LONWORKS network When setting up a network connect one or two terminators depending on the topology The terminator consists of one resistor and two capacitors as illustrated below Bus Topology gt RS C2 Terminator Configuration Network gt Connect terminators to the both ends of the bus topology network R 105Q 1 1 8W C1 and C2 Free Topology 100 250V note the polarity Node Node Node Node 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE M ODULE Node Node Connect a terminator to any position on the free topology network R 52 3Q 1 1 8W C1 and C2 Terminator Node 100 250V note the polarity Node Node OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Node Terminator Terminator Node Node Node 26 7 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Link Registers for LoNWonks Network Communication LONWORKS network communication data is stored to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the data is communicated through the LONWORKS interface module Since seven functional modules including a LONWORKS interface module can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module link registers are allocated depending on the position where the L
278. O C Data Link with FA 3S High performance CPU using Serial Interface Module PF3S SIF4 OpenNet Controller Settings PF3S SIF4 Settings PF3S SIF4 Settings Transmit data 6 words Receive data 6 words Baud rate 19200 or 38400 bps Data link slave station mode Data link slave station mode Slave station number 1 Slave station number 2 Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 FA 3S FA 3S CP 12 13 CP12 13 n PF3S SIF4 PF3S SIF4 21 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 22 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Introduction C When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and I O status can be monitored on the com puter data in the CPU can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded The OpenNet Controller can also be started or stopped from the computer A maximum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPUs can be con nected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system This chapter describes the 1 N computer link system For the 1 1 computer link system see page 4 1 omputer Link System Setup 1 N Computer Link System To set up a 1 N communication computer link system connect the RS232C RS485 converter to the RS485 terminals B and G on every OpenNet C
279. O through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTRC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word nteger D double word L long y _ When a bit operand such as output internal relay shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 11 13 BiT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTRC Data Type Word S1 1 REP 13 20 ROTRC W 51 bits D20 1 Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D20 13 After first rotation D20 6 After second rotation 020 32771 Data Type Double Word ROTRC D S1 bits 11 D20 1 Bits to rotate 2 1 Before rotation D20 D21 851 981 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 13 to data register D20 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by bit as d
280. OCC7hex RB FAIL or ODC4hex to ODC7hex LB FAIL Meaning Multiple timeout at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device Defective local remote bus cable that belongs to the local remote bus of the specified device Defective INTERBUS device connected to the local remote bus of the specified INTERBUS device Cause Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage U for the module electronics made available by the BK module Failure of the supply voltage U for the BK module Remedy Check this local remote bus Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCC8hex to OCCBhex RB FAIL or ODC8hex to ODCBhex LB FAIL Unexpected devices were found at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS Meaning device INTERBUS device connected without an entry in the active configuration INTERBUS cable connected without any further INTERBUS devices Add Error Info Error location Segment Position Cause dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2427 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OCCChex to OCCFhex RB FAIL or ODCChex to ODCFhex LB FAIL Meaning Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Interrupted data register of the INTERBUS device connected to OUT2 Cause The number of data registers of the INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the length code entered in the
281. OK OK RK OK include lt access h gt include msg addr h include control h Zinclude status h include snvt lev h include fc3asxb5l h Refer to the header file shown below BR RK RR RK KK IK KKK IK IKK IK IKK OK IK KKK IK IK KR IK IO RK IK KK RK RK KK OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 28 29 30 31 32 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Main Program RK IK IK IK IKK OK IK KK AOR KKK IK IKK OK IK KK IO RK IK IK IK IO KK KK when reset initialize Insert other commands here to execute within when reset if required Header File fc3asx5l h www 0 ID IO ID NNN ID I ID iH HH p i NN I2 i00 amp O wo d 0 NH U1 UI UI w NBEO Header File fc3asx5l h BRR IK IK RK OK RK OK RK KK RK RK RK KK Common Definition BRR RK IR RK IK RK IK RK OK RK KR CK RK RK RK KK define LED OFF 1 define LED ON define OK define NG define HIGH define LOW Timer Value define DTm_5sec 5000 BRR RK KK RK IR RK IK RK OK RR KR IK RK RK RK RK Memory Mapped I O Definition RK IK RR KK RK KK k k RK RK RK define IO GA BASE 0xc000 I O Base Address BRR RRR RK IK RK KR RK RK RR K
282. ON OFF voltage levels correct Make sure of correct input filter selection setting See page 5 6 Make sure of correct input voltage ON voltage 15V DC minimum OFF voltage 5V DC maximum Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL END 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 14 The calendar clock does not operate correctly Is the ERROR LED on See Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERROR LED is on Read the error data using WindLDR see page 27 1 Clear the error code see page 27 2 The clock data is broken Set the calendar clock using WindLDR see page 15 7 Is Calendar clock error displayed Monitor the PLC status using WindLDR Is the calendar clock YES operating normally Call IDEC for assistance END dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 21 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 15 27 22 Remote 1 communication is impossible and the FAIL LED is on Is only the FAIL LED lit on the remote 1 master module YES Are the RDY RUN and FAIL LEDs lit on the remote I O master module NO Are more than 32 remote 1 slave stations connected Does the unction Area Setting atch the quantity of connected slave stations Are all remote 1
283. ON or turned off WKCMP OFF Set 0 for S3 when the WKTBL is not used the WKTBL instruction is ignored even if it is programmed 1 Additional days in the week table When the current time reaches the hour minute comparison data set for S2 on the special day programmed in the WKTBL the designated output or internal relay is turned on WKCMP ON or turned off WKCMP OFF 2 Skip days in the week table On the special day programmed in the WKTBL the designated output or internal relay is not turned on or off even when the current day and time reach the presets for S1 and S2 Note When 1 or 2 is set for 53 program special days in the week table using the WKTBL instruction If the WKTBL instruction is not programmed when or 2 is set for 53 in the WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instruction a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Make sure that the values set for S1 S2 and S3 are within the valid ranges If any data is over the valid value a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED WKTBL Week Table 51 82 53 SN Week Table H WKTBL S1 S2 S3 SN FOO When input is on N blocks of special month day data in oper ands designated by S1 S2 S3 SN are set to the week table The quantity of special days can be up to 50 The special days stored in the week table a
284. ON ON ON ON 30 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 62 OFF ON ON ON ON ON 31 ON ON ON ON ON OFF 63 ON ON ON ON ON ON Data Rate Output Hold or Load Ott Physical Port Number Data Rate DRO DR1 Output Load H L Physical Port Number NO 125k baud OFF OFF LOAD OFF OFF 0 OFF 250k baud ON OFF HOLD ON 1 ON 500k baud OFF ON Selection Prohibited ON ON 25 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Link Registers for DeviceNet Network Communication DeviceNet network communication data is stored to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the data is communicated through the DeviceNet slave module Since seven functional modules including the DeviceNet slave module can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module link registers are allocated depending on the position where the DeviceNet slave module is mounted Link Register Allocation Numbers Allocation Number Area Function Description R W L 00 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 01 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 02 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 03 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 04 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 05 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 06 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 07 Data a
285. ONWORKS interface module is mounted Link Register Allocation Numbers pA Area Function Description R W L 00 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 01 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 02 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 03 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 04 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 05 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 06 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 07 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 12 Status area Error data Stores various error codes Read L 13 Status area counts Stores the byte counts of transmit receive data Read L 24 ID area Software version Stores the user application software version Read L 25 ID area Expansion module ID Stores the user program module ID Read Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module is mounted such as OpenNet interface module or analog 1 module Consequently operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Error Data Status Area L 12 L 12 b14 unused b10 b0 unused When an error occurs the I O or
286. OR LED is lit While the power voltage remains below the rated value the ERROR LED does not go on 2 When a program RAM sum check error occurs operation is stopped momentarily for recompiling the user program After completing the recompilation operation resumes 3 Outputs where error occurs are turned off and restore normal operation when the cause of error is removed Error Causes and Actions 0001h Power Failure This error indicates when the power supply is lower than the specified voltage This error is also recorded when the power is turned off Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 0002h Watchdog Timer Error The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle scan time When the time exceeds approximately 1 68 seconds the watchdog timer indicates an error Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer If this error occurs frequently the OpenNet Controller CPU module has to be replaced 0004h Data Link Connection Error This error indicates that data link station numbers are incorrect Make sure that the communication selector DIP switches are set to station number at the master station and to station numbers 1 through 31 at slave stations No duplication of station numbers is allowed See page 21 2 To correct this error change the communication selector DIP switch setting to 0 at the master station and to 1 through 31 at slave stations Turn power off and on again for the slave station
287. PENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Input Module A D Converter The 12 bit analog input module converts 6 channels of analog signals to digital data of 0 through 4000 which can be pro cessed using advanced instructions such as the coordinate conversion instruction The analog input module is a functional module and the converted digital data is stored to a link register depending on the analog channel and the mounting slot number of the analog input module in the system setup The input mode can be selected using the rotary switch to meet five different analog signal ranges 0 to 10V 10 0 to 5V 5V or 4 to 20 mA Analog Input Module Type Number Parts Description Module ID Power LED Cable Terminal Terminal Label Expansion Connector Rotary Switch ot Protection Module Name Type No 5 Expansion Connector 6 Rotary S witch 6 channel Analog Input M odule FC3A AD1261 SS Q T jo 1 Module ID TEE ERR SI o 0 JI 0 ch 0 FE BR E E 0 2 Power LED R g 0 re g rr J Er E END E 0 r E 0 re cl 012 rr A D indicates the analog input module ID Turns on when power is on Screw terminal block Indicates terminal numbers on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules 3 Cable Terminal 4 Terminal La
288. Q M R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X 2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 1 5 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the BTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 9 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOA Quantity of Digits 5 BTOA W S1 52 D1 10 D10 5 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 4 BTOA W S1 S2 D1 11 D10 4 D20 D10 Quantity of Digit
289. R UsER S MANUAL 11 1 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the binary arithmetic instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double wor
290. R k k RK RK RK RK Digital I O Register Address BRR RRR KK RK IK RK KR RK OK RK KK RK RK KK define GA_FCDR IO_GA_BASE 0x00 Data Register define GA_CSR_ERR IO_GA_BASE 0x12 Error Register define GA_FVER IO_GA_BASE 0x18 I O Version Register define GA_EMID IO_GA_BASE 0x19 Expansion Module ID Register define GA BCTL IO GA BASE 1 BRR IK RK IK RK OK IK OK RK RK RK RK I O Register Bit Definition BRR KKK RK IK KK IK RR KR IK IK KR IK RK RK RK RK define BCTL CENABLE 0x10 define BCTL NWR REQ 0x04 define BCTL NENABLE 0 01 define FCDR DATA LEN 16 Define Neuron Chip IO pins as follows IO 0 output bit PO RUN LED HIGH IO 1 output bit PO ERR LED HIGH IO 2 output bit IO LED HIGH IO 3 input bit PI ODE IO 4 input bit PI RUN IO 6 output bit F ERR LOW BRR kk RR RIKI RK KR RK RK KK CK RK RK RK RK Prototype KI KKK IK RK RK RK void initialize void void init internal io void void init external io void void init gate array void BRR KKK RK IK RK IK RK RK RK KR k k k k RK RK KK Global Variable BRR kk RR RK IR RK IK RK RK RR KK RK RK RK RK mtimer io check timer unsigned char csr error data CSR ERROR Reg data save area void initialize void OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 26 19 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODU
291. R on a computer 0040h Keep Data Sum Check Error This error indicates that the data designated to be maintained during power failure is broken because of memory backup failure Note that the keep data of internal relays and shift registers are cleared Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer If this error occurs when power is shut down for a short period of time after the battery is charged as specified the battery is defective and the CPU module has to be replaced 0080h User Program Syntax Error This error indicates that the user program has a syntax error Correct the user program and download the corrected user program to the OpenNet Controller The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred User program syntax errors include the following causes e Invalid opcode for basic instruction e Invalid operand for basic instruction e Invalid TIM CNT CC TC DC SFR N preset value or data e Invalid opcode for advanced instruction e Invalid data for advanced instruction e Invalid operand for advanced instruction e Invalid repeated usage of advanced instructions such as DISP or DGRD e User program capacity over error 0100h User Program Writing Error This error indicates a failure of writing into the OpenNet Controller CPU module ROM when downloading a user pro gram The error code is cleared when writing into the ROM is completed successfully If this error occurs frequently the OpenNet Controll
292. REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Internal Relays for INTERBUS Master Information Three special internal relays are assigned for the INTERBUS master station control and status information CPU Power Stopped OFF Description R W When M8030 is turned on the INTER BUS master is initialized When the INTERBUS master detects a ar M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG BUS NG M8036 is turned R Maintained Cleared M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault When the INTERBUS master detects R Maintained Cleared peripheral fault M8037 is turned on M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize R W Maintained Cleared When critical error is found in the INTER M8040 INTERBUS Master E R 5 BUS master hardware software the master is initialized M8040 or M8041 is M8041 INTERBUS Master Error turned on depending on error contents R Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared e When the remote I O network is subjected to large noises the remote I O communication is affected When such a trouble occurs it is possible to initialize the remote I O master module to restore normal operation Include special data register D8178 INTERBUS master system error information in the user program to detect any error in the remote I O system e When the CPU module at the remote I O master station and the remote I O slave modules are pow ered up simultaneously the remote I O master module may fail to recognize the slave modu
293. S1 0 before the process variable reaches the AT set point 51 21 2 Calculate the dead time based on the derived maximum slope 3 Based on the maximum slope and dead time calculate the four Dead Time PID parameters dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 209 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S2 Control Relay Turn on or off appropriate outputs or internal relays starting with the operand designated by S2 before executing the PID instruction as required Operands S244 through 2 7 are for read only to reflect the PID and auto tuning statuses Operand Function Description R W ON Direct control action PET Condo action OFF Reverse control action RIT ON Manual mode 5241 Auto manual mode OFF Auto mode R W 9242 Output manipulated ON Enable output manipulated variable upper and lower limits S116 and 1417 R W variable limit enable OFF Disable output manipulated variable upper and lower limits 51 16 and 1417 S243 Integral start coefficient ON Disable integral start coefficient 51 10 R W disable OFF Enable integral start coefficient 51 10 ON When process variable S140 2 high alarm value S1 14 AE Vnde RON EOUE OFF When process variable 51 0 lt high alarm value 51414 R ON When process variable S1 0 lt low alarm value 51 15 3249 Lowalar output OFF When process variable S1 0 gt low alarm value 51 15 R S2 6 Control output Goes on and off according to the AT parameters or
294. S2 1 gt D1 D1 1 BW When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S2 is subtracted from 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand S1 The result is set to destination operand D1 and borrow M8003 MUL Multiplication Datatype Worl S1 x S2 D1 D1 1 H MULON SE OH CARE CREE il Data ape D orto SISAS DEDE When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S1 is multiplied by 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand S2 The result is set to 32 bit data designated by desti nation operand D1 When the result exceeds the valid range for data types D or L the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user pro gram execution error are turned on DIV Division Data type W or I H OMe ok Sen DIR 1 52 DI quotient D1 1 remainder Data type D or L SI S141 S2 S2 1 D1 D1 1 quotient D1 2 D1 3 remainder When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S1 is divided by 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand S2 The quotient is set to 16 or 32 bit destination oper and D1 and the remainder is set to the next 16 or 32 bit data When S2 is 0 dividing by 0 the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are turned on A user program execution error also occurs in the following division operations Data type I 32768 1 Data type L 2147483648 1 dee OPENNET CONTROLLE
295. S485 Port 7 RS485 B RS485 line B 8 RS485 G RS485 line SG 9 24V Power supply 24V DC Power Supply Terminals 10 oV Power supply 0V DC 11 T Frame ground 9 Expansion Connector For connecting a digital I O module or functional module 10 Remote I O Master Module Connector For connecting a remote I O master module compatible with INTERBUS This connector is located on the left side of the CPU module and usually covered with an end plate When connecting a remote I O master module remove the end plate from the CPU module and attach the remote I O master module 11 End Plate A pair of end plates are supplied with the CPU module Remove the end plate from the CPU module before connecting digital I O and functional modules then attach the end plates on both sides of the assembly For removing the end plates see page 3 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 23 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Normal Operating Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C operating ambient temperature Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C Relative Humidity Level RH1 30 to 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 2 IEC 60664 1 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Altitude Operation 0 to 2 000m 0 to 6 565 feet Transport 0 to 3 000m 0 to 9 840 feet Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 sweep cycles per axis on
296. Shift Reg ister section on page 7 20 Next the SFRN instruction is programed as detailed in the Reverse Shift Register section on page 7 22 Ladder Diagram Program List Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction Rung 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 I3 6 7 6 9 Rung 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Rung 3 R23 00 R24 Ql R26 Q2 Structural Diagram Forward Shifting Reset First Bit R22 3t of Bits 6 Reset esp I2 Last Bit R22 of Bits 6 15 Reverse Shifting Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 23 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SOTU SOTD Single Output Up and Down The SOTU instruction looks for the transition of a given input from off to on The SOTD instruction looks for the transi tion of a given input from on to off When this transition occurs the desired output will turn on for the length of one scan The SOTU or SOTD instruction converts an input signal to a one shot pulse signal The SOTU or SOTD instruction is followed by one address A total of 4096 SOTU and SOTD instructions can be used in a user program If operation is started while the given input is already on the SOTU output will not turn on The transition from off to on is what triggers the SOTU instruction When a relay of the OpenNet Controller relay output module is defined as the SOTU or SOTD output it may not operate if the scan time is not compat
297. Side Side Bridge pins 5 and 9 inside the Use inch sized screws UNC4 40 to fasten housing of the male connector the cable connectors to INTERBUS ports Stripping and Clamping Cable Ends 3 8 20 Next place the braided shield back over the cable First strip the cable sheath 20 mm from both ends of sheath the cable and shorten the braided shield by 12 mm Clamp the shield under the strain relief in the connector Bare the wire ends 3 mm Trim the unused white wire housing for conductive connection with the housing Do not install the INTERBUS cable in parallel with or close to motor lines Keep the INTERBUS cable away from noise sources e Turn power off before wiring the INTERBUS cable Make sure of correct wiring before turning power on e Use a special INTERBUS cable and connect the cable as shown above Use D sub connectors with metal or metal coated housing Connect the cable shield with the connector housing electrically e Leave open the remote out connector at the last station in the network e Supply power to each slave station or to each group of stations separately e Master and slave stations may be powered up in any order But if a slave station is not powered up while the master is in preparation for transmission a network error will result e Causes of network errors include disconnection or short circuit of the network cable strong external noise invalid com mand sent to the master station
298. Stations Master Station D8400 D7000 D7001 D7010 D7011 D8401 D7020 D7021 D7030 D7031 D8402 D7040 D7041 D7050 D7051 D8403 D7060 D7061 D7070 D7071 D8400 D7000 D7001 D7010 D7011 D8400 D7000 D7001 D7010 D7011 D8400 D7000 D7001 D7010 D7011 D8400 D7000 D7001 D7010 D7011 Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data Communication Error Transmit Data Receive Data ave Stati ave Stati ave Stati ave Stati D8429 Communication Error D8400 Communication Error D7580 D7581 Transmit Data D7590 D7591 Receive Data D8430 Communication Error D7600 D7601 Transmit Data D7610 D7611 Receive Data AA AAA D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Station 30 D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Example 2 Transmit Data 10 Words and Receive Data 10 Words Master Station D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Rece
299. T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X 52 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 14 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results XK X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the HTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X m m When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 145 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOA Quantity of Digits 4 Binary SOTU HTOA W 51 S2 D1 4660 pe 4880 Quantity of Digits 3 Binary HTOA W
300. TB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Rotary Switch Terminal No Channel n Position Voltage output 0 to 10V COM GND Voltage output 10V COM GND Voltage output 0 to 5V COM GND Voltage output 25V COM GND Current output 4 to 20mA COM GND Voltage output 0 to 10V COM GND Voltage output 10V COM GND Voltage output 0 to 5V COM GND Voltage output 25V COM GND Current output 4 to 20mA COM GND Channel 0 L IL IL ILILILIL IL a C5 C2 C0 C2 C02 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C02 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 Channel 1 Wiring Example Suppose that an analog output module is the sixth functional module installed in the OpenNet Controller system To gener ate a 4V analog output voltage from channel 1 using the 0 to 5V output range set the rotary switch to 2 and store a digital value of 3200 to link register L601 which is assigned to channel 1 of the sixth functional module Because 5V x 3200 4000 4V digital value 3200 is converted to an analog value of 4V and outputted to terminals 15 and 16 of the analog output module For wiring schematic and precautions see page 3 8 Notes e Before mounting the analog output module first set the rotary switch to meet the required analog output range After set ting the rotary switch power up the CPU and other modules e The COM GND terminals of each ch
301. Talk protocol has all seven layers in compliance with the reference model of the Open System Interconnection OSD issued by the International Standard Organization ISO Neuron Chip Some special LSI Neuron Chips that support the LonTalk protocol have firmware embedded in the built in memory The Neuron Chip used in the LONWORKS interface module is Toshiba TMP3150B1AF with firmware embedded in the exter nal memory flash memory This Neuron Chip uses a 1OMHz quartz clock oscillator The Neuron Chip and peripheral cir cuit are powered through the CPU bus Application Program The application program for the LONWORKS interface module is in compliance with the application layer of the OSI refer ence model and is described in Neuron C that is derived from ANSI C Communication data is transferred through the registers located between the OpenNet Controller CPU bus and the Neuron Chip external memory expansion bus An application program including access to the registers is created and embedded in the external memory flash memory along with firmware by IDEC before shipment Users do not have to create and install application programs although programmers familiar with Neuron C can also create or modify the application pro gram using a special tool such as LonBuilder Developer s Kit When a user creates or modifies the application program the user must keep a backup file For application program examples see pages 26 18 through 26 22 Network
302. Transmit Data Blue GND Ground RXD Receive Data Green dE DSR Data Set Ready Brown SG Signal Ground Gray SG Signal Ground Red NC No Connection White Barcode Reader Caution Do not connect any wiring to the NC no connection pins otherwise the OpenNet Controller and the barcode reader may not work correctly and may be damaged Description of Operation A barcode reader is used to scan barcodes of 8 numerical digits The scanned data is sent to the OpenNet Controller through the RS232C port 1 and stored to data registers The upper 8 digits of the data are stored to data register D20 and the lower 8 digits are stored to data register D21 Programming Special Data Register Special DR Description D8200 0 RS232C port 1 user communication mode not modem mode Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch Since this example uses the RS232C port 1 turn on communication selector DIP switch 2 to select the user communica tion mode See page 17 2 Setting Communication Parameters Set the communication parameters to match those of the barcode reader See page 17 3 For details of the communication parameters of the barcode reader see the user s manual for the barcode reader An example is shown below Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits 7 Parity check Even Stop bits 1 ier OPENNET CONTROL
303. Variables The LonTalk protocol allocates communication data to network variables NV specifically designed to simplify the proce dures for packet transmission The variables are available in input network variables and output network variables The values of output network variables are transmitted to input network variables of the target node on the network Details are described on pages 26 9 and 26 23 Network Management When setting up a LONWORKS network system the user has to install network configuration information shown below Addressing Determines each node address Binding Determines target nodes to communicate with Configuration Determines the type of message service retry cycles timeout period etc Use a network management tool from other manufacturers such as LonMaker for Windows Integration Tool to install network configuration information An external interface file XIF extension unique to each product series is needed to install the network configuration information The external interface file for the LONWORKS interface module is available from IDEC The user must keep a backup file of the information used for network management 26 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL LoNWoRKS Network System Setup Various LONWORKS compliant devices such as the LONWORKS interface module and IDEC SX5L communication I O terminals can be connected to the LONWORKS network 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE M ODULE The OpenNet Controller c
304. Voltage Output Current Comparison Output Delay 20 usec maximum Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter No Description ON OFF Operation R W M8010 Comparison Output Reset Turns off comparison output Continuous R W M8130 Up Down Status Counting up Counting down Continuous Read M8131 Comparison ON Status Comparison ON ON for1scan Read M8132 Current Value Zero clear Phase Z input ON ON for1scan Read M8133 Current Value Overflow Overflow occurred ON forlscan Read M8134 Current Value Underflow Underflow occurred ON for1scan Read M8135 Comparison Output Status Comparison output ON Comparison output OFF Continuous Read Note Special internal relays M8131 through M8134 go on for only one scan Special Data Registers for High speed Counter No Description Updated Read Write D8045 High speed Counter Current Value Every scan Read only D8046 High speed Counter Reset Value R W D8047 High speed Counter Preset Value R W In the first counting cycle the value stored in D8047 at the second scan is used as a preset value to compare with the cur rent value In subsequent counting cycles the D8047 value at the moment when coincidence occurred is used as a preset value for the next counting cycle Gate and Reset Inputs for High speed Counter Any Input or Internal Relay High speed Counter Gate Input Enables counting Stops countin
305. When initialized 24 6 D8061 INTERBUS Node 2 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8062 INTERBUS Node 3 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8063 INTERBUS Node 3 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8064 INTERBUS Node 3 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8065 INTERBUS Node 3 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8066 INTERBUS Node 4 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8067 INTERBUS Node 4 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8068 INTERBUS Node 4 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8069 INTERBUS Node 4 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8070 INTERBUS Node 5 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8071 INTERBUS Node 5 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8072 INTERBUS Node 5 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8073 INTERBUS Node 5 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8074 INTERBUS Node 6 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8075 INTERBUS Node 6 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8076 INTERBUS Node 6 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8077 INTERBUS Node 6 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8078 INTERBUS Node 7 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8079 INTERBUS Node 7 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8080 INTERBUS Node 7 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8081 INTERBUS Node 7 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8082 INTERBUS Node 8 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8083 INTERBUS Node 8 Length Code When initialized 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 6 13 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Allocation
306. a _ 6 12 Digital I O Module Operands 6 18 Functional Module Operands 6 18 Bit Designation of Link Register 6 19 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Basic Instruction List 2 ie uad acea Dr ema ed eq des Are ed 7 1 LOD Load and LODN Load Not isssssseeee a a aG 7 2 OUT Output and OUTN Output 7 2 SET and RST Reset see eee oo a Ev A 7 3 AND and ANDN And Not 0 ccc hh 74 OR and ORN Or Not ee od Saeed OE We EVER RESTER EE 74 AND LOD Load ees recte E Ped eae LE REP as 75 OR LOD Load d ee one aul e et WD Shae aad Cete 75 BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP 74 TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer 0 0 RR Hn 78 CNT CDP and CUD Counter n ORE te 7 11 and CC Counter Comparison 7 14 and TC2 Timer Comparison 7 16 DC and gt Data Register lt 7 18 SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift Register 7 20 SOTU SOTD Single Output Up and Down 7 24 MCS and MCR Master Control Set
307. a value larger than 500 the control period is set to 50 0 sec The ON pulse duration of the control output S2 6 is determined by the product of the control period S1 13 and the output manipulated variable S1 1 Example Control period 5 sec 51 13 is set to 50 Output Manipulated Variable 51 1 80 60 50 Control Output S2 6 ON 4 sec ON 3 sec ON 2 5 sec OFF Control Period S1 13 5 sec 5 sec 1414 High Alarm Value The high alarm value is the upper limit of the process variable S1 0 to generate an alarm When the process variable is higher than or equal to the high alarm value while the start input for the PID instruction is on the high alarm output control relay S24 is turned on When the process variable is lower than the high alarm value the high alarm output control relay S2 4 is turned off When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required high alarm value of 0 through 4000 to the data regis ter designated by 1 14 When S1 14 stores a value larger than 4000 the high alarm value is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S144 set to 1 set a required high alarm value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designated by 51 14 The high alarm value must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S146 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 If the high alarm value is set to a value
308. a in the link register is changed within 15 msec the preceding data is not transmitted to the interface module Data communication between the CPU module and the interface module through link registers is not in synchronism with the user program scanning When the CPU is powered up the transmit data in the link registers are cleared to 0 Consequently 0 cannot be transmitted in the first cycle immediately after the CPU is powered up because the transmit network variables are not updated Processing Receive Data When the interface module receives data from the network corresponding receive network variables are updated and the updated data is stored to the receive data area of link registers in the CPU module The refresh cycle of reading from the interface module to the link register is also approximately 15 msec and is not in syn chronism with the user program scanning When the interface module receives subsequent data within 15 msec the incom ing data is stored in the buffer and is transmitted to link registers every 15 msec The data in the link register is read each time the CPU module scans the user program dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 269 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Function Area Setting for LonWorks Node The quantity of transmit receive data for LONWORKS network communication is specified using the Function Area Setting in WindLDR The OpenNet Controller CPU module recognizes all functional modules such as LONWOR
309. a program to jump to three different portions of program depending on the input When input 10 is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments 1 M8122 is the 100 msec clock special internal relay C2 When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 msec increments M8123 is the 10 msec clock special internal relay e When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 msec increments Using the Timer Instruction with Program Branching When the timer start input of the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction is already on timedown begins immediately at the location jumped to starting with the timer current value When using a program branch it is important to make sure that timers are initialized when desired after the jump If it is necessary to initialize the timer instruction set to the preset value after the jump the timer s start input should be kept off for one or more scan cycles before initialization Otherwise the timer input on will not be recognized Using the SOTU SOTD Instructions with Program Branching Check that pulse inputs of counters and shift registers and input of single outputs SOTU and SOTD are maintained dur ing the jump if required Hold the input off for one or mo
310. able FC2A KMIC The DTR or ER indicator on the modem does not tum on Cause A wrong cable is used or wiring is incorrect Solution Use the modem cable FC2A KMIC When a start internal relay is turned on the data of D8211 D8311 modem mode status does not change Cause 1 D8200 D8300 does not store 1 and the modem mode is not enabled Solution 1 Store 1 to D8200 or D8300 when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively Cause 2 Communication selector DIP switch setting is wrong and the modem mode is not enabled Solution 2 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively When an initialization string is sent a failure occurs but sending ATZ completes successfully Cause The initialization string is not valid for the modem Solution Refer to the user s manual for the modem and correct the initialization string When a dial command is sent a result code NO DIALTONE is returned and the telephone line is not connected Cause 1 The modular cable is not connected Solution 1 Connect the modular cable to the modem Cause 2 The modem is used in a PBX environment Solution 2 Add 10 or 20 to the value stored in D8201 D8301 when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively and try initialization again Dialing completes successfully but the telephone line is disconnected in a short period of time Cause 1 The modem settings at the both ends of the line are di
311. abled by an END pro cessing From enabling the RXD instruction by an END processing until incom ae Receiving dala ing data is received 48 Data receive complete From receiving incoming data until the received data is converted and p stored in data registers according to the receive format TE All data receive operation is completed and the next data receive is 64 Receive instruction complete made possible User communication receive RXD instructions are cancelled by special internal relay M8022 or 128 instruction cancel flag active M8023 If the receive status code is other than shown above an error of receive instruction is suspected See User Communication Error Code on page 17 25 Receive Data Byte Count The data register next to the operand designated for receive status stores the byte count of data received by the RXD instruction When a start delimiter end delimiter and BCC are included in the received data the byte counts for these codes are also included in the receive data byte count Example Data register D200 is designated as an operand for receive status e Receive status e Receive data byte count D200 D201 7 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Special internal relays M8022 and M8023 are used to cancel all RXD1 and RXD2 instructions respectively While the OpenNet Controller has completed receive format and is ready for receiving incoming d
312. adder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 0 H 10 MO Program List Program List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 DC 1 2 AND 3 OUT e To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 7 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DC and DC Data Register Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 MOWW S1 D1 D10 D2 DC D2 DC gt D2 C Timing Chart Input I1 e D10 Value D2 Value ON OFF Output Q1 Mes Output 00 Ladder Diagram 2 MOWW S1 D1 D50 D30 Ladder Diagram 3 MOWW S1 D1 DO D15 Ladder Diagram 4 MOVW S1 D1 I1 D100 D20 DC gt D20 150 REP Program List Instruction Prgm Adrs CO Ui C Output 00 is on when data register D2 value is 5 Output Q1 is turned on when data register D2 value is 3 or more Timing Chart D30 Value Output Q0 ON OFF Output QO is on when data register D30 value is 500 Timing Chart D15 Value 200 355 521 249 200 350 390 600 ON Output Q1 off Output 1 is on when data register D15 value is 350 or more Timing Chart D20 Value ON OFF Output Q2 Be Output QO Output Q2 is on while data register D20 value is between 149 and 100 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 19 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift Register The shift register consists of a tota
313. adecimal digits 0 through F Each digit of the error code indicates a different set of conditions requiring attention After the error code is cleared as described on the preceding page the error code box is left blank For example the error code may read out 0021 This indicates two conditions requiring attention User program sum check error from the third chart and Power failure from the fourth chart If the read out displays OOOD this indicates three conditions exist from only the fourth chart Error Code Most Significant Digit F000 E000 0000 000 B000 A000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0000 INTERBUS master access error X X O bus initialize error xX X Error Code 2nd Digit from Left FOO E00 DOO C00 BOO A00 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 000 User program writing error X X X X X X X X Protect output overload error X X XX XIX Calendar clock error X X X X X X XX I O bus error X X X X X Xx x Error Code 3rd Digit from Left Fo o po co BO ao 90 60 50 40 20 10 o0 TIM CNT preset value sum check error X X X X X X X X User program RAM sum check error X X X X XX XIX Keep data sum check error X X X xX X X X Xx User program syntax error X X X X X X Error Code Least Significant Digit
314. after the input to the CDISP instruction is turned on Keep the input to the CDISP instruction for the period of time shown below to process the display data Scan Time Display Processing Time 5 msec or more 3 scan times x Quantity of digits When the scan time is less than 5 msec the data cannot be displayed correctly When the scan time is too short to ensure normal display set a value of 6 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 16 5 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example CDISP The following example demonstrates a program to display STOP on character display units when input 10 is off When input 10 of on RUN flashes on the display units When input 10 is off decimal values for ASCII character codes are moved to data registers DO and D1 21332 5354h ST 20256 4F20h OP MOVW S1 1 21332 DO MOV W S1 1 REP 20256 D1 M8121 is the 1 sec clock pulse special internal relay MOV W S1 1 n 10 10 M8121 21077 DO When input IO and M8121 are on decimal values for ASCII character codes are moved to data registers DO and D1 MOV W S1 1 20000 D1 21077 5255h RU 20000 4E20h N space ara i E Ao oe 8224 2020h space space M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay CDISP z d za TEM S1 specifies data register DO no conv
315. al internal relays M8005 through M8007 and M8140 through M8177 are assigned for the data link communication M8005 Data Link Communication Error When an error occurs during communication in the data link system M8005 turns on The M8005 status is maintained when the error is cleared and remains on until M8005 is reset using WindLDR or until the CPU is turned off The cause of the data link communication error can be checked using Online Monitor followed by Online PLC Status Error Status Details See page 21 4 M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station When M8006 at the master station is turned on in the data link system data link communication is stopped When M8006 is turned off data link communication resumes The M8006 status is maintained when the CPU is turned off and remains on until M8006 is reset using WindLDR When M8006 is on at the master station M8007 is turned on at slave stations in the data link system M8007 Data Link Communication Initialize Flag Master Station Data Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station M8007 has a different function at the master or slave station of the data link communication system Master station Data link communication initialize flag When M8007 at the master station is turned on during operation the link configuration is checked to initialize the data link system When a slave station is powered up after the master station turn M8007 on to initialize the
316. alization string amp D2 Hang up and disable auto answer on DTR detection When the DTR signal turns off the telephone line is disconnected The OpenNet Controller uses this function to disconnect the telephone line This command must be included in the initialization string amp 1 DCD ON with carrier from remote modem DCD tracks the state of the data carrier from the remote modem An ON condition of DCD indicates the presence of a carrier This command must be included in the initialization string 50 2 Ring to answer ON Specifies the ring on which the modem will pick up the telephone line SO 2 specifies that the modem answers an incoming call when detecting 2 ring calls S0 0 disables the auto answer function Commands included in several initialization strings Commands in this category are essential depending on the modem used for the OpenNet Controller MNP result codes disabled WO Conventional result codes are used and reliable link result codes are not used AO Set MNP maximum block size to 64 bytes X4 Enables dial tone and busy detection X3 Enables busy tone detection X4 X3 X0 X0 Disables telephone line monitor signal detection PBX systems and outside telephone lines often use different line monitor signals When using the modem the PBX environment include in the initialization string to disable the signal detection 103 1 Q2 Enables hardware flow control
317. alues for the day of week comparison data S1 constant week table output control S3 and comparison output operand D1 3 Hour minute comparison data S2 constant has a relationship ON time lt OFF time Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on the same day When the current day and time reach the presets the output designated by operand D1 is turned on and off 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 Tue Wi i Sun Mon ed Thu Fri Sat M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay WKCMP 51 S2 53 D1 M8125 ON 62 830 0 Q0 S1 62 specifies Monday through Friday WKCMP 51 52 53 D1 WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 30 on Monday through OFF 62 1715 0 00 S1 Same constant value WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 17 15 on the same day 2 Constant values ON time lt OFF time S3 Same constant value D1 Same operand 154 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Conditions for Interval Comparison with ON OFF Times on Different Days When WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions are programmed to turn on and off the output on different days the five conditions shown below are needed to enable the interval comparison Otherwise the instructions work as ordinary clock data comparison instructions 1 WKCMP ON is followed by WKCMP OFF immediately which has the same input contact 2 The matching WKCMP ON and
318. am 10 00 n 00 Valid Operands Instruction SET RST L 3 dw E 8000 8117 1000 0 1317 15 Program List Timing Chart Prom Ads 0 LOD 10 1 SET 00 2 LOD 11 3 RST 00 100 0 717 15 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 73 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS AND 3H and ANDN And Not xt The AND instruction is used for programming a NO contact in series The ANDN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in series The AND or ANDN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON 00 ON 01 When both inputs 10 and 11 are on output QO is on When either input IO or I1 is off output QO is off When input 10 is on and input 11 is off output Q1 is on When either input IO is off or input I1 is on output Q1 is off Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 Valid eI T 9 M C R 1 AND 02557 100071715 ANDN 0597 0597 000 8237 0255 0255 0255 10000131715 OR and ORN Or Not The OR instruction is used for programming a NO contact in parallel The ORN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in parallel The OR or ORN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 obs 10 00 ON 1 11 ON 00 ON 10 Ql Ql 11 When either input 10 or I1 is on output QO is on When both input
319. an be used as a node by adding the LONWoRKS interface module to the right of the OpenNet Controller CPU module A maximum of seven OpenNet interface modules such as LONWORKS interface modules and DeviceNet slave modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module CI POWER ERUN CHSC our oO 001 IT oo oo ooo ooo DDD DDD idec IDEC 1 Module OpenNet Controller CPU Module LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A S X5LS1 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL SERVICE REQUEST LonWorks Network LON Pow o SX5L QO0O000000 wp E RRO SER O ooo00000000000000000000000 Oo000000000000000000000000 IDEC SX5L Communication 1 Terminal Other LonWorks Compliant Devices 26 3 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWORKS Interface Module Parts Description Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4
320. and OK OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagram 8 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Data link communication is impossible Is Ommunication selector DIP switch 1 set to ON YES Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON to select data link mode Did you pres the communication enable NO button for 4 sec Did you power down and up after changing the DIP switch S Enable Data Link selected at the master station Y Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once Click the check box for Enable Data Link in the WindLDR Function Area Settings and down load the user program again see page 21 7 Is M8006 on at the master station Turn off M8006 using WindLDR M8006 Data link communication prohibit flag M8007 Data link communication initialize flag Is the communication cable connected to data link termi nals correctly Make sure of correct wiring see page 21 2 Check error codes for the troubled stations see page 214 Is the error code 0 at all stations For the master station click the Reset COMx button see page 21 11 or turn on M8007 during operation using WindLDR Reset the error codes at all stations using WindLDR Y power on afte
321. and click OK Next in the BCC dialog box enter 1 in the Cal culation Start Position box click ADD for the Calculation Type click BIN to ASCII for the Conversion Type and click 2 for the Digits When finished click OK 7 Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Constant Hexadecimal and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX 03h When finished click OK dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 23 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 8 In the Receive instruction dialog box type M20 in the destination D1 box and type D200 in the destination D2 box When finished click OK Tpm 01 Br lene 5 Hip BIET AR i 8 Pan d mE om Doe Ld von coco Programming of the RXD1 instruction is complete and the receive data will be stored as follows D20 5678h 222136 D21190ABh 237035 1724 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL User Communication Error When a user communication error occurs a user communication error code is stored in the data register designated as a transmit status in the TXD instruction or as a receive status in the RXD instruction When multiple errors occur the final error code overwrites all preceding errors and is stored in the status data register 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS The status data register also contains transmit rec
322. ands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X A X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S2 or D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S2 or DI When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current value is read out Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 S2 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execu tion error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Unlike the IMOV and IMOVN instructions offset operands S2 and D2 must always be designated Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X d When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the S2 or D2 1 point is used Example IBM VN SOTU IBMVN W S1 52 01 D2 M20 010 Q10 C5 M20 D10 NOT gt
323. annel are connected together internally dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 33 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Expansion Power Supply Module The FC3A EA1 expansion power supply module is used to mount more than seven I O and functional modules When a maximum of 15 I O modules are mounted the number of I O points is expanded from 224 to 480 maximum Whether an expansion module is used or not seven functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LON WORKS interface modules can be mounted at the maximum in either the normal or expansion slots Expansion Power Supply Module Type Number Module Name Expansion Power Supply Module Type No 1 The expansion power supply module is supplied with the following attachments Cable Connector 1 pc cable length 1m 3 28 ft Contact 3 pcs used to extend the cable length Parts Description 6 Expansion Connector Wess reo CF rr cr 1 Module ID rr mE A 2 Power LED q re 3 Terminal Cover rr 4 Terminal Label 5 Cable Connector 1 Module ID EXP indicates the expansion power supply module ID 2 Power LED Turns on when power is on 3 Terminal Cover The terminal cover flips open to the right 4 Terminal Label Indicates terminal numbers 5 Cable Connector Nylon connector 5 pin 6 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules Expansion Power Supply Module Mounting Positio
324. as the S2 or D2 1 point is used xample IBMV SOTU IBMV W S1 S2 D1 D2 M10 010 930 5 MIO D10 gt Q30 C5 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the value of data register D10 designated by source operand M27 M20 M17 M15 M10 S2 is 5 the source data is determined by adding the offset to internal relay M10 designated by source operand S1 VASA 5th from M10 If the current value of counter C5 designated by destination a qs 3B operand D2 is 12 the destination is determined by adding the 2 1 040 g i offset to output Q30 designated by destination operand D1 ARA AUS SR 12th from Q30 As a result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M15 is moved to output Q44 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 9 11 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not 1 52 NOT gt DI 02 H IBMVN W S1 52 DI D p When input is on the values contained in operands designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 1 bit data so determined is inverted and moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in oper ands designated by D1 and D2 Valid Oper
325. aster Information 24 10 Special Internal Relays for INTERBUS Master Information 2441 Calculation of the INTERBUS Cycle 24 12 Start and Stop of Remote I O Communication 24 12 Function Area Setting for Remote I O Master Station 24 13 Precautions for Wiring INTERBUS Cable 24 15 INTERBUS Errr COd S xoi adam ade dee e Peete an ed De a 4 24 16 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Features 25 1 About 25 1 DeviceNet Network System Setup 25 2 DeviceNet Slave Module Parts Description 25 3 DeviceNet Slave Module Specifications 25 4 Wiring DeviceNet Slave Module 25 5 DIPS WItCH S ttingS oett Ped s Aon op ies 25 6 Link Registers for DeviceNet Network Communication 25 7 Function Area Setting for DeviceNet Slave 5 25 8 Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR 25 9 Starting Operation o v tiet eig rne ine 25 9 Trans MISSION TIME pr
326. ata turning on M8022 or M8023 cancels all receive instructions for RS232C port or port 2 respectively This function is useful to cancel receive instruc tions only without stopping the OpenNet Controller To make the cancelled RXD instructions active turn off the flag and turn on the input to the RXD instruction again dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 21 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Programming RXD Instruction Using WindLDR The following example demonstrates how to program a RXD instruction including a start delimiter skip BCC and end delimiter using WindLDR Converted data is stored to data registers D20 and D21 Internal relay M20 is used as destination D1 for the receive completion output Data register D200 is used as destination D2 for the receive status and data register D201 is used to store the receive data byte count Receive data example BCC calculation range STX BCC BCC ETX 02h a En Gan Gan ee aah fm sn on iain pm 39h 32h 03h Start Skip Stored to D20 Stored to D21 End Delimiter Delimiter RXD sample program sotu RXD S1 DI D2 Communication port RS232C port 1 1 16 M20 D200 Receive completion output 20 Receive status register D200 Receive data byte count D201 1 Start to program a RXD instruction Move the cursor where you want to insert the RXD instruction and type RXD You can also insert the RXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the menu bar and
327. ata type to store a negative value to a data register The set point value S3 must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 and smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 When an invalid value is designated as a set point the PID action is stopped and an error code is stored to the data register designated by 1 2 See Operating Status on page 20 3 Source Operand S4 Process Variable before Conversion The analog output from the transducer is inputted to the analog input module which converts the input data to a digital value of 0 through 4000 The digital value is stored to a link register L100 through L705 depending on the mounting posi tion of the analog input module and the analog input channel connected to the transducer Designate a link register as source operand S4 to store the process variable For example when the analog input module is mounted in the first slot from the CPU module among all functional mod ules such as analog I O and OpenNet interface modules not including digital I O modules and when the analog input is connected to channel 0 of the analog input module designate link register L100 as source operand S4 When the analog input module is mounted in the third slot and the analog input is connected to channel 4 designate link register L304 as source operand S4 Link Register Allocation Numbers for Source Operand S4 m Analog Input Channel A
328. ated variable lower limit S1 17 are enabled or disabled using the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 To enable the output manipulated variable upper lower limits turn on 5242 To disable the output manipulated variable upper lower limits turn off 5242 243 Integral Start Coefficient Disable The integral start coefficient S1 10 is enabled or disabled using the integral start coefficient disable control relay S243 To enable the integral start coefficient S1 10 turn off 524 3 the integral term is enabled as specified by the integral start coefficient S1 10 To disable the integral start coefficient S1 10 turn on S243 the integral term is enabled at the start of the PID action 244 High Alarm Output When the process variable S1 0 is higher than or equal to the high alarm value S1 14 while the start input for the PID instruction is on the high alarm output control relay S2 4 goes on When S1 0 is lower than 1 14 S244 is off 245 Low Alarm Output When the process variable S1 0 is lower than or equal to the low alarm value S1 15 while the start input for the PID instruction is on the low alarm output control relay S2 5 goes on When S1 0 is higher than 1 15 S245 is off 246 Control Output During auto tuning in auto mode with the auto manual mode control relay S241 set to off the control output S246 is turned on and off according to the AT control period S1 20 and AT output ma
329. ation Between input terminals Not isolated Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Load for I Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination M ethod Static Effect of Improper Input Connection Both sinking and sourcing input signals can be connected If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Screw Terminal Block Nylon Connector Connector on Mother Board MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 B10PS VH x 2 Phoenix Contact 5 Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 40 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 10 mA 24V DC Weight approx Input Operating Range The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below 210g 180g 30 9 re ON Area gt E 15 9 Transition A Area B 5 pot Area 0 1 5 44 7 8 8 Input Current mA Input Internal Circuit 3 3 O t E Input 2 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 32 point DC Input Module Specifications Type No Rated Input Voltage FC3A N32B4 FC3A N32B5 24V DC sink source input signal Input Voltage Range 20 4 to 27 6V DC Rated Input Current 4 9 mA point 24V DC Terminal Arrangemen
330. ation operands D22 If the current value of counter C10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 the source data is deter D23 mined by adding the offset to data register D20 designated by source operand S1 024 6450 D 20 4 D24 D25 20 If data register D25 contains a value of 20 the destination is determined by adding the offset to TN XT data register D10 designated by destination operand D1 D30 6450 D 10 20 D30 Mu C10 4 As a result when input IO is on the data in data register D24 is moved to data register D30 9 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOVN Indirect Move Not MOV in x irn a De When input is on the values contained in operands desig nated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 16 or 32 bit data so determined is inverted and moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 H S1 S2 D1 D2 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated a
331. ation parameters in WindLDR menu bar gt Configure gt Func tion Area Settings Comm Port Click the check box for Port 1 or Port 2 and click the Comm Param button Since the total of modem communication parameters is 10 bits set the value to a total of 10 bits 23 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE Programming Data Registers and Internal Relays To enable the modem mode and communicate through the telephone line the following settings are needed 1 Program to move to data register D8200 D8300 RS232C port communication mode selection to enable the modem mode at RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively Program to move a value 0 through 5 10 through 15 or 20 through 25 to data register D8201 D8301 modem initial ization string selection depending on your modem For applicable modems see page 23 4 If the predetermined initialization strings do not match your modem program a proper initialization string and enter the ASCII values to data registers starting with D8245 D8345 initialization string Make sure that the D8201 D8301 value is not changed after the new initialization string has been stored to data registers starting with D8245 D8345 To send out the new initialization string turn on internal relay M8050 M8080 initialization string start IR after the new values have been stored to the data registers Program to move 0 or to data register D8203 D8303 on line mode protocol selecti
332. ause and to correct the error Errors are checked in various stages While editing a user program on WindLDR incorrect operands and other data are rejected User program syntax errors are found during compilation on WindLDR When an incorrect program is down loaded to the OpenNet Controller user program syntax errors are still checked Errors are also checked at starting and dur ing operation of the OpenNet Controller When an error occurs the error is reported by turning on the ERROR LED on the OpenNet Controller and an error message can be viewed on WindLDR ERROR LED C ERROR g C HSC OUT For error causes to turn on the ERROR LED see page 27 4 Hiele Reading Error Data When any error occurs during the OpenNet Controller operation the error codes and messages can be read out using WindLDR on a computer Monitoring WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt PLC Status The PLC Status dialog box appears The general error code stored in special data register D8005 is displayed in the error code box Seay Tee 5 ep Fen Scan Tora Vua 3 Pu TN Poe TRANT Diane Wiki Tyran Progen acr 200 cee uma Duce Hurbs ES Details Button TET
333. auto mobiles making it possible to configure reliable networks with high noise immunity Transmission Distance and Nodes The maximum transmission distance is 500 meters when using a thick trunk cable at a data rate of 125k baud and the maximum quantity of nodes is 64 including a master station DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 25 1 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Network System Setup Various DeviceNet compliant devices such as the DeviceNet slave module and IDEC SX5D communication I O termi nals can be connected to the DeviceNet network The DeviceNet network requires a DeviceNet master module available from other manufacturers The OpenNet Controller can be used as a slave station by adding the DeviceNet slave module to the right of the OpenNet Controller CPU module A maximum of seven OpenNet slave modules such as DeviceNet slave modules and LONWORKS interface modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module 252 DeviceNet Master Station DeviceNet STATUS MODULE NET r3 E J a 0 og a a how nau on O n Chau sallinn ial E mmo 0 hl lao esl o a our oo iB a un saj
334. bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Monitor Enter M8000 in the Direct Monitor Dialog Note To turn on M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Set Reset Enter M8000 in the Direct Set Reset Dialog Press Set and OK Is stop or reset input designated using Function Area Settings Turn off the stop and reset inputs Is the RUN LED on Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 27 9 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 3 27 10 The ERROR LED is on Is the power voltage NO Supply the rated voltage 24V DC YES DC power 24V DC NO Is the ERROR LED Clear error codes using WindLDR See Note below Is the ERROR LED YES turned off YES turned off See page 27 3 Identify the error code and correct the error END Note Temporary errors can be cleared to restore normal operation by clearing error codes from WindLDR See page 27 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 4 Input module does not operate normally Is the input LED on Are input allocation numbers correct Is the wiring correct Correct the program Correct the wiring o YES Is the power voltage for th
335. bel Selects the input mode from five different signal ranges Rotary Switch Position Input Signal Range Resolution Input value of LSB 0 0 to 10V DC 2 5 mV 1 10V DC 5 mV 2 0 to 5V DC 1 25 mV 3 5V DC 2 5 mV 4 4 to 20 mA DC 4 uA V Fd Voltage Input O Current Input COMO 2500 Pl V 5 Differential Amplifier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Analog Input Module Specifications Type No Quantity of Input Channels 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A AD1261 6 channels Terminal Arrangement See page 2 30 Input Impedance within Signal Range Voltage input 1 MQ minimum Current input 2500 Maximum Error at 25 C 0 6 of full scale Input Error Temperature Coefficient 30 013 C typical M aximum Error over Full Temperature Range 1 of full scale Digital Resolution 4000 increments Data Type in Application Program 0 to 4000 Digital Output Reading at Overload 4000 Input Mode Selection Using a rotary switch see page 2 28 Type of Input Differential input Common M ode Characteristics Common mode reject ratio CMRR 50 dB Common M ode Voltage 16V DC Total Input System Transfer Time 3 msec per channel 1 scan time maximum Conversion Time 3 msec per channel Conversion Method XA type ADC Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise Te
336. bled S1 4 is set to 0 the data register designated by S140 stores the same value as the process variable S4 S141 Output Manipulated Variable While the PID action is in progress the data register designated by 1 1 holds 0 through 100 read from the manipulated variable 32768 through 32767 stored in the data register designated by D1 omitting values less than 0 and greater than 100 The percent value in 51 1 determines the ON duration of the control output S246 in proportion to the control period S1 13 While manual mode is enabled with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to on S1 1 stores 0 through 100 read from the manual mode output manipulated variable S 14 18 While auto tuning AT is in progress S1 1 stores 0 through 100 read from the AT output manipulated variable 814 22 142 Operating Status The data register designated by 51 2 stores the operating or error status of the PID instruction Status codes 1X through 6X contain the time elapsed after starting auto tuning or PID action X changes from 0 through 9 in 10 minute increments to represent 0 through 90 minutes The time code remains 9 after 90 minutes has elapsed When the operation mode S1 3 is set to 1 AT PID the time code is reset to 0 at the transition from AT to PID Status codes 100 and above indicate an error stopping the auto tuning or PID action When these errors occur a user pro gram execution error will result turning on the ERR LED and
337. bus NG is turned on Is the shield of the INTERBUS cable terminated correctly Terminate the shield of the INTERBUS cable correctly see page 24 15 Are FG terminals Connect the FG terminal on the master and eee e slave modules to a proper ground Is any cable connector Plug in the cable connector correctly unplugged Is any network cable broken Repair or replace the cable __ Are all remote 1 0 slave stations powered up Power all remote 1 slave stations __ Call IDEC for assistance End Initialize the remote I network by turning on special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS master initialize or power down and up the OpenNet Controller CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 23 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 17 27 24 The PF peripheral fault LED on the remote 1 master module is on Monitor special data register D8183 INTERBUS master error location using WindLDR to locate the remote 1 node number hexadecimal where an error occurred Remove the cause of the error referring to the manual for the node END OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL A module error occurred at a remote 1 0 slave station When this error occurs the remote 1 network contin
338. by the quantity of digits designated by operand digits and converted back to 32 bit binary data Nod Valid values for each of 51 and S1 1 are 0 through 9999 The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7 Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits shifted Data Type Double Word digits to shift 1 51 S141 Before shift 011121311415 1617 1 10 Shift to the left After shift 0 1 11 121314 5 670 0 MSD LSD Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 51 Source 1 Data for BCD shift X X digits Quantity of digits to shift 1 7 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7 for the double word data type Make sure that the source data determined by 51 and S1 1 is between 0 and 9999 for each data register or link register If either source data is over 9999 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long zx X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 2 points double word type are used Example BCDLS MOVW M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay REP 51 123 1 D10
339. byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Allocation No D8090 D8091 D8092 D8093 D8094 D8095 D8096 D8097 D8098 D8099 D8100 D8101 D8102 D8103 D8104 D8105 D8106 D8107 D8108 D8109 D8110 D8111 D8112 D8113 D8114 D8115 D8116 D8117 D8118 D8119 D8120 D8121 D8122 D8123 D8124 D8125 D8126 D8127 D8128 D8129 D8130 D8131 D8132 24 8 D8133 Node 10 Node 11 Node 12 Node 13 Node 14 Node 15 Node 16 Node 17 Node 18 Node 19 Node 20 Description Logical Device No Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No
340. can list in the master e System Operation Data Flow 1 SX5D SBM16K sends 8 input data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBM16K 2 SX5D SBM16P sends 8 input data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBM16P 3 SX5D SBM16K sends 8 input data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBRO8 e Calculating the Response Time Response time Input processing time slave Communication time slave to master Data processing time master and PLC Communication time master to slave Output processing time slave e Measured Value of Response Time SX5D SBM16K Input ON OFF 5 SX5D SBM 16K Output ON OFF response time Approx 18 msec 17471532 Node 0 MAC ID 0 DeviceNet DeviceNet Master Power Supply Module 1747 SDN DeviceNet Network Node 2 MAC ID 2 HOOOOOOOOOOER Ooo00o00000000000 oooo00000000000 Node 3 MAC ID 3 onaooooon00000000000 oooo0o00000000000000 Pow Sx5D 100 DeviceNet DeviceNet o 0000000 oo0o000000000000000 onooonoononoooonoon ooo ooo onaooooon0000000000000 oo oo oo goooo0o0000000000000000 ooooo0o000000000000000 o DeviceNet
341. ce connected to the local bus of the specified INTERBUS device Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage U for the module electronics made available by the BK module Remedy Check this local bus Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCD8hex to OCDBhex RB FAIL or ODD8hex to ODDBhex LB FAIL Meaning The local bus connected to the specified bus terminal module consists of more local bus devices than were entered in the active configuration Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCDChex to OCDFhex RB FAIL or ODDChex to ODDFhex LB FAIL Meaning The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device has an invalid ID code Add Error Info Error location Segment Position The error codes described above are excerpts from INTERBUS User Manual Generation 4 Controller Boards as of Firmware 4 12 Designation Order No IBS SYS FW G4 UM E 2745185 Section 3 Error Codes 2428 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Introduction D A This chapter describes DeviceNet slave module FC3A SX5DS1 used with the OpenNet Controller to interface with the DeviceNet network and provides details on the DeviceNet system setup and the DeviceNet slave module specifications The OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks For communication through the DeviceNet network the Devic
342. ced instruction the current value is read as source data Using Timer or Counter as Destination Operand As described above when a timer or counter is designated as a destination operand of an advanced instruction the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter Timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 65535 When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register the timer or counter cannot be designated as a des tination of an advanced instruction When executing such an advanced instruction a user program execution error will result If a timer or counter is designated as a destination of an advanced instruction and if the timer or counter is not pro grammed then a user program execution error will also result For details of user program execution error see page 27 6 Note When a user program execution error occurs the result is not set to the destination dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 3 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Data Types for Advanced Instructions When using move data comparison binary arithmetic Boolean computation bit shift rotate data conversion and coordi nate conversion instructions for the OpenNet Controller data types can be selected from word W integer I double word D or long L For other advanced instructions the data is processed in units of 16 bit word Data Type Symbol Bits peli Range of Decimal Va
343. ceives data from the slave station one after another After receiving data from slave stations the master station stores the data into data registers allocated to each slave station The process of updating data into data registers is called refresh The master station refreshes the received data in two ways separate refresh or simultaneous refresh mode Differences of these two refresh modes are listed below Mode Separate Refresh Mode Simultaneous Refresh Mode Since the master station refreshes received Since the master station uses an interrupt pro Master Station data at the END processing of the user pro cessing to refresh received data while executing Scan Time gram the scan time in the master station is the user program the scan time in the master affected Station is not affected All data of fixed data lengths are transmitted Transmit prame as selected in the Function Area Settings Only data that has been changed is trans mitted Data received from all slave stations is Master Station Data received from one slave station is ratrached at the END preceesima aftercomplet Refresh Timing refreshed at each END processing od g p ing communication with all slave stations Master OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller SE ave OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C When the data link system contains the OpenNet Controller and MICRO MICRO C set the baud
344. chronous 16 bit timer when the timer instruction is executed Error TML TIM TMH TMS 1 sec timer 100 msec timer 10 msec timer 1 msec timer Advance error 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec Minimum Behind error 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec Advance error 1000 msec 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec Maximum Behind error 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time Timeout Output Error The output RAM status is set to the actual output when the END instruction is processed So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timeout output turns on in a scan cycle The timeout output error shown below does not include output delay caused by the hardware Program Processing Timeout output error is equal to Tte behind error and can be between 0 and one scan time 0 Tte 1 scan time Timeout Output RAM Actual Output Tte Time from the timer instruction execution to the END processing 1 scan time Maximum and Minimum of Errors Error Timer Input Error Timer counting UL iE Total Error Error Error E Advance error 0 Note 0 0 Note 0 Minimum Behind error Tet 0 Tte 0 Maxi Advance error 0 Note Increment 0 Note Increment Tet Tte aximum Behind error 1 scan time Tet 1 scan time Tte 2 scan times Tet Tte Notes Advance error does not occur at the timer input and timeout output Tet Tte 1 scan time Increment is 1 sec TML 100 msec TIM 10 msec
345. clicking where you want to insert the RXD instruction in the program edit area then the Transmit dialog box appears Click RXD to change the dialog box to the Receive dialog box The Receive instruction dialog box appears Tepe 51 p B f Pan d cr ee Ere cance ri 2 Check that RXD is selected in the Type box and click Port 1 in the Port box Then click Insert The Data Type Selection dialog box appears You will program source operand S1 using this dialog box 3 Click Constant Hexadecimal in the Type box and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 02 to program the start delimiter STX 02h When finished click OK ues Antec Livan conc 17 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 4 Since the Receive instruction dialog box reappears repeat the above procedure In the Data Type Selection dialog box click Skip and click OK Next in the Skip dialog box type 4 in the Digits box and click OK 3 5 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Variable DR and click OK Next in the Variable Data Register dialog box type D20 in the DR No box and click ASCII to BIN to select ASCII to binary conversion Enter 4 in the Digits box 4 digits and 2 in the REP box 2 repeat cycles When finished click OK 6 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click BCC
346. configuration frame Remedy Replace the INTERBUS device which is connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the speci fied INTERBUS device or adapt in the configuration frame the entry to the length code Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position OCDOhex to OCD3hex RB FAIL or ODDOhex to ODD3hex LB FAIL After the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device was opened further meaning devices in addition to a BK module were included in a data ring Cause The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device carried out a voltage reset or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maximum permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position 0CD4hex to 0CD7hex RB FAIL or ODD4hex to ODD7hex LB FAIL Meaning Error in the 8 wire local bus connected to the specified INTERBUS device Defective local bus cable that belongs to the local bus of the specified device Cage Defective INTERBUS devi
347. ct Indefinite Accept 5 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Catch Input The catch input function is used to receive short pulses from sensor outputs regardless of the scan time Input pulses shorter than one scan time can be received First eight inputs of every DC input module can be designated to catch a rising or falling edge of short input pulses The Function Area Settings is used to designate first eight inputs of every DC input module as a catch input or normal input Input signals to normal input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Catch Input Specifications Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width 40 usec when the input filter is set to 0 msec Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width 150 usec when the input filter is set to 0 msec Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Filter Catch tab Keep Module nass Lik Module Number Selection gt Module 1 to 15 Input Filter Time Selection Groups of 8 inputs 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 msec Default 4 msec dria Fates Tien Sensu mnn im mun IM FETE s Catch Input Ri
348. cted with the communication selector DIP switch When the communication selec tor DIP switch setting is changed while the CPU is powered up press this button to enable the new communication mode for the RS485 and RS232C ports 3 Communication Selector DIP Switch Selects the communication mode for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also selects the device number for the CPU in the computer link or data link communication network DIP Switch No Function Setting 1 RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode Device numbers 0 through 31 for the CPU the computer 4 to 8 Device number selection 7 be link or data link communication network Data link mode Used for data link communication User communication mode Used for user communication or modem communication Maintenance mode Used for computer link communication between the CPU and WindLDR on computer After changing the settings of the communication selector DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communica tion enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode for the RS485 or RS232C port takes effect When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and
349. ction depending on current input condition When instructions following a LCAL instruction must be executed after the subroutine is called make sure the subroutine does not change input conditions unfavorably In addition include subsequent instructions in a new line separated from the LCAL instruction Correct Incorrect MOV W S1 1 REP DO D1 LCAL S1 0 EE MOVW S1 01 REP D20 D21 MOV W S1 1 REP DO LCAL 51 5 REP MOV W S1 D1 D20 D21 Separate the ladder line for each LCAL instruction 10 status may be changed by the subroutine upon return dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 3 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example LCAL and LRET The following example demonstrates a program to call three different portions of program depending on the input When the subroutine is complete program execution returns to the instruction following the LCAL instruction 184 When input 10 is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments Program execution returns to rung 1 input I1 M8122 is the 100 msec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 msec increments Program execution returns to
350. ctor Nylon Connector 5P x 1 Type No FC3A EA1 Note The expansion power supply module is supplied with a cable connector 1 meter long and 3 contacts for expanding cables OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL A3 APPENDIX Remote 1 Master Module Description Remote 1 Master Module compatible with INTERBUS OpenNet Interface Modules DeviceNet Slave Module Description Type No FC3A SX5SM1 Type No FC3A SX5DS1 LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A SX5LS1 SX5 Communication 1 Terminals Bus INTERBUS DeviceNet LONWORKS A4 1 O Type Input Type Type No DC Input 16 point source input 24V DC SX5S SBN16S 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5S SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5A SX5S SBR08 Transistor Output 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 6A common SX5S SBT16K 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5S SBT16P DC Input Transistor Output 8 point source input 24V DC 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4 common SX5S SBM16K 8 point source input 24V DC 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com SX5S SBM16P Blant 16 point source input 24V DC SX5D SBN16S g 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5D SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5A SX5D SBR08 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A
351. d 15 BCD4 10 00 D10 to data register D10 Wiring Diagram 16 DC Input Module 16 Transistor Sink Output Module FC3A N16B1 FC3A T16K1 Digital Switches COM Q0 o C 48 COM Ql i foe as 0 10 Q2 oj poo 10 11 Q3 o o o 12 04 13 Q5 8 14 Q6 JESE 15 Q7 057 101 16 oCOM 1 po 17 4V pee ote 7 010 COM 011 C 5 0894 110 Q12 ip Looe 11 013 10 04692 4 10 112 014 1 n 113 Q15 114 Q16 eI 115 017 12 044 55 116 COM TEORI 7 103 117 V 0 o o 4 24V DC _ Power Supply 164 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS CDISP Character Display 8 When input is on data designated by source operand 51 is icd set to outputs designated by operand D1 LAT DAT L KKK KK KK KKK One CDISP instruction can send data to 16 character display Data phase units at the maximum Low or High The CDISP instruction can be used up to 8 times in a user Latch phase program Low or High Note The CDISP instruction can be used on transistor output modules only Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to display X X X X 1 16 D1 Destination 1 First output numb
352. d 214 D8431 D8999 Reserved OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 647 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Digital 1 O Module Operands Input and output numbers are automatically allocated to each digital I O module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module A maximum of 7 digital I O or functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module without using an expansion power supply module so that a maximum of 224 I O points can be allocated in total When using an expan sion power supply module 15 modules can be mounted so that the I O numbers can be expanded up to 480 points in total 1 Operand Numbers Operand Without Expansion Power Supply Module When Using Expansion Power Supply Module Input 10 through 1277 224 points 10 through 1597 480 points Output QO through Q277 224 points QO through Q597 480 points Example Slot No 1 2 3 4 5 6 OpenNet Input Output Func Output Input Input Controller Module Module tional Module Module Module CPU Module Module 16 pt 32 pt 16 pt 16 pt 32 pt Input Output Output Input Input The system setup shown above will have operand numbers allocated for each module as follows Slot No Module Operand Numbers 1 Input Module 1 10 through 17 110 through 117 2 Output Module 1 Q0 through Q7 Q10 through Q17 Q20 through Q27 Q30 through Q37 3 Functional Module L100 through L127 4 Output M odule 2 Q40 through Q47 Q50 through Q57 5 Output Module 3 1
353. d in RXD are received 2 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and without BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 h as the first data register D101 xxxxh 31h 32h 33h End delimiter End of receiving data gt D100 n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter is not stored to a data register Any data arriving after the end delimiter is discarded 3 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and one byte BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 h pep ETX T BCC as the first data register D101 x R 31h 32h 03h Code End delimiter End of receiving data gt D1004n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter and BCC code are not stored to data registers After receiving the end delimiter the OpenNet Controller receives only the one byte BCC code dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 17 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Skip When skip is designated in the receive format a specified quantity of digits in the incoming data are skipped and not stored to data registers A maximum of 99 digits bytes of characters can b
354. d or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Using Carry or Borrow Signals When the D1 destination data is out of the valid data range as a result of addition a carry occurs and special internal relay M8003 is turned on When the D1 destination data is out of the valid data range as a result of subtraction a borrow occurs and special internal relay M8003 is turned on Data Type Carry occurs when D1 is Borrow occurs when D1 is W word over 65 535 below 0 integer below 32 768 or over 32 767 below 32 768 or over 32 767 D double word over 4 294 967 295 below 0 L long below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 There are three ways to program the carrying process see examples below If a carry never goes on the program does not have to include internal relay M8003 to process carrying If a carry goes on unexpectedly an output can be programmed to be set as a warning indicator If a carry goes on the number of times a carry occurs can be added to be used as one word data in a specified register Examples ADD Data Type Word This example demonstrates the use of a carry signal from special internal relay M8003 to set an alarm signal D2 500 5 D2 S1 S2 D1 D2 500 D2 ADD W When a carry occurs output QO is set as a warning indicator M8003
355. d to the calendar clock Once the calendar clock data is stored the data is held by the backup battery while the CPU power is turned off 1 2 Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar then select Monitor The screen display changes to the monitor window From the Online menu select PLC Status The OpenNet PLC Status dialog box is displayed The current calendar clock data is read out from the OpenNet Controller CPU and displayed in the Calendar box Click the Change button in the Calendar box The Set Calendar and Time dialog box comes up with the date and time values read from the computer internal clock Sel ari Ton Comte AHN s Cancel Click the Down Arrow button on the right of Calendar then the calendar is displayed where you can change the year month and date Enter or select new values To change hours and minutes click in the Time box and type a new value or use the up down keys When new values are entered click the OK button to transfer the new values to the CPU Setting Calendar Clock Using a User Program Another way of setting the calendar clock data is to move the values to special data registers dedicated to the calendar and clock and to turn on special internal relay M8020 by executing a user program Data registers D8015 through D8021 do not hold the current values of the calendar clock data but hold unknown values before executing a user program
356. d variable D1 in the feedback control is recom mended dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 17 20 PID INSTRUCTION 20 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Introduction This chapter describes the data link communication function used to set up a distributed control system A data link communication system consists of one master station and a maximum of 31 slave stations each station com prising an OpenNet Controller CPU module and I O modules When the data link communication is enabled the master station has 20 data registers assigned for each slave station and each slave station has 20 data registers for communication with the master station Using these data registers the master station can send and receive data of 10 data registers to and from each slave station Any particular program is not required for sending or receiving data in the data link communica tion system When data of inputs outputs internal relays timers counters or shift registers are moved to data registers using the move instructions in the user program these data can also be exchanged between the master and slave stations The MICRO MICRO C FA 3S series PLCs and HG2A series operator interfaces can also be connected to the data link communication system Communication Selector
357. de constant by entering a required scan time value into a special data register reserved for constant scan time Keep Output Status during User Program Download Outputs can be designated to maintain the current statuses when downloading a user program from WindLDR to the CPU This function can be used when the output status change does not occur frequently Stop and Reset Inputs Any input number can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the OpenNet Controller operation 1 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 GENERAL INFORMATION System Setup This section describes various system setup configurations for using powerful communication functions of the OpenNet Controller Open Network Communication System The OpenNet Controller can be connected to three open network communication lines DeviceNet LONWORKS and INTERBUS OpenNet interface modules are available for communication through DeviceNet and LONWoRKS networks The OpenNet interface modules such as DeviceNet slave modules and LONWORKS interface modules serve as a slave station or node in the network A remote I O system can be set up using a remote I O master module mounted next to the CPU module and SX5S commu nication I O terminals at remote I O slave stations When using 32 SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote s lave stations at the maximum The remote I O network uses the INTER BUS protocol
358. ded to the CPU a user program syntax error will result turning on the ERROR LED Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat Label number Tag for LJ MP LCAL and DJ NZ 0 255 LJMP Label Jump 2 When input is on jump to the address with label 0 through 255 designated by S1 H prx When input is off no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction The LJMP instruction is used as an either or choice between two portions of a pro gram Program execution does rof return to the instruction following the LJMP instruc tion after the program branch Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM 1 Source 1 Label number to jump to X X X Constant Repeat R T C D L X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Since the LJMP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Note Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LJ MP instruction is programmed If a matching label does not exist a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 1 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example 1 and LABEL The following example demonstrates
359. digits 1st block 17 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Conversion Type 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS The data block of the specified receive digits is then converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example Received data has been divided into a 2 digit block 1 ASCII to Binary conversion 10012h 100012 3132h Y No conversion Repeat Cycles When a data register is designated to repeat the received data is divided and converted in the same way as specified and the converted data is stored to consecutive data registers as many as the repeat cycles Hexadecimal value Y 000Ch Example Received data of 6 bytes is divided into 2 digit blocks converted in ASCII to Binary and stored to data registers starting at D20 1 Repeat cycles 2 2 2 3 Pond 31h 32h 33h 34h 2 digits 2 digits Ist block 2 block ASCII to Binary conversion Repeat 1 D20 0012h Repeat 2 D21 0034h 2 Repeat cycles 3 o4 55 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits Ist block 2nd block 3rd block ASCII to Binary conversion D20 0012 Repeat 1 Repeat 2 D21 0034h Repeat 3 D22 0056h dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL
360. ding a password in the user program This function is effective for security of user programs Week Programmer Function Week programmer instructions can be programmed to compare the preset date and time with the internal realtime calen dar clock When the preset values are reached designated outputs can be turned on and off as programmed for the week RUN STOP Selection at Startup when Keep Data is Broken When data to be kept such as keep designated counter values are broken while the CPU is powered down the user can select whether the CPU starts to run or not to prevent undesirable operation at the next startup Module ID Registration Another protection method to run or stop operation is the module ID registration When disparity is found between the module ID registration and actual modules in the system setup the CPU can be made to start to run or not User Memory Download from Memory Card A user program can be transferred using WindLDR from a computer to a miniature memory card The handy miniature card can be inserted into the CPU module to download the user program User programs can be replaced without the need for connecting to a computer This feature is available on CPU modules FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM Constant Scan Time The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions are executed or not depending on input conditions to these instructions When performing repetitive control the scan time can be ma
361. dule ID use a number 40h through 7Fh CO1Ah CFFFh reserved Do not write data into this area OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 15 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Data Exchange between LonWorks Interface Module and CPU Module Communication data status data and ID data are exchanged through registers in the LONWORKS interface module and link registers in the CPU module The registers correspond to link registers as listed below Register Address in LonWorks Interface Module Link Register in CPU Module Function Area C000h COO1h L 00 C002h C003h L 01 Receive Data C004h C005h L 02 C006h C007h L 03 Communication C008h C009h L 04 Data Area C00Ah COOBh L 05 Transmit Data COOCh COO0Dh L 06 COOEh COOFh L 07 C012h L 12 Error Data Status Area C013h L 13 1 0 Counts C018h L 24 Software Version ID Area C019h L 25 Expansion Module ID Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module such as OpenNet interface module or analog 1 module is mounted Consequently operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Example 1 Receive Data in Registers C000h and COO1h When receive data enters registers CO00h and COOIh in the LONWORKS interface module the data is transferred to a link register
362. e e For analog input and output module specifications see pages 2 28 and 2 31 Wiring Schematic Analog Voltage Input rotary switch set to 0 through 3 Voltage Output Analog Input Module Terminal No Channel Name 1 V Ch 0 Device 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V 5 Connect V COM terminals of unused channels together COM 5 Chil FG Analog Output M odule Chan Voltage Input Device 0 to 10V DC Voltage Input Device 0 to 10V DC 3 8 FG OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Analog Current Input rotary switch set to 4 Current Output Analog Input Module Terminal No Channel Name 1 V Ch 0 COM Device 0 to 20 mA Connect V and COM terminals of unused channels together Ch 1 6 COM A rh FG Analog Output M odule Chan Current Input Device 0 to 20 mA Current Input Device 0 to 20 mA P 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ower Supply e Use a power supply of the rated value Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard e The allowable power voltage range for the OpenNet Controller is 19 to 30V DC Do not use the OpenNet Controller on any other voltage
363. e or 32 points double word or long data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used Examples NRS SOTU NRS W NW 51 D1 D25 2345 D30 2345 10 5 025 030 D31 2345 D25 030 through 034 D32 2345 When input IO is turned on data of data register D25 designated by source operand S1 is D33 2345 moved to 5 data registers starting with D30 designated by destination operand D1 D34 2345 sotu H NRS D Nw 51 D1 050 _12 11 3 D40 D50 D51 34 Double word data of D40 and D41 D50 through D55 p40 _12_ 092 12 When input I1 is turned on double word data of data registers D40 and DAl 34 4 D53 __34 D41 designated by source operand S1 is moved to 6 data registers starting 54 12 with D50 designated by destination operand D1 L D55 34 9 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IBMV Indirect Bit Move E When input is on the values contained in operands designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 1 bit data so determined is moved to destination which is deter mined by the sum o
364. e 250 C D14 2500 1419 AT sampling period 1 5 sec D19 150 1420 AT control period 3 sec D20 30 1421 AT set point 150 C D21 1500 1422 AT output manipulated variable 100 Note D22 100 S241 Auto manual mode Auto mode M1 OFF 242 a manipulated Venable linit Disable output manipulated variable limits M2 OFF 52 3 Integral start coefficient disable Enable integral start coefficient S1 10 M3 OFF Ste tion alarm outa Remains on during auto tuning n and off rding to th ntrol peri pene Control output se uo nnd EC Me during PID action 53 Set point 200 C D100 2000 Analog input module is mounted at the first slot S4 Process variatie d P ME module stores 0 through 4000 D1 Manipulated variable Stores PID calculation result 32768 to 32767 D102 PID start input Starts to execute the PID instruction 10 Monitor input B to monitor the analog input module data 1 or high alarm Heater power switch Turned on and off by control output M6 90 High alarm light Turned on and off by high alarm output M4 Ql Note The output manipulated variable during auto tuning is a constant value In this example the AT output manipulated variable is set to the maximum value of 100 100 so the control output S2 6 remains on during auto tuning 20 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL System Setup Relay Output Module FC3AR161 CPU Module Er Sz C POWER ORUN C ERROR our
365. e 4C Used to connect an IBM PC to the OpenNet Controller RS232C p port 1 1 computer link with D sub 9 pin female connector to con FC2AKC4C 3m 9 84 ft long nect to computer Link Cable 6 Used to connect an IBM PC to the OpenNet Controller RS485 ter minals 1 1 computer link with D sub 9 pin female connector to FC2AKC6C 2m 6 56 ft long connect to computer User Communication Cable 1 Used to connect RS232C equipment to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port without a connector to connect to RS232C equip FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long rient PLC Connection Cable RS232C cable used to connect IDEC HG1B 2A 2C operator inter xc193 3m 9 84 ft long face to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port INTERBUS Cable Used for wiring the remote I O master and slave modules See page 24 15 Used for interface between an IBM PC and the OpenNet Controller RS232C RS485 Converter CPU modules in the computer link 1 N communication system or 2 1 through modems RS232C Cable 4 wire Used to connect the RS232C 5485 converter to an PC with HD92 C52 1 5m 4 92 ft long D sub 9 pin female connector to connect to computer DIN Rail 1m 3 28 ft long 35 mm wide DIN rail to mount OpenNet Controller modules BAA1000 Mounting Clip Used on DIN rail to fasten OpenNet Controller modules BNL6 Phoenix Ferrule Ferrule for connecting 1 or 2 wires to screw terminal See page 3 1
366. e 6C FC2A KC6C 2m 6 56 ft long n5232C o D sub 9 pin Female Connector dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 4 1 4 OPERATION BASICS Start Stop Operation This section describes operations to start and stop the OpenNet Controller and to use the stop and reset inputs Caution Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the OpenNet Controller Incorrect operation on the OpenNet Controller may cause machine damage or accidents Start Stop Schematic The start stop circuit of the OpenNet Controller con sists of three blocks power supply M8000 start Controller while the other two blocks are set to run the OpenNet Controller WindLDR control special internal relay and stop reset inputs moame gp Be Power M8000 op eset Each block can be used to start and stop the OpenNet Supply Start Control Input Input Start Stop Operation Using WindLDR The OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped using WindLDR run on a PC connected to the OpenNet Controller CPU module When the PLC Start button is pressed in the dialog box shown below start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on to start the OpenNet Controller When the PLC Stop button is pressed M8000 is turned off to stop the Open Net Controller 1 Connect the PC to the OpenNet Controller start WindLDR and power up the OpenNet Controller See page 4 1 2 Check t
367. e WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Run Stop tab Stop Input Click the check box on the left and type a desired input number IO through 1597 in the input number field Reset Input Click the check box on the left and type a desired reset number IO through 1597 in the input number field Keep ID Dai Lih c s This example designates input IO F Step input rum as a stop input and input 112 as E Feet jm z a reset input A E ez 5 Hum jD elash f Step Default No stop and reset inputs are designated dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 5 1 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error Start control special internal relay M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down After the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the data designated to be maintained during power failure is broken The Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error dialog box is used to select whether to start or stop the CPU when attempting to restart operation after the keep data in the CPU RAM has been lost Since this setting relates to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after chang ing this setting Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function
368. e application program is modified by the user See page 26 19 Monitors the CPU module operating status Input ae 0 CPU stopped 1 CPU in operation 5 unused Error signal to the CPU 0 The Neuron Chip cannot write data to registers When modifying the appli 6 Output Failure cation program make sure to turn this pin to 0 when an unrecoverable critical error occurs 1 Normal operation 7 10 unused Registers The OpenNet Controller CPU module exchanges communication data through the registers in the LONWORKS interface module The register addresses are listed in the table below Data Flow Direction Address Name CPU Interface Module Module Data register C000h C007h 9 t Allocate network variables to these 8 bytes addresses to exchange data between the C008h COOFh Data register CPU and interface modules 8 bytes C010h COl1h reserved Do not write data into this area CO12h Error data Use this address to read error data from the lt interface module Use this address to store the byte counts of C013h counts transmit receive data selected in WindLDR Function Area Settings C014h C017h reserved Do not write data into this area Use this address to write the user applica C018h Software version M tion software version number use any num ber other than 00h Use this address to write the user program TT Expansion oe mo
369. e communication enable button only when you change the communication mode while the CPU is powered up After changing the settings of the communica tion selector DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary Operating Procedure 1 After completing the user program including the Function Area Settings download the user program to the OpenNet Controller from a computer running WindLDR through the RS232C port or the data link terminals To download the user program the loader port or the data link terminals must be set to maintenance mode by setting communication selector DIP switches through 3 to OFF After downloading the user program set the communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for the RS232C port or 2 respectively Press the communication enable button for 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once if necessary 3 Start the OpenNet Controller to run the user program 4 Turn on start internal relay M8050 M8055 port 1 or M8080 M8085 port 2 to initialize the modem dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 23 11 23 MODEM MODE When originating the modem communication turn on M8050 M8080 to send the initialization string t
370. e constant value 0 D1 Same operand Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different days 2 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m every day and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 2 00 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 Sat M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay S1 0 specifies all days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m everyday WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m on the next day WKCMP S1 S2 53 D ON 0 1100 0 Q0 M8125 S1 0 52 200 53 WKCMP OFF 00 S1 Same constant value to designate consecutive days 2 Constant values ON time OFF time 3 Same constant value 0 D1 Same operand dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 155 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different days 3 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m on Friday through Sunday and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 2 00 11 00 2 00 11 00 2 00 11 00 Output 00 ON Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat WKCMP 51 S2 S3 DI M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay N 0 99 1100 0 00 S1 99 specifies Friday through Monday WKCMP 51 92 53 D1 WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m on Friday OFF 99 200 0 Q0 through Sunday S1 Same constant value to designate consecutive days WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m on the next day 2 Constant
371. e has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal remote I O function is not restored automatically the remote I O module has to be replaced 2000h I Bus Initialize Error This error indicates that an I O module has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal I O function is not restored automatically the I O module has to be replaced dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 275 27 TROUBLESHOOTING User Program Execution Error This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program When this error occurs the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are also turned on The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error code stored in special data register D8006 user program execution error code The error address is stored in special data register D8007 user program execution error address User Program Execution Error Code Error Details D8006 1 Source destination operand is out of range 2 MUL result is out of data type range 3 DIV result is out of data type range or division by 0 4 BCDLS has 51 orS1 1 exceeding 9999 5 HTOB W has S1 exceeding 9999 HTOB D has 51 51 1 exceeding 99999999 6 BTOH has any digit of S1 S 1 exceeding 9 7 HTOA ATOH BTOA ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range 8 ATOH ATOB has non ASCII data for S1 through S144 WKCMP has S1 S2 and S3 exceeding
372. e hazard Use wires of a proper size to meet voltage and current requirements Tighten terminal screws to a proper tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the OpenNet Controller This is required when equipment con taining the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the output circuit This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Use an EU approved circuit breaker This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the OpenNet Controller or when operating the OpenNet Controller to force outputs on or off Incorrect operation on the OpenNet Controller may cause machine damage or accidents f relays or transistors in the OpenNet Controller output modules should fail outputs may remain on or off For output sig nals which may cause heavy accidents provide a monitor circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Do not connect to the ground directly from the OpenNet Controller Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing OpenNet Controller using an M4 or larger screw This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Do not disassemble repair or modify the OpenNet Controller modules Dispose of the battery in the OpenNet Controller modules when the battery is dead
373. e input module correct Are wiring and operation of external devices correct Correct the external device wiring Y END a y Call IDEC for assistance ier OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 27 11 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 5 27 12 Output module does not operate normally Is the output LED on NO Y Check the output allocation numbers Are output allocation numbers correct Monitor the output using WindLDR Does the monitored output turn on and off Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct output wiring Correct the program The output circuit in the output module is damaged Replace the output module OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL END 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 6 Communication between WindLDR on a computer and the OpenNet Controller is not possible Is the computer link cable connected correctly Connect the cable completely See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on 15 the POWER LED on Set the communication selector DIP switch to maintenance mode See page 4 1 communication selector DIP switch set to maintenance Call IDEC for assistance
374. e retry cycles to a value of 1 or more If com munication is performed using other than the ACKD service the ERR LED on the interface mod ule does not function properly e When installing the network configuration information without modifying the application pro gram an external interface file XIF extension containing information such as the network vari ables of the LONWORKS interface module is needed Consult IDEC for the external interface file e The user must keep a backup file of the network configuration information used for network man agement 26 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Precautions for Modifying Application Program The LONWORKS interface module is shipped with a standard application program installed Users with expertise in pro gramming can also modify or create application programs using a special programming tool such as LonBuilder Devel oper s Kit The application program is written in Neuron C Read this section before starting modifications Define Neuron Chip 1 pins As shown in the sample program on page 19 define I O pins 10 0 through IO 4 and 10 6 of the Neuron Chip If these pins are not defined correctly the LONWORKS interface module may be damaged For the description of I O pins see page 26 15 Include necessary codes in the application program When you modify or create an application program make sure that the codes shown in italics in the appl
375. e skipped continuously Example When a RXD instruction with skip for 2 digits starting at the third byte is executed Incoming Data 0102 0035h D103 0036h 0104 0037h 0105 0038h Skipped When D100 is designated as the first data register D100 0031h 0101 0032h BCC Block Check Character The OpenNet Controller has an automatic BCC calculation function to detect a communication error in incoming data If a BCC code is designated in the receive format of a RXD instruction the OpenNet Controller calculates a BCC value for a specified starting position through the position immediately preceding the BCC and compares the calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC calculated in either or ADD can be 1 or 2 digits When an end delimiter is not used in the RXD instruction the BCC code must be positioned at the end of the receive for mat designated in Source operand When an end delimiter is used the BCC code must be immediately before or after the end delimiter The OpenNet Controller reads a specified number of BCC digits in the incoming data according to the receive format to calculate and compare the received BCC code with the BCC calculation results BCC Calculation Start Position The sta
376. e slave station receives correct communication data M8007 turns off M8010 High speed Counter Comparison Output Reset When M8010 is turned on the high speed counter comparison output is turned off See page 5 10 M8011 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Outputs are normally turned off when the CPU is stopped M8011 is used to maintain the output statuses when the CPU is stopped When the CPU is stopped with M8011 turned on the output ON OFF statuses are maintained When the CPU restarts M8011 is turned off automatically dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 9 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M8012 SFR N Shifting Flag When power failure occurs while data shift is in progress in a shift register M8012 is turned on If M8012 is on when the CPU is powered up again the data in keep designated shift registers may be broken and cannot be used to continue correct data shifting To prevent continuation of incorrect data shifting at startup include M8012 in the user program to prevent program execution If a shift register is not designated as a keep type the shift register data is cleared when power is restored M8014 Write Communication Command Execution at Receive Completion When M8014 is off while maintenance protocol communication is in progress incoming write commands are executed at the END processing of a user program and the data is written into the CPU When M8014 is on write commands are exe cuted immediately when the receive completio
377. eNet slave module is available Mounting the DeviceNet slave module beside the OpenNet Controller CPU module makes a slave station used as an I O terminal in a DeviceNet network The slave station can transfer I O data to and from the master station just as an ordinary I O module in a distributed network eviceNet Slave Module Features Since the DeviceNet slave module conforms to the DeviceNet specifications the OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks consisting of DeviceNet compliant products manufactured by many different vendors such as I O ter minals sensors drives operator interfaces and barcode readers The transmit receive data quantity can be selected from 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits in 1 byte increments One DeviceNet slave module enables the OpenNet Controller CPU module to transmit 64 bits and receive 64 bits at the maximum to and from the DeviceNet master station bout DeviceNet DeviceNet was originally developed by Allen Bradley as a network for sensors actuators and other discrete devices and later the specifications were opened Now major automotive manufacturers and various industries employ DeviceNet networks DeviceNet Features The network configuration is based on the bus system The basic network consists of a trunkline dropline topology Multi drop or daisy chain configuration is also possible The DeviceNet protocol is based on CAN Controller Area Network which has been widely used for networks on
378. eat 3 Destination Repeat 3 MOWW SIR DIR REP nu Dio oo 13 p10 110 _ 20 110 D11 111 D21 111 12 112 D22 112 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 3 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Double Word MOWD SIR DIR REP Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 16 D10 D20 3 D10 110 20 110 I 11 111 D21 111 12 112 22 112 D13 113 Lp23 113 14 114 rD241 114 15 115 Los 115 Repeat Bit Operands The MOV move instruction moves 16 bit data word or integer data type or 32 bit data double word or integer data type When a bit operand such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as the source or destination operand 16 or 32 bits starting with the one designated by S1 or D1 are the target data If a repeat operation is designated for a bit operand the target data increases in 16 or 32 bit increments depending on the selected data type Data Type Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W Sl DIR REP 110 D10 MO 3 10 110 M0 through M7 M10 through M17 D11 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 12 112 M40 through M47 M50 through M57
379. eceive completion output goes on When ASCII to binary or ASCII to BCD conversion is specified in the receive format any code other 8 nad to 9 and Ato F is received These codes complet Bc aH DUEGOES are regarded as 0 during conversion BCC calculated from the RXD instruction does 9 not match the BCC appended to the received The receive completion output goes on data The end delimiter code specified in the RXD 10 instruction does not match the received end The receive completion output goes on delimiter code Receive timeout between characters After receiving one byte of data the next byte is a not received in the period specified for the The receive completionou tput goes One receive timeout value Overrun error 12 Before the receive processing is completed the The receive completion output goes on next data is received Framing error m Detecten error of start bit or stop bit No effect Gn the completion gutput Parity check error 14 a is found in the parity check No effect on the completion output TXD1 RXD1 or TXD2 RXD2 instruction is exe 15 cuted while the communication selector DIP No effect on the completion output switch is not set to select user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 or RS232C port 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 1725 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS ASCII Character Code Table 0 Decimal 1 Decimal 2 Decimal 3 Decimal 4 Decimal
380. ed Unchanged Reset Reset input ON OFF OFF Reset to zero OFF Resettozero Reset to zero Reset to zero Restart Unchanged Unchanged OFF Reset to zero Reset to preset Unchanged Note Link registers used as outputs are turned off like outputs OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 4 3 4 OPERATION BASICS Simple Operation This section describes how to edit a simple program using WindLDR on a computer transfer the program from WindLDR on the PC to the OpenNet Controller run the program and monitor the operation on WindLDR Connect the OpenNet Controller to the computer as described on page 4 1 Sample User Program Create a simple program using WindLDR The sample program performs the following operation When only input 10 is turned on output QO is turned on When only input is turned on output 1 is turned on When both inputs IO and I1 are turned on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Rung No Input 10 Input 11 Output Operation 01 ON OFF Output Q0 is turned ON 02 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON 03 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Start WindLDR From the Start menu of Windows select Programs WindLDR WindLDR WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen Edit User Program Rung by Rung Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input IO 1 Click the Normally Open contact icon 3 When t
381. ed in the non volatile memory of the modem using the amp W command The initialization string is restored when the modem is powered up or when the ATZ command is issued The OpenNet Controller sends the ATZ command to the modem following the initialization string when M8055 M8085 is turned on The ATZ command can also be issued separately by turning M8056 M8086 on ATZ Command ATZ F LF When the ATZ command has been completed successfully internal relay M8066 M8096 is turned on If the ATZ com mand fails internal relay 8076 8106 is turned on If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem M8055 M8085 may be skipped Start with M8056 M8086 to send the ATZ command dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 7 23 MODEM MODE Modem Mode Status Data Register When the modem mode is enabled data register D8211 RS232C port 1 or D8311 RS232C port 2 stores a modem mode status or error code 08211 08311 23 8 Value Status Description 0 Not in the modem mode Modem mode is not enabled 10 Ready for connecting line Start internal relays except for disconnecting line can be turned on Sending initialization string 20 ae originate mode 21 Sending ATZ originate mode 22 Dialing A Start internal relay is in operation in the first try or 23 Disconnecting line subsequent retrial 24 Sending AT command 25 Sendin
382. eive status code To extract a user communication error code from the status data register divide the value by 16 The remainder is the user communication error code See pages 17 9 and 17 21 To correct the error correct the user program by referring to the error causes described below User Communication Error Code User Communication Error Cause Transmit Receive Completion Output Error Code Start inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions are Completion outpatsonthe first 5 TAD 1 s instructions from the top of the ladder diagram on simultaneously are turned on 2 Transmission destination busy timeout Goes on after busy timeout Among the first 5 RXD instructions from the top 3 Start inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions with of the ladder diagram receive completion out a start delimiter are on simultaneously puts of RXD instructions go on if the start delim iter matches the first byte of the received data While a RAD Instruction without a start delimiter The receive completion output of the RXD instruc 4 is executed another RXD instruction with or with Pics tate tion at a smaller address goes on out a start delimiter is executed 5 Reserved 6 Reserved No effect on the receive completion output 7 The first byte of received data does not match If incoming data with a matching start delimiter the specified start delimiter is received subsequently the r
383. els together Connecting these terminals together will reduce the AD conversion time in the analog input module by approximately 10 for every unused slot 2 30 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Analog Output Module D A Converter The 12 bit analog output module converts digital data of 0 through 4000 to 2 channels of analog signals The analog output module is a functional module and the digital data for conversion must be stored to a link register depending on the analog channel and the mounting slot number of the analog output module in the system setup The output mode can be selected using the rotary switch to meet five different analog signal ranges 0 to 10 10V 0 to 5V 5V or 4 to 20 mA Analog Output Module Type Number Parts Description Module ID Power LED Cable Terminal Terminal Label Expansion Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary Switch Protection Module Name Type No 6 Rotary Switch 5 Expansion Connector 2 channel Analog Output Module KY SS CS EXE CS CS GS CS C Co co eS Ssss D A indicates the analog output module ID Turns on when power is on Screw terminal block 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A DA1221 44444 cO wav 12424 VARA naa En 1 Module ID 2 Power LED 3
384. embling Modules N Caution Remove the OpenNet Controller modules from the DIN rail before disassembling the modules Attempt to disassemble modules on a DIN rail may cause damage to the modules 1 Ifthe modules are mounted on a DIN rail first remove the modules from the DIN rail as described below on this page 2 Press the blue unlatch button on top of the module to disengage the latches With the button held depressed pull the modules apart as shown 3 To remove the end plate push in the square button at the top and bottom of the end plate from the front and pull the end plate from the module row as shown Attach the end plate to the CPU module if required aq ngound 5599 f so999009 235959909 99999909 gogoanga 550959999 9999955 Mounting on DIN Rail N Caution Install the OpenNet Controller modules according to instructions described in this user s manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller e Mount the OpenNet Controller modules on a 35 mm wide DIN rail Applicable DIN rail IDEC s BAA1000 1000mm 39 4 long 1 Fasten the DIN rail to a panel using screws firmly 2 Pull out the clamp from each OpenNet Controller module and put the groove of the module on the DIN rail Press the modules towards the DIN rail and push in the clamps as shown on the right Groove 3 Use
385. enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the DIP switch settings while the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary 4 Memory Card Connector Plug a miniature memory card into the memory card connector When a memory card is inserted the CPU runs the user program contained in the memory card instead of the user program stored in the CPU memory The memory card connector is provided on CPU modules FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM 5 Memory Card Eject Button Press this button to eject the memory card from the CPU module 6 RS232C Port 1 Communication port used for the maintenance and user communication modes User communication instructions TXD1 and RXD1 send and receive data through this port 7 RS232C Port 2 Communication port used for the maintenance and user communication modes User communication instructions TXD2 and RXD2 send and receive data through this port 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 Terminal Block 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Function Terminal No Symbol Assignment 1 COM High speed counter COM 2 High speed counter phase E counter 3 B High speed counter phase B 4 Z High speed counter phase Z 5 HSC OUT High speed counter comparison output 6 RS485 A RS485 line A R
386. ep cycles each in 3 axes total 80 minutes IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec 3 shocks each in 3 axes IEC1131 Power Supply supplied from the OpenNet Controller CPU module Dielectric Strength Between power terminal on CPU module and FG 500V AC 1 minute Insulation Resistance Between power terminal on CPU module and FG 10 MQ 500V DC megger Current Draw Approx 30 mA Grounding sems Ground Terminal Grounding Resistance 1009 maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Weight Weight Approx 180g Communication Specifications Communication System LON system Transceiver FTT 10A Free Topology Twisted Pair Transceiver made by Echelon Transmission Rate 78 kbps Transmission Distance when using Level 4 AWG22 cables Free topology Bus topology Total 500m 400m maximum between nodes 1 150m when using 10 transceivers only Maximum Nodes 32 385 nodes in a network Network Interface Connector In the module MSTB2 5 2 GF 5 08 made by Phoenix Contact To the cable FRONT MSTB2 5 2 STF 5 08 made by Phoenix Contact Network Cable l wire connection 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG24 to 14 0 2 to 1 5 mm AWG24 to 16 2 wire connection OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Wiring LoNWORKS Interface Module Precautions for Wiring e Use a twisted pair cable to
387. epeat cycles starting with the operands designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are ANDed and set to the destination operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 51 Repeat 3 CMP gt W SIR 52 1 REP 10 D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 D20 0 E pi1 20 4 D21 20 andD M10 pi2 30 022 100 Data Type Double Word CMP gt D SIR S2R Dl REP S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 lo D20 030 M50 3 D20021 lt gt D30 D31 4 D22 D23 032 033 gt AND M50 024 025 034 035 Repeat Source and Destination Operands When S1 S2 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat source operands as many as the repeat cycles start ing with the operands designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are set to destina tion operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 CMP gt W SIR S2R DIR REP rh D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 lt D20 0 gt M10 turned on D11 20 4 D21 20 M11 turned on D12 30 022 100 M12 turned off Data Type Double Word CMP gt D SIR 52 DIR REP 51 Repeat 3
388. er The OpenNet Controller stops operation when M8000 is turned off while the CPU is running M8000 can be turned on or off using the WindLDR Online menu When a stop or reset input is designated M8000 must remain on to control the CPU operation using the stop or reset input For the start and stop operation see page 4 2 M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down When the data to be maintained during power failure is bro ken after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the CPU restarts operation or not as selected in Function Area Settings gt Run Stop gt Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error See page 5 2 M8001 1 Clock Reset While M8001 is on M8121 1 sec clock is turned off M8002 All Outputs OFF When M8002 is turned on all outputs QO through Q597 go off until M8002 is turned off Self maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off M8003 Carry Cy and Borrow Bw When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction M8003 turns on M8003 is also used for the bit shift and rotate instructions See pages 11 2 and 13 1 M8004 User Program Execution Error When an error occurs while executing a user program M8004 turns on The cause of the user program execution error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt PLC Status gt Error Status gt Details See page 27 6 M8005 Data Link Communication
389. er CPU module has to be replaced When a memory card is installed in the CPU module writing into the memory card is checked 0200h Protect Output Overload Error This error is issued when a protect transistor output is overloaded during operation then only the overloaded output is forced off When this error occurs remove the cause of the overload then the output restores normal operation automati cally Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 0400h Calendar Clock Error This error indicates that the real time calendar clock in the OpenNet Controller CPU module has an error caused by invalid clock data due to voltage drop or by erroneous quartz oscillator operation Clear the error code and set the calendar clock data using WindLDR on a computer If the error continues the OpenNet Control ler CPU module has to be replaced See Troubleshooting Diagram on page 27 21 0800h I Bus Error This error indicates that an I O module has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal I O function is not restored automatically the I O module has to be replaced This error also occurs when the I O module mounting position is changed with Module ID Operation Selection is enabled in the Function Area Settings Restore the original I O module mounting positions or disable the Module ID Operation Selection and download the user program See page 5 5 1000h INTERBUS Master Access Error This error indicates that a remote I O modul
390. er at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the AT command string and execute the MACRO instruction before turning M8054 M8084 on Example of AT Command ATEOQOV1 Q LF AT and LF are appended at the beginning and end of the AT general command string automatically by the system program and need not be stored in data registers To program the AT command string of the example above store the command characters and ASCII value ODh for E to data registers starting with D8230 23 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE 08230 4530h 45 30hz 0 08231 5130 51h2 Q 30h 0 08232 56311 56h v 31 1 08233 0D00h 0 All characters subsequent to When the AT general command has been completed successfully internal relay M8064 M8094 is turned on If the AT gen eral command fails internal relay M8074 M8 104 is turned on The AT general command is determined successful when result code IFJOK Gi IF returned from the modem is received Answer Mode The answer mode is used to send an initialization string to the modem and to issue the ATZ command to reset the modem To execute a command turn on one of start internal relays M8055 M8056 RS232C port 1 or M8085 M8086 RS232C port 2 If two or more start
391. er becomes the preset value Directly after the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction can be programmed Ladder Diagram Program List m 5 Lo Prom 11 010 00 0 LOD 11 TIM 5 D10 OUT 00 e Timedown from the preset value is initiated when the operation result directly before the timer input is on e The timer output turns on when the current value timed value reaches 0 e The current value returns to the preset value when the timer input is off e Timer preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor then select Online Point Write To change a timer pre set value specify the timer number with a capital T and a new preset value If the timer preset value is changed during timedown the timer remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next time cycle To change a timer current value specify the timer number with a small t and a new current value while the timer is in operation The change takes effect immediately e If the timer preset value is changed to 0 then the timer stops operation and the timer output is turned on immediately e If the current value is changed during timedown the change becomes effective immediately Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy due to software configuration depends on three factors timer input error ti
392. er to display data For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Note The CDISP instruction can be used up to 8 times in a user program When transferring a user program containing more than 8 CDISP instructions to the CPU a user program syntax error occurs turning on the ERROR LED The user program can not be executed S1 Data to Display Operand Conversion Type Display Digits Repeat Timer Binary to ASCII 1to4 Counter BCD to ASCII 1to5 1to16 Data Register No conversion 1to2 Constant No conversion 1 D1 First Output Number to Display Data Connect the data signals starting with operand designated by D1 through the last destination operand followed by latch signals The quantity of required output points is 8 plus the quantity of digits to display When displaying 4 digits with out put QO designated as the first output number 12 consecutive output points must be reserved starting with QO through Q13 LAT Latch Phase Select the latch phase for the digit select signal L Low latch High latch DAT Data Phase Select the phase for the data signal L Negative logic H Positive logic Display Processing Time Displaying character data requires the following time
393. er to read Q First output number for digit selection X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 The DGRD instruction can read 65535 5 digits at the maximum When the read value exceeds 65535 with the quantity of digits set to 5 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Note The DGRD instruction can be used up to 16 times in a user program When transferring a user program containing more than 16 DGRD instructions to the CPU a user program syntax error occurs turning on the ERROR LED The user pro gram cannot be executed Conversion BCD connect BCD decimal digital switches BIN To connect BIN hexadecimal digital switches Input Points Inputs are used to read the data from digital switches The quantity of required input points is always 4 Four input points must be reserved starting with the input number designated by operand I For example when input IO is designated as operand I inputs IO through 13 are used Output Points Outputs are used to select the digits to read The quantity of required output points is equal to the quantity of digits to read When connecting the maximum of 5 digital switches 5 output points must be reserved starting with the output number designated by operand For example when o
394. erent preset values e The comparison instructions only compare the current value The status of the counter does not affect this function e The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 90 H 10 MO Program List Program List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 CC 1 2 AND 3 OUT To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 ram as T 10 Q0 7 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples CC and gt Counter Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction Timing Chart Reset Input 10 Pulse Input 11 C2 Output 00 is on when counter C2 current value is 5 Output QO Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current value reaches 3 and remains on Output 01 until counter C2 is reset Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Timing Chart Reset Rung 1 Prgm Adrs Instruction ON 500301502 1 Pulse Input 12 gre Pulse ON Output 00 Output Q0 is on when counter C30 current value is 5
395. ernal Relay Allocation The example of a key matrix configuration shown on page 5 16 stores input information to 30 internal relays starting with internal relay M100 The switches are assigned to internal relays as shown below Input 10 11 12 13 l4 5 cunei opa i swoo 4 5000 SW02 4 SW03 SWO swo a i a O a E Output x Output 50 00 SW10 45 SW12 513 S S K wo A i 2 4 13 A Wi A w5 4 Vv a 2 SW21 a SW23 SW24 2E 9i 1 ZA Pal ZA ZA ZA ae 4 50030 4 SW31 4 SW32 4 i SW34 4 5 35 4 Transistor Sink Output 2 2E ye P d Q3 Module K Q3 A M ya swa3 4 E M or Q4 Note For the circuit above transistor sink output module must be used When using a transistor protect source output module reverse the direction of diodes Diode rating is Average rectified current gt 100 mA Reverse voltage gt 100V DC Use switches with superior contact reliability Inputs Outputs 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 SW00 SW01 SW02 SW03 SW04 SW05 01 106 107 M110 M111 M112 M113 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 Q2 M114 M115 M116 M117 M120 M121 SW20 SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24 SW25 Q3 M122 M123 M124 M125 M126 M127 SW30 SW31 SW32 SW33 SW34 SW35 04 130 131 132 133 134 135 51040 51 41 51 42 51 43 51044 50 45 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIO
396. ernal relays M are internal relays dedicated to specific functions Timers T are relays used in the user program available in 1 sec 100 msec 10 msec and 1 msec timers Counters C are relays used in the user program available in adding counters and reversible counters Shift registers R are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs Data registers D are registers used to store numerical data Some of the data registers are dedicated to special functions Link registers L are registers used for inputting and outputting numerical values to and from functional modules dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 6 1 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers Total Points Allocation Numbers Operand Input 1 1000040007 1004040047 1008040087 1012040127 1016040167 1020040207 1024040247 1001040017 1005040057 1009040097 1013040137 1017040177 1021040217 1025040257 10020 10027 10060 10067 10100 10107 10140 10147 10180 10187 10220 10227 10260 10267 1003040037 1007040077 1011040117 1015040157 1019040197 1023040237 1027040277 1028040287 1032040327 1036040367 1040040407 1044040447 1048040487 1052040527 1056040567 1029040297 1033040337 1037040377 1041040417 1045040457 1049040497 1053040537 1057040577 1030040307 1034040347 1038040387 10420 0427 1046040467 1050040507 1054040547 1058040587 1031040317 1035040357 1039040397 1043040437 1047040477 1051040517
397. error can be found in the preceding bus segment of a local bus in the preceding bus segment of a ST compact station in the bus segments of a preceding remote bus branch e g installation remote bus or in the bus segment of the indicated INTERBUS device Cause Voltage reset of an INTERBUS device in the specified area Cable break in the specified bus segment The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing bus is defective for a device in the specified area Add Error Info 24 18 INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OBF1hex BUS FAIL Meaning Data transmission is interrupted at a BK module Cause The connector for the outgoing remote bus branch has not been plugged in The bridge LBST in the connector for the outgoing remote bus branch is defective Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF2hex BUS FAIL Meaning Data transmission is interrupted at a BK module Cause The connector for the outgoing remote bus branch has not been plugged in The bridge RBST in the connector for the outgoing remote bus branch is defective Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF3hex BUS FAIL The data transmission is interrupted at a BK module local bus devices or
398. ersion 2 digits 2 repeats The CDISP sends out data from DO upper byte DO lower byte PURSBU SOUS D1 upper byte and D1 lower byte in this order Output Wiring Diagram 16 Transistor Sink Output Module FC3A T16K1 Q0 Q1 o o TOO O00 00 010 p 3 Q11 p Q12 5 4 013 5h Q14 015 016 017 COM p gt p 24V DC _ Power Supply 4 im Di 51 eee Di BI 3 NL P 8 e GEN PS eee DS e pe eee Character Display Units IDEC s DD3S F57N 16 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Character Codes for IDEC DD3S Character Display Unit 0 Decimal Decimal Decimal 3 Decimal 4 Decimal Decimal 6 Decimal Decimal 8 Decimal 9 Decimal A Decimal Decimal Decimal D Decimal Decimal Decimal Note These character codes are used with IDEC DD3S series c
399. erted bit by bit and moved to 16 internal relays starting with M50 designated by destination operand D1 M10 through M17 M20 through M27 NOT M50 through M57 M60 through M67 MSB S1 LSB The ON OFF statuses of the 16 internal relays M10 B sale 2 M10 olol l llolololollolol l l lolol through M17 and M20 through M27 are inverted and moved to 16 internal relays M50 through M57 and M60 through M67 M50 is the LSB least significant bit and M67 is the MSB most significant bit m m e MSB D1 LSB 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 After inversion M67 M50 MOVN W S1 01 REP S 0NOT gt D2 1 810 D2 When input I1 is on decimal constant 810 designated by source operand S1 is converted into 16 bit binary data and the ON OFF statuses of the 16 bits are inverted and moved to data register D2 designated by destina tion operand D1 mm MSB S1 LSB Before inversion 810 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DO MSB D1 LSB D1 After inversion 64725 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 02 64725 810 MOVN W S1 D1 When input 12 is on the data in data register L p D30 020 p qu D30 designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and 1 D30 930 moved
400. esh special internal relay M8177 all slave station communication completion relay goes on at the master station Special internal relays M8140 through M8176 slave station communication comple tion relay do not go on at the master and slave stations in the simultaneous refresh mode The communication sequence in the simultaneous refresh mode is shown below 1 scan Simultaneous Refresh for Slave Stations 1 through 31 END Processed Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 31 Master Station Completion M8177 ___ LL S Simultaneous Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with One Slave Station Trf When no transmit receive data has been changed during communication at 19200 bps the master station requires the fol lowing time to refresh data for communication with one slave station Trf 2 3 125 msec When N words of transmit receive data have been changed during communication at 19200 bps Trf 4 167 msec x 2 N Total Simultaneous Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with All Slave Stations Trfn When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with all slave stations that 1s the total of refresh times gt Trf 234 167 msec x 2 Example Refresh Time in Simultaneous Refresh Mode When data link comm
401. esignated by operand bits The status of the LSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB MSB D20 LSB o o o o 0101010 10101010 1 1 01 90 M8003 MSB D20 LSB CY o o o o 0101010 1010 010 01 1 01 M8003 MSB D20 LSB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 111 0 M8003 Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D20 and D21 is rotated to the right by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the LSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB MSB 20 21 LSB _ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 gt 10 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation D20 D21 425 990 MSB D20 D21 LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 13 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS BCDLS BCD Left Shift 8 BCDLS diat When input is on the 32 bit binary data designated by S1 is converted into 8 a NR Je BCD digits shifted to the left
402. essing time breakdown A 2 end delimiter 17 17 plate 2 3 error causes and actions 27 4 code data link communication 21 4 general 27 3 general bus error 24 16 INTERBUS 24 16 INTERBUS master 24 10 remote local bus errors 24 22 user errors 24 16 user program execution 27 6 data 25 7 26 17 location INTERBUS master 24 10 ERROR LED 27 1 during errors 27 4 ESD 2 37 exchange 9 13 exclusive OR word 12 1 execution times for instructions 1 expansion connector 2 3 module ID 26 17 power supply module 2 34 A 3 system 1 6 external interface file 26 2 26 12 ferrule 3 10 25 5 26 6 OpenNet Controller User s Manual iii INDEX filter input 5 6 flash memory 26 14 forward shift register 7 20 free topology 26 7 function area setting DeviceNet slave station 25 8 LonWorks node 26 10 remote I O master station 24 13 communication 2 6 specifications 2 5 functional module operands 6 18 general error codes 27 3 specifications 2 4 header file 26 19 hex to ASCII 14 5 BCD 14 1 hexadecimal storage decimal values 8 4 high speed counter 2 6 5 9 comparison output reset M8010 6 9 timing chart 5 12 wiring diagram 5 13 housekeeping A 2 HTOA 14 5 HTOB 14 1 VO bus error 27 5 initialize error 27 5 counts 25 7 26 17 delay time A 2 error 25 7 pins 26 13 26 15 service A 2 wiring diagram 16 4 IBMV 9 11 IBMVN 9 12 ICMP gt 10 4 ID code 24 6 IMOV 9 6 IMOVN 9 7 INC 11 9 increment 11 9 indirect bitmove 9 11
403. et point S1 21 When the process variable S1 0 reaches the AT set point S1 21 auto tuning is complete and the output manipulated variable S1 1 is reduced to zero When PID action is selected with operation mode 51 3 set to 1 AT PID the PID action follows immediately When the linear conversion is disabled S144 set to 0 set a required AT set point of 0 through 4000 to the data register designated by S121 When 1 21 stores a value larger than 4000 the AT set point is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S144 set to 1 set a required AT set point of 32768 through 32767 to the data reg ister designated by S121 The AT set point must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value 5 1 6 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 In the direct control action see page 20 10 set the AT set point S1 21 to a value sufficiently smaller than the process variable 54 at the start of the auto tuning In the reverse control action set the AT set point S1 21 to a value sufficiently larger than the process variable S4 at the start of the auto tuning 1422 AT Output Manipulated Variable The AT output manipulated variable specifies the amount of the output manipulated variable 0 through 100 during auto tuning When using auto tuning set a required AT output manipulated variable of 0 through 100 to the data register desig nated by 1 22 When 1 22 stores a value lar
404. f values contained in operands designated SI S2 gt 1 D2 H IBMV W 51 52 D1 D2 by D1 and D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X A X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S2 or D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S2 or D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current value is read out Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 S2 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execu tion error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Unlike the IMOV and IMOVN instructions offset operands S2 and D2 must always be designated Valid Data Types W word 1 D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points are used When a word operand such as timer counter D data register or L link register is designated
405. fferent Solution 1 Make the same settings for the modems at the both ends Cause 2 The model of the modems at the both ends of the line is different Solution 2 Use the same modems at the both ends Cause 3 The quality of the telephone line is low Solution 3 Decrease the baud rate of the OpenNet Controller to lower than 9600 bps 23 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Introduction The OpenNet Controller uses the INTERBUS open network to set up a remote I O system Input data from a remote I O slave station is stored to link registers allocated to input data in the OpenNet Controller Output data is sent from the link registers allocated to output data in the OpenNet Controller A remote I O slave station can have a maximum of 128 I O points 64 inputs and 64 outputs When using 32 IDEC s SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote slave stations at the maximum The total cable length can be 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum For the remote I O master module parts description and specifications see page 2 36 Since I O data is stored in link registers and transferred automatically no communication program is required to send and receive I O data between the master and slave stations I O connection is just as easy as ordinary digital I O connection Remote 1 System Setup Cable Length 400m 1312 ft maximum Remote 1 Master Module FC3A SX5S
406. fications Card Type Miniature memory card FC9Z MC02 Accessible Memory Capacity 2MB 5V type Download Destination CPU module FC3A CP2KM and CP2SM Software for Writing Card WindLDR Quantity of Stored Programs One user program stored on one memory card When a memory card is inserted user program on the memory card is executed Program Execution Priority Downloading User Program from WindLDR to Miniature Card For the procedures to download a user program from WindLDR on a computer to a miniature card see page 4 6 When a miniature card is inserted in the CPU module the user program is downloaded to the miniature card dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 19 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Constant Scan Time The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions are executed or not depending on input conditions to these instructions The scan time can be made constant by entering a required scan time preset value into special data reg ister D8022 reserved for constant scan time When performing accurate repetitive control make the scan time constant using this function The constant scan time preset value can be between 1 and 1 000 msec The scan time error is 1 msec of the preset value normally When the data link or other communication functions are used the scan time error may be increased to several milliseconds When the actual scan time is longer than the scan time preset value the sca
407. fo Error location Segment Position 0C8Chex to 0C8F Meaning hex RB FAIL or OD8Chex to OD8Fhex LB FAIL Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Cause Interrupted data register of the INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 The number of data registers of the specified INTERBUS that is connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the length code Add Error Info 0C90hex to 0C93 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device could not activate the following bus segment The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause carried out a voltage reset or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maximum permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices Add_Error_Info 24 26 Error location Segment Position OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM 0C94hex to 0C97hex RB FAIL An INTER
408. for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF9hex BUS FAIL Multiple error at the specified device during quick diagnostics It was not possible to exactly locate Meanin 9 The error occurs due to Cause installation errors defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info 24 20 INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OBFAhex BUS FAIL Meaning Multiple errors at the specified device during startup or permanent diagnostics The error occurs due to Cause installati
409. for communication The total cable length can be 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum One remote I O master module can be mounted with the OpenNet Controller CPU module In addition a maximum of seven functional modules including OpenNet interface modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one Open Net Controller CPU module LonWorks DeviceNet 2 oo n oo oo o E T fee ET S 22 eal 82 Heal 189 ileal 8 9 fay se b TEERDE E oo aa oo iB nuu aaf o oo saj nn saj s n d H ng iB o nu ta oo bo nu uE E S 2 6 ll EA oo oo oj oo oj o gt IC nu 1B ng sg o 6 EH vm HH vm HH veal n NIC Yt LON a o aC g IS oo a 9 4 ERIS OIS S oo oo oo B D SIC E mN 9 oo oo nn E IC Ee HS og oo 5 oa E C fag his ISI oo o n ajc 290 HIS oo oo o idec BIC ISI idec idec oo oo oa H Remote 1 0 CPU Master
410. g PID action Auto tuning is first executed according to the designated AT parameters such as AT sampling period S1 19 AT con trol period S 14 20 AT set point S121 and AT output manipulated variable S 1 22 As a result of auto tuning PID parameters are determined such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S1 8 derivative time S1 9 and control direction S240 then PID action is executed according to the derived PID parameters 2 AT auto tuning Auto tuning is executed according to designated AT parameters to determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S147 integral time S1 8 derivative time S149 and control direction S2 0 PID action is not executed S144 Linear Conversion 0 Disable linear conversion Linear conversion is not executed When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 the analog input data 0 through 4000 from the analog I O module is stored to the process variable S4 and the same value is stored to the process variable S1 0 without conversion 1 Enable linear conversion The linear conversion function is useful for scaling the process variable to the actual measured value in engineering units When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 the analog input data 0 through 4000 from the analog I O mod ule is linear converted and the result is stored to the process variable S1 0 When using the linear conversion set proper values to the linear conversion maxim
411. g R W Any Input or Internal Relay High speed Counter Reset Input Resets the current value R W to the D8046 reset value Any input or internal relay number can be designated as a high speed counter gate input and reset input using Function Area Settings Others Enable High speed Counter in WindLDR Clearing High speed Counter Current Value The high speed counter current value is cleared to zero in five ways when the CPU is powered up when a user program is downloaded to the CPU when the phase Z or reset to zero input at terminal No 4 is turned on when the communication enable button on the CPU module is pressed or when the reset input not the high speed counter reset input designated in the Function Area Settings is turned on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Others tab IIT TS Fuscteen Ainge Fiadh Link Comm Post Oyen Bus Others x F Enada thigh specd rantur HL paraten Mack F Enable HSE T Enable HSC Fate lepra T Enable Maipi DT Yaben Autometer erent f Enakbla Cap Waima inpai Visi bajni Mis quiin Fari Disp Hau ter lian lisar l rnquam Pierie Crete 3 Click the Enable High speed Counter
412. g for the error location and cause Cause A bus error occurred Remedy Wait until the search for the error has been completed The controller board will inform you of the result Add Error Info Error Codes for General Bus Errors BUS FAIL OBElhex BUS FA Meaning IL A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off However no error was detected when checking the current configuration This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE2hex BUS FA Meaning IL The controller board detected changes in the configuration which do not permit to continue the data traffic over the bus Cause The maximum permissible number of INTERBUS words was exceeded The maximum number of INTERBUS devices was exceeded Add Error Info 24 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL OBE4hex BUS FA Meaning 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM IL A serious error occurred when acquiring the bus configuration via
413. g initialization string answer mode 26 Sending ATZ answer mode Waiting for resending initialization string 30 S originate mode 31 Waiting for resending ATZ originate mode 32 Waiting for re dialing 33 Waiting for re disconnecting line The command started bya start internal relay was not completed and is waiting for retrial 34 Waiting for resending AT command 35 Waiting for resending initialization string answer mode 36 Waiting for resending ATZ answer mode 40 Line connected Telephone line is connected Only M8053 M8083 dis connect line can be turned on 50 AT command completed successfully Command started by M8054 M8056 or M8084 M8086 is completed successfully Invalid character is included in the initialization string 60 AT command program error dial number or AT command string Correct the program to include ODh in the AT command Two or more start internal relays are on 61 Simultaneous start of commands Correct the user program so that only one start internal relay goes on at a time A start IR other than M8053 M8083 disconnect line is turned on while the telephone line is connected 62 Invalid command in on line mode Correct the program so that only the disconnect com mand is sent while the line is connected 63 AT command execution error Command failed in the first and all retry cycles OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE Initialization String Commands The built in initialization stri
414. g modem 23 10 process variable before conversion 20 12 program branching instructions 18 1 using with SOTU SOTD instructions 18 2 using with timer instruction 18 2 programming data registers and internal relays 23 11 high speed counter using WindLDR 5 11 RXD instruction using WindLDR 17 22 special data register 17 31 17 33 transmit receive data using WindLDR 25 9 26 11 TXD instruction using WindLDR 17 10 protect output overload error 27 5 protection circuit for relay output 2 17 type 2 28 2 31 user program 5 18 pulse input 7 20 reading error data 27 1 transmit data 26 22 receive completion output 17 13 17 20 data 25 9 26 11 26 16 byte count 17 21 writing 26 21 digits 17 14 format 17 13 17 14 instruction cancel flag M8022 M8023 17 21 status 17 13 17 21 code 17 21 timeout 17 17 receive 1 17 13 receive 2 17 13 refresh modes 21 8 register bit stack register 7 7 operation register 7 7 registers 26 15 remote bus cable 24 15 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL IO master module 2 36 A 4 connector 2 3 system 24 1 removing from DIN rail 3 3 repeat cycles 8 3 17 7 17 15 designation 8 3 operation ADD SUB and MUL instructions 11 5 ANDW ORW and XORW instructions 12 3 data comparison instructions 10 3 DIV instruction 11 7 move instructions 9 3 reset input 4 3 5 1 7 20 system status 2 6 resetting modem 23 5 23 7 restart system status 2 6 retry cycles 23 3 interval 23 3 reverse control action 20 10 sh
415. ger than 100 the AT output manipulated variable is set to 100 While auto tuning is executed the specified value of the AT output manipulated variable 81422 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S1 1 and the control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the AT control period 51 20 and the AT output manipulated variable 814 22 To keep the control output S2 6 on during auto tuning set 100 to 1422 Auto Tuning AT When auto tuning is selected with the operation mode S1 3 set to 1 AT PID or 2 AT the auto tuning is executed before starting PID control to determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S147 integral time S1 8 derivative time S149 and control action S240 automatically The OpenNet Controller uses the step response method to execute auto tuning To enable auto tuning set four parameters for auto tuning before executing the PID instruction such as AT sampling period S1 19 AT control period S1 20 AT set point S121 and AT output manipulated variable S 1 22 Step Response M ethod The OpenNet Controller uses the step response method to execute auto tuning and determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S148 derivative time 5 1 9 and con trol action S240 automatically The auto tuning is executed in the Set Point 51421 following steps Process Variable 51 0 Maximum Slope 1 Calculate the maximum slope of the process variable
416. gh 10099 the value minus 10000 determines the ratio of the output manipulated variable S1 1 in proportion to the manipulated variable D1 of O through 100 The output manipulated variable S141 can be calculated by the following equation Output manipulated variable 51 1 Manipulated variable D1 x N 10000 where N is the value stored in the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 10001 through 10099 If the manipulated variable D1 is greater than or equal to 100 100 multiplied by N 10000 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S 1 1 If D1 is less than or equal to 0 0 is outputted to S141 To enable the manipulated variable upper limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 When 8222 is turned off the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 has no effect When 5 1 16 is set to a value 10001 through 10099 the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 is disabled 1417 Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit The value contained in the data register designated by S1 17 specifies the lower limit of the output manipulated variable S141 Set a required value of O through 100 for the output manipulated variable lower limit to the data register desig nated by 51 17 When S1 17 stores a value larger than 100 the output manipulated variable lower limit is set to 100 The output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 must be smaller than the output manipulated
417. gister is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used xamples NSET SOTU H NSET W S1 52 53 54 5 DI 1998 D20 10 1998 12 25 12 30 D20 12 gt p21 Five constants 1998 12 25 12 and 30 D20 through D24 25 ee When input IO is turned on 5 constants designated by source operands S1 through S5 12 gt 023 are moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 designated by destination operand D1 30 D24 SOTUL NSET D 51 S2 S3 D1 m 050 H 1 sem 12 34 56 D50 L D51 S1 12 32 bit Three 32 bit constants 12 34 and 56 050 through 055 S2 34 32 bit LX 052 When input I1 is turned on 3 constants designated by source oper s3 56 32 bit 053 ands S1 through S3 are moved to 6 data registers starting with D50 r D54 designated by destination operand D1 L D55 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 9 9 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS NRS N Data Repeat Set 8 SI gt D1 D2 DN 1 NRS NW S1 D1 When input is 16 or 32 bit data designated 51 is set to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data First 16 32 bit data N Data Repeat Set D1 1 or D1 2 Second 16 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data 0 S1 164 32 bi
418. gram following it is executed according to the actual input statuses When the input condition to the MCS instruction is off and the MCS is executed other instructions between the MCS and MCR are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT All are turned off OUTN All are turned on SET and RST All are held in current status TML TIM TMH and TMS Current values are reset to zero Timeout statuses are turned off CNT CDP and CUD Current values are held Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are turned off SFR and SFRN Shift register bit statuses are held Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is turned off Input conditions cannot be set for the MCR instruction More than one MCS instruction can be used with one MCR instruction Corresponding MCS MCR instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding MCS MCR instructions Ladder Diagram Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF Input 10 Input 11 Output QO Program List Prom Ads 10 11 Q0 When input IO is off MCS is executed so that the subsequent input is forced off When input IO is on MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 25 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS MCS and MCR Master
419. gram in the operation register is stored in the first bit stack register When the BPS instruction is used again the program in the first stack register is stored in the second bit stack register and the program in the operation register is stored in the first stack register Each time the BPS instruction is used the program is moved to the next bit stack register Program blocks can be stored in a maximum of eight bit stack registers When the BRD bit read instruction is used the program in the first bit stack register is read to the operation register All program blocks stored in bit stack registers are not moved When the BPP bit push instruction is used all program blocks in bit stack registers are shifted back by one place The program in the first bit stack register is moved to the operation register Ladder Diagram BPS 10 11 01 12 Q2 BPP 13 Q3 Operation Register Bit Stack Register 8 maximum LOD 10 n es H Aga AND 11 H OUT Q1 n 11 Q 10 BRD ANDI2 91 OUT Q2 in 12 02 10 bene xn ee ee eee cu po Svea AND 13 m g1 OUT Q3 i dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 1 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer Four types of timers are available 1 sec timedown timer TML 100 msec timedown timer TIM 10 msec timedown timer TMH and 1 msec t
420. h D8036 correspond to the first through seventh protect transistor modules respectively When an overload or short circuit occurs the transistor protect source output module detects the overload and shuts down the output immediately to protect the external load and output circuit elements from permanent damage Since the over load detection is based on the heating of the output element the output circuit is turned on again when the output elements have cooled down Consequently a continued overloaded status causes the output to turn on and off repeatedly and even tually leads to deterioration of the output module When the cause of the short circuit is removed the output module restores normal operation However once an overload or short circuit occurs the condition tends to continue for a long period of time When the transistor protect source output module is used use of a protection program is recommended to turn off all outputs within 60 seconds as described below Sample Program 1 Turning All Outputs Off when using one transistor protect source output module M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV stores 0 to data register D8030 Special data register D8030 stores protect transistor output error data when an overload or short circuit occurs in the first protect output modules When an overload occurs D8030 stores 1 When the D8030 data is 1 M8002 all outputs off special inter nal relay is turned on to t
421. h M8237 are read only internal relays primarily used for indicating the CPU statuses All special internal relays cannot be used as destinations of advanced instructions Special Internal Relays Read Write 6 6 nn Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8000 Start Control Maintained Maintained M8001 1 sec Clock Reset Cleared Cleared M8002 All Outputs OFF Cleared Cleared M8003 Carry Cy or Borrow Bw Cleared Cleared M8004 User Program Execution Error Cleared Cleared M8005 Data Link Communication Error Maintained Cleared M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station Maintained Maintained M8007 Data Link Communication Stop Fag Slave Station Cleared Cleared M8010 High speed Counter Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared M8011 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Maintained Cleared M8012 SFR N Shifting Flag Maintained Maintained M8013 Reserved M8014 Write Communication Command Execution at Receive Completion Maintained Maintained M8015 M8017 Reserved M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag Maintained Cleared M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag Maintained Cleared M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 1 Cleared Cleared M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 2 Cleared Cleared M8024 M8027 Reserved M8030 INTERBUS Master
422. h the information specified in the user program and retry to start the CPU dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 5 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Input Filter The input filter function is used to reject input noises The catch input function described in the next section is used to receive short input pulses On the contrary the input filter function ignores short input pulses when the OpenNet Controller is used with input signals containing noises Normal inputs require a pulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals Input filter values have effect on the performance of the catch inputs key matrix inputs and digital read instruction Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Filter Catch tab Keep Fiach nass Link c el Module 1 to 15 Input Filter Time Selection wne a O s Groups of 8 inputs 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 msec IM a a Default 4 msec MAM om a Catch Inzut Haung l allergy Ldgn Sectors Catch Input Rising Falling 1 Edge Selection No effect on the input filter PROCTER _ zl cem Module Number Selection Select the module number from 1
423. haracter display units Those codes left blank are reserved for Japanese characters dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 16 7 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS 168 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes the user communication function for communication between the OpenNet Controller and external devices with an RS232C port The OpenNet Controller uses user communication instructions for transmitting and receiv ing communication to and from external devices User Communication Overview The user communication mode is used for linking the OpenNet Controller to an RS232C communication device such as a computer modem printer or barcode reader All OpenNet Controller CPU modules feature two RS232C ports to communicate with two external devices simulta neously User communication transmit and receive instructions can be programmed to match the communication protocol of the equipment to communicate with Possibility of communication using the user communication mode can be determined referring to the user communication mode specifications described below User Communication Mode Specifications Standards EIA RS232C Control Signal DSR DTR RTS Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data Bits 7 or 8 bits Parity Odd Even None Stop Bits 1 or 2 bits 10 to 2540 msec 10 msec increments or none Receive Timeout Receive timeout is
424. hat a stop input is not designated using Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Run Stop See page 5 1 Note When a Stop input is designated the OpenNet Controller cannot be started or stopped by turning start control special internal relay M8000 on or off 3 Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar then select Download Program Or click the download icon Ri OpenNet Download Program dialog box appears T Vrae Monde E Bana Cle E Fiaty T Am Mapam nirs LIB AA eT Sem PLE sion oem Satin D 20 7D 1 F Aymer alan alien drsi a Eep osipa dan ay 4 Click the PLC Start button to start operation then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on 5 Click the PLC Stop button to stop operation then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned off The PLC operation can also be started and stopped while WindLDR is in the monitor mode To access the Start or Stop button select Online gt Monitor and select Online gt PLC Status gt Run Stop Status Note Special internal relay M8000 is a keep type internal relay and stores the status when power is turned off M8000 retains its previous status when power is turned on again However when the backup battery is dead M8000 loses the stored status and can be turned on or off as programmed when the OpenNet Controller is powered up The selection is made in Configure gt
425. he ATZ command and the dial command If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem turn on M8051 M8081 to start with the ATZ command followed by the dial command When answering an incoming call turn on M8055 M8085 to send the initialization string and the ATZ command If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem turn on M8056 M8086 to send the ATZ command only 5 Transmit or receive communication through the modem 6 Turn on start internal relay M8053 M8083 to disconnect the telephone line Sample Program for Modem Originate Mode This program demonstrates a user program for the modem originate mode to move values to data registers assigned to the modem mode at RS232C port 1 initialize the modem dial the telephone number and disconnect the telephone line While the telephone line is connected user communication instruction TXD1 sends a character string Connect M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV instructions store values to data registers for the modem mode at RS232C port 1 1 08200 to enable the modem mode for port 1 D8201 to select a predetermined initialization string 1 08203 to enable user protocol after telephone line is connected MACRO sets a dial command ATDT123 q LF MACRO 51 D1 D2 M8120 5 08270 D8272 T1 5431h gt D8270 to designate touch tone and tele phone number 23
426. he CPU module and download the user program to the CPU module using WindLDR 3 Start the CPU module to run then DeviceNet communication starts The delay until the communication starts after power up depends on the size of the user program and the system setup While the CPU is stopped data exchange between the CPU and DeviceNet slave modules is halted but communication with the DeviceNet network continues Data exchange between the CPU and DeviceNet slave modules is asynchronous with the user program scanning in the CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 259 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Transmission Time The response time of the DeviceNet network varies greatly depending on factors such as the quantity of nodes data bytes and DeviceNet system setup To determine the accurate response time confirm the response time on the actual network system The following example describes a response time in a DeviceNet network system comprised of IDEC SX5D communica tion I O terminals Example DeviceNet Transmission Time e System Setup PLC 1747 L532 SLC5 03 CPU made by Rockwell Automation Master 1747 SDN SLC500 DeviceNet Scanner Module made by Rockwell Automation Slaves SX5D SBM16K 8pt transistor source input 8pt transistor sink output SX5D SBM16P 8pt transistor sink input 8pt transistor protect source output SX5D SBROS 8pt relay output Data Rate 125k baud Operation Mode Communication according to the s
427. he DC2 instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly compare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When a data register comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a data register comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the DC or DC2 instruction a data register number DO through D7999 followed by the preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram DC Program List Data register to compare with Adrs Q Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram DC2 Program List 0 Prom Ads pis The DC and DC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values e The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram L
428. he memory card is executed Not installed in the CPU The user program stored in the flash ROM in the CPU module is executed e When the user program is downloaded from the memory card to the CPU the user program stored in the flash ROM in the OpenNet Controller CPU module is overwritten Power down the CPU before inserting or removing the memory card e Program execution using the memory card must be limited to operation check only Do not use the memory card for normal execution of user programs Downloading User Program from Memory Card to the CPU 1 Power down the OpenNet Controller CPU module Insert a memory card into the CPU module until the card clicks into place as shown at right Power up the CPU module The CPU starts to run the user program stored on the memory card Check the operation of the user program stored on the memory card If there is no problem in the program operation power down the CPU o a A oO ND Hold the communication enable button depressed and power up the CPU The user program is downloaded from the memory card to the flash ROM in the CPU For the communication enable button see page 2 1 While program download is in progress the ERROR LED flashes If program download fails the ERROR LED goes on 7 Power down the CPU and remove the miniature card by pressing the miniature card eject button 8 Power up the CPU to start the program Memory Card Eject Button Speci
429. he mouse pointer is placed on an icon the name of the icon is indicated 44 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 4 OPERATION BASICS 2 Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact and click the left mouse button Tz oppo oo The Normally Open dialog box appears Rung 01 1 3 Enter IO in the Tag Name field and click OK Hormally Open A NO contact of input 10 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line Next program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input 4 Click the Normally Closed contact icon 38 The mouse pointer is indicated with the name of the icon Normally Closed 5 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact and click the left mouse button The Normally Closed dialog box appears 6 Enter I1 in the Tag Name field and click OK A NC contact of input is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line At the end of the first ladder line program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output QO 7 Click the Output coil icon 4 The mouse pointer is indicated with the name of the icon Output 8 Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil and click the left mouse button The Output dialog box appears 9 Enter QO in the Tag Name field and click O
430. i o o i i 0 M 8003 Data Type Double Word bits to shift 2 1 Before shift MSB SI LSB CY 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1110 1 0 01 1 o 1 o 1 1 i o o 1 1 o Shift to the right M8003 After shift MSB 51 LSB 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit shift X A X X X bits Quantity of bits to shift 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to shift can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the SFTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types integer D double word L long TEC L When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 3 13 Bit SH
431. ible with relay requirements Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Timing Chart ON OFF Output QO Input 10 Output 01 ne Note T equals one scan time one shot pulse There is a special case when the SOTU and SOTD instructions are used between the MCS and MCR instructions which are detailed on page 7 25 If input D2 to the SOTU instruction turns on while input I1 to the MCS instruction is on then the SOTU output turns on If input I2 to the SOTD instruction turns off while input I1 is on then the SOTD output turns on If input I1 turns on while input I2 is on then the SOTU output turns on However if input I1 turns off while input I2 is on then the SOTD output does not turn on as shown below Ladder Diagram Timing Chart Input 11 d ON OFF SOTU Output M1 he Input I2 ON SOTD Output 2 ore No Output No Output 7 24 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS MCS j and MCR Master Control Set and Reset The MCS master control set instruction is usually used in combination with the MCR master control reset instruction The MCS instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the MCR instruction When the input preceding the MCS instruction is off the MCS is executed so that all inputs to the portion between the MCS and the MCR are forced off When the input preceding the MCS instruction is on the MCS is not executed so that the pro
432. ication program examples on pages 26 18 through 26 22 are included in the application program Defined network variables The application program installed in the LONWORKS interface module defines network variables for transmit and receive data listed on page 26 23 When you modify or create an application program do not use these variable names otherwise verification of the application program will be difficult Precautions for writing and reading registers Make a program to write and read data to and from registers in the LONWORKS interface module as shown in the sample programs on pages 26 21 and 26 22 While data write or read is in progress do not execute any other command Precautions for downloading an application program to the flash memory through the network A special tool is required to download an application program Before starting download stop the OpenNet Controller CPU operation While downloading is in progress make sure the power voltage is within the rated operating voltage range Precautions for flash memory used for the application program Do not store variables to the flash memory To hold variables and other data while power is off use the RAM backup func tion of the CPU module The flash memory can be rewritten a maximum of 10 000 times Precautions for system setup Set the retry cycles of the message service to a value of or more dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 26 13 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MO
433. ice No Bus Segment No Position 1514131211109 8 7 65 43 2 1 0 Bus segment number Position Length Code Note The data register assigned to the length code stores the quantity of the input or output points whichever is larger of the slave station When using the SX5S as a slave the length code can be 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes 15 14 131211109 8 7 65 43 2 1 0 s Always 0 Value 4 BRT 816 Unit 2 0 0 reserved 0 1 Nibbles 1 0 Bytes 1 1 Bits ID Code 1514131211109 8 7 65432 1 0 B Always 0 I O Type _ Quantity of PCP Words peripherals communication protocol Station Type ID Code Examples ID Code Low Byte Type 01h Digital output remote bus station example SX5S SBT16K 02h Digital input remote bus station example SX5S SBN16S 03h Digital I O remote bus station example SX5S SBM16K 31h Analog output remote bus station 32h Analog input remote bus station Device Level 1514131211109 817 6 54 32 1 0 pr 8 Always 0 INTERBUS Device Level 0 through 15 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Special Data Register Numbers for Remote 1 Node Information Allocation No D8050 D8051 D8052 D8053 D8054 D8055 D8056 D8057 D8058 D8059 D8060 D8061 D8062 D8063 D8064 D8065 D8066 D8067 D8068 D8069 D8070 D8071
434. ift register 7 22 ROOT 11 10 rotate left 13 5 left with carry 13 9 right 13 7 right with carry 13 11 ROTL 13 5 ROTLC 13 9 ROTR 13 7 ROTRC 13 11 RS232C line control signals 17 27 port communication mode selection 23 3 communication protocol 23 6 connecting equipment 17 1 port 1 2 2 port2 2 2 RTS output control signal option D8207 D8307 17 29 RUN mode control signal statuses 17 27 run stop operation upon disparity 5 5 selection at memory backup error 5 2 RXDI1 17 13 RXD2 17 13 sample program modem answer mode 23 13 modem originate mode 23 12 turning all outputs off 2 20 screwdriver 25 5 26 6 selecting device numbers 22 2 master and slave station numbers 21 2 separate refresh mode 21 8 SET and RST instructions 7 3 set point 20 12 setting calendar clock using a user program 15 7 using WindLDR 15 7 communication parameters 23 10 using WindLDR 17 3 SFR and SFRN instructions 7 20 SFR N shifting flag M8012 6 10 SFTL 13 1 SFTR 13 3 shift left 13 1 register instructions 7 20 right 13 3 simple operation 4 4 simultaneous refresh mode 21 10 single output instruction 7 24 skip 17 18 slave station communication completion relay M8140 M8176 21 6 M8177 21 6 numbers 21 2 software version 25 7 26 17 SOTU and SOTD instructions 7 24 SOTU SOTD instructions using with program branching 18 2 source and destination operands 8 3 operand 8 3 special data registers 6 12 for data link communication error 21 4 for data link
435. ignated by operand S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When transmission is complete an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The transmit status data register DO through D7998 stores the status of transmission and error code The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data The same data registers should not be used as transmit status registers for TXD1 TXD2 instructions and receive status registers for RXD1 RXD2 instructions Precautions for Programming TXD Instruction The OpenNet Controller has five formatting areas each for executing TXD1 and TXD2 instructions so five TXD1 and five TXD2 instructions can be processed at the same time If inputs to more than five TXD1 or TXD2 instructions are turned on at the same time an error code is set to the transmit status data register designated by operand D2 in the excessive TXD instructions that cannot be executed e If the input for a TXD instruction is turned on while another TXD instruction is executed the subsequent TXD instruc tion is executed 2 scan times after the preceding TXD instruction is completed e Since TXD instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required User Communication Transmit Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR 51 01
436. il may cause damage to the modules e When using analog input or output modules first set the rotary switch on the side of the module to the desired input output mode before assembling the module The rotary switch cannot be changed after the module has been assembled For the operation modes of analog input and out put modules see pages 2 28 and 2 31 The following example demonstrates the procedure for assembling a CPU module and an I O module together 1 When assembling an analog input or output module set the rotary switch to select the desired operation mode Use a small flat screwdriver to turn the rotary switch 2 Place the CPU module and I O module side by side Put the expansion connectors together for easy alignment 3 With the expansion connectors aligned correctly press the CPU module and I O module together until the latches click to attach the modules together firmly 4 Press the end plate to each side of the module assembly A pair of end plates are supplied with each CPU module f 259950955 25555500 3 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Disass
437. imedown timer TMS A total of 256 timers can be programmed in a user program Each timer must be allocated to a unique number TO through T255 Timer Allocation Number Range Increments Preset Value TML 1 sec timer TO to T255 0 to 65535 sec l sec TIM 100 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 6553 5 sec 100 msec Constant 0 to 65535 TMH 10 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 655 35 sec 10 msec Data registers DO to D7999 TMS 1 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 65 535 sec 1 msec The preset value can be 0 through 65535 and designated using a decimal constant or data register TML 1 Sec Timer Ladder Diagram TML 100 Ladder Diagram TIM TMH 10 msec Timer Ladder Diagram TMH TMS 1 msec Timer Ladder Diagram TMS 7 8 Program List Prgm Adrs Program List Prgm Adrs Program List Prgm Adrs Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Timer Circuit The preset value 0 through 65535 can be designated using a data register DO through D7999 then the data of the data reg ist
438. in accordance with pertaining regula tions When storing or disposing of the battery use a proper container prepared for this purpose This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe When disposing of the OpenNet Controller do so as an industrial waste dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL PREFACE 1 About This Manual This user s manual primarily describes entire functions of the OpenNet Controller CPU modules digital I O modules ana log I O modules Also included are powerful communications of the OpenNet Controller CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION General information about the OpenNet Controller features brief description on special functions and various system setup configurations for communication CHAPTER 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Specifications of CPU digital and analog I O expansion power supply remote I O master OpenNet interface modules CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Methods and precautions for installing and wiring OpenNet Controller modules CHAPTER 4 OPERATION BASICS General information about setting up the basic OpenNet Controller system for programming starting and stopping Open Net Controller operation and simple operating procedures from creating a user program using WindLDR on a PC to moni toring the OpenNet Controller operation CHAPTER 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Stop reset inputs run stop selection at memory backup error keep designation for internal relays
439. ination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Example IM OVN IMOVN W S1 52 Dl D2 REP n C10 D10 030 020 D10 C10 D10 NOT D30 D20 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 D19 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands D20 If the data of data register D10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 then the source data is deter D21 mined by adding the offset to counter C10 designated by source operand S1 C 10 4 C14 D45 59085 D46 THEE If data register D20 designated by destination operand D2 contains a value of 15 then the destina tion is determined by adding the offset to data register D30 designated by destination operand D1 D 30 15 D45 C13 C14 As a result when input IO is on the current value of counter C14 is inverted and moved to data reg c15 ister D45 dec OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 7 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS BMOV Block Move Ba S1 S1 1 S142 SI N 1 gt DI 1 1 D1 2 DI N 1 H BMOV W S1 N W D1 When input is N blocks of 16 bit word data starting with operand designated by S1 are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D
440. ine Computer 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Computer Link System When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and I O status can be monitored on the com puter data in the CPU module can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded A max imum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPU modules can be connected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system For details about the computer link communication see page 22 1 Computer Link 1 1 Communication Computer Link Cable 4 E RS232C Port 1 or Port 2 Eei nins 2 4 3m 9 84 ft long H D sub 9 pin Female Connector ee IH AC Adapter H mem D sub 9 pin Female Connector Computer Link Cable 6C FC2AKC6C 2m 6 56 ft long Computer Link 1 N Communication RS232C RS485 Converter ist Unit FC2AMD1 EEI E a D sub 9 pin ag Female Connector RS232C Cable EE HD9Z C52 1 5m 4 92 ft long ag 2nd Unit Twist pair Shielded Cable 88 32nd Unit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Data Link System O
441. ink System Setup eee as 21 2 Data Register Allocation for Transmit Receive Data 21 3 Special Data Registers for Data Link Communication Error 214 Data Link Communication between Master and Slave Stations 215 Special Internal Relays for Data Link Communication 21 6 Programming WindLDR 21 7 Refresh sos shits Sadie PAR See ie D tighten tpi 21 8 Operating Procedure for Data Link 21 11 Data Link with Other Equipment Separate Refresh Mode 21 12 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Computer Link System Setup 1 N Computer Link System 22 1 Monitoring PECS Cats 4 a m eret to e e a ee Ale dae a 22 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL C HAPTER 23 C HAPTER 24 C HAPTER 25 TABLE OF CONTENTS MODEM MODE System Setup sospes REESE E aad deh ea RE GER RAUS CI i ed 23 1 Applicable Modems ek ew ee Re Pa RA eS 23 2 Internal Relays for Modem Mode 232 Data Registers for Modem Mode 233 Originate Mode cue RR hs ee a eee he ENE Ee E ES 234 Disconnect Mode csse RR ee Mawes wee ee ee EY n RR eR e 23 6 AT General Command Mode 23 6 Answer
442. input or output can be loaded or outputted in the remote I O system This example demonstrates a program to load an input status at the slave station of node 0 and to send the status to output Q3 at the master station rite Q3 24 14 OPE node 1 When the input at the slave station of node 0 is turned on output Q3 at the master station is turned on NNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Precautions for Wiring INTERBUS Cable For wiring the remote I O master and slave modules use the INTERBUS cable made of the remote bus cable with D sub 9 position male and female connectors The remote bus cable is available from Phoenix Contact When ordering the remote bus cable from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and cable length in meters Remote Bus Cable Type No Phoenix Type Order No Specification Used for IBS RBC METER T 28 06 28 6 Standard 3 x2 x0 22 mm Fixed routing Flexible power conduits and machinery compo j 2 IBS RBC METER FT 27 23 12 3 Highly flexible 3 x 2 x 0 25 mm nents which are frequently in motion IBS RBC METER ET 27 23 14 9 Underground 3 x2 x 0 22 mm Fixed routing indoors outdoors or underground Cable Connector Pinouts D sub 9 pin Male Connector D sub 9 pin Female Connector Yellow 6 6 oy o5 o9 o5 Gray o 2 sio 9 9 C Brown W IO ojs Soldered Strain Relief Strain Relief Soldered
443. ions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the CDP instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly Timing Chart Preset Input 10 Up Pulse I1 Down Pulse I2 Counter C1 Value 500 501502501500499 s 0 1 500500 ON OFF Counter C1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL e The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once e The preset input must be turned on ini tially so that the current value returns to the preset value e The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin e When the up pulse and down pulses are on simultaneously no pulse is counted e The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 e After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down e After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to 0 on the next count up e When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be desig nated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see page 5 3 Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor then select Online Point Write To change a counter preset value specify the counter number with a capital C and a new preset value To change a counter current value specify the counter num ber with a
444. ircuit 47 mi COM O E S Los 4 Input OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 9 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 8 point AC Input Module Specifications Type No Rated Input Voltage FC3A N08A11 100 to 120V AC Input Voltage Range 85 to 132V AC Rated Input Current 8 3 mA point 100V AC 60 Hz Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement chart on page 2 15 Input Impedance 12 k 60 Hz Turn ON Time 100V AC 20 msec maximum Turn OFF Time 100V AC 20 msec maximum Between input terminals Not isolated Isolation Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Load for 1 Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination M ethod Static Effect of Improper Input Connection If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 30 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Weight approx Input Operating Range 220g The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below ON Area Sad pea cd Input Voltage V AC Transition A Area Input Internal Circuit COM O t OFF Area pd 1 6 6583 11
445. is used for the RXD instruction in the user communication mode Since this example uses only the TXD instruction the receive timeout value has no effect Ladder Diagram The second data stored in special data register D8014 is compared with 0 using the CMP compare equal to instruction Each time the condition is met the TXD2 instruction is executed to send the C2 and D30 data to the printer A counting circuit for counter C2 is omitted from this sample program MOVW S1 Dl REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 gt Doe 3 D8305 to enable the DSR option for busy control aie CMP W m 1 4 16 a 0 REP M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay CMP W compares the D8014 second data with 0 MOVW S1 1 REP MO C2 D31 When the D8014 data equals 0 second MO is turned on MOV W S1 D1 REP Counter C2 current value is moved to D31 D8012 hour data is moved to D20 MOV W ae Dos REP D8013 minute data is moved to D21 SOTU TXD S1 D1 D2 TXD2 is executed to send 73 byte data through the MO 2 73 M1 DO RS232C port 2 to the printer SP SP SP SP P R N T SP T 20h 20h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh 20h 50h 52h 49h 4Eh 54h 20h 54h E S T SP CR LF CR LF SP SP SP 45h 53h 54h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh ODh 0Ah ODh 0Ah 20h 20h 20h D20 hour data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 2 dig D20 Conversion BCDASCII Digits 2 REP 01 its are sent H SP 48h 20h 021 Conversion BCDASCII Digits 2 REP 0
446. ith peniiet PLE x n Sc Tice erc Emi lore Vina 7 PUE Te TRANT howgge m Che Urchanged Leve Hise Erm Site COM a Chi PLE Hom mew Protect Satur hangs 5 Unrprs gui X T i OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE Introduction This chapter describes the modem mode designed for communication between the OpenNet Controller and another Open Net Controller or any data terminal equipment through telephone lines Using the modem mode the OpenNet Controller can initialize a modem dial a telephone number send an AT command enable the answer mode to wait for an incoming call and disconnect the telephone line All of these operations can be performed simply by turning on a start internal relay dedicated to each operation UN Caution The modem mode provides for a simple modem control function so that the OpenNet Controller can initialize a modem dial a destination telephone number or answer an incoming call The per formance of the modem communication using the modem mode depends on the modem functions and telephone line situations The modem mode does not prevent intrusion or malfunctions of other systems For practical applications confirm the communication function using the actual system setup and include safety provisions e While communicating through modems the telephone li
447. ith respect t d 12 M8021 j pect to seconds 15 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The DISP display instruction is used to display 1 through 5 digits of timer counter current values and data register data on 7 segment display units The DGRD digital read instruction is used to read 1 through 5 digits of digital switch settings to a data register This instruction is useful to change preset values for timers and counters using digital switches The CDISP character display instruction is used to display a maximum of 16 characters on dot matrix display units DISP Display maj H When input is on data designated by source operand S1 is set to outputs or internal relays designated by operand Q This instruction is used to output 7 segment data to display units DISP S1 Q LAT DAT L BCD4 L Quantity of digits 1 to 5 decimal 1 to 4 hex Data phase Low or High Eight DISP instructions can be used in a user program Latch phase Display data can be 0 through 65535 FFFFh Low or High Conversion BCD or BIN Note The DISP instruction can be used on transistor out put modules only Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to display X X X Q Output First output number to display data X For the valid operand
448. ive Data D8401 Communication Error D7020 D7029 Transmit Data D7030 D7039 Receive Data D8402 Communication Error D7040 D7049 Transmit Data D7050 D7059 Receive Data D8403 Communication Error D7060 D7069 Transmit Data D7070 D7079 Receive Data D8429 Communication Error D7580 D7589 Transmit Data D7590 D7599 Receive Data D8430 Communication Error D7600 D7609 Transmit Data D7610 D7619 Receive Data AA AAAA Slave Stations D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data Slave Station 31 ave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data ave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data ave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data ave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data Slave Station 30 D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Slave Station 31 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Special Internal Relays for Data Link Communication Speci
449. ization String Selection D8201 D8301 Value Applicable Modem Confirmed Operation on 0 AIWA 33 6 Kbps or less AIWA PV BW3360 1 OMRON 2 AIWA 56 Kbps 3 OMRON 56 Kbps OMRON ME5614 4 Sun Corporation Sun Corporation MS56KEF Micro Research Micro Research MR 560XL 5 Seiko Instruments Seiko Instruments MC 6630 In making this user s manual the correct operation has been confirmed on five modems listed in the table above When using other modems set a proper initialization string by referring to page 23 4 and confirm operation When using the modem in the PBX environment enter a value listed in the table above plus 10 to D8201 D8301 Try this value to establish modem connection If it does not work enter a value listed above plus 20 to D8201 D8301 Determine the type of the telephone line Consult your local telephone company whether your telephone line is for touch tone phones or pulse dial phones Deter mine the dial command according to the type of the telephone line ATDT Touch tone phones ATDP Pulse dial phones Setting Communication Parameters The default communication parameters shown below are recommended RS232C Port Communication Parameter Default Baud rate 9600 bps Start bit 1 Data bits 7 Parity Even Stop bit 1 Total 10 bits Only when the DTE connected on the communication line uses different communication parameters than the default val ues of the OpenNet Controller set the matching communic
450. l of 256 bits which are allocated to RO through R255 Any number of available bits can be selected to form a train of bits which store on or off status The on off data of constituent bits is shifted in the forward direction forward shift register or in the reverse direction reverse shift register when a pulse input is turned on Forward Shift Register SFR When SFR instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFR instruction is entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate operand numbers The shift register number corresponds to the first or head bit The number of bits is the second required address after the SFR instruction The SFR instruction requires three inputs The forward shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input and the SFR instruction followed by the first bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram First Bit Program List Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction First Bit RO to R255 of Bits of Bits 1 to 256 I2 Rung 2 H H 94 I3 R3 A Structural Diagram Shift Direction Caution When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be r programmed immediately above and below the SFR instruction To program other instructions start a new Reset rung If an instruction is entered above or below the SFR instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly Tee 11 First
451. ld load off and physical port number 3 Network Interface Connector For connecting the DeviceNet communication cable 4 Color Label A five color label is located beside the connector on the DeviceNet slave module Connect each of the five different color wires of the DeviceNet communication cable to the terminal of a matching color Label and Wire Insulation Color Name Black V Blue CAN L Bare Wire Drain White CAN H Red V 5 Status LED Indicates operating status Indicator Status Description POW OFF Module power OFF power Green ON Module power ON OFF Power OFF or Dup MAC ID test not completed Flash Normal operation communication not established MNS Green module network Status ON Normal operation communication established Red Flash Minor fault temporary network error ON Critical fault OFF I O inactive 10 Green ON active status Red Flash Minor fault ON Critical fault dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 3 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Specifications General Specifications Communication Interface Power Voltage Range 11 to 25V DC Current Draw Approx 25 mA Isolation Between control circuit and communication terminal Photocoupler isolated Insulation Resistance Between communication terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Dielectric Strength Between
452. le to 100 10001 to 10099 other values designate 100 R W upper limit s1417 Output manipulated variable o to 100 5101 designates 100 R W lower limit Sista Manual mod output 0 to 100 2101 designates 100 R W manipulated variable 1 to 10000 0 01 sec to 100 00 sec aca AT sampling period 0 designates 0 01 sec 210001 designates 100 00 sec REM 1 to 500 0 1 sec to 50 0 sec ont AU COUOrDENOG 0 designates 0 1 sec 2501 designates 50 0 sec RW When 51 4 linear conversion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 AT SEE paint When S144 1 Linear conversion lt AT set point lt Linear conversion max ib 51422 AT output manipulated variable 0 to 100 2101 designates 100 R W 1423 51424 51425 Reserved for processing the PID instruction 51426 Note The value stored in the data register designated by 51 3 operation mode is checked only when the start input for the PID instruction is turned on Values in all other control registers are refreshed in every scan 202 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION S140 Process Variable after conversion When the linear conversion is enabled S 1 4 set to 1 the data register designated by 51 0 stores the linear conversion result of the process variable S4 The process variable S1 0 takes a value between the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 and the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 When the linear conversion is disa
453. le Mounting the LONWORKS interface module beside the OpenNet Controller CPU module makes up a node on a LONWORKS network The node can communicate I O data with other nodes in a dis tributed network LONWoRKS Interface Module Features The LONWORKS interface module conforms to the specifications of LONWORKS that is recognized worldwide as a de facto industry standard open network so the OpenNet Controller can be linked to the LONWoRKS networks consisting of LON WORKS compliant products manufactured by many different vendors such as I O terminals sensors drives operator inter faces and barcode readers The flexible configurable and interoperable features of the LONWORKS network make it possible to build expand or modify production lines with reduced cost The transmit receive data quantity can be selected from 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits in 1 byte increments One LONWORKS interface module enables the OpenNet Controller CPU module to transmit 64 bits and receive 64 bits at the maximum to and from the LONWORKS network The network can be configured either in bus or free topology The total transmission distance can be 1 400m in bus topol ogy and 500m in free topology The free topology makes it possible to configure a flexible network About LON The LON Local Operating Network technology is a network control system developed by Echelon USA The LON technology is an intelligent distributed network for communication with various senso
454. les If this trouble occurs include special data register D8179 INTERBUS master status transition num ber to detect failure to run e Include special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS master initialize in the user program and turn on M8030 to initialize the remote I O master module CMP lt gt W S1 S2 8125 is in operation output special 08178 0 internal relay CMP lt gt W S1 S2 D8178 stores 0 during normal operation 08179 5 When 08178 is not equal to 0 M1 is turned on D8179 stores 5 during normal operation When D8179 is not equal to 5 M2 is turned on When either M1 or M2 is turned on M8030 is turned on for one scan to initial ize the master module Note When M8030 is turned on outputs of the remote I O slave modules are initialized For exam ple when using IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals as slave modules all outputs are turned off during initialization and restore normal operation to turn on or off according to the output data transmitted from the OpenNet Controller CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 11 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Calculation of the INTERBUS Cycle Time The I O data is refreshed continuously The cycle time of the INTERBUS system Cycle Time Examples depends on few factors and increases almost linearly with an increasing number 1 Points Cycle Time of I O points Due to the high effectiveness of the protocol the greater part of the 512 2
455. les diada Keep oubput dure download ul Note When downloading a user program all values and selections in the Function Area Settings are also downloaded to the OpenNet Controller For Function Area Settings see pages 5 1 through 5 18 4 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 4 OPERATION BASICS Monitor Operation Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the PC The input and output statuses of the sample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor When both inputs 10 and are on the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows a Pi pm Rung 01 When both inputs IO and I1 are on output QO is turned 00 0000 off Rung 02 When both inputs IO and I1 on output 1 is turned i 000 rDDOi 0001 sd E mn mS Rung 03 When both input IO and I1 are on internal relay M10 is 0000 10001 0010 turned on M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay 4 a c While M10 is on output 2 flashes in 1 sec increments HoOoOLO MElIZzI GQODOZ Quitting WindLDR When you have completed monitoring you can quit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen In both cases from the menu bar select File Exit WindLDR dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 4 7 4 OPERATION BASICS 48 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS In
456. ling edge differentiation output 1 SOTU Single Output Up Rising edge differentiation output 1 Timer Comparison Equal to comparison of timer current value 3 TC gt Timer Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of timer current value 3 TIM 100 msec Timer Subtracting 100 msec timer 0 to 6553 5 sec 3 TMH 10 msec Timer Subtracting 10 msec timer 0 to 655 35 sec 3 TML 1 sec Timer Subtracting 1 sec timer 0 to 65535 sec 3 TMS 1 msec Timer Subtracting 1 msec timer 0 to 65 535 sec 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 1 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS LOD Load and LODN Load Not 4 The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with a NO normally open contact The LODN instruction starts the log ical operation with a NC normally closed contact A total of eight LOD and or LODN instructions can be programmed consecutively Ladder Diagram Valid ae instruction Se an a Toa cec LOD 100 0 717 15 2S 0717 LODN 0597 0597 3000 8237 0239 0 255 0255 1500 01317 15 H OUT Output x and OUTN Output Not zx The OUT instruction outputs the result of bit logical operation to the specified operand The OUTN instruction outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation to the specified operand Ladder Diagram Valid Operands Instruction OUT 100 0 717 15 Se CORE T OUTN 8000 8117 1000 0 1317 15 Multiple OUT and OUTN There is no limit to the number of OUT and OUTN instructions that ca
457. lize flag M8007 6 9 21 6 prohibit flag M8006 6 9 21 6 stop flag M8007 6 9 21 6 connection error 27 4 master station processing A 2 mode 2 2 system 1 6 tab 21 7 wiring 3 7 with other equipment 21 12 data rate 25 4 25 6 data register allocation for transmit receive data 21 3 comparison instructions 7 18 data registers and link registers double word datamove 9 2 operands 8 5 for modem mode 23 3 DC and DC2 instructions 7 18 DEC 11 9 decimal values and hexadecimal storage 8 4 decrement 11 9 jump non zero 18 5 defined network variables 26 23 destination operand 8 3 device level 24 6 numbers 21 2 22 2 DeviceNet 25 1 cable 25 4 slave module 2 38 DGRD 16 3 dialing 23 2 telephone number 23 5 digital F INDEX I O module operands 6 18 read 16 3 dimensions 2 40 DIN rail 3 3 DIP switch settings 25 6 direct control action 20 10 disabling protection 5 18 disassembling modules 3 3 disconnect line 23 2 mode 23 2 23 6 discontinuity of operand areas 8 5 DISP 16 1 disparity run stop operation upon 5 5 display 16 1 DIV 11 1 division 11 1 DJNZ 18 5 double word data move in data registers and link registers 9 2 operands in data registers and link registers 8 5 download program 4 6 5 19 DSR input control signal option D8205 D8305 17 28 DTCB 14 14 DTDV 14 13 DTR output control signal option D8206 D8306 17 29 dual pulse reversible counter CDP 7 12 edit user program 4 4 enabling protection 5 18 END instruction 7 28 proc
458. long data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When an output or internal relay is designated as the destination only 1 point is used regardless of the selected data type Example ICMP gt ICMP gt W 51 S2 S3 D1 10 D10 D11 D12 M10 D10 gt D11 2 D12 MIO goes on When input 10 is turned on data of data registers D10 D11 and D12 designated by source operands S1 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met internal relay M10 designated by destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met M10 is turned off 104 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The binary arithmetic instructions make it possible for the user to program computations using addition subtraction mul tiplication and division For addition and subtraction operands internal relay M8003 is used to carry or to borrow ADD Addition Datatype Worl 51 525 DI CY H ABB p UM SAM PU Datatype DorL S1 S1 1 52 52 1 1 0 1 1 CY When input is on 16 32 bit data designated by source ands S1 and S2 are added The result is set to destination oper and D1 and carry M8003 SUB Subtraction Datatype Worl 81 82 DI BW H MEM Py Su DI PEE Datatype Dor L S1 S1 1 S 2
459. lue Automatic Reset Click the check box to enable the high speed counter current value automatic reset When the comparison output is turned on with this box checked the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 high speed counter reset value automatically The high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 11 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High speed Counter Timing Chart Current Value The 08047 value at this point becomes the preset value for the next counting cycle Jl Preset Value i 1 i 1 one scan one scan J scan Lm gt a gt lt Phase Z Input Terminal 4 ae Comparison Output Terminal 5 ee i ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Comparison Output Reset M8010 Up Down Status M8130 Comparison ON Status M8131 Current Value Zero clear M8132 Current Value Overflow M8133 Current Value Underflow M8134 Comparison Output Status M8135 5 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High speed Counter Wiring Diagram Sink Type High speed Counter Comparison Output FC3A CP2K and F
460. lue in 51 1 determines the ON duration of the control output S2 6 in proportion to the control period S1 13 When the output manipulated variable limit is enabled S2 2 set to on the manipulated variable D1 is stored to the out put manipulated variable S1 1 according to the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 and the output manipu lated variable lower limit S1 17 as summarized in the table below While manual mode is enabled with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to on 5 1 1 stores 0 through 100 of the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 and D1 stores an indefinite value While auto tuning is in progress 51 1 stores 0 through 100 of the AT output manipulated variable 81422 and D1 stores an indefinite value Examples of Output Manipulated Variable Values Output anipulated Output anipulated Output anipulated Output anipulated Variable Limit Enable Variable Upper Limit Variable Lower Limit URS Vantage Variable S242 1416 1417 S141 2100 100 OFF disabled 1to 99 1 to 99 0 0 250 50 50 25 26 to 49 26 to 49 lt 25 25 ON enabled gt 100 50 10050 1 to 99 1 to 99 x 0 5 lt 0 0 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 13 20 PID INSTRUCTION Application Example This application example demonstrates a PID control for a heater to keep the temperature at 200 C In this example when the program is started
461. lues Word Unsigned 16 bits W 16 bits 1 0 to 65 535 Integer Signed 15 bits 16 bits 1 32 768 to 32 767 Double Word Unsigned 32 bits D 32 bits 2 0 to 4 294 967 295 Long Signed 31 bits L 32 bits 2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Decimal Values and Hexadecimal Storage The following table shows hexadecimal equivalents which are stored in the CPU as the result of addition and subtraction of the decimal values shown Data Type Result of Addition Hexadecimal Storage Result of Subtraction Hexadecimal Storage 0 0000 65535 FFFF 65535 FFFF Word 131071 CY FFFF 1 BW FFFF 65535 BW 0001 65536 BW 0000 65534 CY 7FFE 65534 BW 7FFE 32768 CY 0000 32768 BW 0000 32767 7 FFF 32767 7 FFF 0 0000 0 0000 Integer 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 32767 8001 32767 8001 32768 8000 32768 8000 32769 CY FFFF 32769 BW FFFF 65535 CY 8001 65535 BW 8001 0 00000000 4294967295 FFFFFFFF 4294967295 FFFFFFFF Double Word 8589934591 CY FFFFFFFF 1 BW FFFFFFFF 4294967295 BW 00000001 4294967296 BW 00000000 4294967294 CY 7FFFFFFE 4294967294 BW 7FFFFFFE 2147483648 CY 00000000 2147483648 BW 00000000 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 0 00000000 0 00000000 Long 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF 2147483647 80000001 2147483647 80000001 2147483648 80000000 2147483648 80000000 2147483649 CY FFFFFFFF 2147483649 BW FFFFFFFF 4294967295 CY 80000001 4294967295 BW 80000001 84 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 A
462. lues are cleared despite the settings in the Keep dialog box shown below The keep clear settings in this dialog box have effect when restarting the CPU Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Keep tab The Keep page appears Moite i0 Data internal Firley Beriman 55 AB 7 AB Keen Esp Rare Kemp dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 3 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Internal Relay Keep Designation All Clear All internal relay statuses are cleared at startup default All Keep All internal relay statuses are maintained at startup Keep Range A designated area of internal relays are maintained at startup Enter the start keep number in the left field and the end keep number in the right field The start keep number must be smaller than or equal to the end keep number Valid internal relay numbers are MO through M2557 Special internal relays cannot be desig nated Fusctign fica Gethin Eoep 0 Fister Coton Dass liek c e internal Fizlap Teme Darsegrefron Clear
463. m 1 Counter Comparison Equal to comparison of counter current value 3 gt Counter Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value 3 CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter Dual pulse reversible counter 0 to 65535 3 CNT Adding Counter Adding counter 0 to 65535 3 CUD BOWN Selection Revers ble Up down selection reversible counter 0 to 65535 3 Counter DC Data Register Comparison Equal to comparison of data register value 3 DC2 Data Register Comparison 2 Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value 3 END End Ends a program 1 JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction 1 JMP Jump Jumps a designated program area 1 LOD Load Stores intermediate results and reads contact status 2 LODN Load Not Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status 2 MCR Master Control Reset Ends a master control 1 MCS Master Control Set Starts a master control 1 OR Or Parallel connection of NO contacts 2 OR LOD Or Load Parallel connection of circuit blocks 1 ORN Or Not Parallel connection of NC contacts 2 OUT Output Outputs the result of bit logical operation 2 OUTN Output Not Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation 2 RST Reset Resets output internal relay shift register or link register bit 2 SET Set Sets output internal relay shift register or link register bit 2 SFR Shift Register Forward shift register 3 SFRN Shift Register Not Reverse shift register 3 SOTD Single Output Down Fal
464. m button The Communication Parameter dialog box appears When 2550 ms is selected in the Receive Timeout box the receive timeout function is disabled 4 Select communication parameters to the same values for the device to communicate with The terminator code selected in this dialog box has no effect in the user communication mode Instead end delimiter codes are used for the user communication The terminator code is used for the maintenance communication dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 173 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS TXD1 Transmit 1 1j 5 When input is on data designated by S1 is converted into a specified H 51 D1 D format and transmitted through the RS232C port 1 to a remote terminal with an RS232C port KKKKK KKKKK KKKKK TXD2 Transmit 2 When input is on data designated by S1 is converted into a specified H 51 D1 D2 format and transmitted through the RS232C port 2 to a remote terminal with an RS232C port KKKKK KKKKK Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 51 Source 1 Transmit data X X D1 Destination 1 Transmit completion output D2 Destination 2 Transmit status register For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Transmit data des
465. m not in compliance with EN61131 3 Instruction Words 37 basic instructions 65 advanced instructions Processing Time Basic advanced instruction See page A 1 END processing See page A2 Clock calendar processing One cycle in 100 msec see page A2 Data link master station processing See pages page 21 1 and page 21 10 Internal Relay 2 048 points Data Register 8 000 points Counter 256 points adding dual pulse reversible up down selection reversible Timer 256 points 1 sec 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec First 8 channels of each input module can be designated as catch inputs Catch Input Minimum turn on pulse width 40 usec maximum Minimum turn off pulse width 150 usec maximum Calendar Clock Accuracy 30 sec month at 25 C typical Backup duration Approx 30 days 25 C typical Self diagnostic Function Keep data sum check WDT check user program RAM sum check user program ROM sum check user program write check power failure check timer counter preset value sum check calendar clock error check user program syntax check data link connection check 1 bus check I bus initialization check user program execution check Start Stop Method Turning power on and off Start stop command in WindLDR Turning start control special internal relay M8000 on and off Turning designated stop or reset input off and on OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 25 2 MODU
466. m 0000 Modem Cable 1C L h To RS232C Port 1 FC2A KM1C Dub 25 pin Male Connector D sub 25 pin Connector Pinouts Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Request to Send Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Do not connect the NC no connection pin to any line otherwise the OpenNet Controller and modem may be damaged Modem cables for Apple Macintosh computers cannot be used for the OpenNet Controller OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE Applicable Modems Any Hayes compatible modem can be used Modems with a communications rate of 9600 bps or more between modems are recommended Use modems of the same make and model at both ends of the communication line Internal Relays for Modem Mode When the modem mode is enabled internal relays M8050 through M8107 are allocated to special functions M8050 M8056 RS232C port 1 and M8080 M8086 RS232C port 2 are used to send an AT command or disconnect the tele phone line M8060 M8066 and M8070 M8076 RS232C port 1 and M8090 M8096 and M8100 M8106 RS232C port 2 turn on to indicate the results of the command M8057 M8067 and M8077 RS232C port 1 and M8087 M8097 and M8107 RS232C port 2 are used to indicate the status of the RS232C port All completion and failure internal relays are turned off at the first scan in the modem mode Start and Result Internal Relays for RS232C Port 1 Mode Comma
467. many as required to turn on and off designated output and internal relays at predeter mined times and days of the week Once the internal calendar clock is set the WKCMP ON and OFF instructions compare the predetermined time with the internal clock When the preset time is reached internal relay or output designated as destination operand is turned on or off as scheduled WKCMP ON Week Compare ON ON LATE EUM preset data with the current day and time When input is on the WKCMP ON compares the 51 and S2 H WKCMP S1 S2 53 D1 When the current day and time reach the presets an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on depend ing on the week table output control designated by S3 WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF When input is on the WKCMP OFF compares the S1 and S2 H a 4 ie E ha x i mas e r preset data with the current day and time When the current day and time reach the presets an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned off depend ing on the week table output control designated by S3 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 Q M R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Day of week comparison data X X X X X X X X 0 127 52 Source 2 Hour minute comparison data X X X X X X X 02359 3 Source 3 Week table output control X X X X X X X X 02 D1 Destination 1 Comparison ON output WKCMP ON P B Comparison OFF output WKCMP OFF For the valid
468. master slave stations 6 17 for error information 27 3 for high speed counter 5 10 6 13 for INTERBUS 6 13 for INTERBUS master information 24 10 for modem mode 6 16 for remote I O node information 24 6 for RS232C line control signals 17 27 special functions 5 1 special internal relay allocation numbers 6 6 special internal relays for data link communication 21 6 for high speed counter 5 10 for INTERBUS master information 24 11 specifications CPU module 2 5 data link 21 1 DeviceNet slave module 25 4 function 2 5 general 2 4 LonWorks interface module 26 5 remote I O master module 2 37 remote I O system 24 2 user communication mode 17 1 start and result internal relays 23 2 control M8000 6 9 delimiter 17 16 start stop operation 4 2 INDEX remote I O communication 24 12 schematic 4 2 using power supply 4 3 using WindLDR 4 2 starting operation 25 9 26 12 station numbers 21 2 status code receive 17 21 transmit 17 9 data register modem mode 23 8 LED 2 2 transition number INTERBUS master 24 10 status LEDs 26 15 step response method 20 9 stop input 4 3 5 1 system status 2 6 STOP mode control signal statuses 17 28 structure 26 23 of an advanced instruction 8 3 SUB 11 1 subtraction 11 1 SUM 11 11 SX5 communication I O terminals A 4 SX5D communication I O terminals 25 2 SX5L communication I O terminals 26 3 SX5S communication I O terminals 24 3 system error information INTERBUS master 24 10 setup 1 3 data li
469. mended torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m e Either connect commercially available terminators at both ends of the network or connect the following resistor to the branch taps at both ends of the network Connect the terminator between the CAN H white and CAN L blue lines Metal film resistor 1210 1 1 4W Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block of the network interface connector can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of the cable Applicable ferrules for the terminal block and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw terminals on the DeviceNet slave module Ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are made by and are available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of Phoenix Contact ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are listed below When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below DeviceNet slave modules are connected to the network using special DeviceNet thick or thin cables each cable consisting of three different sizes of wires listed below Ferrule Order No Applicable Wire Size For 1 wire connection For 2 wire connection Pcs Pkt mm AWG Phoenix Type Order No Phoenix Type Order No 0 25 24 Al 0 25 8 YE 32 00 85 2 100 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8 WH 32 00 014 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 32 00 93 3 100 0 75 18 Al 0
470. mer counting error and timeout output error These errors are not constant but vary with the user program and other causes Timer Input Error The input status is read at the END processing and stored to the input RAM So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timer input turns on in a scan cycle The same error occurs on the normal input and the catch input The timer input error shown below does not include input delay caused by the hardware Minimum Error M aximum Error Program Processing Program Processing ie Actual Input e Actual Input Input 2 Input RAM gn ii Timer Start Timer Start E Tet E Tie Tet e 1 1 r 3 x gt i 1 scan time i 1 scan time When the input turns on immediately before the When the input turns on immediately after the END pro END processing Tie is almost 0 Then the timer cessing Tie is almost equal to one scan time Then the input error is only Tet behind error and is at its timer input error is Tie Tet one scan time Tet minimum behind error and is at its maximum Tie Time from input turning on to the END processing Tet Time from the END processing to the timer instruction execution der OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 79 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Timer Accuracy continued Timer Counting Error Every timer instruction operation is individually based on asynchronous 16 bit reference timers Therefore an error occurs depending on the status of the asyn
471. mmunication through the LONWoRKS network the P LONWORKS interface module is available 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS For details about the LONWORKS interface module and LONWORKS communication system see page 26 1 LoNWoRks Interface Module Type Number and Weight arts Description 6 Expansion Connector Module ID FG Terminal 1 2 3 Service Request Button 4 Connector 5 Status LED 6 Expansion Connector Module Name LoNWoRks Interface Module Type No FC3A SX5LS1 Weight approx 180g 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4 Connector FC3A SX5LS1 indicates the LONWORKS interface module ID Frame ground Pushbutton used for network management Network interface connector for connecting an input communication cable Indicates operating status POWER PEW Green Power is on RUN a Green ON Normal operation COM ERROR ERR Red ON Communication error OFF Normal 0 1 ERROR Red ON Access error to the CPU through I O bus SERVICE SER Yellow ON Application program not configured Yellow Flash Network management not configured Connects to CPU and other modules OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 39 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions All OpenNet Controller modules have the same profile for consistent mounting on a DIN rail CPU Module
472. mote or local bus errors The exact error position is only indi cated if no interface error occurred In the case of an interface error the defective bus segment will be indicated Bit 7 indi cates whether an interface error occurred The meanings of bits 0 to 6 will also change This results in three different states which have the following bit combinations in the Add_Error_Info No interface error occurred 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred Ir Position of the located error Bit7 0 No interface error occurred Error at the outgoing remote bus interface 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred 0 Erroratthe outgoing remote bus interface Bit 1 6 0 Bit7 1 An interface error occurred Error at the outgoing local bus interface 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred BitO 1 Erroratthe outgoing local bus interface Bit 1 6 0 Bit7 1 An interface error occurred 2422 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 0C10hex to 0C13 Meaning 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM hex RB FAIL or OD10hex to 0D13hex LB FAIL An INTERBUS device is missing A device entered in the connected bus configuration and not marked as switched off is missing in the connected bus configuration
473. munica tion with the LONWORKS network continues Data exchange between the CPU and LONWORKS interface modules is asynchronous with the user program scanning in the CPU module Network M anagement When setting up a LONWORKS network system the user has to install network configuration information into each node Use a network management tool available from other manufacturers such as LonMaker for Windows Integration Tool to install network configuration information An external interface file XIF extension unique to each product series is needed to install the network configuration information The external interface file for the LONWORKS interface module is available from IDEC Find an XIF No printed on the side of the LONWORKS interface module or on the shipping package When requesting an external interface file inform IDEC of the XIF No that represents the external interface file version number Without a correct external interface file of the matching XIF No network configuration information cannot be installed successfully The network configuration information includes addressing binding and configuration Addressing Determines each node address Binding Determines target nodes to communicate with Configuration Determines the type of message service retry cycles timeout period etc e When using the LONWORKS interface module select the acknowledge ACKD service to enable the message service for network variables and set th
474. n Allocation No Description Remarks INTERBUS Master System Error Information Occurred process 0 Normal 1 INTERBUS master DPRAM is Not Ready DPRAM fault etc 2 INTERBUS master is Not Ready master unit fault etc 3 No response from INTERBUS master timeout error T D8178 4 System error unexpected reply from INTERBUS master d c 5 Entry count error disparity of quantity of nodes between actual from Bus NG system setup and Function Area Settings value 6 Data size error bus station of invalid size is connected ID code error bus station of invalid type is connected 8 Maximum node quantity over more than 32 nodes are connected INTERBUS Master Status Transition Number 0 Power ON 1 DPRAM and master ready ready for receiving service command 2 Reading and identification of configuration complete D8179 3 I O logical addressing complete 4 Set the bus active 5 Set the bus to run I O data updated 5 is stored during normal operation 6 Bus NG occurred 08180 INTERBUS Master Acknowledge Code 0 normal completion Stores execution result of remote I O master command request or error code is stored D8181 INTERBUS Master Additional Error Information Stores additional error information of D8180 D8182 h INTERBUS Master Error Code See page 24 16 D8183 h INTERBUS Master Error Location See page 24 16 24 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24
475. n Mount the expansion power supply module in the eighth slot Do not mount the expansion power supply module in any other slot than the eighth otherwise correct allocation of I O and link register numbers may not occur 7 modules I O and functional 8 modules I O and functional CPU Module Expansion Power Supply Module A maximum of 7 functional modules can be mounted in any of 15 slots 2 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Expansion Power Supply Module Specifications Type No Rated Power Voltage FC3A EA1 24V DC Allowable Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC including ripple Dielectric Strength Between power terminal and FG 1 000V AC 1 minute Maximum Input Current 5A at 24V DC Internal Current Draw 30 mA 24V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 msec 24V DC Level PS 2 EN61131 Insulation Resistance Between power terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Inrush Current 50A total of inrush currents into CPU and expansion power supply modules Ground Grounding resistance 100Q maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 Power Supply Wire UL1015 AWG22 Effect of Improper Power Supply C
476. n QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Examples M OVN M10 NOT M50 H 0 MG MES REE When input 10 is on the 16 internal relays starting with M10 designated by source operand S1 are inv
477. n be programmed Ladder Diagram into one rung Programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended How Ladder Diagram ever when doing so it is good practice to separate the outputs with the JMP JEND set of instructions or the MCS MCR set of instructions These instructions are detailed later in this chapter ON state 11 When the same output number is programmed more than once within one scan the out put nearest to the END instruction is given priority for outputting In the example on the right output is off OFF state 12 OFF state 7 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples LOD Load NOT and OUT Output Ladder Diagram 10 90 n I1 Q1 Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram s Ladder Diagram e Ladder Diagram 7 6 1 010 Program List Timing Chart Prom Adis o 10 ON OFF ON 00 ON 01 Program List Pram Ads 0 LOD M2 1 OUT 00 Program List Prom 2 LODN Q0 3 OUT Q1 Program List Fram Ads 4 LOD TO 5 OUTN Q2 Program List Fram Ads 6 LODN C1 7 OUT Q10 SET and RST Reset Ei The SET and RST reset instructions are used to set on or reset off outputs internal relays shift register bits and link reg ister bits The same output can be set and reset many times within a program SET and RST instructions operate in every scan while the input is on Ladder Diagr
478. n flag of a user communication RXD instruction is turned on without wait ing for the END processing M8014 is valid for all communication ports RS232C port 1 and port 2 and RS485 When an IDEC s HG series operator interface is linked to the OpenNet Controller use the OpenNet Controller with M8014 set on M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag When M8020 is turned on data in data registers D8015 through D8021 calendar clock preset data are set to the internal clock of the CPU See page 15 7 M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented one See page 15 8 M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 1 When M8022 is turned on all instructions ready for receiving user communication through RS232C port 1 are dis abled M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 2 When M8023 is turned on all RXD2 instructions ready for receiving user communication through RS232C port 2 are dis abled M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize When M8030 is turned on the INTERBUS master is initialized See page 24 11 M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG When the INTERBUS master detects a BUS NG M8036 is turned on See page 24
479. n mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 4to8 Device number selection Device numbers 0 through 31 for the CPU Memory Card Card Type Miniature memory card Accessible Memory Capacity 2MB 5V type Download Destination CPU module FC3A CP2KM and CP2SM Software for Writing Card WindLDR Quantity of Stored Programs One user program stored on one memory card Program Execution Priority High speed Counter Maximum Counting Frequency 10 kHz When a memory card is inserted user program on the memory card is executed Counting Range 0 to 65535 16 bits Operation Mode Rotary encoder mode Dual pulse reversible counter mode Comparison Output 2 6 OPENNET CONTROLLE Transistor sink or source output 1 point 500mA Output delay 20 usec R UsER s MANUAL Input Module Digital input modules are available in 16 and 32 point DC input modules and 8 point AC input modules Four different connector terminal styles are available Input Module Type Numbers 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Module Name 16 point DC Input 32 point DC Input 8 point AC Input Screw Terminal FC3AN16B1 FC3AN08A11 FC3A N16B3 Nylon Connector FC3AN32B4 Fujitsu Connector FC3AN32B5 Parts Descripti
480. n operands specify 16 or 32 bit data depending on the selected data type When a bit operand such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as a source or destination operand 16 or 32 points start ing with the designated number are processed as source or destination data When a word operand such as timer or counter is designated as a source operand the current value is read as source data When a timer or counter is designated as a des tination operand the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter When a data reg ister is designated as a source or destination operand the data is read from or written to the designated data register Using Timer or Counter as Source Operand Since all timer instructions TML 1 sec timer TIM 100 msec timer TMH 10 msec timer and TMS 1 msec timer subtract from the preset value the current value is decremented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time As described above when a timer is designated as a source operand of an advanced instruction the current value or the remaining time of the timer is read as source data Adding counters CNT start counting at 0 and the current value is incremented up to the preset value Reversible counters CDP and CUD start counting at the preset value and the current value is incremented or decremented from the preset value When any counter is designated as a source operand of an advan
481. n the Week Table 53 2 WKTBL designates Dec 31 to Jan 3 and May 3 to May 5 as special days S1 65 specifies Saturday and Sunday S3 1 adds special days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 10 18 on every Saturday Sunday and special days The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 23 03 on the same days On the special days programmed in the WKTBL the designated output is not turned on or off while the designated output is turned on and off every week as designated by operand S1 of WKCMP In normal execution when the current day and time coincide with the preset day S1 and time S2 the designated output is turned on or off Execution on the special days has precedence over execution on normal days This example is demonstrates operation aborted on special days The output is turned on from 8 45 a m to 10 32 p m on every Monday through Friday but is not turned on December 31 through January 3 and May 3 through May 5 WKTBL S1 S2 53 S4 S5 S6 S7 M8125 1231 101 102 103 503 504 505 WKCMP S1 S2 53 DI 62 845 2 00 WKCMP S1 5 53 DI OFF 62 2232 2 00 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL WKTBL designates Dec 31 to Jan 3 and May 3 to May 5 as special days S1 62 specifies Monday to Friday S3 2 skips special days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 45 on every Monday through Friday except on special days The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 22 32 on the same days 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRU
482. n time cannot be reduced to the constant value Special Data Registers for Scan Time In addition to D8022 three more special data registers are reserved to indicate current maximum and minimum scan time values D8022 Constant Scan Time Preset Value 1 to 1 000 msec D8023 Scan Time Current Value msec D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value msec D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value msec Example Constant Scan Time This example sets the scan time to a constant value of 500 msec M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay i 120 MOON ae ee nen When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 500 to special data register D8022 The scan time is set to a constant value of 500 msec 520 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Introduction This chapter describes allocation numbers available for the OpenNet Controller CPU module to program basic and advanced instructions Special internal relays and special data registers are also described The OpenNet Controller is programmed using operands such as inputs outputs internal relays timers counters shift reg isters data registers and link registers Inputs 1 are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals Outputs Q are relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Internal relays M are relays used in the CPU and cannot be outputted to the output terminals Special int
483. n using 32 SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote slave stations at the maximum For details about the remote I O system see page 24 1 Remote 1 O Master Module Type Number and Weight Parts Description 1 Module ID 2 FG Terminal 3 Connector 1 4 Connector 2 5 Status LED Module Name Remote 1 Master Module Type No FC3A SX5SM1 Weight approx 200g 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Connector 1 V 24 Interface D sub 9 pin Male Connector 4 Connector 2 REMOTE OUT D sub 9 pin Female Connector FC3A SX5SM1 indicates the remote I O master module ID Frame ground V 24 Interface for monitoring the communication line using CMD CMD is a software program to run on Windows 3 1 95 for configuration monitoring and diagnosis supplied by Phoenix Contact REMOTE OUT for connecting a communication cable to the REMOTE IN connector on a remote I O slave module Turns on to indicate the following status RDY RUN READY RUN NO ERR REMOTE BUS ERR Exil LOCAL BUS ERR CONTROLLER ERR WATCHDOG ERR HARDWARE FAULT BSA BUS SEGMENT DISABLED PF MODULE ERROR HF HOST HARDWARE FAULT OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Remote 1 Master Module General Specifications Type No Power Voltage FC3A SX5SM1 Supplied by the CPU module Dielectric
484. nalog Input Module Position 0 1 2 3 1 5 Functional Module 1 L100 L101 L102 L103 L104 L105 Functional Module 2 L200 L201 L202 L203 L204 L205 Functional Module 3 L300 L301 L302 L303 L304 L305 Functional Module 4 L400 L401 L402 L403 L404 L405 Functional Module 5 L500 L501 L502 L503 L504 L505 Functional Module 6 L600 L601 L602 L603 L604 L605 Functional Module 7 L700 L701 L702 L703 L704 L705 When an analog input module is not used a data register can also be designated by source operand S4 process variable When designating a data register as S4 make sure that the S4 data takes a value between 0 and 4000 When S4 stores a value larger than 4000 the process variable is set to 4000 20 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION Destination Operand D1 Manipulated Variable The data register designated by destination operand D1 stores the manipulated variable of 32768 through 32767 calcu lated by the PID action When the calculation result is less than 32768 D1 stores 32768 When the calculation result is greater than 32767 D1 stores 32767 While the calculation result is less than 32768 or greater than 32767 the PID action still continues When the output manipulated variable limit is disabled S242 set to off while the PID action is in progress the data regis ter designated by 51 1 holds 0 through 100 of the manipulated variable D1 omitting values less than 0 and greater than 100 The percent va
485. nd Start IR Completion IR Failure IR Data Registers Initialization String M8050 M8060 M8070 D8245 D8269 Originate Mode ATZ M8051 M8061 M8071 Dialing M8052 M8062 M8072 D8270 D8299 Disconnect Mode Disconnect Line M8053 M8063 M8073 AT General Command Mode AT Command M8054 M8064 M8074 D8230 D8244 Anewermode Initialization String M8055 M8065 M8075 D8245 D8269 ATZ M8056 M8066 M8076 Start and Result Internal Relays for RS232C Port 2 Mode Command Start IR Completion IR Failure IR Data Registers Initialization String M8080 M8090 M8100 D8345 D8369 Originate Mode ATZ M8081 M8091 M8101 Dialing M8082 M8092 M8102 D8370 D8399 Disconnect Mode Disconnect Line M8083 M8093 M8103 AT General Command Mode AT Command M8084 M8094 M8104 D8330 D8344 Initialization String M8085 M8095 M8105 D8345 D8369 Answer Mode ATZ M8086 M8096 M8106 When one of start internal relays M8050 M8056 or M8080 M8086 is turned on a corresponding command is executed once To repeat the command reset the start internal relay and turn the internal relay on again Completion or failure of a command is determined as described below Completion command is transmitted repeatedly as many as the retry cycles specified in data register D8209 or D8309 When the command is completed successfully the completion IR is turned on and the command is not executed for the remaining cycles Failure The command is
486. ndLDR Select Online Mon itor then select Online gt PLC Status gt Error Status Details Error Code Error Details 1h Overrun error data is received when the receive data registers are full 2h Framing error failure to detect start or stop bit 4h Parity error an error was found by the parity check 8h Receive timeout line disconnection 10h BCC block check character error disparity with data received up to BCC 20h Retry cycle over error occurred in all 3 trials of communication 40h 1 definition quantity error discrepancy of transmit receive station number or data quantity When more than one error is detected in the data link system the total of error codes is indicated For example when framing error error code 2h and BCC error error code 10h are found error code 12 is stored 214 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link Communication between Master and Slave Stations The master station has 10 data registers assigned to transmit data to a slave station and 10 data registers assigned to receive data from a slave station The quantity of data registers for data link can be selected from 0 through 10 using WindLDR The following examples illustrate how data is exchanged between the master and slave stations when 2 or 10 data registers are used for data link communication with each slave station Example 1 Transmit Data 2 Words and Receive Data 2 Words Slave
487. ne OpenNet Controller at the master station can communicate with 31 slave stations through the RS485 line to exchange data and perform distributed control effectively The RS485 terminals are connected with each other using a 2 core twisted pair cable For details about the data link communication see page 21 1 Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 31 0 oooo ooon e HG Series Operator Interface EE 3333333 555505655959 0000000000000000 000000000000000 coq coq 555555555659 Communication Selector DIP Switch Basic System The OpenNet Controller CPU module can be mounted with seven modules including digital I O and functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules to set up a stand alone system When using seven digital I O modules the I O points can be 224 points at the maximum A 7 modules I O and functional CPU Module Expansion System The FC3A EA1 expansion power supply module is used to moun
488. ne may be disconnected unexpectedly or receive data errors may occur Provisions against such errors must be included in the user program System Setup To connect a modem to the RS232C port 1 or 2 on the OpenNet Controller use the modem cable 1C FC2A KMIC To enable the modem mode make the two settings described below 1 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively See page 2 2 Both RS232C port and 2 can be used for modem communication at the same time 2 Enter to data register D8200 or D8300 RS232C port communication mode selection to enable the modem mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively See page 23 3 ERROR GOOOO00000000000000000 CELE 5955509059550 Mini DIN Connector Pinouts Shield ooofllooooooooooooooooo Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively To RS232C Port 3m 9 84 ft long RTS Request to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready TXD Transmit Data RXD Receive Data DSR Data Set Ready SG Signal Ground SG Signal Ground NC AN Caution No Connection To RS232C Port 2 LAE Modem 5 MED
489. near conversion minimum 232768 to 32767 R W value 1 to 10000 0 01 to 100 0090 SLE y Proportionalgain 0 designates 0 01 gt 10001 designates 100 00 iid 5148 Integral time 1 to 65535 0 1 sec to 6553 5 sec 0 disables integral action R W 5149 Derivative time 1 to 65535 0 1 sec to 6553 5 sec 0 disables derivative action R W 0 0 0 51 10 Integral start coefficient 1 to 100 1 to 100 0 and 2101 except 200 designate 100 R W 200 executes integral action within the proportional range 51411 Input filter coefficient 0 to 99 096to 99 2100 designates 99 R W 1 to 10000 0 01 sec to 100 00 sec 1412 sampling penod 0 designates 0 01 sec gt 10001 designates 100 00 sec REW 1 to 500 0 1 sec to 50 0 sec Controlipenog 0 designates 0 1 sec 2501 designates 50 0 sec When S144 linear conversion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 When 51 4 1 Linear conversion lt High alarm lt Linear conversion max 21794 Enea mele When 51 14 146 linear conversion min S146 becomes high alarm REM When 1414 gt 51 5 linear conversion max 145 becomes high alarm When S144 linear conversion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 When S144 1 Linear conversion min lt Low alarm lt Linear conversion max piis POW clan When 51 15 lt S1 6 linear conversion min S146 becomes low alarm When 1415 gt 51 5 linear conversion max 51 5 becomes low alarm 51416 Output manipulated variab
490. neral Command AT Command Start Maintained Maintained M8085 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8086 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8087 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode AT Command Execution Maintained Cleared M8090 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8091 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8092 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Completion Maintained Cleared M8093 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Completion Maintained Cleared M8094 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Completion Maintained Cleared M8095 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8096 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8097 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Operational State Maintained Cleared M8100 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8101 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8102 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Failure Maintained Cleared M8103 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Failure Maintained Cleared M8104 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Failure Maintained Cleared M8105 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8106
491. ngs see page 23 4 include the commands shown below The commands are divided into two groups by importance For details of modem commands see the user s manual for your modem When you make an optional initialization string include the commands in the first category to make sure of correct modem communication Commands included in all initialization strings Commands in this category are essential to use the modem mode Some modems have the same function by a different command name When you make an optional initialization string modify the initialization string to match your modem E0 Characters NOT echoed The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller operates without echo back Without the EO command the OpenNet Controller misunderstands an echo for a result code An error will be caused although a com mand is executed correctly This command must be included in the initialization string Q0 Result codes displayed The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller is configured to use result codes Without the QO com mand a timeout error will be caused although a command is executed correctly This command must be included in the initialization string V1 Word result code The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller is configured to use word result codes Without the V1 command result codes are regarded as invalid and a timeout error will be caused although a command is executed correctly This command must be included in the initi
492. ngs of the communication selec tor DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the communication mode while the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary Selecting Maintenance M ode To select the maintenance mode set communication selector DIP switch 1 to OFF at all OpenNet Controller CPU modules in the 1 N computer link network RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode dec OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 22 1 DIP Switch No 22 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Selecting Device Numbers Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to assign a unique device number of 0 through 31 to each CPU in the computer link network The device numbers do not have to be consecutive Device Number DiPswiteh Tz 13a PS oe LIT 87 913 12 as T1835 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
493. nipulated variable S 1 22 During PID action in auto mode with the auto manual mode control relay S241 set to off the control output S2 6 15 turned on and off according to the control period 5 1 13 and the output manipulated variable S141 calculated by the PID action In manual mode with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to on the control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S 1 18 247 AT Complete Output The AT complete output control relay S247 goes on when auto tuning is complete or failed and remains on until reset Operating status codes are stored to the operating status control register S 1 2 See page 20 3 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 11 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S3 Set Point The PID action is executed to adjust the process variable S1 0 to the set point S3 When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required set point value of 0 through 4000 to the operand des ignated by S3 Valid operands are data register and constant When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 designate a data register as operand S3 and set a required set point value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designated by S3 Since the PID instruction uses the word data type negative constants cannot be entered directly to operand 53 Use the MOV instruction with the integer I d
494. nk 21 2 DeviceNet network 25 2 LonWorks network 26 3 modem mode 23 1 remote I O system 24 1 user communication 17 2 statuses 4 3 at stop reset and restart 2 6 table ASCII character code 17 26 display unit character codes 16 7 TC and TC2 instructions 7 16 telephone number 23 3 23 5 terminal block 2 3 connection 3 10 terminator 25 4 26 7 timeout receive 17 17 timer accuracy 7 9 comparison instructions 7 16 instruction using with program branching 18 2 or counter as destination operand 8 3 as source operand 8 3 timer counter preset value changed M8124 6 11 sum check error 27 4 TML TIM TMH and TMS instructions 7 8 transceiver 26 2 transmission dec OpenNet Controller User s Manual vii INDEX distance 25 4 time 25 10 26 9 transmit bytes 17 7 completion output 17 9 data 17 5 byte count 17 10 digits 17 7 status 17 9 code 17 9 transmit 1 17 4 transmit 2 17 4 transmit data 25 9 26 11 26 16 reading 26 22 troubleshooting 27 1 DeviceNet network 25 11 diagrams 27 7 LonWorks network 26 25 modem communication 23 14 TXD1 17 4 TXD2 17 4 type list A 3 of protection 2 28 2 31 U up counter CNT 7 11 up down selection reversible counter CUD 7 13 user communication cable 1C 17 2 17 31 17 33 error 17 25 error code 17 25 instructions 17 1 mode 2 2 17 2 receive instruction cancel flag 17 21 RS232C port 1 M8022 6 10 RS232C port 2 M8023 6 10 system 1 4 setup 17 2 user fail 24 16 user program
495. nnot be set for the JEND instruction More than one JMP instruction can be used with one JEND instruction Corresponding JMP JEND instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding JMP JEND instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adis 10 I1 00 Timing Chart Input I0 occ Input 11 a Output QO Eo When input IO is on JMP is executed so that the subsequent output status is held When input IO is off JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses dec OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 27 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS JMP Jump and J END Jump End continued Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 This jump circuit will give priority to I1 I3 and I5 in that order When input I1 is on the first JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of QO through Q2 are held When input I1 is off the first JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When is off and I3 is on the second JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of Q1 and Q2 are held When both I1 and I3 are off the first and second JMPs are not executed so that the following program is executed accord ing to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 END The END instruction is always required at the end of a program
496. nput bit PI RUN 10 11 when TRUE T2 unsigned char pGA 13 unsigned char dat 14 unsigned char tx_dat 15 while TRUE 16 if io in PI RUN HIGH 17 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL Preparation for data read 18 pGA BCTL NWR REQ 19 dat pGA 20 if dat amp BCTL NWR REQ Preparation for data read complete 23 pGA unsigned char GA FCDR TX 222 tx dat pGA Read data from register CO008h 23 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL 24 pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ End data read 25 nv o8 tx dat Substitute the value for output network variable nv 08 26 break 27 28 29 26 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Defined Network Variables The application program installed in the LONWORKS interface module defines network variables for transmit and receive data listed below When you modify or create an application program do not use these variables otherwise verification of the application program will be difficult The network variables their data type and structure are listed in the following tables Input Network Variables Input Network Variable Data Type and Structure Used For nv i8 0 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 1 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 2 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 3 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 4 unsigned char 8 point in
497. nsmitted to the network L100 L101 DO D1 When input I1 is on 32 bit 4 byte data in two link registers L100 and L101 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data registers DO and D1 designated by destination operand D1 Since link registers L100 and L101 receive data communication data read to L100 and L101 is moved to data registers DO and D1 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 26 11 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Starting Operation The LONWoRKS network requires installation of network configuration information into each node When setting up the LONWORKS network for the first time follow the procedures described below 1 Set up the OpenNet Controller CPU and LONWORKS interface modules connect the LONWORKS interface module to the LONWORKS network using LONWORKS cables and power up the CPU module 2 Connect a network management tool to the network and install network configuration information to the LONWORKS interface module See Network Management described below 3 Download the user program to the CPU module 4 Start the CPU module to run then the CPU module starts to communicate with other nodes on the LONWORKS net work as specified in the network configuration information and user program The delay until the communication starts after power up depends on the size of the user program and the system setup While the CPU is stopped data exchange between the CPU and LONWORKS interface modules is halted but com
498. nstrates a program to display the 4 digit current value of counter CNT10 on 7 segment dis play units IDEC s DD3S F31N connected to the transistor sink output module DISP S1 Q LAT DAT When input IO is on the 4 digit current value of counter C10 is dis 10 BCD4 C10 Q0 L H played on 7 segment digital display units Output Wiring Diagram 16 Transistor Sink Output FC3A T16K1 o Un Upper Digit Lower Digit 16 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS DGRD Digital Read H When input is on data designated by operands I and Q is set to a data register or link register designated by destination DGRD Q D1 BCD4 operand D1 First output number This instruction can be used to change preset values for timer First input number and counter instructions using digital switches The data that Quantity of digits can be read using this instruction is 0 through 65535 5 dig 1 to 5 decimal its or FFFFh 1 to 4 hex Conversion Note The DGRD instruction can be used on DC input and tran BCD or BIN sistor output modules only Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat First input numb
499. nted by one The carry M8003 is not set by this operation Decrement beyond Limits In the word data type valid values are 0 to 65535 If the designated operand is currently 0 the value will become 65535 after it is decremented by one The borrow M8003 is not set by this operation In the double word data type valid values are 0 to 4 294 967 295 If the designated operand is currently 0 the value will become 4 294 967 295 after it is decremented by one The borrow M8003 is not set by this operation Example INC H SOTU INC W Di 010 100 1 D10 101 n When input IO is turned on the data of D10 is incremented by one If the SOTU is not programmed the data of D10 is incremented in each scan Example DEC D20 H Hsen sor 570 pzo 399 1 n20 99 When input I1 is turned on the data of D20 is decremented by one If the SOTU is not programmed the data of D20 is decremented in each scan dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 9 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS ROOT Root ROOT pam 51 D1 4S1 DI PERR IUD When input is on the square root of operand designated by S1 is extracted and is stored to the destination designated by D1 Valid values are 0 to 65535 The square root is calculated to two decimals omitting the figures below the second place of decimals Valid Operands Operand Function QM T
500. nterface IN of the speci Meaning fied INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info 0C28hex to 0C2B Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D28hex to 0D2Bhex LB FAIL The Medium Attachment Unit MAU diagnosed an interruption of the data transmission Meaning Cause Interruption in the return data path at the incoming bus interface IN of the specified INTERBUS device Remedy Check the cables male and female connectors on cables and devices for interruptions and repair them if required Add Error Info 0C2Chex to 0C2F Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD2Chex to OD2Fhex LB FAIL Unexpected change of the RBST or LBST signal Missing or defective bridge loose contact dry joint in the outgoing bus connector of the preceding INTERBUS device Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for interruptions in the connector loose con Remedy tact dry joint Solder a bridge or ensure the proper connection of the already existing bridge to gener ate an error free RBST or LBST signal
501. number automatically After changing the settings of the communication selec tor DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the communication mode while the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 21 11 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link with Other Equipment Separate Refresh M ode The data link communication system can include IDEC s HG2A operator interfaces MICRO MICRO C micro programma ble controllers and FA 3S programmable controllers using serial interface modules Data Link with HG2A Operator Interface OpenNet Controller Settings HG2A Settings HG2A Settings Transmit data 2 words x 6 Receive data 2 words x 6 Baud rate 19200 bps First slave station number 1 First slave station number 7 6 slave stations 6 slave stations HG2A 1 HG2A 2 Data Link with MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller Settings MICRO Settings MICRO C Settings Transmit data 2 words Receive data 2 words Function selector switch 1 Function selector switch 2 Baud rate 19200 bps Master Station Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 1 i MICRO MICR
502. ny destination 11 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS INC Increment KKK K K When input is on one is added to the value in the operand and the new value is stored to the same operand D 1 D ae eee NCE Wo 5 5 S D 1 gt 8 DEC Decrement OK K k When input is on one is subtracted from the value in the operand and the new value is stored to the same operand D 12S D enone Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat S D Source Destination Operand to increment data XX For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the INC and DEC instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used Increment beyond Limits In the word data type valid values are 0 to 65535 If the designated operand is currently 65535 the value will become 0 after it is incremented by one The carry M8003 is not set by this operation In the double word data type valid values are 0 to 4 294 967 295 If the designated operand is currently 4 294 967 295 the value will become 0 after it is increme
503. o 32767 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results x lt gt gt lt For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 51 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed a user program execution error will result turning on spe cial internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED S2 Y value Enter a value for the Y coordinate to convert within the range specified in the XYFS instruction Although the integer value can be 32768 through 32767 any value out of the range specified in the XYFS results in a user program exe cution error turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED D1 Destination to store results The conversion results of the X value is stored to the destination The integer value of the conversion results can be 0 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X ET When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as S2 or D1 16 points integer da
504. oduction lines Maintenance for communication lines will also become even easier Master Station Remote 1 INTERBUS Slave Station DeviceNet LONWORKS High performance CPU Module The OpenNet Controller CPU module has multiple functions to work as a brain of the control system connected to the open networks Optimum control systems can be made possible using the OpenNet Controller Powerful Communication Functions In addition to connection to the open networks the OpenNet Controller features three more communication functions The OpenNet Controller can be linked to external RS232C devices such as computers User Communication DEN modems printers and barcode readers using the user communication function One OpenNet Controller at the master station can communicate with 31 slave stations through the RS485 line to exchange data and perform distributed control effectively When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and 1 status can be monitored on the computer data in the CPU can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded A maximum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPUs can be connected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system Data Link Computer Link International Safety Standards and Approvals The OpenNet Controller is certified by UL and CSA dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 1 1 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Special Functions The OpenNe
505. ogram M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts the NSET moves calendar clock data to data registers DO through D6 When input IO turns on new calendar data year month day and day of week are moved to data registers D8015 through D8018 and internal relay MO is turned on for 1 scan time When input I1 turns on new clock data hour minute and sec ond are moved to data registers D8019 through D8021 and internal relay M1 is turned on for 1 scan time When either MO or M1 is turned on calendar clock data write flag special internal relay M8020 is turned on to set the new cal endar clock data to the CPU M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay While the CPU is running the MOV W moves current calen dar clock data to data registers D10 through D16 Special internal relay M8021 clock data adjust flag is provided for adjusting the clock data When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented one M8021 is useful for precise timing which starts at zero seconds Example Adjusting Calendar Clock Data When input I2 turns on clock data adjust flag special internal relay M8021 is turned on and Sed C the clock is adjusted w
506. oltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE9hex BUS FAIL Meaning A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off When checking the current config uration the diagnostic algorithm detected errors but could not locate the precise error location This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error rate can be very high Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBEAhex BUS FAIL Meaning The Control Device Function 0714hex service could not be executed Cause Fatal error Remedy Repeat the service if the controller board is in the RUN or ACTIVE state If diagnostics is active you must wait for the result Then the indicated bus error specifies the error location Add Error Info OBFOhex BUS FAIL Meaning The data transmission was temporarily interrupted As a result the controller board reset all outputs and stopped data transmission The display shows the INTERBUS device number The
507. on 6 Expansion Connector This figure illustrates a screw terminal type input module 1 Module ID 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label 6 Expansion Connector nannanannpannnnn 1 Module ID WOOO 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label Indicates the input module ID DC IN AC IN 24V DC sink source input 16 or 32 points 100V AC input 8 points Turns on when input is on The terminal block cover flips open to the right When using long ferrules for wiring the terminal block cover may be removed Five different terminal connector styles are available for wiring Indicates terminal numbers 1 through 20 on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 7 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point DC Input Module Specifications Type No FC3A N16B1 FC3A N16B3 Rated Input Voltage 24V DC sink source input signal Input Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Input Current 7 mA point 24V DC Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 11 and 2 12 Input Impedance 3 4 kQ Turn ON Time 24V DC 20 usec filter preset Turn OFF Time 24V DC 120 usec filter preset Input Filter 0 msec 0 5 msec 1 msec 2 msec 4 msec 8 msec 16 msec 32 msec Isol
508. on to select maintenance protocol or user protocol for the RS232C port after telephone line is connected Program the destination telephone number if dialing is required Enter the ASCII values of the telephone number to data registers starting with D8270 D8370 telephone number Store two characters each in one data register Enter ODh at the end of the telephone number See page 23 5 If you want to change the default value of 3 retry cycles program to move a required value to data register D8209 D8309 retry cycles in the next scan after entering 1 to D8200 D8300 Include internal relays M8050 M8077 RS232C port 1 and M8080 M8107 RS232C port 2 in the user program to control the modem communication as required Setting Up the CPU Module 1 Determine which RS232C port to use port 1 port 2 or both Connect the OpenNet Controller CPU module to a modem using the modem cable 2 as shown on page 23 1 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically You have to press th
509. on errors a defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info OBFBhex BUS FA Meaning INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device IL Error detected by means of quick diagnostics Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2421 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Error Codes for Remote Bus and Local Bus Errors The Add_Error_Info provides the coded error location for re
510. on is primarily designed for use with an analog I O module to read analog input data and turns on and off a desig nated output to perform PID control in applications such as temperature control described in the application example on page 20 14 In addition when the output manipulated variable is converted the PID instruction can also generate an ana log output using an analog I O module UN Warning e Special technical knowledge about the PID control is required to use the PID function of the OpenNet Controller Use of the PID function without understanding the PID control may cause the OpenNet Controller to perform unexpected operation resulting in disorder of the control sys tem damage or accidents e When using the PID instruction for feedback control emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure of inputting the process variable may cause equipment damage or accidents ID PID Control When input is on auto tuning and or PID action is exe H zi s 2 of l cuted according to the value 0 through 2 stored in a data register operand assigned for operation mode KKK KK KKKKK KKKKK KKKKK A maximum of 42 PID instructions can be used in a user program Valid Operands Operand Function Q M R D L Constant S1 Source 1 Control register D0 D7973 52 Source
511. onal gain of 0 01 through 100 00 to the data register designated by 51 7 When S1 7 stores 0 the proportional gain is set to 0 01 When S1 7 stores a value larger than 10000 the proportional gain is set to 100 0046 When the proportional gain is set to a large value the proportional band becomes small and the response becomes fast but overshoot and hunching will be caused In contrast when the proportional gain is set to a small value overshoot and hunching are suppressed but response to disturbance will become slow While the PID action is in progress the proportional gain value can be changed by the user 148 Integral Time When only the proportional action is used a certain amount of difference offset between the set point S3 and the pro cess variable S1 0 remains after the control target has reached a stable state An integral action is needed to reduce the offset to zero The integral time is a parameter to determine the amount of integral action When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT an integral time is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 65535 to specify an integral time of 0 1 sec through 6553 5 sec to the data register designated by 51 8 When S1 8 is set to 0 the integral action is disabled When the integral time is too sho
512. onnection Reverse polarity Improper voltage or frequency Improper lead connection No operation no damage Permanent damage may be caused Permanent damage may be caused Weight approx 180g Power Supply Wiring to Expansion Power Supply Module Connect a 24V DC power source to the 24V and OV pins on the expansion power supply module connector Use the same power source for the CPU module to power the expansion power supply module The inrush current to both the CPU and expansion power supply module is 50A total AC power source cannot be used Internal current draw of the expansion power supply module is 30 mA Power Voltage 24VDC _ 4 Inrush Current 50 mi same power source for CPU Connector 1 NC M te ee 2 NC Eu 3 24V DC red i 4 OV blue eae 5 FG green _ Ground The length of the attached cable is 1 meter 3 28 feet When a longer cable is needed use the attached contacts to connect the cable to the attached connector OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Remote 1 Master Module The remote I O master module is used to configure a remote I O network to increase I O points at remote stations The OpenNet Controller uses the INTERBUS network for communication with a maximum of 32 remote I O slave stations For the remote I O slave stations IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals are used Whe
513. ontroller CPU module using a shielded twisted pair cable as shown below The total length of the cable for the computer link system can be extended up to 200 meters 656 feet Connect the RS232C port on the computer to the RS232C RS485 converter using the RS232C cable HD9Z C52 The RS232C cable has a D sub 9 pin female connector for connection with a computer Ist Unit Nth Unit 32 Set communication selector aimee AG DIP switch 1 to OFF at all OpenNet Controller stations to select the maintenance mode for the RS485 port i MONS RS232C 85485 Converter FC2AMD1 RS232C Cable i HD9ZC52 Shielded twisted pair cable 200 meters 656 feet maximum 1 5m 4 92 feet long Core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch The communication selector DIP switch is used to select the communication protocol for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also to select the device number for the OpenNet Controller CPU module used in a data link or computer link commu nication system When using the OpenNet Controllers in a 1 N computer link system set communication selector DIP switches 1 and 4 through 8 When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically After changing the setti
514. or Address 1 At advanced inst error D8041 Advanced Instruction Error Address 2 At advanced inst error D8042 Advanced Instruction Error Address 3 At advanced inst error D8043 Advanced Instruction Error Address 4 At advanced inst error D8044 Advanced Instruction Error Address 5 At advanced inst error OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Special Data Registers for High speed Counter Allocation 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Number Description Updated See Page D8045 High speed Counter Current Value Every scan 5 10 D8046 High speed Counter Reset Value 5 10 D8047 High speed Counter Preset Value 5 10 D8048 D8049 Reserved Special Data Registers for INTERBUS Description Updated See Page D8050 INTERBUS Node 0 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8051 INTERBUS Node 0 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8052 INTERBUS Node 0 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8053 INTERBUS Node 0 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8054 INTERBUS Node 1 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8055 INTERBUS Node 1 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8056 INTERBUS Node 1 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8057 INTERBUS Node 1 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8058 INTERBUS Node 2 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8059 INTERBUS Node 2 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8060 INTERBUS Node 2 ID Code
515. orrectly Supply 11 25V DC to the DeviceNet power line Green ON OFF Green ON Master is not found Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the data rate of the master station correctly Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network Green ON Red ON Green ON Physical communication trouble or duplicate MAC ID exists in the network Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the MAC ID correctly using DIP switches Make sure that nodes with duplicate MAC ID does not exist in the same network Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network Green ON Green Flash Green ON Slave operates nor mally but is not recog nized by the master OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Supply power to the DeviceNet master Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the MAC ID correctly using DIP switches Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network
516. ot be used for disconnecting the telephone line Always use M8053 M8083 to disconnect the telephone line as described below RS232C Port Communication Protocol Before the telephone line is connected in the modem mode after power up the RS232C port 1 or port 2 can only send out an AT command by turning on a start internal relay M8050 M8056 or 8080 8086 The communication protocol for the RS232C port after the telephone line is connected is selected by the value stored in data register D8203 D8303 D8203 D8303 RS232C Port Communication Protocol in the On Line Mode 0 other than 1 Maintenance protocol 1 User protocol When the telephone line is disconnected the RS232C port restores the state as before the telephone line is connected whether D8203 D8303 is set to 0 or 1 When using a TXD or RXD instruction in the user communication mode while the telephone line is connected insert internal relay M8077 M8107 line connection as an input condition for the TXD or RXD instruction After the telephone line is connected make sure of an approximately 1 second interval before executing the TXD or RXD instruction until the telephone line connection stabilizes Note When the OpenNet Controller is stopped while the telephone line is connected the RS232C port protocol changes to the maintenance protocol even if D8203 D8303 is set to 1 user protocol in the on line mode then the telephone line remains connected When the OpenNet Controller is
517. ote I O communication For example when any of the slave stations are removed or added or the INTERBUS cable is disconnected the remote I O communication is halted To configure the remote I O master module make settings in the Function Area Settings for the user program Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab Fusctisn luna Selle Maia Link Come Posi ones ajaj Configure Communication Medals Master Module Check Box Quanity ui Hades Connected 1 zj Siren Staten Timom Recea Data Quanity Slave Station ede Rarmw Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes The remote 1 0 system does not require this setting When using DeviceNet slave module or LoNWoRks inter face module specify the data bytes to communicate through each slave or inter face module Quantity of Nodes Connected 1 through 32 3 To specify the quantity of nodes connected click the Configure Communication Master Module check box 4 Select the quantity of slave stations 1 through 32 in the Quantity of Nodes Connected list box 5
518. ough C255 are keep types Data Register Clear Designation All Keep All data register values are maintained at startup default All Clear All data register values are cleared at startup Clear Range designated area of data register values are cleared at startup Enter the start clear number in the left field and the end clear number in the right field The start clear number must be smaller than or equal to the end clear number Valid data register numbers are DO through D7999 Special data registers cannot be designated When a range of D100 D7999 is designated DO through D99 are keep types and D100 through D7999 are clear types 54 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Module ID Selection and Run Stop Operation upon Disparity The CPU module can be mounted with a maximum of seven I O modules and functional modules without using an expan sion power supply module When using an expansion power supply module a maximum of 15 modules can be mounted with one CPU module The Module ID function is used to register the type of module installed in each slot If the information in the memory about the module ID for each slot is found different from the actual module installed at startup the CPU can be stopped to run in order to prevent accidents Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings
519. owing example demonstrates how to program a TXD instruction including a start delimiter BCC and end delim iter using WindLDR TXD sample program sou TXD S1 DI D2 Communication port RS232C port 1 1 12 M10 0100 Transmit completion output M10 Transmit status register D100 Transmit data byte count D101 Data register contents 010 04D2h 21234 D11 162Eh 25678 Transmit data example BCC calculation range STX BCC BCC ETX 02h aon aah o4 b Ge ne EN ath 36h 03h Constant D11 BCC Constant hex hex 1 Startto program a TXD instruction Move the cursor where you want to insert the TXD instruction and type TXD You can also insert the TXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the menu bar and clicking where you want to insert the TXD instruction in the program edit area The Transmit instruction dialog box appears Trend al p romae 5 Pan ct Coe Cie C 1740 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 Check that TXD is selected in the Type box and click Port 1 in the Port box Then click Insert The Data Type Selection dialog box appears You will program source operand S1 using this dialog box 3 Click Constant Hexadecimal in the Type box and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 02 to program the start delimiter STX 02h When finished click OK
520. penNet Controller operation Connecting OpenNet Controller to PC 1 1 Computer Link System The OpenNet Controller can be connected to an IBM PC or compatible computer in two ways Computer Link through RS232C Port 1 or Port 2 When connecting a Windows computer to the RS232C port 1 or port 2 on the OpenNet Controller CPU module enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port To enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port 1 set the DIP switch 2 to OFF To enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port 2 set the DIP switch 3 to OFF To set up a 1 1 computer link system connect a computer to the OpenNet Controller using the computer link cable 4C FC2A KCAC RS232C Port 2 B P E Computer Link Cable 4 oze 2 3m 9 84 ft long E g T Ed MS H Li D sub 9 pin Female Connector RS232C Port 1 Computer Link through RS485 Port When connecting a Windows computer to the RS485 port on the OpenNet Controller CPU module enable the mainte nance mode for the RS485 port To enable the maintenance mode for the RS485 set the DIP switch 1 to OFF To set up a 1 1 computer link system connect a computer to the OpenNet Controller using the computer link cable 6C FC2A KC6C An AC adapter is needed to supply 5V DC power to the RS232C RS485 converter on the computer link cable 6C For the applicable output plug of the AC adapter see page A 5 Computer Link Cabl
521. plicable Maximum Inductive Load Not applicable Monotonicity Yes Crosstalk 2 LSB maximum Non lineality 0 1 of full scale maximum Repeatability after Stabilization Time 0 5 of full scale maximum more than 30 minutes after powerup Output Ripple 1 LSB maximum Output Response at Power Up and Down Output returns to the lower limit value within 1 msec Output Mode Selection and Output Value of LSB Using a rotary switch see page 2 31 Load Impedance in Signal Range 2 minimum 2500 3002 maximum Voltage output Current output Maximum Allowed Output Voltage Voltage output Current output 12V DC between output terminals 12V DC between output terminals Dielectric Strength 500V AC between output channel and power supply under normal operating conditions Cable Shielded cable is recommended for improved noise immunity Quantity of Channels per COM 1 channel per COM Effect of Improper Output Connection Permanent damage may be caused Terminal Block Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Applicable Load Type Resistive load Internal Current Draw 120 mA 24V DC 2 32 Weight approx OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2300 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Output M odule Terminal Arrangement FC3A DA1221 2 channel Analog Output Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMS
522. point 6A common SX5D SBT16K Transistor Output 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5D SBT16P 8 point source input 24V DC SX5D SBM16K DC Input 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4A common Transistor Output poi i p 8 point source input 24V DC SX5D SBM16P 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com Benet 16 point source input 24V DC SX5L SBN16S 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5L SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5A SX5L SBRO8 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 6A common SX5L SBT16K Transistor Output 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5L SBT16P 8 point source input 24V DC DC Input 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4A common SISESBMIOR Transistor Output poi i p 8 point source input 24V DC SX5L SBM16P 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Cables and Accessories APPENDIX Name Function Type No For mounting on both ends of OpenNet Controller module assembly End plates a pair of end plates are supplied with the CPU module FERENT Modem Cable 1C Used to connect a modem to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port 2 1 3m 9 84 ft long with D sub 25 pin male connector to connect to modem Computer Link Cabl
523. ptimum performance The environment for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 Make sure that the operating temperature does not drop below 0 C or exceed 55 C If the temperature does exceed 55 C use a fan or cooler Mount the OpenNet Controller on a vertical plane To eliminate excessive temperature build up provide ample venti lation Do not install the OpenNet Controller near and especially above any device which generates considerable heat such as a heater transformer or large capacity resistor The relative humidity should be above 30 and below 95 The OpenNet Controller should not be exposed to excessive dust dirt salt direct sunlight vibrations or shocks Do not use the OpenNet Controller in an area where corrosive chemicals or flam 80505080 55500080 55558005 5855598909 BNL6 mable gases are present The modules should not be exposed to Mounting Clip chemical oil or water splashes dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 1 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Assembling Modules Caution Assemble OpenNet Controller modules together before mounting the modules onto a DIN rail Attempt to assemble modules on a DIN ra
524. puts 8 bits nv i8 5 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 6 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 7 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i16 BIT16 DAT 16 point inputs 8 bits x 2 nv i24 BIT24 DAT 24 point inputs 8 bits x 3 nv i32 BIT32 DAT 32 point inputs 8 bits x 4 nv i40 BIT40 DAT 40 point inputs 8 bits x 5 nv i48 BIT48 DAT 48 point inputs 8 bits x 6 nv i56 BIT56 DAT 56 point inputs 8 bits x 7 nv i64 BIT64 DAT 64 point inputs 8 bits x 8 Output Network Variables Output Network Variable Data Type and Structure Used For nv o8 0 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 1 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 2 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv 08 3 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 4 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 5 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 6 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 7 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv 016 BIT16 DAT 16 point outputs 8 bits x 2 nv 024 BIT24 DAT 24 point outputs 8 bits x 3 nv 032 BIT32 DAT 32 point outputs 8 bits x 4 nv 040 40 DAT 40 point outputs 8 bits x 5 nv 048 BIT48 DAT 48 point outputs 8 bits x 6 nv 056 BIT56 DAT 56 point outputs 8 bits x 7 nv 064 BIT64 DAT 64 point outputs 8 bits x 8 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2623 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Structure Used For Structure Name BIT16_DAT typedef struct unsigned char
525. r is designated as the source N W or destination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source N W or destination 1 point word data type is used Example BM OV BMOV W S1 NW Dil 010 1998 gt D20 1998 10 D10 5 020 pii 12 021 12 D10 through D14 D20 through D24 D12 25 D22 _25 When input 10 is turned on data of 5 data registers starting with D10 desig D13 __12 p23 12 nated by source operand S1 is moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 014 30 024 30 designated by destination operand D1 9 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL NSET N Data Set E NSET 51 52 SN D1 KKKKK KKKKK x ne xe xx H 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS 51 52 S3 SNO DL D2 DN When input is N blocks of 16 or 32 bit data in operands designated by S1 52 S3 SN are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data gt pu Eee SN Nth 16 32 bit data 51 52 53 N Data Set N blocks of 164 32 bit data D1 D1 1 or D1 2 D1 2 or D1 4 First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32
526. r the OpenNet Controller counts up to 65535 high speed pulses from a rotary encoder or proximity switch without regard to the scan time compares the current value with a preset value and turns on the output when the current value exceeds the preset value This function can be used for simple motor control or to measure lengths of objects The high speed counter can be used in the rotary encoder mode or dual pulse reversible counter mode which can be selected using the Function Area Settings in WindLDR The CPU module has screw terminals 1 through 5 dedicated to the high speed counter The high speed counter counts up or down input pulses to terminals 2 phase A or CW and 3 phase B or CCW and turns on the comparison output at ter minal 5 comparison output when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output does not go on when the preset value is reached but goes on when another input pulse enters after reaching the preset value Use of the compar ison output is selected using the Function Area Settings When the input to terminal 4 phase Z or reset to zero input is turned on the current value is reset to zero Three special data registers and seven special internal relays are assigned to control and monitor the high speed counter operation The high speed counter current value is stored in data register D8045 and is updated every scan The value stored in D8046 is used as a reset value and the value in D8047 is used as a
527. r TC2 instruction a timer number TO through T255 fol lowed by the preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram TC Program List Timer to compare with Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram gt Program List T 8 LO Prom Ads Esra pis e The TC and TC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values e The comparison instructions only compare the current value The status of the timer does not affect this function e The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 90 KI 10 MO Program List Program List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 TC 1 2 AND 3 OUT e To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 7 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Examples TC and gt Timer Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Instruction Prgm Adrs
528. r a few seconds Turn power off at the master station and turn Are error codes YES cleared to 0 at all stations Call IDEC for assistance END OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 27 15 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 9 27 16 Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode Is the comm selector DIP switch set to user communi cation NO YES Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Did you press the hod NO communication enable button for 4 sec YES Did you power down and up after chang ing the comm selector DIP switch NO Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once communication cable NO connected correctly YES Is the input to the NO TXD instruction on YES Is the POWER LED on NO YES Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct wiring Turn on the input to the TXD instruction See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Troubleshooting Diagram 10 Data is not transmitted correctly in the user communication mode Are communication parameters set correctly using WindLDR I
529. r below the CUD instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly e The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 e After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down e After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to 0 on the Timing Chart next count up Preset Input 10 ba e When power is off the counter s current m value is held and can also be desig Pulse Input 1 orc nated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see page 5 3 ON U D Selection Input 12 occ Counter C2 Value 500501502501500499 0 1 500500 ON Counter C2 OFF Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU see page 7 12 When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately e When the CPU is turned off counter current values are maintained unless designated as clear type counters When resetting the counter current values is required at start up include initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 in an OR circuit with the reset input e The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input One scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change from off to on Reset Preset be ON Pulse orc Valid
530. r data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 1 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS CVXTY Convert X to Y When input is on the X value designated by operand S2 is converted H LUE 2 e into corresponding Y value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction Operand S1 selects a format from a maximum of 30 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the oper KOK KKK KK KKK and designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function I QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number 0 to 29 S2 Source 2 X value X X X X X X X X 0 to 32767 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed a user program execution error will result turning on spe cial internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED S2 X value Enter a value for the X coordinate to convert within
531. r des tination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 11 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOB Quantity of Digits 5 ASCIl ATOB W S1 2 Di D10 5 D20 49 50 D11 9932h 51 D12 0033h 52 D13 0034h 53 014 0035h Quantity of Digits 4 ASCII H ATOB W oF 2 Di 1 010 9931h 50 D11 0032h 51 D12 0033h 52 D13 0034h Quantity of Digits 3 H ATOB W S1 52 DI S 010 3 D20 49 2 010 0031h 50 D11 0032h 51 D12 0033h e Quantity of Digits 2 H ATOB W S1 S2 DI TU D10 2 D20 49 010 9931h 50 D11 0032h e Quantity of Digits 1 ASCII H ATOB W ES 52 Dt iG 010 9931h 14 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 020 020 020 020 020 BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 1234 04D2h BCD Binary 123 007Bh BCD Binary 12 0018h BCD Binary 1 0001h 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS DTDV Data Divide
532. r details see page 20 12 Destination operand D1 manipulated variable stores 32768 through 32767 that is a calculation result of the PID action For details see page 20 13 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 1 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S1 Control Register Store appropriate values to data registers starting with the operand designated by S1 before executing the PID instruction as required and make sure that the values are within the valid range Operands 140 through 1 2 are for read only and operands 1 23 through 51 26 are reserved for the system program Operand Function Description R W When 144 linear conversion 1 enable linear conversion S140 Process variable Stores the process variable after conversion R after conversion When S1 4 linear conversion 0 disable linear conversion Stores the process variable without conversion Stores the output manipulated variable manual mode output variable and AT S1 1 Output manipulated variable output manipulated variable in percent R 0 to 100 0 to 100 5142 Operating status Stores the operating or error status of the PID instruction R 0 PID action 5143 Operation mode 1 AT auto tuning PID action R W 2 AT auto tuning S144 Linear tonversish 0 Disable linear conversion R W 1 Enable linear conversion 5145 Linear conversion maximum 32768 to 32767 R W value S146 Li
533. r shorted e Strong external noise e The power voltage to the module has dropped below the minimum operating voltage at least momentarily e Use of a faulty communication line cable other than twisted pair cables or transmission beyond the rated distance e Improper terminator Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POW LED on the LonWorks interface module does not go on Is the POWER LED on the CPU module on Supply power to the power supply terminals on the CPU module Is the POWER LED on the CPU module on See Troubleshooting in the OpenNet Controller user s manual EM333 YES Is the POW LED on the interface module on Are modules installed ud Install the modules correctly correctly YES p NO Is the POW LED on the interface module on y Call IDEC for assistance END dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 26 25 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Troubleshooting Diagram 2 The RUN LED on the LonWorks interface module does not go on Is the POW LED on the interface module on Supply power to the power supply terminals on the CPU module See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POW LED on the interface module does not go on YES la Is the POW LED on the interface module on Is the RUN LED on the interface module on Y Call IDEC for assistance END 2626 OPENNET
534. r than the linear conversion maximum value 51 5 Select an appropriate value for the linear conversion minimum value to repre sent the minimum value of the input signal to the analog I O module When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 you don t have to set the linear conversion minimum value S146 204 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION Example When the transducer connected to the analog input module has an input range of 50 C through 199 C set the following values The temperature values are multiplied by 10 to calculate the process variable Control mode 51 4 1 enable linear conversion Linear conversion maximum value S 1 45 1990 199 0 C Linear conversion minimum value S1 6 500 50 0 C Process Variable after Conversion S140 A Linear Conversion Maximum Value 145 1990 199 0 C E E 0 Linear Conversion Minimum Value 146 500 50 0 C gt 4000 Digital Output from Analog Input Module S147 Proportional Gain The proportional gain is a parameter to determine the amount of proportional action in the proportional band When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S143 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT a proportional gain is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 10000 to specify a proporti
535. rate to 19200 bps and transmit receive data quantity to 2 words in the Function Area Settings for the OpenNet Controller to communicate with MICRO MICRO C stations When the MICRO MICRO C is used as a slave station in the simultaneous refresh mode the transmit frame from the mas ter station will be of a fixed data length The OpenNet Controller master station in the simultaneous refresh mode automat ically checks if slave stations connected in the data link system are MICRO MICRO C or not Separate Refresh Mode Communication Sequence The master station can communicate with only one slave station in one scan time When a slave station receives a commu nication from the master station the slave station returns data stored in data registers assigned for data link communica tion When the maximum 31 slave stations are connected the master station requires 31 scans to communicate with all slave stations Both master and slave stations refresh communication data in the END processing at each station When data refresh is complete communication completion special internal relays M8140 through M8176 slave station communication com pletion relay go on at the master and slave stations for one scan time after the data refresh When the master station completes communication with all slave stations special internal relay M8177 all slave station communication completion relay goes on at the master station 21 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MA
536. re scan cycles after the jump for the rising or falling edge transi tion to be recognized Although normally the SOTU instruction produces a pulse for one scan when used in a program branch the SOTU pulse will last only until the next time the Q1 Internal ON C same SOTU instruction is executed Memory orr In the example on the left the program branch will Q1 Output Ses 01 LJ 51 loop as long as internal relay MO remains on How MO ever the SOTU produces a pulse output only during END END the first loop Since the END instruction is not executed as long as MO remains on output Q1 is not turned on even if input I1 is on 18 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL L 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS CAL Label Call 8 When input is on the address with label 0 through 255 designated by S1 is called When H LCAL 51 input is off no call takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruc tion OK KKK The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine and returns to the main program after the branch is executed A LRET instruction see below must be placed at the end of a pro gram branch which is called so that normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction Note The END instruction must be used to separate the main program from any subrou tines called by the LCAL instruction A maximum of 10 LCAL instructions can be nested Valid Operands Operand Func
537. re used to add or skip days to turn on or off the comparison outputs programmed in subsequent WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instructions The WKTBL must precede the WKCMP instructions Valid Operands Operand Function C D L Constant Repeat T 1 Source 1 Special month day data X X X X X 101 1231 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 through SN the timer counter current value is read out 51 through SN Special month day data Specify the months and days to add or skip days to turn on or off the comparison outputs programmed in WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instructions Month Day 01 through 12 01 through 31 Example To set July 4 as a special day designate 704 as S1 Make sure that the values set for 51 through SN are within the valid ranges If any data is over the valid value a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED 152 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS xamples WKCMP ON OFF Without Special Days S3 0 This example is the basic program for week programmer application without using the WKTBL week table instruction While the CPU is running the WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF compare the S1 and 52 preset data with the current day and time When the current day and time reach the presets an output designated by operand D1 is turned on and off WKCMP ON S1 62
538. rea Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 12 Status area Error data Stores various error codes Read L 13 Status area I O counts Stores the byte counts of transmit receive data Read L 14 Status area Connection status Stores the allocation choice byte Read L 24 Reserved area Software version Stores the system software version Read Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module is mounted such as OpenNet interface module or analog I O module Consequently operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Error Data Status Area L 12 L 12 b15 b14 unused b12 b9 unused b8 b7 b0 unused When an error occurs the MNS or IO LED on the DeviceNet slave module goes on or flashes depending on the error and a corresponding bit in the link register goes on The status LED goes off when the cause of the error is removed The error data bit remains on until the CPU is powered up again or reset b15 initialization error This bit goes on when the CPU module fails to acknowledge the completion of initialization for communication with the DeviceNet slave module b13 I O error This bit goes on when an error occurs during communication through the CPU bus b8 communication fault This bit goes on when a communication fault is detected
539. refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with all slave stations that is the total of refresh times Trf Y 2 083 msec x Transmit Words Receive Words 3 125 msec 1 scan time Example Refresh Time in Separate Refresh Mode When data link communication is performed with such parameters as transmit words 10 receive words 10 slave stations 8 average scan time 20 msec and baud rate 19200 bps then the total refresh time Trf8 for communication with all eight slave stations in the separate refresh mode will be Trf8 2 083 msec x 10 10 3 125 msec 20 msec x 8 518 28 msec When the baud rate is 38400 bps the total refresh time will be Trf8 518 28 msec 2 259 14 msec dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 219 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Simultaneous Refresh Mode Communication Sequence Unlike the separate refresh mode the master station performs data link communication using an interrupt processing dur ing normal scanning When communication with all slave stations is complete the master station refreshes all received data simultaneously As with the separate refresh when a slave station receives a communication from the master station the slave station returns data stored in data registers assigned for data link communication to the master station Data refresh at the master and slave stations is done in the END processing at the respective station When the master station completes data refr
540. register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 3 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOH Data Type Word SOTU BTOH W 51 D1 H sotu D10 D20 Data Type Double Word BTOH D 51 D1 12 D10 D20 144 D10 D10 D10 D11 D10 D11 D10 D11 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL BCD 0 0000h 4660 1234h 39321 9999h BCD 0 0000h 0 0000h 4660 1234h 22136 5678h 39321 9999h 39321 9999h D20 D20 D20 D20 D21 D20 D21 D20 D21 Binary 0 0000h 1234 04D2h 9999 270Fh Binary 0 0000h 0 0000h 188 00BCh 24910 614Eh 1525 05F5h 57599 EOFFh 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS HTOA Hex to ASCII HTOA W 51 S2 RRR KK KKK k K When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 converted into ASCII data and stored to the destination starting with the operand designated by D1 H DI SI DI D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R
541. restarted the user protocol is enabled again Disconnect Mode The disconnect mode includes only one command to disconnect the telephone line To disconnect the telephone line turn on internal relay M8053 M8083 The telephone line is disconnected by turning off the DTR signal since the initialization string includes the amp D2 command While a modem command is executed another command cannot be executed If two or more start internal relays are turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D821 1 D8311 see page 23 8 When the disconnect command has been completed successfully internal relay M8063 M8093 is turned on If the discon nect command fails internal relay M8073 M8103 is turned on The disconnect command is determined successful when the DCD signal is turned off After the telephone line is disconnected the RS232C port restores the state as before the telephone line is connected whether D8203 D8303 is set to 0 or 1 so that the RS232C port can be controlled by turning on a start internal relay M8050 M8056 or M8080 M8086 AT General Command Mode When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8230 D8244 or D8330 D8344 are allocated to the AT command string Before turning on start internal relay M8054 M8084 for the AT general command mode store an AT command string in data registers starting with D8230 D8330 One data register stores two characters the first charact
542. rk and the link registers in the CPU module allocated to the OpenNet interface module depending on the slot where the OpenNet interface module is mounted To create a communication program for an OpenNet interface module first determine the slot number where the OpenNet interface module is mounted and make a program to write data to link registers allocated to transmit data and to read data from link registers allocated to receive data xample When a DeviceNet slave module is mounted in the first slot of all functional modules e Transmit Data 65535 L104 through L107 H 0 When input IO is on constant 65535 FFFFh designated by source oper and S1 is moved to four link registers L104 through L107 designated by destination operand D1 All 64 bits 8 bytes in link registers L104 through L107 are turned on Since link registers L104 through L107 transmit data the data is transmitted to the network e Receive Data L100 L101 DO D1 pu When input I1 is on 32 bit 4 byte data in two link registers L100 and L101 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data registers DO and D1 designated by destination operand D1 Since link registers L100 and L101 receive data communication data read to L100 and L101 is moved to data registers DO and D1 Starting Operation 1 Set up the OpenNet Controller CPU and DeviceNet slave modules and connect the DeviceNet slave module to the DeviceNet network using DeviceNet cables 2 Power up t
543. rnal relay MOV W S1 1 REP 40966 D10 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 S1 bits D10 1 ROTL W Each time input IO is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 CY MSB D10 LSB Before rotation 010 40966 1 o 1 o o o o o o o o o o 1 1 O M8003 CY MSB D10 LSB After first rotation 010 16397 1 o 1 o o ojo o o o o o oj 1 1 o 1 M8003 CY MSB D10 LSB After second rotation 010 32794 0 1 0 0 1 10 10 M8003 Data Type Double Word ROTLD 51 bits Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and 1 Serv D10 1 D11 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D10 D11 2 684 788 742 CY MSB 10 011 LSB _ 11 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 M8
544. rough 107 or when auto tuning is completed the manipulated variable D1 stores 0 and the control output S2 6 turns off Do not use the PID instruction in program branching instructions LABEL LJMP LCAL LRET JMP JEND MCS and MCR The PID instruction may not operate correctly in these instructions The PID instruction using the difference between the set point S3 and process variable S4 as input calculates the manipulated variable D1 according to the PID parameters such as proportional gain S147 integral time S 1 8 and derivative time S149 When the set point S3 or process variable 54 is changed due to disturbance overshoot undershoot will be caused Before putting the PID control into actual application perform simulation tests by changing the set point and process variable disturbance to anticipated values in the application e The PID parameters such as proportional gain S147 integral time S 1 8 and derivative time 814 9 determined by the auto tuning may not always be the optimum values depending on the actual application To make sure of the best results adjust the parameters Once the best PID parameters are determined perform only the PID action in usual opera tion unless the control object is changed e When a feedback control is executed using the control output S246 the optimum control may not be achieved depend ing on the controlled object If this is the case use of the manipulate
545. rs and actuators at a maximum of 32 385 nodes LONWORKS is the open control standard for buildings factories houses and transportation systems Now LONWORKS networks are widely used in major building automation BA process automation PA and many other industries in the world Communication between application programs installed in LonWorks compliant nodes is performed using the LonTalk protocol based on the reference model of the Open System Interconnection OSD issued by the International Standard Organization ISO LON LonWorks LonBuilder Echelon Neuron LonTalk and 3150 are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation regis tered in the United States and other countries LonMaker is a trademark of Echelon Corporation dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 1 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRKS Network Components Physical Layer Transceiver The LONWORKS interface module incorporates an FTT 10A Free Topology Twisted Pair Transceiver for the physical layer The FTT 10A transceiver is a transformer isolated type and has the following specifications Name Communication Transmission Transmission Distance Topolo M edia Rate 500m maximum total wire length gt Free FTT 10A Transceiver Twisted pair cable 400m maximum node to node distance 1 150m Bus Note The transmission distance is the value when Level 4 AWG22 cables and proper terminators are used LonTalk Protocol The Lon
546. rt the integral action becomes too large resulting in hunching of a long period In con trast when the integral time is too long it takes a long time before the process variable S1 0 reaches the set point S3 While the PID action is in progress the integral time value can be changed by the user S149 Derivative Time The derivative action is a function to adjust the process variable S1 0 to the set point S3 by increasing the manipulated variable D1 when the set point S3 is changed or when the difference between the process variable S1 0 and the set point S3 is increased due to disturbance The derivative time is a parameter to determine the amount of derivative action When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S143 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT a derivative time is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 65535 to specify a derivative time of 0 1 sec through 6553 5 sec to the data register designated by 51 9 When S149 is set to 0 the derivative action is disabled dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 205 20 PID INSTRUCTION When the derivative time is set to a large value the derivative action becomes large When the derivative action is too large hunching of a short period is caused While the PID action is in progress the derivative time value can be changed by the
547. rt position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the receive data Example Received data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start position 1 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th Daduna BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 17 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from XOR exclusive OR or ADD addition operation Example Incoming data consists of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h 1 BCC Calculation Formula XOR 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC Calculation Formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh 4Fh Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC Conversion Type The BCC calculation result can be converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 004 1h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion 0041h Binary to ASCII conversion A oar X 2 digits 2 No conversion NUL A No conversion NL 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be
548. rt pulses Diagram 13 The calendar clock does not operate correctly Diagram 14 Remote I O communication is impossible and the FAIL LED is on Diagram 15 Remote I O communication has stopped Bus NG Diaoram 16 The RDY RUN LED flashes and the FAIL LED is on 9 The PF peripheral fault LED the remote 1 master module is on Diagram 17 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 1 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 1 27 8 The POWER LED does go on Is power supplied Supply power Is the POWER LED on Is the power voltage 24V DC Supply the rated voltage DC power type 24V DC Is the POWER LED on Y Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL END Troubleshooting Diagram 2 The RUN LED does not go on Is the ERROR LED on Click the Start PLC button in WindLDR on a computer con nected to the OpenNet Controller Is the RUN indicator on 27 TROUBLESHOOTING See Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERROR LED is on Note To access the Start Button from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Download Program Monitor M8000 start control spe cial internal relay using WindLDR YES Is M8000 on Turn on M8000 using WindLDR Is the RUN LED on Note To monitor M8000 from the WindLDR menu
549. s 3 H BTOA W I2 Quantity of Digits 2 H BTOA W 13 e Quantity of Digits 1 S1 S2 D10 3 S1 S2 D10 2 D1 D20 D10 D1 D20 D10 BTOA W S1 S2 D1 14 D10 1 D20 D10 14 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D20 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 53 0035h 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ATOB ASCII to BCD ATOB W 51 S2 When input is on ASCII data designated 51 as many as quantity of digits designated by S2 is converted into BCD and con verted into 16 bit binary data The result is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 H DI Sl S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 51
550. s 10 and 11 are off output QO is off When either input IO is on or input I1 is off output Q1 is on When input IO is off and input I1 is on output Q1 is off Valid ae 1 Oo M c R 1 OR 100 0 717 15 02557 EIE ORN 8000 8237 0255 0255 0255 1000 011317 15 74 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS AND LOD Load The AND LOD instruction is used to connect in series two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The AND LOD instruction is the equivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user need not program the AND LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into AND LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adr 10 12 Q0 10 12 I3 I3 Q0 Timing Chart 10 When input 10 is on and either input 12 or 13 is on output QO is on 12 a When input IO is off or both inputs I2 and 13 are off output 00 is off 3 ON OFF ON Q0 OR LOD Load The OR LOD instruction is used to connect in parallel two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The OR LOD instruction is the equivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user need not program the OR LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into OR LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 11 00
551. s D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the operand data is the timer counter current value When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments For source operand 52 and destination operand D2 16 points bit operand or 1 point word operand is always used with out regard to the data type Source operand 52 and destination operand D2 do not have to be designated If S2 or D2 is not designated the source or destination operand is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or dest
552. s are required so do not use internal relay M2521 or a larger number as destination operand D1 Data Type Integer DIV I S1 S2 Dl REP 010 50 D20 7 Dp30 7 D31 1 12 D10 20 030 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses two word operands in the division operation of integer data type so do not use data register D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2521 larger number as destination operand D1 Data Type Double Word DIV D S1 S2 Dl REP 11 D10 D20 D30 D10 D11 100000 D20 D21 70000 gt D30 D31 1 D32 D33 30000 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses four word operands in the division operation of double word data type so do not use data register D7997 through D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2481 ora larger number as destination operand D1 Data Type Long DIV L S1 S2 Dl REP 11 D1
553. s data While DSR is off busy the CPU stops data transmission If the off duration exceeds a limit approx 5 sec a trans mission busy timeout error will occur and the remaining data is not sent The transmit status data register stores an error code See pages 17 9 and 1725 Printout Ex Do not connect any wiring to the NC no connection pins otherwise the OpenNet Controller and ample PRINT TEST 11H 00M CNT2 0050 D030 3854 PRINT TEST 11H 01M CNT2 0110 D030 2124 The OpenNet Controller monitors the DSR signal to prevent the receive buffer of the printer from overflowing For the DSR signal see page 17 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 1731 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch Since this example uses the RS232C port 2 turn on communication selector DIP switch 3 to select the user communica tion mode See page 17 2 Setting Communication Parameters Set the communication parameters to match those of the printer See page 17 3 For details of the communication parame ters of the printer see the user s manual for the printer An example is shown below Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits 8 Parity check None Stop bits 1 Note 1 In the user communication mode communication is based on the end delimiter code specified in the TXD or RXD instruction Note 2 The receive timeout value
554. s the data register designated as transmit status used repeatedly Are inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions on simultaneously Is duration of the busy signal at the remote terminal less than 5 sec Did you make Sure of Source 1 operand of the TXD instruction Call IDEC for assistance 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Set the communication parameters to match those of the remote terminal using WindLDR see page 17 3 Correct the program to replace the repeated data register with a different data register YES Correct the program to make sure that inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions do not go on simultaneously NO Make sure that the busy signal at the remote terminal does not exceed 5 sec NO Make sure that the transmit data desig nated as source 1 operand is correct When the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure also perform the procedure of Diagram 9 described on the preceding page OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 17 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 11 27 18 Data is not received at all in the user communication mode Is the comm selector DIP switch set to user communi cation NO YES Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port
555. selected from 1 or 2 Example 1 BCC digits 2 2 BCC digits 1 Lower digit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 19 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Comparing BCC Codes The OpenNet Controller compares the BCC calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data to check for any error in the incoming communication due to external noises or other causes If a disparity is found in the compari son an error code is stored in the data register designated as receive status in the RXD instruction For user communica tion error code see page 17 25 Example 1 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the XOR format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data nt tn BCC Calculation Range BCC Calculation Result Comparison result is true to indicate 31h 6 32h 6 33h 34h 35h 6 36h 07h Hiab alas Teves INE UOI RON Binary to ASCII Conversion 0 30 37 Example 2 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the ADD format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data fen tytn BCC Calculation Range Comparison result is false BCC Calculation Result 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36 135h P status data register
556. shift registers counters and data registers Also included are module ID selection and run stop operation upon disparity input filter catch input high speed counter key matrix input and user program read write protection CHAPTER 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Allocation numbers available for the OpenNet Controller CPU module to program basic and advanced instructions Spe cial internal relays and special data registers are also described CHAPTER 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Programming of the basic instructions available operands and sample programs CHAPTER 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS General rules of using advanced instructions terms data types and formats used for advanced instructions CHAPTER 9 THROUGH CHAPTER 20 Detailed descriptions on advanced instructions grouped into 12 chapters CHAPTER 21 THROUGH CHAPTER 26 Various communication functions such as data link computer link modem mode remote I O system Devicenet slave module and LONWORKS interface module CHAPTER 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the OpenNet Controller APPENDIX Additional information about execution times for instructions I O delay time and OpenNet Controller type list INDEX Alphabetical listing of key words IMPORTANT INFORMATION Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
557. signated by operands D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other D35 500 D35 100 D36 600 036 200 ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 9 13 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS 9 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data can be compared using data comparison instructions such as equal to unequal to less than greater than less than or equal to and greater than or equal to When the comparison result is true an output or internal relay is turned on The repeat operation can also be used to compare more than one set of data Three values can also be compared using the ICMP gt instruction Since the data comparison instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Compare Equal 28 S1 S2 DI on H poe nee When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are compared When S1 data is equal to 52 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off lt gt Compare Unequal 8 S1 S2 D1 on H POTE ee Es When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands 51 and S2 are compared When S1 data is not equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off CMP Compare Less Than 5 S1 lt
558. sing Falling Edge Selection Normal Input default Catch Input Falling Edge Catch Input Rising Edge Module Number Selection Select the module number from 1 through 15 to designate catch input or input filter function Module number is the input module mounted next to the CPU module Module number 2 is the second from the CPU module and so on Input Filter Time Selection Input filter time is selected in groups of eight inputs For example input numbers of module number are divided into four groups IN_FLTO 10 through I7 only IN_FLTO has effect on catch inputs IN FLT1 IN FLT2 and IN FLT3 have no effect on catch inputs Select an input filter value from 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 msec for IN FLTO of each DC input module Default 4 msec Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection Select catch input of rising or falling edge or normal input for the first eight inputs of each DC input module Default Normal Input dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 5 7 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse ON Actual Input oec Input Relay ON IO to 17 OFF Scan T END Processed Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse ON Actual Input Input Relay ON IO to 17 OFF END Processed Note 1 When two or more pulses enter within one scan subsequent pulses are ignored Note 2 The pulse entering at the timing shown above cannot be used as pulse inputs for counters
559. sition 14 A ASCII to Binary Data Register D0 D7999 15 B ASCII to BCD 1 99 12 No conversion Start Delimiter OOh FFh 7Fh No conversion End Delimiter 00h TFh 7Fh No conversion A Binary to ASCII X XOR BGG B 2 No B A ADD mm T Skip 1 99 Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source operand S1 receive digits and conversion type must also be designated The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits converted in a specified conversion type and stored to the designated data register Conversion types are available in ASCII to Binary ASCII to BCD and no conversion When repeat is designated received data is divided converted and stored into data registers as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated data register Repeat cycles can be up to 99 Receive Digits The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits before conversion as described below Example Received data of 6 bytes are divided in different receive digits Repeat is also designated 2 Receive digits 3 1 Receive digits 2 I 2 4 5 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h Spr ats S potes 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 3 digits 2nd block 2 digits 1st block 2 digits 2nd block 2 digits 3rd block 3
560. small c and a new current value while the counter reset input is off When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CUD Up Down Selection Reversible Counter The up down selection reversible counter CUD has a selection input to switch the up down gate so that three inputs are required The circuit for an up down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input pulse input up down selection input the CUD instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Preset Input Program List e The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once Instruction e The preset input must be turned on ini tially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin e The up mode is selected when the up down selection input is on e The down mode is selected when the up down selection input is off When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CUD instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above o
561. smit status information including a transmis sion status code and a user communication error code Transmit Status Code Transmit Status Code Status Description From turning on the start input for a TXD instruction until the trans mit 16 Preparingitransmission data is stored in the internal transmit buffer From enabling data transmission by an END processing until all data 32 Transmitting data TOS transmission is completed 48 Data transmission complete From completing all data transmission until the END processing is completed for the TXD instruction 64 Transmit instruction complete All transmission operation is completed and the next transmission is made possible If the transmit status code is other than shown above an error of transmit instruction is suspected See User Communica tion Error Code on page 17 25 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 9 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Data Byte Count The data register next to the operand designated for transmit status stores the byte count of data transmitted by the TXD instruction When BCC is included in the transmit data the byte count of the BCC is also included in the transmit data byte count Example Data register D100 is designated as an operand for transmit status D100 e Transmit status D101 Transmit data byte count Programming TXD Instruction Using WindLDR The foll
562. st followed by the CPU module or power up the CPU and I O modules at the same time When shutting down the system power down the CPU first eo i o followed by I O modules or power down the CPU gt gt and I O modules at the same time 0 sec or more 0 sec more I O Module Power ON CPU Module Power off tart Stop Operation Using Stop Input and Reset Input Any input IO through 1597 can be designated as a stop or reset input using Function Area Settings The procedure for selecting stop and reset inputs is described on page 5 1 Note When using a stop and or reset input to start and stop operation make sure that start control special internal relay M8000 is on If M8000 is off then the CPU does not start operation when the stop or reset input is turned off M8000 is not turned on or off when the stop and or reset input is turned on or off When a stop or reset input is turned on during program operation the CPU stops operation the RUN LED is turned off and all outputs are turned off The reset input has priority over the stop input ystem Statuses The system statuses during running stop reset and restart after stopping are listed below Internal Relays Shift Registers Mode Outputs Counters Data Registers Timer Link Register Current Value Note Keep Type Clear Type Run Operating Operating Operating Operating Operating Stop Stop input ON OFF Unchanged Unchanged Unchang
563. stination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h Make sure that the values for each source desig nated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the S1 or S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the ATOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X m When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 7 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOH Quan
564. struction 10 7 Last Bit RO to R255 of Bits of Bits 1 to 256 2 11 3 4 5 12 E 7 Rung 2 8 R21 Q1 9 10 11 R23 02 R25 Q3 e The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFRN instruction In this exam uN Caution ple the status of bit R20 is read to output QO When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruc programmed immediately above and below the SFRN OH instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the For details of reset pulse and data inputs see SFRN instruction in the same rung the program is not page 7 20 compiled correctly Structural Diagram Shift Direction Reset Last Bit R20 of Bits 7 11 Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to main tain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See page 5 3 Note SFR N shifting flag special internal relay M8012 is turned on when the CPU is powered down while data shifting is in progress See page 6 10 7 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Bidirectional Shift Register A bidirectional shift register can be created by first programming the SFR instruction as detailed in the Forward
565. sts and Test Conditions 3 maximum of full scale at 500V impulse test Conversion Type Successive approximation type Operating Mode Self scan Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Impossible Accuracy Monotonicity Yes Crosstalk 2 LSB maximum Non lineality 0 1 of full scale maximum Repeatability after Stabilization Time 0 5 of full scale maximum more than 30 minutes after powerup Sample Duration Time 0 1 msec Sample Repetition Time 0 5 msec Input Filter 0 2 msec Dielectric Strength 500V AC between input channel and power supply under normal operat ing conditions Cable Shielded cable is recommended for improved noise immunity Effect of Improper Input Connection Permanent damage may be caused Terminal Block Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw 120 mA 24V DC Weight approx OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 230g 2 29 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Input Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A AD1261 6 channel Analog Input Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Terminal No Channel V voltage Channel 0 current COM V 1 V voltage Channel 1 current COM V 1 V voltage Channel 2 current COM V I V voltage Channel 3 H current COM V I V voltage Channel 4 H current COM V I V
566. t See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 13 and 2 14 Input Impedance 4 7 Turn ON Time 24V DC 20 usec filter preset Turn OFF Time 24V DC 120 usec filter preset Input Filter 0 msec 0 5 msec 1 msec 2 msec 4 msec 8 msec 16 msec 32 msec Isolation Between input terminals Not isolated Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Load for 1 Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination M ethod Static Effect of Improper Input Connection Both sinking and sourcing input signals can be connected If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Nylon Connector Fujitsu Connector Connector on Mother Board BS18P SHF LAA x 2 FCN 365P040 AU J S T Mfg Fujitsu Connector Insertion Removal Durability 50 times minimum 500 times minimum Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 50 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 10 mA 24V DC Allowable Simultaneous ON Inputs 7096 maximum Weight approx Input Operating Range 230g 240g The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below A 27 6 9 cu o E ON Area gt A 8 15 5 Transition gt Area 1 5 i OFF Area 0 1 4 4 5 4 4 9 Input Current mA Input Internal C
567. t Controller features various special functions packed in the small housing as described below For details about these functions see the following chapters Keep or Clear Designation of CPU Data Internal relays shift register bits counter current values and data register values can be designated to be kept or cleared when the CPU is powered down All of these data or a specified range of these operands can be designated as keep or clear types Catch Input Function The catch input function makes sure to receive short input pulses rising pulse of 40 usec or falling pulse of 150 usec min imum from sensors without regard to the scan time Input Filter Function The input filter can be adjusted for the pulse widths to accept or reject input signals This function is useful for eliminating input noises and chatter in limit switches High speed Counter Function The OpenNet Controller has a built in high speed counter to make it possible to count up to 65 535 FFFFh high speed pulses which cannot be counted by the normal user program processing The maximum count input frequency is 10 kHz This function can be used for simple positioning control and simple motor control Key Matrix Function A matrix configuration consisting of 16 inputs and 16 outputs enables to read a maximum of 256 input signals User Program Read Write Protection The user program in the CPU module can be protected against reading and or writing by inclu
568. t data B e D1220rD144 omuia cai D14N 10rD142N 2 Nth 165 32 bit data Source data for repeat set DI Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C L Constant Repeat N W N blocks Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X X 51 Source 1 Operand number to move X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as N W or S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data type or D1 2N 2 double word or long data type are within the valid operand range If the derived destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X For the N W 16 points bit operand or 1 point word operand is always used without regard to the data type When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data typ
569. t data to slave 12 Slave 28 D7540 D7549 Transmit data to slave 28 D7230 D7239 Receive data from slave 12 D7550 D7559 Receive data from slave 28 Slave 13 D7240 D7249 Transmit data to slave 13 Slave 29 D7560 D7569 Transmit data to slave 29 D7250 D7259 Receive data from slave 13 D7570 D7579 Receive data from slave 29 Slave 14 D7260 D7269 Transmit data to slave 14 Slave 30 D7580 D7589 Transmit data to slave 30 D7270 D7279 Receive data from slave 14 D7590 D7599 Receive data from slave 30 Slave 15 D7280 D7289 Transmit data to slave 15 Slave 31 D7600 D7609 Transmit data to slave 31 D7290 D7299 Receive data from slave 15 D7610 D7619 Receive data from slave 31 Slave 16 D7300 D7309 Transmit data to slave 16 D7310 D7319 Receive data from slave 16 If any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave stations can be used as ordinary data registers Slave Station Data Data Register Transmit Receive Data D7000 D7009 Transmit data to master station tation Dat Zave o tatom Data D7010 D7019 Receive data from master station Slave station data registers D7020 through D7619 can be used as ordinary data registers OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Special Data Registers for Data Link Communication Error In addition to data registers assigned for data communication the master station has 31 special data registers and each
570. t more than seven I O and functional modules When a maximum of 15 I O modules are mounted the number of I O points is expanded from 224 to 480 maximum Whether an expansion power supply module is used or not seven functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules can be mounted at the maximum in either the normal or expansion slots Er E E E E uz uz wt uz 7 modules I O and functional 8 modules I O and functional CPU Module Expansion Power Supply Module A maximum of 7 functional modules can be mounted in any of 15 slots 1 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Introduction This chapter describes OpenNet Controller modules parts names and specifications of each module Available modules include CPU modules digital I O modules analog I O modules expansion power supply module remote I O master module and OpenNet interface modules such as DeviceNet slave and LONWoRKS interface modules Analog I O modules and OpenNet interface modules are also called functional modules A maximum of seven functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module CPU Module The CPU modules are available in sink and source output types which have a
571. ta Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 19 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8163 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 20 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8164 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 21 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8165 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 22 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8166 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 23 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8167 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 24 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8170 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 25 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8171 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 26 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8172 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 27 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8173 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 28 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8174 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 29 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8175 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 30 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8176 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 31 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8177 Data Link All Slave Station Communication Completion Relay Operating Cleared 6 8 M8180 M8237 Reserved OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M8000 Start Control M8000 indicates the operating status of the OpenNet Controll
572. ta type Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat 51 Source 1 BCD data to convert X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 BCD for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 BCD for the double word data type Make sure that each digit of the source designated by S1 is 0 through 9 If the source data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the BTOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link
573. ta type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as S2 or D1 1 point integer data type is used Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 3 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Linear Conversion The following example demonstrates setting up two coordinate points to define the linear relationship between X and Y The two points are YO 0 0 and 8000 4000 Once these are set there is an X to Y conversion as well as a Y to X conversion S1 X0 0 0 S1 52 0 10 51 52 0 D11 YO X1 0 8000 D1 D20 S1 D21 D11 2500 D20 1000 0 X0 YO D10 2000 194 D21 5000 Y1 4000 8000 X M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay At startup XYFS specifies two points When input IO is on CVXTY converts the value in D10 and stores the result in D20 When input I1 is on CV YTX converts the value in D11 and stores the result in D21 The graph shows the linear relationship that is defined by the two points 1 pe If the value in data register D10 is 2000 the value assigned to D20 is 1000 For Y to X conversion the following equation is used X 2Y If the value in data register D11 is 2500 the value assigned to D21 is 5000 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 COORDINATE CONV
574. tage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Load Current 0 5A per output point Maximum Load Current 0 625A per output point at 30V DC 5A per common line at 30V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on Inrush Current 5A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Maximum Lamp Load 10W Inductive Load L R 10 msec 30V DC 0 5 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Isolation Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Between output terminals Not isolated Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON 70 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 40 mA 24V DC Output Delay Turn ON time 500 usec maximum Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum Protecting Operation Protection is activated by element heating when a short circuit occurs Only the overloaded output is forced off Not in compliance with IEC1131 Protected outputs and Short circuit proof outputs Restarting Method Remove the cause of overload then the output protection is reset automatically Reset time 10 msec maximum Short circuit Current 2 5A maximum at power voltage 24V DC load resistance 10 mQ ma
575. tection 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt PLC Status JOperdict Stan 3 Under the Protect Status the PLC Status dialog box press Change but Pretec Goth ton The Change Protect dialog box appears Dashni nahis Protect 4 Enter the protect code and click either button under Disable Enable Protect Basin Enable Protect Disable Protect Disables the user program protection temporarily When the CPU is powered up again the protection stored in the user program takes effect again Enable Protect After disabling enables the user program protection again without turning power up and down the CPU O 5 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Memory Card A user program can be stored on a miniature memory card from a computer running WindLDR and downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module without using a computer This feature is available on FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM only Using a memory card the user program in the CPU module can be replaced where WindLDR or a computer cannot be used Depending whether a memory card is installed in the OpenNet Controller CPU module or not a user program stored on the memory card or in the CPU is executed respectively Memory Card User Program Installed in the CPU The user program stored on t
576. tection Circuit A Protection Circuit B Output O 4 4 Inductive Load Output Q E Inductive Load LG 1 4 N R R C S d f S xX COM C2 COMO JASA H Protection circuit A can be used when the load impedance is smaller than the RC impedance in an AC load power circuit C 0 1 to 1 uF R Resistor of about the same resistance value as the load Protection Circuit C Protection circuit B can be used for both AC and DC load power circuits C 0 1 to 1 uF R Resistor of about the same resistance value as the load Protection Circuit D Output Q ER Inductive Load COM Output Q TT Inductive Load Pid Varis tor Protection circuit C can be used for DC load power circuits Use a diode with the following ratings Reverse withstand voltage Power voltage of the load circuit x 10 More than the load current Forward current OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL COMO Protection circuit D can be used for both and DC load power circuits 2 17 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Transistor Sink Output Module Specifications Type No FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16K3 Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 24 and 2 25 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Load Current 0 5A per output point 0 625A per output
577. ted counting is always enabled When the reset input is turned on the current value is reset to the reset value High speed Counter Operation Modes and Input Output Terminals CPU Module Terminal No Rotary Encoder Mode Dual pulse Reversible Counter Mode 1 COM COM 2 Phase A CW 3 Phase B CCW 4 Phase Z Reset to zero 5 Comparison output Comparison output Note When using the phase Z reset to zero input keep the input signal on for 100 usec or more Comparison Output Timing Chart The comparison output at terminal 5 comparison output is turned on when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output does not go on when the current value equals the preset value but goes on when another input pulse enters after reaching the preset value The figure below illustrates the comparison output timing when the preset value is N ON Pulse Input off HSC Current Value ON Comparison Output occ 20 usec maximum OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 9 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High speed Counter Input Specifications Maximum Counting Frequency 10 kHz 0 to 65535 16 bits 24V DC 15 6 kQ Counting Range Input Voltage Input Impedance High speed Counter Output Specifications Comparison Output 1 point terminal 5 on the CPU module Output Device Transistor sink or source output depending on the CPU module type 24V DC 15 500 mA maximum Output Power
578. the direct or reverse control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the difference between the process variable S1 0 and the set point S3 increases Reverse Control Action Time 52 1 Auto Manual Mode To select auto mode turn off the auto manual mode control relay designated by 2 1 before or after starting the PID instruction In auto mode the PID action is executed and the manipulated variable D1 stores the PID calculation result The control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the output manipulated vari able S1 1 To select manual mode turn on the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 When using manual mode set a required value to the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 before enabling manual mode In manual mode the output manipulated variable S 1 1 stores the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 and the control output S246 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S 1 18 While auto tuning is in progress manual mode cannot be enabled Only after auto tuning is complete auto or manual mode can be enabled Auto manual mode can also be switched while executing the PID instruction 20 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 PID INSTRUCTION 242 Output Manipulated Variable Limit Enable The output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 and the output manipul
579. the example above store character T for touch tone phone or P for pulse or rotary phone followed by the telephone number and ASCII value ODh for to data registers start ing with D8270 08270 5431h 54h T 1 1 D8271 3233h 32h2 2 33hz 3 08272 L0DOOh 9 All characters subsequent to ignored As described above when start internal relay M8050 M8080 is turned on the initialization string is sent followed by the ATZ command and the dial command When start internal relay M8051 M8081 is turned on the ATZ command is sent followed by the dial command The dial command can also be sent separately by turning on start internal relay M8052 M8082 If retry cycles are set to data register D8209 D8309 the dial command is repeated at retry intervals specified by D8210 D8310 default 90 seconds as many as the specified retry cycles default 3 cycles until the telephone line is connected dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 235 23 MODEM MODE When the dial command has been completed successfully internal relay M8062 M8092 is turned on If the dial command fails internal relay 8072 8102 is turned on The dial command is determined successful when the DCD signal is turned on Note When the OpenNet Controller is powered down while the telephone line is connected the telephone line is discon nected because the DTR signal is turned off This method should n
580. the modem mode D8211 08311 stores 0 AT Command AT command result codes returned from modem are stored D8215 D8229 D8315 D8329 When the result code exceeds 30 bytes first 30 bytes are Result Code stored AT command string for the AT general command mode is AT Command stored Enter an AT command string to these data registers to 08230082 D8330 EST String send byturning on M8054 M8084 AT command start internal relay AT and LF 0Ah are appended automatically D8245 D8269 D8345 D8369 Initialization String Initialization string for the originate and answer modes is stored depending on the D8201 D8301 value To change the initialization string enter a new value without changing the value of D8201 D8301 The new value is sent by turning on M8050 M8080 or M8055 M8085 AT and LF 0Ah are appended automatically D8270 D8299 D8370 D8399 Telephone Number Telephone number for dialing in the originate mode is stored ATD and LF 0Ah are appended automatically Note To change the D8209 08309 or D8210 08310 value enter a new value in the next scan after entering 1 to D8200 D8300 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 23 MODEM MODE Originate Mode The originate mode is used to send an initialization string to the modem issue the ATZ command to reset the modem and dial the telephone number To execute a command turn on one of start internal relays M8050 M8052 RS232C port 1 or M8080 M8082 RS2
581. the on status is maintained when the input is turned off as demonstrated by this program ON CMP gt W S1 S2 Dl REP Input l0 occ 10 D10 C1 Q0 Comparison 010 gt 1 Result D10 c1 Comparison ON Output Q0 This program turns the output off when the input is off ON CMP gt W S1 S2 Dl REP Input 10 off 10 D10 Cl MO Comparison 010 gt 1 Result 10 ci Output 00 bs 102 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL R 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS epeat Operation in the Data Comparison Instructions Repeat One Source Operand When only S1 source is designated to repeat source operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are compared with the operand designated by S2 The comparison results are ANDed and set to the des tination operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 1 R 2 0 D1 0 CMP gt W SIR S2 Dl REP ecd a 32 Repeat 0 sheets lo 010 15 M10 3 D10 15 7 pii 15 15 AND M10 12 20 lt gt 15 A A A Data Type Double Word 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt D SIR S2 Dl REP 10 D20 D30 M50 3 D20 D21 30 031 D22 D23 D30 D31 D24 D25 D30 D31 Repeat Two Source Operands When 1 source and S2 source are designated to repeat source operands as many as the r
582. the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components individually or in combination with other equipment All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their appli cation and for choosing an application appropriate for the component individually or in combination with other equipment All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does including these diagrams and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all pro grams prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user PREFACE 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS C HAPTER 1 C HAPTER 2 C HAPTER 3 C HAPTER 4 C HAPTER 5 GENERAL INFORMATION About the OpenNet Controller Duro RO a aban Ge soe ae Speclal FUNCONS su S5 S eot dee Bee ee SUR EUR eek od System Setup iu xe th OAM eisai AAs e ht RR are We OR male od Gos d dos MODULE SPECIFICATIONS CPU Module ine E PNG e oe ee GG ES Sear Input Mod l ehe CE Uae eRe ae ae le i we deeds Output Modules oie prb ea aR eee we eee ed POE Ba ede deest Analog Input Module A D Converter Analog Output Module D A
583. tinues When the sampling end input is turned on before the sampling cycles designated by operand S3 have not been completed sampling is stopped and the results at this point are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 The average value is calculated to units rounding the fractions of one decimal place When the sampling end input is not used designate an internal relay or another valid operand as a dummy for source oper and S2 Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type is used 19 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example AVRG The following example demonstrates a program to calculate average values of the data register D100 and store the result to data register D200 in every 500 scans AVRG W 51 52 53 D1 D2 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay M8125 D100 110 500 D200 M100 When the sampling end input does not turn on While sampling end input 110 is off the average maximum and minimum values are calculated in every 500 scans and stored to data registers D200 D2
584. tion About the OpenNet Controller IDEC s OpenNet Controller is a programmable logic controller with enhanced communication capabilities The OpenNet Controller is compatible with world s three major open networks INTERBUS DeviceNet and LONWORKS Since appli cation of these networks are expanding at a fast pace the OpenNet Controller is ideal for use in multi vendor control sys tems In addition the OpenNet Controller has user communication functions to communicate with various communication equipment Modem communication is also very easy using the built in modem communication functions to communicate with remote devices through telephone lines For these communication applications the OpenNet Controller CPU module features two RS232C ports and one RS485 port User programs for the OpenNet Controller can be edited using WindLDR on a Windows PC Since WindLDR can load exist ing user programs made for IDEC s preceding PLCs such as all FA series MICRO 1 MICRO and MICRO C your soft ware assets can be used in the new control system Digital I O points can be 480 total at the maximum when using an expansion power supply module Program capacity is 16K words 8K steps Features Connect to Open Networks The OpenNet Controller can be connected to the three major open networks INTERBUS DeviceNet and LONWORKS The versatile communication capabilities reduce the time and cost needed when constructing expanding or modifying pr
585. tion M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV instructions store values to data registers for the modem mode at RS232C port 1 1 gt 08200 to enable the modem mode for port 1 1 D8201 to select a predetermined initialization string 1 08203 to enable user protocol after telephone line is con nected M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay Timer TO 1 sec timer TML starts to time down when the Open Net Controller is started to run When timer TO times out 5 seconds M8055 is turned on to send the initialization string for the modem answer mode RXD SI D1 D2 M8077 line connection status is on while telephone line is con M8077 1 20 MO nected RXDI receives incoming communication and stores received data to data registers starting with D10 The RXDI instruction is programmed using WindLDR with parameters shown below Source S1 Data register D10 No conversion 2 digits Repeat 10 T sI pi H DR aa eras TET oo i OW Hp TET he C ARCH ta BOD Nene Poe 8 Pat bae ci e elc C m aoa cancel grab dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 23 13 23 MODEM MODE Troubleshooting in Modem Communication When a start internal relay is turned on the data of D8211 D8311 modem mode status changes but the modem does not work Cause A wrong cable is used or wiring is incorrect Solution Use the modem c
586. tion When the integral term is enabled at the start of the PID action a large overshoot is caused The overshoot can be sup pressed by delaying the execution of the integral action in coordination with the proportional term The PID instruction is designed to achieve proper control with a small or moderate overshoot when the integral start coefficient is set to 100 Overshoot is most suppressed when the integral start coefficient is set to 1 and is least suppressed when the integral start coefficient is set to 10096 When the integral start coefficient is too small overshoot is eliminated but offset is caused 1 11 Input Filter Coefficient The input filter has an effect to smooth out fluctuations of the process variable S4 Set a required value of 0 through 99 to specify an input filter coefficient of 0 through 99 to the data register designated by S1 11 When S1 11 stores a value larger than 99 the input filter coefficient is set to 99 The larger the coefficient the larger the input filter effect The input filter is effective for reading a process variable S4 such as temperature data when the value changes at each sampling time The input filter coefficient is in effect during auto tuning and PID action 1 12 Sampling Period The sampling period determines the interval to execute the PID instruction Set a required value of 1 through 10000 to specify a sampling period of 0 01 sec through 100 00 sec to the data register designated by
587. tion 1 QM S1 Source 1 Label number to call X X X Constant Repeat R T C D L X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When designating S1 using other than a constant the value for the label is a variable When using a variable for a label make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user program Since the LCAL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required LRET Label Return 1 This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine called by the LCAL instruction When the sub LRET routine is completed normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine starting with a LABEL instruction When the LRET is programmed at other places a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat Correct Structure for Calling Subroutine When a LCAL instruction is executed the remaining program instructions on the same rung may not be executed upon return if input conditions are changed by the subroutine After the LRET instruction of a subroutine program execution begins with the instruction following the LCAL instru
588. tion selector DIP switches press the communication enable button for 4 sec onds While the CPU is powered up pressing the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once makes the CPU read the settings on the communication selector DIP switches Then the CPU updates the com munication mode for the RS232C ports 1 and 2 This button is useful when you want to change the communication mode without turning power off IMPORTANT Do not power up while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is necessary to do so 17 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Setting Communication Parameters Using WindLDR When using the user communication function to communicate with an external RS232C device set the communication parameters for the OpenNet Controller to match those of the external device Note Since communication parameters in the Function Area Settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings 1 Select Configure from the WindLDR menu bar then select Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Click the Comm Port tab Click the check box to the left of Enable Communication Format Selection for the Port 1 or Port 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C Leave the Input Number box blank 3 Click the Comm Para
589. tity of Digits 4 SOTU ATOH W 51 52 D1 HHn pio Quantity of Digits 3 D12 D13 SOTU FY ATOH W 51 S2 Dl SOTU D10 3 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 2 H ATOH W 12 Quantity of Digits 1 H ATOH W 13 148 51 52 D10 2 51 52 10 1 D11 D12 D20 D10 D11 D1 D20 D10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h ASCII 49 0031h D20 D20 D20 D20 Binary 4660 1234h Binary 291 0123h Binary 18 0012h Binary 1 0001h 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOA BCD to ASCII BTOA W 51 S2 KKK k K When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is converted into BCD and converted into ASCII data The data is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 The result is stored to the destination starting with the operand designated by D1 H DI SI D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 D1 4 The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Valid Operands Operand Function
590. to ASCIL and no conversion When repeat is designated data of data registers as many as the repeat cycles are transmitted starting with the designated data register Repeat cycles can be up to 99 Conversion Type The transmit data is converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example D10 stores 000Ch 12 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data oooch o o o C 010 000Ch Binary to ASCII conversion When transmitting 4 digits 2 BCD to ASCII conversion ASCII data o g ov yp ov 1 2 30h 30h 30h 31h 32h 010 000Ch Decimal value BCD to ASCII conversion When transmitting 5 digits 3 No conversion ASCII data NUL FF D10 000Ch No conversion 00h 0Ch Mam When transmitting 2 digits 17 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Digits Bytes After conversion the transmit data is taken out in specified digits Possible digits depend on the selected conversion type Example D10 stores 010Ch 268 1 Binary to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 2 ASCII data Transmitted data o 1 0 C 0 c D10 010 Binary to ASCII conversion 30h 31h 30h 43h 2 BCD to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 3 30h 43h Lowest 2 digits
591. to ON at master and slave stations RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode Selecting Master and Slave Station Numbers Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to assign master station 0 and slave station numbers 1 through 31 The slave station numbers do not have to be consecutive DIP Switch No OFF Maintenance mode Slave Station Number Em ree aqnas sl 9 TER eae 14 15 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Slave Station Number DIP Switch No c T17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
592. to data register D20 designated by D1 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 9 5 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOV Indirect Move 8 OX x EE y DXX When input is on the values contained in operands des ignated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 16 or 32 bit data so determined is moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 H IMOV 51 S2 D1 R D2 REP SI S2 gt 1 D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the operand data is the timer counter current value When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 16 points word data type or 32 points do
593. to indi cate the OpenNet Controller operating status OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped 7 ON DTR signal OPE D8206 D8306 1 Whether the OpenNet Controller is running or stopped DTR remains off OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped y ON DIR signal EE D8206 D8306 2 While the OpenNet Controller can receive data DTR is turned on While the OpenNet Controller can not receive data DTR remains off Use this option when flow control of receive data is required Receive Impossible Impossible ON DIR signal OF D8206 D8306 3 or more Same as D8206 D8306 0 RTS Output Control Signal Option D8207 D8307 D8207 and D8307 are used to control the RTS request to send signal to indicate the OpenNet Controller transmission sta tus or operating status The RTS control signal option can be used only in the user protocol to communicate through the RS232C port 1 or port 2 D8207 D8307 0 system default While the OpenNet Controller is transmitting data RTS remains off While the OpenNet Controller is not transmitting data RTS is turned on Use this option for communication with a remote terminal in the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the data transmission from the OpenNet Controller Data transmission Transmitting RTS signal bre dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 29 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS D8207 D8307 1 While the OpenNet Controller is transmitting data RTS
594. tput Protect Source Output Sink Output Screw Terminal FC3AR161 FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 FC3AR162 Nylon Connector FC3A T16K3 FC3AT32K4 Fujitsu Connector FC3A T32K5 Parts Description 6 Expansion Connector SS d I EE PE DI loll 8 rr amp Hs SENG ING E r E 0 E R 0 re E rr cl fT Q 1 Module ID 1 E 0 r Sd NE Ell 2 Status LED This figure illustrates a screw terminal type output module 1 Module ID 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label Indicates the output module ID Ry OUT Relay output 16 points Tr OUT Transistor output 16 or 32 points Turns on when output is on The terminal block cover flips open to the right When using long ferrules for wiring the terminal block cover may be removed 4 Cable Terminal Connector Six different connector terminal styles are available 5 Terminal Label 6 Expansion Connector Indicates terminal numbers 1 through 20 on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Relay Output M odule Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A R161 FC3A R162 See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 22 and 223 Output Points and Common Lines 16 NO contacts in 4 common lines
595. transistor sink or source output of the high speed counter respectively Either type is available with or without a memory card connector All CPU modules have two RS232C ports and one RS485 port CPU Module Type Numbers CPU Module Types Without Memory Card Connector With Memory Card Connector High speed Counter Sink Output Type FC3A CP2K FC3A CP2KM High speed Counter Source Output Type FC3ACP2S FC3A CP2SM Parts Description 1 Status LED 10 Remote I O Master Module Connector 8 Terminal Block 2 Communication Enable Button 11 End Plate 3 Communication Selector DIP Switch 7 RS232C Port 2 9999999929999999979197 B 6 RS232C Port 1 Communication Selector DIP Switch 5 Memory Card Eject Button 9 Expansion Connector i o 4 Memory Card Connector FC3A CP2KM FC3A CP2SM o e lt le e prr p rt P Fee Opening the Covers Functions of each part are described on the following pages dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2 1 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 1 Status LED POWER Turns on when power is supplied to the CPU RUN Turns on when the CPU is running ERROR Turns on or flashes when an error occurs HSC OUT Turns on when the high speed counter comparison output is on 2 Communication Enable Button Enables the communication mode sele
596. troduction The OpenNet Controller features special functions such as stop reset inputs run stop selection at memory backup error keep designation for internal relays shift registers counters and data registers These functions are programmed using the Function Area Settings menu Also included in the Function Area Settings are module ID selection and run stop operation upon disparity input filter catch input high speed counter key matrix input and user program read write protection This chapter describes these special functions Constant scan and memory card features are also described in this chapter Although included in the Function Area Settings the data link communication function is detailed on pages 21 1 through 21 12 N Caution Since all Function Area Settings relate to the user program the user program must be down loaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Stop Input and Reset Input As described on page 4 2 the OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped using a stop input or reset input which can be designated from the Function Area Settings menu When the designated stop or reset input is turned on the OpenNet Controller stops operation For the system statuses in the stop and reset modes see page 4 3 Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From th
597. truction uses two destination operands the quotient and remainder are stored as described below Source operands S1 and 52 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 quotient and D 1 remainder When repeat is designated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the desig nated operand are used Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 and D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W 1 2 01 H Se D10 020 030 031 D11 D20 030 031 012 D20 D30 D31 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 D1 1 and D1 2 D1 3 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 A SOU a ME Saas 350 30 279 D10 D11 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D32 D33 012 013 20 021 030 031 032 033 D14 D15 D20 D21 D30 D31 D32 D33 Quotient Remainder Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 E Mu ELEME W X dM DIO s D30 D33 D10 D20
598. uble word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments For source operand 52 and destination operand D2 16 points bit operand or 1 point word operand is always used with out regard to the data type Source operand 52 and destination operand D2 do not have to be designated If 52 or D2 is not designated the source or destination operand is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Example IM OV IMOVW S1 52 1 D2 10 D20 C10 D10 D25 D20 C10 gt D10 D25 D20 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 D21 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destin
599. ubsequent operand Double word Destination Operand Data Register Data Move to Data Registers Double word S1 D1 REP Hs 305419896 DO Source Data 305419896 1234 12345678 TEET 5678h Upper Word DO Lower Word D1 Double word Destination Operand Link Register Data Move to Link Registers MOWD S1 D1 REP ie 1 305419896 L100 22225 Lower Word L100 305419896 12345678h 4660 1234h Upper Word L101 92 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the Move Instructions Repeat Source Operand When the 51 source is designated with repeat operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the destination As a result only the last of the source operands is moved to the destination Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 SIR 1 Taq H D10 D20 3 D10 110 020 112 11 111 D l 12 112 022 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 MOVD SIR 1 REP H D10 020 3 D10 110 7020 114 11 111 D21 115 12 112 022 D13 113 p23 X 014 114 024 015 115 JH D25 X
600. ue stored in D8201 D8301 a modem initialization string is stored to D8245 D8269 or D8345 Modem 08369 When 08201 08301 value is changed a correspond D8201 D8301 Initialization String ing initialization string is stored See page 2344 Selection Valid values 0 to 5 10 to 15 20 to 25 When D8201 D8301 stores any value other than above the initialization string for value 0 is stored The D8203 D8303 value selects the protocol for the RS232C On line Mode port after telephone line is connected du Protocol Selection 0 other than 1 Maintenance protocol 1 User protocol The D8209 08309 value selects how many retries will be made until the operation initiated by a start internal relay D8209 D8309 ae 8050 8056 or M8080 M8086 is completed See Note 0 No retry 165535 Executes a specified number of retries The D8210 D8310 value specifies the interval to start a retry of dialing when a dialing fails with the retry cycles set to a value more than 1 Other start commands are repeated con tinuously as many as the retry cycles See Note D8210 D8310 Retry Inte Valid value 0 to 65535 seconds default 90 sec i If a telephone line is not connected within the retry interval the OpenNet Controller starts a retry Consequently if the retry interval is set to a too small value the telephone line can not be connected correctly 08211 08311 Modem Mode Modem mode status is stored see page 23 8 When not in Status
601. ugh M2557 can be designated as D1 or D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 or D2 When T timer or C counter is used as D1 or D2 the current value is read and written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the destination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the destination point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used Examples XCHG sotu XCHG W D1 D2 Before Exchange After Exchange D21 D25 021 100 p21 200 D21 e D25 022 When input 10 is turned on data of data registers D21 D25 D23 D23 designated by operands D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other D24 D24 025 200 D25 100 XCHG D2 Before Exchange After Exchange paci sotu p pst D35 031 100 031 500 032 200 032 600 D31 D32 lt D35 D36 D33 D33 When input I1 is turned on data of data registers D31 D32 and D34 D34 D35 D36 de
602. uity of Operand Areas Each operand area is discrete and does not continue for example from input to output or from output to internal relay In addition special internal relays M8000 through M8237 are in a separate area from internal relays MO through M2557 Special data registers D8000 through D8999 are in a separate area from data registers DO through D7999 Slave link regis ters L100 through L727 are in a separate area from master link registers L1000 through L1317 The internal relay ends at M2557 Since the MOV move instruction MOV W S1 1 REP M8125 M2550 DO reads 16 internal relays the last internal relay exceeds the valid range When this program is downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU mod ule a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit DIVW Sl S2 Dl REP This program results in a user program syntax error The desti 10 D100 D200 D7999 nation of the DIV division instruction requires two data regis ters D7999 and D8000 Since D8000 is a special data register and does not continue from the data register area a user pro gram syntax error is caused Advanced instructions execute operation only on the available operands in the valid area If invalid operands are desig nated a user program syntax error occurs when transferring the user program to the OpenNet Controller CPU module The MOV move instruction sets data of data register DO to 16 outputs MOV W S1 1 REP Da M8125 DO Q580 2
603. um permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices Add Error Info 0C70hex to 0C73 Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D70hex to 0D73hex LB FAIL Data transmission was aborted In an INTERBUS device whose SUPI is run in the microprocessor Meaning mode the microprocessor failed to initialize the SUPI The controller board tried to switch the bus into the ACTIVE state faster than the microprocessor of Cause the INTERBUS device could initialize the SPUI The INTERBUS device is defective Delay the call of the Activate_Configuration 0711hex service until the microprocessor has initial Remedy ized the SUPI Replace the INTERBUS device Add_Error_Info 0C74hex to 0C77 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D74hex to 0D77hex LB FAIL Data transmission was interrupted Cause An invalid mode has been set on the INTERBUS protocol chip of an INTERBUS device Remedy Set a valid operating mode or replace the device Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 2425 24 REMOTE I O 0C80hex to 0C83 Meaning SYSTEM hex RB FAIL or 0D80hex to 0D83hex LB FAIL Multiple errors at the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Defect of the bus cable connected to this bus interface of the following
604. um value S1 5 and linear conversion minimum value 5 1 6 to specify the linear conversion output range When using the linear conversion function in a temperature control application temperature values can be used to designate the set point 53 high alarm value 5 1 14 low alarm value S1 15 and AT set point 1421 and also to read the process variable S1 0 Linear Conversion Result Linear Conversion Maximum Value 51 5 Set point S3 AT set point S1 21 and process variable S1 0 must be within this range Linear Conversion Minimum Value S1 6 4 Analog Input Data 2000 145 Linear Conversion Maximum Value When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set the linear conversion maximum value to the data register desig nated by 1 5 Valid values are 32768 through 32767 and the linear conversion maximum value must be larger than the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 Select an appropriate value for the linear conversion maximum value to repre sent the maximum value of the input signal to the analog I O module When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 you don t have to set the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 S146 Linear Conversion Minimum Value When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set the linear conversion minimum value to the data register desig nated by S146 Valid values are 32768 through 32767 and the linear conversion minimum value must be smalle
605. unication Cable 1C FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long Cable Connection and Pinouts NC No Connection NC No Connection Transmit Data NC No Connection Data Set Ready SG Signal Ground SG Signal Ground NC No Connection To RS232C Port Attach a proper connector to the open end of the cable referring to the cable connector pinouts shown below D sub 9 pin Connector Pinouts Pin Description mm No Connection No Connection Receive Data No Connection Ground No Connection No Connection Busy Signal WO CO MI GD OT BY WW NM No Connection The name of BUSY terminal differs depending on printers such as DTR The function of this terminal is to send a signal to remote equipment whether the printer is ready to print data or not Since the operation of this signal may differ depend ing on printers confirm the operation before connecting the cable UN Caution the printer may not work correctly and may be damaged Description of Operation The data of counter C2 and data register D30 are printed every minute A printout example is shown on the right Programming Special Data Register Special data register D8305 is used to monitor the BUSY signal and to control the transmission of print data Special DR Description User communication mode not modem mode While DSR is on not busy the CPU send
606. unication is performed with such parameters as transmit words 10 receive words 10 slave stations 8 average scan time 20 msec and baud rate 19200 bps then the total refresh time Trf8 for communication with all eight slave stations in the simultaneous refresh mode will be as follows When no transmit receive data has been changed Trf8 3 125 msec x 8 25 msec When one word of transmit data has been changed at all eight slave stations Trf8 4 167 msec x 2 1 x 8 2 100 0 msec When 10 words of all transmit data have been changed at all eight slave stations Trf8 4 167 msec x 2 10 x 8 2400 0 msec When the baud rate is 38400 bps Trf8 for all slave stations is 400 0 2 200 0 msec 21 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Operating Procedure for Data Link System To set up and use a data link system complete the following steps 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 First determine the assignments for the master station and slave stations 3 Connect the OpenNet Controller CPU modules at the master station and all slave stations as illustrated on page 21 2 4 Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON at all master and slave stations to select the data link mode for the RS485 port 5 Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to select master station number 0 and slave station numbers 1 through 31 as
607. urce or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments xamples MOV Data Type Word D10 MO H MOM ae M 0 e When input I2 is on the data in data register D10 designated by source operand S1 is moved to 16 internal relays starting with MO designated by destination operand D1 D10 12345 MO through M7 M10 through M17 The data in the source data register is converted into 16 bit binary MSB LSB data and the ON OFF statuses of the 16 bits are moved to internal 0101111 11111 0 relays MO through M7 and M10 through M17 MO is LSB least M17 M10 M7 MO significant bit M17 is the MSB most significant bit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 1 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Word MOWW Si D 80902 DO 10 810 D2 When input 10 is on constant 810 designated D1 by source operand S1 is moved to data register D2 designated by destination operand D1 D2 810 810 Data move operation for the integer data type is the same as for the word data type Data Type Double Word 810 D2 D3 E MOV D rm o REP When input 10 is on constant 810 designated D1 by source operand 5
608. urn off all outputs Sample Program 2 Turning All Outputs Off when using seven transistor protect source output modules MOV W S1 DIR REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 0 08080 7 MOV stores 0 to seven data registers 08030 through 08036 ORW W S1 S2R DIR REP Special data registers D8030 through D8036 store protect tran D 1 7 D ETE 0 8030 0 sistor output error data when an overload or short circuit occurs in the first to seventh protect output modules respectively When an overload occurs D8030 through D8036 store 1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay ORW turns on M10 through M16 when D8030 through D8036 store 1 respectively When any of M10 through M16 turns on 1 sec timer TML starts to timedown When the preset value of 2 seconds is reached M8002 is turned on to turn off all outputs M8002 is the all outputs off special internal relay 2 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A T32K4 FC3A T32K5 See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 26 and 2 27 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 20 4 to 27 6V DC Rated Load Current 0 1A per output point Maximum Load Current 0 115A per output point at 27 6V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is
609. urred 214 D8414 Slave Station 15 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8415 Slave Station 16 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8416 Slave Station 17 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8417 Slave Station 18 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8418 Slave Station 19 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8419 Slave Station 20 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8420 Slave Station 21 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8421 Slave Station 22 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8422 Slave Station 23 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8423 Slave Station 24 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8424 Slave Station 25 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8425 Slave Station 26 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8426 Slave Station 27 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8427 Slave Station 28 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8428 Slave Station 29 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8429 Slave Station 30 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8430 Slave Station 31 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurre
610. used for tightening the screw ter minals on the OpenNet Controller modules These ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are made by Phoenix Contact and are available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of the ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver listed below are the type numbers of Phoenix Contact When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below Ferrule Order No Quantity of Cables Cable Size Phoenix Type Order No Pcs Pkt UL1007 AWG18 Al 1 8 RD 3200030 100 For 1 cable connection UL1015 AWG22 Al 0 5 8 WH 3200014 100 UL1007 AWG18 AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD 32 00 810 100 For 2 cable connection UL1015 AWG22 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 32 00 93 3 100 Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Order No Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x 35 1205053 10 Screw Terminal Tightening Torque 0 5 to 0 6 If ferrules other than listed above are used the ferrule may come in contact with the terminal block cover Then remove the terminal block cover from the module OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 4 OPERATION BASICS Introduction This chapter describes general information about setting up the basic OpenNet Controller system for programming start ing and stopping OpenNet Controller operation and introduces simple operating procedures from creating a user program using WindLDR on a computer to monitoring the O
611. usly full duplex and leads to better diagnostic possibilities when compared to a bus structure To simplify system installation the ring is implemented within one cable line go and return line within one cable The system therefor appears as a bus system with branching lines tree structure For detailed information about INTERBUS read documents published by the INTERBUS CLUB or access the INTER BUS CLUB home page at www interbusclub com 24 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Data Communication between Remote 1 Master and Slave Stations IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals for INTERBUS can be used as slave stations in the remote I O communica tion system When the SX5S is used with the remote I O master module the input and output data at the slave station are allocated to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module as described below SX5S Communication 1 Terminals for INTERBUS Type No ID Code Station Type Data Length SX5S SBN16S SX5S SBN16K 02h Remote Bus Station with Digital Inputs 1 word 16 inputs SX5S SBRO08 01h Remote Bus Station with Digital Outputs 1 word 8 outputs SX5S SBT16K SX5S SBT16P 01 Remote Bus Station with Digital Outputs 1 word 16 outputs SX5S SBM16K SX5S SBM16P 03h Remote Bus Station with Digital I Os 1 byte 8 in 8 out The following examples assume that the SX5S is connected at node 0 Communication of 1 word Inp
612. ut Data 5 55 5 165 or SX5S SBN16K Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1000 acid 78 078 1910102 01001 256 Input No 7 15 Communication of 1 word Output Data SX5S SBR08 Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1004 10 0121070 02001 512 Input No Low byte has no effect on the Slave Station Output SX5S ar eer ae oe be I oe 8 point output slave station Communication of 1 word Output Data SX5S SBT16K or SX5S SBT16P Bit 15 Master Station Link Register L1004 nandaan 0300h 768 Input No 7 Slave Station Output SX5S Emm Communication of 1 byte Input Output Data SX5S SBM16K or SX5S SBM 16P Bit 15 Master Station Link Register 11000 GOOG 0400h 1024 Input No 7 Low byte is not used for Slave Station Input 5 55 M Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1004 BOOGIE EEISEEEEE 0500h 1280 Input No 7 Low byte is not used for Slave Station Output SX5S mamme dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 243 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Logical Device Number and Node Number Node addresses logical device numbers are assigned to each slave station by the remote I O master module automatically according to the physical configuration of the remote I O network The following diagram illustrates an example of the
613. ut Module Wiring Load T Load Load Load Fuse ETC Load F 11216 Load Hog Load r 4 C i8 Load 5 Ha Eje le 8 Load EOD Load 1816 2a Load Hoje Iia L C Data Link Wiring For wiring the data link cable to the RS485 terminals on the CPU module use a two core twisted pair shielded cable with minimum eR C core diameter of 0 9 mm gt C e Separate the data link cable from the output line power line and 0 C motor line a eJ iC 2 1 2 ier OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 7 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Analog Input Output Wiring When using an analog input or output module connect analog signals and ground wire as shown below e For wiring analog input or output module use a two core twisted pair shielded cable with a minimum core diameter of 0 9 mm Connect the shield to a proper frame ground grounding resistance 1000 maximum e Connect the FG terminals of the 24 DC power supply and the CPU module to the ground grounding resistance 1000 maximum The ground connection improves the stability of analog digital conversion e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input output modul
614. ut from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required MOV Move E KARRE When input is on 16 or 32 bit data from operand designated by S1 is H MOV SI R DI R REP AR UA moved to operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Source operand can be both internal relays MO through M2557 and special internal relays M8000 through M8237 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the so
615. ution After Execution D20 D20 D21 0 20 021 0 D20 D21 1 20 021 1 D20 D21 2147483648 20 21 2147483648 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 5 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS 12 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 BIT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Bit shift and rotate instructions are used to shift the 16 or 32 bit data in the designated source operand S1 to the left or right by the quantity of bits designated The result is set to the source operand S1 and a carry special internal relay M8003 SFTL Shift Left 9 SFTL per x PUE uum eS When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is shifted to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB Data Type Word bits to shift 1 CY MSB 51 LSB Before shift _ lt 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 lt 0 M8003 Shift to the left CY MSB 51 LSB After shift 1 1 1 1101110 0 111010 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to shift 1 Before shift
616. utput QO is designated as operand to read 3 digits outputs QO through Q2 are used Digital Switch Data Reading Time Reading digital switch data requires the following time after the input to the DGRD instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DGRD instruction for the period of time shown below to read the digital switch data For example when read ing data from 5 digital switches to the destination operand 14 scans are required Digital Switch Data Reading Time 2 scan times x Quantity of digits 2 Adjusting Scan Time The DGRD instruction requires a scan time longer than the filter time plus 4 msec Minimum Required Scan Time Scan time Filter time 4 msec When the actual scan time is too short to execute the DGRD instruction use the constant scan function The default value of the input filter is 4 msec When the input filter time is set to default set a value of 8 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 When the input filter time is changed set a proper value to D8022 to make sure of the minimum required scan time shown above dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 3 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example DGRD The following example demonstrates a program to read data from four digital switches IDEC s DF 031D K to a data register in the OpenNet Controller CPU module DGRD 0 D1 When input I5 is on the 4 digit value from BCD digital switches is rea
617. utput status M8135 turns on in Output Reset one scan time after the comparison output is turned on A maximum of one scan time of TM T10 M8135 5 M8010 delay exists before M8135 is turned on When M8135 turns on the 100 msec timer TIM instruction starts to time down When the preset value of 0 5 second is reached M8010 is turned on to reset the comparison output OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 15 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Key Matrix Input The key matrix input function can be programmed using the Function Area Settings in WindLDR to form a matrix with 1 to 16 input points and 1 to 16 output points to multiply input capability A key matrix with 8 inputs and 4 outputs would equal 32 inputs for example The maximum 16 inputs and 16 outputs would result in 256 input points The input information is stored in consecutive internal relays as many as the quantity of input points multiplied by the quantity of output points starting at the first internal relay number programmed in the Function Area Settings When using the key matrix input function DC input modules and transistor output modules must be used Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Others tab
618. uts to Is one input used to start multiple RXD instructions more than 5 RXD instructions on simultaneously NO Use one input to start one RXD instruction without a start delim iter Did you check the start delimiter of incoming data NO Make sure that the start delimiter in the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data YES Did you check the format of incoming data Make sure that the receive format of the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data Is an end delimiter specified in the RXD instruction Did you check the end delimiter of incoming data Make sure that the end delimiter in the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data Is the receive timeout value set correctly using WindLDR NO Make sure that the receive timeout value is larger than character inter vals of the incoming data Did you make sure of source 1 operand of the RXD instruction Make sure that the receive data designated as the source 1 oper and 15 correct Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 27 19 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 13 27 20 The catch input function cannot receive short pulses Is the input filter time selection set correctly Are the input
619. valid transmit data value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Fun Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box When 8 data bits are selected 00h through FFh is transmitted When 7 data bits are selected as default O0h through 7Fh is transmitted Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data Constant Character Any character available on the computer keyboard can be entered One character is counted as one byte Constant Hexadecimal Use this option to enter the hexadecimal code of any ASCII character ASCII control codes NUL 00h through US 1Fh can also be entered using this option Example The following example shows two methods to enter 3 byte ASCII data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 1 Constant Character ee dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 175 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 Constant Hexadecimal Ss ima Heras C Constant Chunin m Designating Data Register as 51 When a data register is designated as source operand S1 conversion type and transmit digits must also be designated The data stored in the designated data register is converted and a designated quantity of digits of the resultant data is transmit ted Conversion types are available in Binary to ASCII BCD
620. variable upper limit 51 16 enable the output manipulated variable lower limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay 52 2 and set the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 to a value other than 10001 through 10099 When the manipulated variable D1 is smaller than or equal to the specified lower limit the lower limit value is outputted to the out put manipulated variable S1 1 When the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S2 2 is turned off the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 has no effect 1418 Manual Mode Output Manipulated Variable The manual mode output manipulated variable specifies the output manipulated variable 0 through 100 for manual mode Set a required value of 0 through 100 for the manual mode output manipulated variable to the data register designated by 51 18 When 51 18 stores a value larger than 100 the manual mode output manipulated variable is set to 100 To enable the manual mode turn on the auto manual mode control relay S24 1 While in manual mode the PID action is disabled The specified value of the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 is outputted to the output manipu lated variable S1 1 and the control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S 12 18 1419 AT Sampling Period The AT sampling period determines the interval of
621. vice No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 Allocation No D8134 D8135 D8136 D8137 D8138 D8139 D8140 D8141 D8142 D8143 D8144 D8145 D8146 D8147 D8148 D8149 D8150 D8151 D8152 D8153 D8154 D8155 D8156 D8157 D8158 D8159 D8160 D8161 D8162 D8163 D8164 D8165 D8166 D8167 D8168 D8169 D8170 D8171 D8172 D8173 D8174 D8175 D8176 D8177 Node 21 Node 22 Node 23 Node 24 Node 25 Node 26 Node 27 Node 28 Node 29 Node 30 Node 31 Description Logical Device No 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0
622. voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info Error location Segment Position 0C1Chex to 0C1F hex RB FAIL or OD1Chex to 0D1Fhex LB FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the forward data path at the incoming bus interface IN of the spec Meaning ified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Error location Segment Position Add_Error_Info 0C20hex to 0C23 hex RB FAIL or 0D20hex to 0D23hex LB FAIL The Medium Attachment Unit MAU firmware component diagnosed an interruption of the data trans Meaning mission Interruption in the forward data path of the incoming bus interface IN of the specified INTERBUS device Remedy Check the cables male and female connectors on cables and devices for interruptions and repair them if required Error location Segment Position Add_Error_Info OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 24 23 24 REMOTE I O 0C24hex to 0C27 SYSTEM hex RB FAIL or 0D24hex to 0D27hex LB FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the return data path at the incoming bus i
623. wing order reset input pulse input the CNT instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Reset Program List Instruction AN Caution When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CNT instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the CNT instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Reset Input IO Pulse Input I1 Counter CO Input I2 Output 00 The preset value 0 through 65535 can be designated using a data register DO through D7999 then the data of the data register becomes the preset value Directly after the CNT instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction can be pro grammed Ladder Diagram Reset OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL e The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once While the reset input is off the counter counts the leading edges of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value When the current value reaches the preset value the counter turns output on The output stays on
624. within an IB ST compact Meaning station Local bus The connector for the outgoing local bus has not been plugged in panes The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing local bus is defective ST compact station The ST cable has not been plugged in The RBST connection led via the next module of the IB ST compact station is interrupted Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF4hex BUS FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the data forward path at the incoming bus interface IN of the spec Meaning ified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the specified INTERBUS segment for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF5hex BUS FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the data return path at the incoming bus interface IN of the speci pening fied INTERBUS device Check the specified INTERBUS segment for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage
625. ximum Allowable Short circuit Current 60 sec at power voltage 24V DC load resistance 10 maximum M aximum M odules 7 transistor protect source output modules can be mounted at the maximum CPU Module Operation Special data register D8030 to D8036 assigned to 1st through 7th module stores 1 to indicate the slot where an overload occurred The ERROR LED also turns on Weight approx Output Internal Circuit 220g COM 4 COM terminals are connected together internally Internal Circuit Overload Signal O Output Output Protect Device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 19 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Special Data Registers D8030 through D8036 Protect Transistor Output Error N Caution A prolonged overload or short circuit may damage the output circuit elements of the transistor protect source output module Include a protection program in the user program to protect the output module from damage caused by overheating A maximum of seven transistor protect source output modules can be mounted with one CPU module The protect output modules are numbered from one through seven in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module When an over load or short circuit occurs special data registers D8030 through 08036 store 1 to indicate the output module where the overload occurred D8030 throug
626. y ATZ Command ATZ Q LF When the ATZ command has been completed successfully internal relay M8061 M8091 is turned on If the ATZ com mand fails internal relay M8071 M8101 is turned on When the subsequent dialing is also completed successfully M8062 M8092 will also be turned on If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem M8050 M8080 may be skipped Start with M8051 M8081 to send the ATZ command Dialing the Telephone Number When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8270 D8299 or D8370 D8399 are allocated to the telephone number Before turning on one of the start internal relays M8050 M8052 or M8080 M8082 for the originate mode store the tele phone number in data registers starting with D8270 D8370 One data register stores two characters the first character at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register Since 30 data registers are allocated to the telephone number up to 60 characters can be stored as many as the modem capacity allows Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the telephone number and execute the MACRO instruction before turning on start internal relays M8050 M8052 or M8080 M8082 Example of Dial Command ATDT123 Q LF ATD and are appended at the beginning and of the dial command automatically by the system program and need not be stored in data registers To program the telephone number of
627. ycles At retry 23 3 D8210 Port 1 Retry Interval Every scan during retry 233 D8211 Port 1 Modem Mode Status At status transition 233 D8212 D8214 Reserved D8215 D8229 Port 1 AT Command Result Code When returning result code 23 3 D8230 D8244 Port 1 AT Command String When sending AT command 23 3 D8245 D8269 Port 1 Initialization String When sending init string 233 D8270 D8299 Port 1 Telephone Number When dialing 233 D8300 Port 2 RS232C Port Communication Mode Selection Every scan 23 3 D8301 Port 2 Modem Initialization String Selection Every scan 233 D8302 Reserved D8303 Port 2 On line Mode Protocol Selection When sending receiving data 23 3 D8304 Port 2 Control Signal Status Every scan 17 27 D8305 Port 2 DSR Input Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 28 D8306 Port 2 DTR Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8307 Port 2 RTS Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8308 Reserved 08309 Port 2 Retry Cycles At retry 23 3 Allocation 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Number Description Updated See Page D8310 Port 2 Retry Interval Every scan during retry 23 3 D8311 Port 2 Modem Mode Status At status transition 233 D8312 D8314 Reserved D8315 D8329 Port 2 AT Command Result Code When returning result code 23 3 083

opennet controller - Steven Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents